JP7092175B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, it is technical from various viewpoints such as structure, control, and production for the purpose of improving the interest of games, reducing the processing load of gaming machines, and simplifying control. Improvements have been made (for example, Patent Document 1).

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of the game, such as finding and deterring illegal acts by the player and unauthorized modification of the gaming machine.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2011-172988

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, further improvement of the technique is desired for the purpose of improving the interest of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, simplifying the control, providing a sounder game, and the like.

The present invention has been made to solve at least a part of the above-mentioned problems, and can be realized as the following forms.

[form]
A plurality of predetermined detection means for detecting a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area,
A game value-adding means that is electrically connected to the plurality of predetermined detection means and executes a process for imparting a game value to the game.
A payout means that is electrically connected to the game value-adding means and executes a payout process for paying out a game ball.
A process execution means that is electrically connected to the game value-adding means by a signal line capable of transmitting various signals and executes a predetermined process that is different from the payout process .
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The game value-adding means is
A first reference information storage means for storing reference information which is information used in a process for imparting a game value to the game and is referred to for detection of the predetermined detection means.
The reference stored in the first reference information storage means after the predetermined supply of electric power to the game machine is started and before the execution of the predetermined process for advancing the game is started. A first transmission means for transmitting a reference information signal corresponding to the information to the processing execution means, and
A second transmission means for transmitting a predetermined information signal based on the ball entry information, which is information acquired based on the detection by the predetermined detection means, to the processing execution means.
Equipped with
The processing execution means is
A second reference information storage means for storing reference information corresponding to the reference information signal transmitted from the game value adding means, and a second reference information storage means.
An execution means that executes the predetermined process based on the predetermined information signal transmitted from the second transmission means and the reference information stored in the second reference information storage means.
A processing result information storage means for storing processing result information which is information related to the processing result of the predetermined processing by the execution means, and a processing result information storage means.
Equipped with
The game value-adding means and the processing execution means are operated by the same power source for the game machine, and are operated by the same power source.
The processing result information storage means includes a plurality of storage areas that can store a plurality of processing result information in a time series.
When storing new processing result information of the one unit, a means for erasing the processing result information of the storage area for storing the oldest processing result information among the plurality of storage areas is provided.
This gaming machine is
An information storage means provided in the game value-giving means and storing at least information related to the game value-giving.
An erasing operation means for erasing the stored contents of the information storage means, and
Equipped with
When the erasing operation is executed by the erasing operation means, the storage erasing process is executed for the information storage means of the game value imparting means, but the processing result information storage means for storing the processing result information On the other hand, the memory erasing process is not executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the above embodiment, the processing load of the gaming machine can be reduced.

It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol and the display surface which are variable-displayed in a symbol display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of various counters used for a big hit lottery. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the pass / fail table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the distribution table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the winning / failing table for electric accessory opening lottery. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a main control device and the structure of an inspection machine in detail. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the content of the processing in a game history management chip and an inspection machine. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the main MPU executes. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU. It is explanatory drawing explaining the structure of the input port provided in the main MPU. It is explanatory drawing explaining the ball entry detection process executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry determination process which the main side MPU executes. It is explanatory drawing explaining how the presence or absence of a ball entering is detected. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU of a game history management chip executes. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the main control device and the structure of an inspection machine provided in the pachinko machine of aspect 6 of 1st Embodiment in detail. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the content of the processing in the game history management chip and the inspection machine of Embodiment 6 of 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the main control device and the structure of an inspection machine provided in the pachinko machine of aspect 7 of 1st Embodiment in detail. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the outline of the processing in the game history management chip and the inspection machine of Embodiment 7 of 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in Embodiment 11 of 1st Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of the process in the main MPU of Embodiment 11 of 1st Embodiment schematically. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in aspect 12 of 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine in the 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol and the display surface which are variable-displayed in a symbol display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of various counters used for a big hit lottery. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the pass / fail table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the distribution table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the winning / failing table for electric accessory opening lottery. It is a timing chart explaining the outline of the processing executed by the pachinko machine of the second embodiment. It is a timing chart explaining the outline of the processing executed by the pachinko machine of the comparative example. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for a start opening. It is a flowchart which shows the advance determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for a through gate. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the game time control process. It is a flowchart which shows the data setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a fluctuation time. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition process. It is a flowchart which shows the opening time setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the opening and closing process of a big prize opening. It is a flowchart which shows the migration process at the end of an ending period. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electric service support. It is a flowchart which shows the electric service opening / closing control processing. It is a block diagram which mainly shows the electrical structure of the voice emission control device and the display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process which is executed in MPU of a voice light emission control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command correspondence processing which is executed in MPU of a voice light emission control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which is executed in MPU of a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the command interrupt processing which is executed in MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the V interrupt processing which is executed in MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command correspondence processing which is executed in MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a timing chart explaining the outline of the process executed by the pachinko machine of the modification 1 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the opening time setting process which is executed in MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the command correspondence processing which is executed in MPU of a voice light emission control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command correspondence processing which is executed in MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a timing chart explaining the outline of the process executed by the pachinko machine of the modification 2 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a timing chart explaining the outline of the process executed by the pachinko machine of the modification 3 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine in the 3rd Embodiment. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol and the display surface which are variable-displayed in a symbol display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of various counters used for a big hit lottery. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the hit / fail table for the 1st start port. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the hit / fail table for the 2nd start port. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the distribution table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the winning / failing table for electric accessory opening lottery. It is explanatory drawing explaining the variable winning mechanism. It is explanatory drawing explaining the case where the game ball enters the 1st big prize opening. It is explanatory drawing explaining the case where the game ball enters the non-V winning area of the 2nd big winning opening. It is explanatory drawing explaining the case where the game ball enters the V winning area of the 2nd big winning opening. It is explanatory drawing explaining an example of the opening / closing pattern of the 1st opening / closing door and the 2nd opening / closing door in the opening / closing execution mode executed by the type 1 big hit, and the behavior of a game ball in the opening / closing pattern. It is explanatory drawing explaining an example of the opening / closing pattern of the 1st opening / closing door and the 2nd opening / closing door, and the behavior of a game ball in the opening / closing pattern in the opening / closing execution mode executed by the type 2 big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process for a start opening. It is a flowchart which shows the advance determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot / reach information acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation time information acquisition processing. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process for through. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the game time control process. It is a flowchart which shows the data setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a fluctuation time. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition process. It is a flowchart which shows the opening and closing process of a big prize opening. It is a flowchart which shows the migration process at the end of an ending period. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electric service support. It is a flowchart which shows the electric service opening / closing control processing. It is a block diagram which mainly shows the electrical structure of the voice emission control device and the display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed in the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the command correspondence processing. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which is executed in MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command interrupt processing which is executed in MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the V interrupt processing which is executed in MPU of a display control apparatus. It is explanatory drawing explaining the variable winning mechanism in the modification 1 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining the variable winning mechanism in the modification 2 of the 3rd Embodiment. As a modification 3 of the third embodiment, an example of the opening / closing pattern of the first opening / closing door and the second opening / closing door in the opening / closing execution mode executed by the first type jackpot and the behavior of the game ball in the opening / closing pattern will be described. It is explanatory drawing to do. It is explanatory drawing explaining the variable winning mechanism as the modification 4 of the 3rd Embodiment. As a modification 4 of the third embodiment, it is explanatory drawing explaining the opening / closing pattern of an opening / closing door, and an example of the behavior of a game ball in the opening / closing pattern. It is explanatory drawing explaining the variable winning mechanism in the modification 7 of the 3rd Embodiment.

Embodiments of the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in the following order with reference to the drawings.
A. First Embodiment:
B. Second embodiment:
C. Third embodiment:
D. Application to other configurations:
E. Inventions extracted from each of the above embodiments:

A. First Embodiment:
A1. Structure of the gaming machine:
FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, also referred to as “pachinko machine”) according to the first embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13. On the back surface of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a voice emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 with respect to the outer frame 11 and a function of locking the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window portion 18 is formed in a substantially central portion of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and illumination parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. Illuminations are composed of light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the effect of the effect by lighting or blinking at each game round performed by the pachinko machine 10, when a big hit is won, when a reach occurs, and the like. Further, a glass unit 19 made of two plate glasses is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 19. The details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper plate 20 and a lower plate 21 for storing game balls. The upper plate 20 is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface, and stores game balls such as rental balls rented from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game balls stored in the upper plate 20 are supplied to the game ball launch mechanism included in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball launch mechanism is driven by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player, and launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20 and is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. The lower plate 21 stores the game balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 20. On the bottom surface of the lower plate 21, a discharge port 22 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 21 is formed. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch between the closed state and the open state of the discharge port 22 by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22, and the game ball is discharged to the outside from the lower plate 21.

A staging operation button 24 as an operation receiving means is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20. The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the effect operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs a game effect reflecting the operation.

Further, on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front, an operation handle 25 for the player to operate is provided. When the player operates the operation handle 25, the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there is a touch sensor for permitting the driving of the game ball launch mechanism, a weight button for stopping the launch of the game ball by the game ball launch mechanism by a pressing operation by the player, and a rotation of the operation handle 25. A variable resistor that detects the amount of dynamic operation by the change in electrical resistance is provided. When the player grasps the operation handle 25, the touch sensor is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the rotation operation amount. A game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor.

Next, the configuration of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10.

FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, and a third control unit 53. Specifically, these mechanical portions are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13.

The first control unit 51 includes a main control device 60. The main control device 60 has a main control board having a function of controlling the main control of the game and a function of monitoring the power supply. The main control board is housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material. This board box is configured to leave traces of opening and closing. For example, a seal is attached to a place that can be opened and closed, and the characters such as "open" appear when the board box is opened.

The second control unit 52 includes a voice emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The voice emission control device 90 controls light emission means such as a speaker and various lamps provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the symbol display device based on the command transmitted from the voice emission control device 90. The design display device includes a liquid crystal display that displays a design or an image for directing.

The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70 and a launch control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. The launch control device 80 launches a game ball having a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player when an instruction to launch the game ball is input from the main control device 60. Controls the ball launch mechanism. In addition, on the back surface of the inner frame 13, a tank 54 to which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a slope connected below the tank 54 and gently inclined so that the game balls flow to the downstream side. A predetermined number of game balls are paid out according to an instruction from the payout control device 70 by receiving the supply of game balls from the tank rail 55 having the tank rail 55, the case rail 56 vertically connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, and the case rail 56. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as the payout device 71, are provided.

Next, the game board will be described. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13.

FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding the game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and discharged to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicular to the game board 30, and various accessories such as a windmill are arranged. These nails 42 and the windmill disperse and organize the falling direction of the game ball flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is provided with a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display unit 45. The main display unit 45 has a special figure unit 37, a normal figure unit 38, and a round display unit 39.

The general winning openings 32 are entry openings into which game balls can enter, and a plurality of general winning openings 32 are provided on the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the general winning opening 32, 10 game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls. In the present embodiment, three general winning openings 32a, 32b, and 32c are provided as general winning openings 32. Hereinafter, the general winning opening 32a is also referred to as a first winning opening 32a, the general winning opening 32b is also referred to as a second winning opening 32b, and the general winning opening 32c is also referred to as a third winning opening 32c.

The first starting port 33 is an entry port into which a game ball can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided below the center of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a big hit lottery described later is executed.

The second starting port 34 is an entry port into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls and a big hit lottery described later is executed. Further, the second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a as an ordinary electric accessory.

The through gate 35 is provided with a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction. The through gate 35 is a through gate that serves as an opportunity to execute a lottery for opening the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control device 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory opening lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the electric service is won, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the electric service open state in which the electric service is opened in a predetermined mode. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flow direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after passing through the second starting port 34. It is possible to enter the ball into the starting port 34. In this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the prize ball is not paid out.

The variable winning device 36 includes a large winning opening 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30 and an opening / closing door 36b for opening and closing the large winning opening 36a. The opening / closing door 36b is normally closed so that the game ball cannot enter the large winning opening 36a. When the game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the main control device 60 executes a jackpot lottery (internal lottery). As a result of the big hit lottery, if the big hit or the small hit is won, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode. The opening / closing execution mode is a mode for executing the opening / closing process of the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36. Specifically, when the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 shifts to the opening / closing execution mode, the closed state in which the game ball cannot enter is changed to the open state in which the game ball can enter, and a predetermined condition is satisfied. After that, it transitions to the closed state again. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the large winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls by the payout device 71.

Further, an out port 43 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 30, and the game ball that has not entered the various entry ports is discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43.

In this embodiment, a game in which a ball is entered into the first starting port 33, the second starting port 34, the first winning opening 32a, the second winning opening 32b, the third winning opening 32c, the large winning opening 36a, and the out opening 43. The ball is configured to join the discharge passage provided on the back surface of the game board 30, and the discharge passage is provided with a discharge passage detection sensor for detecting the game ball. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, it is possible to grasp the number of game balls fired on the game board 30 by detecting the game balls by the discharge passage detection sensor.

The special symbol unit 37 includes a first symbol display unit 37a and a second symbol display unit 37b. The first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b are each composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first symbol display unit 37a is a display unit for displaying the first symbol. The first symbol is a symbol that is variablely displayed or stopped and displayed based on a jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33. The first symbol display unit 37a is used as a display mode until the segment display is displayed according to the lottery result when the big hit lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 is performed. , The variable display of the first symbol or the predetermined display is performed. When the lottery is completed, the first symbol display unit 37a causes the segment display to display the stop display of the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, the game times in which the jackpot lottery is executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 will also be referred to as the game times for the first start port.

The second symbol display unit 37b is a display unit for displaying the second symbol. The second symbol is a symbol that is variablely displayed or stopped and displayed based on a jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. The second symbol display unit 37b is used as a display mode until the segment display is displayed according to the lottery result when the big hit lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is performed. , A variable display of the second symbol or a predetermined display is performed. When the lottery is completed, the second symbol display unit 37b causes the segment display to display the stop display of the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, the game times in which the jackpot lottery is executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 34 are also referred to as the game times for the second start opening.

Here, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b to the stop display is set. Also called variable time. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a to the stop display is also referred to as the first variable time, and is displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b. The time from the start of the variable display of the displayed second symbol to the stop display is also referred to as the second variable time.

The special figure unit 37 further includes a first hold display unit 37c and a second hold display unit 37d made of LED lamps at positions adjacent to the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b.

The first hold display unit 37c displays the number of holds of the first start port 33 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be turned on. In the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the first starting port 33 are reserved.

The second hold display unit 37d displays the number of holds of the second start port 34 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be turned on. In the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the second starting port 34 are reserved.

The normal drawing unit 38 is composed of a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electric accessory opening lottery triggered by the passage of the through gate 35 is performed, the normal drawing unit 38 causes the light emitting display to display a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined mode as the display mode of the light emitting display. When the electric accessory opening lottery is completed, the normal drawing unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display unit 39 is composed of a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games generated in the open / close execution mode, or displays corresponding to the number of round games. The round game opens and closes until either the predetermined upper limit duration elapses or the predetermined upper limit number of game balls enters the variable winning device 36. This is a game in which the door 36b is kept open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the open / close execution mode is started, and ends when the open / close execution mode ends.

The special figure unit 37, the normal figure unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being composed of a segment display device or a light emitting display device using an LED lamp, and for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and the like. It may be configured by various display devices capable of showing the lottery in progress and the lottery result, such as a CRT or a dot matrix display.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the symbol display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. The configuration of the display device included in the variable display unit 40 is not limited to the symbol display device 41, and may be configured by various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first symbol display unit 37a makes a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, the symbol display device 41 displays the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol accordingly. I do. Further, when the second symbol display unit 37b makes a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol accordingly. Is displayed. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to displaying the fluctuation of the symbol or a predetermined display triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, and when a big hit is won. It also displays the effect during the open / close execution mode that shifts. Hereinafter, the details of the symbol display device 41 will be described.

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a symbol and a display surface 41a that are variablely displayed on the symbol display device 41. FIG. 4A is an explanatory diagram showing a symbol that is variablely displayed on the symbol display device 41. As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the symbol indicating the numbers 1 to 8 is variablely displayed on the symbol display device 41. As the symbol to be displayed in a variable manner, a symbol having a pattern such as a character may be adopted for each of the symbols showing the numbers 1 to 8.

FIG. 4B is an explanatory diagram showing a display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. As shown in the figure, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right are displayed on the display surface 41a. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the symbols 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 4A are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol row has a periodicity from top to bottom or from bottom. A variable display that scrolls up is performed. As shown in FIG. 4B, after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stopped state on the effective line L. Specifically, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, a variable display in which the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity is started. Then, each scrolling symbol switches from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3. .. When the variation display of the symbol is completed and the display is stopped, if the result of the jackpot lottery by the main control device 60 is the jackpot winning, a predetermined combination of symbols is placed on the effective line L. It is formed. For example, the same combination of symbols is formed on the effective line L. The mode of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiment, and the number of symbol rows, the number of effective lines, the direction of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol row, and the symbol of each symbol row. Various modes such as numbers can be adopted as the mode of variable display of the symbol.

Here, the game times is one unit of the process of notifying the player of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the special information acquired based on the winning of either the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. Is. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one jackpot lottery for one special information for each game. When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the winning of either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the first result display unit 37a or the second result is obtained for each game. After the segment display is variablely displayed on one of the display units 37b, the segment display is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the winning of either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the pachinko machine 10 has a predetermined value in the symbol display device 41 for each game. After the symbol string is variablely displayed, the symbol column is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, the time required for one game is also referred to as a unit game time. The unit game time is composed of a variable time, which is the time from the start of the variable display to the stop display of the predetermined lottery result, and a stop time, which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. There is.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4B, the first reserved display area Ds1 and the second reserved display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the first hold display area Ds1, the number of holds based on the winning of the first start port 33 is displayed. In the second hold display area Ds2, the number of holds based on the winning of the second starting port 34 is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the maximum number of game balls that have won prizes in the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is four, respectively.

A2. Electrical configuration of gaming machines:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to a block diagram.

FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly composed of a main control device 60, and also includes a voice emission control device 90 and a display control device 100.

The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 composed of elements having a plurality of functions. The MPU 62 temporarily stores various data and the like when the CPU 62x executes a CPU 62x that executes various control programs, a ROM 63 that records various control programs and fixed value data, and a program recorded in the ROM 63. It is provided with a RAM 64, which is a memory of the above, and an input / output port 62a. The MPU 62 further includes a game history management chip 300 and an inspection terminal 65.

The game history management chip 300 calculates various game history information to be described later based on the ball entry information of the game ball to the start opening, the winning opening, and the gate (hereinafter collectively referred to as "entry entrance"). do. The inspection terminal 65 is a terminal for transmitting the game history information stored in the game history management chip 300 to an inspection machine described later. Details of the game history management chip 300 and the inspection terminal 65 will be described later.

The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. In addition, another element may have a part of the function which MPU 62 has.

A payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85 are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. The main control board 61 receives a DC stable 24V power supply from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power source into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc. Supply power. Further, in the present embodiment, the power supply device 85 includes a capacitor 87, and when a power failure occurs or the power switch is turned off, the power supply to each device is continued for a predetermined period.

Further, a ball entry detection sensor provided at each entry port is connected to the input side of the MPU 62. Specifically, the large winning opening detection sensor 44a that detects the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 36a, the first starting opening detection sensor 44b that detects the game ball that has entered the first starting opening 33, and the first. 2 The second start opening detection sensor 44c that detects the game ball that has entered the start opening 34, the first winning opening detection sensor 44d that detects the game ball that has entered the first winning opening 32a, and the second winning opening 32b. The second winning opening detection sensor 44e that detects the game ball that has entered the third winning opening 32c, the third winning opening detection sensor 44f that detects the game ball that has entered the third winning opening 32c, and the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35. The through gate detection sensor 44g for detection and the discharge passage detection sensor 44h for detecting the game ball passing through the discharge passage described above are connected. Based on the signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered the start opening or the winning opening, and the game ball has passed through the through gate or the discharge passage. Judge whether or not. Further, the MPU 62 executes a jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34.

On the output side of the MPU 62, a variable winning drive unit 36c that opens and closes the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36, an electric accessory driving unit 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34, and a main display. The unit 45 is connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 36c so that the opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed in the opening / closing execution mode. Further, when the electric accessory opening is won as a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory driving unit 44b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. Further, in each game, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b in the main display unit 45, and in the open / close execution mode, the round display on the main display unit 45 is performed. The display control of unit 39 is executed.

Further, the payout control device 70 and the voice emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the MPU 62. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the payout control device 70 based on the ball entry determination result. When the main control device 60 transmits a prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area of the ROM 63. Specifically, when the entry of a game ball into the general winning opening 32 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the first starting port 33. When the entry of the game ball is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of the three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is specified. A prize ball command corresponding to the payout of one game ball is transmitted from the main control device 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 to pay out the prize balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

A launch control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70. The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball launch mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met. Further, an operation handle 25 is connected to the launch control device 80. As described above, the operation handle 25 includes a touch sensor 25a, a weight button 25b, and a variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes according to the rotation operation amount. The game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

The voice emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. Specifically, the voice emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 composed of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14 and the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. In addition to controlling the drive of the display control device 100, the display control device 100 is controlled. Further, the effect operation button 24 is connected to the voice emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, the game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls various lamps 47, speakers 46, display control device 100, and the like.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps the variation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 and the type of the combination of the symbols to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90. , Whether or not reach has occurred, the content of the reach effect, and the content of the effect executed while the first liquid crystal display symbol and the second liquid crystal display symbol are variable display. In this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the first liquid crystal display symbol or the second liquid crystal display symbol is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the fluctuation time, the unit game round time, which is the time required for one game round, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for big hit lottery and the like. Various counters are provided in various counter areas of the RAM 64, and are used when the MPU 62 performs a big hit lottery, a display setting of the main display unit 45, a symbol display setting of the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery. When sorting the jackpot types, the jackpot type counter C2 is used. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not to generate reach when the symbol sequence displayed on the symbol display device 41 is displaced and varied.

The random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, the fluctuation type counter CS is used when determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b of the main display unit 45, and the symbol display device 41. Further, the electric accessory opening counter C4 is used for the electric accessory opening lottery for whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time the counter is updated, and the counter value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

Further, the RAM 64 is provided with a hold information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. The hold information storage area 64b is provided with a first hold area Ra and a second hold area Rb. In the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the first starting port 33, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS at the timing of entering the ball are stored in the reserved information storage area. It is stored in the first holding area Ra of 64b in chronological order. Further, when the game ball enters the second starting port 34, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS at the timing of entering the ball are set in the reserved information storage area 64b. 2 It is stored in the holding area Rb in chronological order.

The details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery as described above. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 1199, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. Further, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 1199).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the updated value is set in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry. It is stored, and when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry.

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first hold area Ra moves to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c, is collated with the hit / miss table stored in the hit / miss table storage area of the ROM 63, and becomes a jackpot. Whether or not it is determined. Further, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second hold area Rb moves to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c, is collated with the hit / miss table stored in the hit / miss table storage area of the ROM 63, and is a jackpot. It is determined whether or not.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is such that the game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. By doing so, the process moves to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c in the order acquired. Then, the jackpot random number counter C1 moved to the execution area AE is collated with the hit / miss table stored in the hit / miss table storage area of the ROM 63, and it is determined whether or not the hit is a big hit.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 39, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0.

The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, and when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the determination processing execution area 64c. The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in. Further, the MPU 62 determines the display mode of the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b by using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2. .. In making the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to.

Next, the details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not reach occurs when the result of the jackpot lottery is not a jackpot. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 238, reach a maximum value, and then return to 0.

The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b. It is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the ball. After moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first hold area Ra is collated with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63, and the reach is determined. Whether or not it occurs is determined. After moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second hold area Rb is collated with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63, and the reach is determined. Whether or not it occurs is determined. However, when the result of the big hit lottery becomes a big hit and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 determines that the reach is generated regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Reach means that some of the symbols displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41 may have a combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot for some of the symbols. It is a display state in which the symbols are displayed and the remaining symbols are displayed in a variable manner. The combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment means a combination of the same symbols on a predetermined effective line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. 28B, the symbol is first stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbol as Z1 is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3. In the situation where the reach line is formed and the reach line is formed, the symbol is varied and displayed in the symbol row Z2 to reach the reach. Then, when a big hit occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the reach, in the state where the reach line is formed, the variable display of the symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows, and the reach effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen. A combination of symbols on which a reach line is formed is reduced or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform a reach effect. In addition, when the reach effect is performed or before the reach display, it is determined whether or not to display a notice using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character by using the reach random number counter C3 or another counter. You may.

Next, the details of the variable type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 62 to determine the variation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b and the variation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, reach a maximum value, and then return to 0.

The variation type counter CS is updated once every time the normal processing described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal processing. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of the variation display on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b and at the start of the variation of the symbol by the symbol display device 41. When determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b, the fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area of the ROM 63 is used.

Next, the details of the electric accessory opening counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 465, reach a maximum value, and then return to 0. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric service holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 stored in the electric accessory holding area 64d moves to the electric accessory execution area 64e, and then the electric accessory release in the electric accessory execution area 64e. A lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a in the open state by using the value of the counter C4. For example, if C4 = 0, 1, the electric accessory 34a is controlled in the open state, and if C4 = 2 to 465, the electric accessory 34a is maintained in the closed state.

It should be noted that at least one of the acquired value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4, and the value of the variable type counter CS is the special information in the present invention. Corresponds to. Further, at least one of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the value of the variable type counter CS stored in the first hold area Ra and the second hold area Rb is held. Also called information.

Next, the pass / fail table will be described. The hit / fail table is table data for collating with the jackpot random number counter C1 when performing a jackpot lottery based on the jackpot random number counter C1. The pachinko machine 10 has a low-probability mode and a high-probability mode set as a lottery mode for the big-hit lottery. At the time of the jackpot lottery in the probability mode, the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the pass / fail table. FIG. 7A shows a hit / miss table for the low probability mode (for the low probability mode), and FIG. 7B shows a hit / miss table for the high probability mode.

As shown in FIG. 7A, five values 0 to 4 are set as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a jackpot in the hit / fail table for the low probability mode. Then, among the values of 0 to 1199, the values (5 to 1199) other than the five values of 0 to 4 are out of the range. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 7B, 16 values from 0 to 15 are set as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a jackpot in the hit / fail table for the high probability mode. Then, among the values of 0 to 1199, the values other than the 16 values of 0 to 15 are out of order. As described above, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery than the low probability mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the hit / fail table for the low probability mode is the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the hit / miss table for the high probability mode. Included in the group. However, as a result of the jackpot lottery, if the probability of winning a jackpot is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the number and value of random numbers set as jackpots are arbitrary.

Although it is not adopted in the winning / failing table in this embodiment, a "small hit" may be provided as a result of the big hit lottery.

The "small hit" is a result of success or failure that does not trigger the transition to the open / close execution mode in which the variable winning device 36 is opened / closed, but does not trigger the transition in both the lottery mode and the support mode. On the other hand, "off" is a result of success or failure that does not trigger the transition of the open / close execution mode, and also does not trigger the transition of the lottery mode and the support mode.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set for the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three modes or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Number of times (number of rounds) of opening / closing the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode
(2) Mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode (3) Lottery mode (low probability mode or high probability mode) of the jackpot lottery after the opening / closing execution mode ends.

As an aspect of the opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above (2) opening / closing execution mode, the generation of a game ball into the variable winning device 36 (winning) from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode. A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequency is relatively high or low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, one opening of the opening / closing door 36b in the opening / closing execution mode is set to continue until 30 seconds have elapsed or until the number of game balls entered into the opening / closing door 36b reaches 10. can do. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, it is set to continue until 1.6 seconds have passed or until the number of balls entered into the opening / closing door 36b reaches 10 in the opening / closing execution mode. Can be done.

The opening limit time for one opening of the opening / closing door 36b and the opening limit number for one opening are the frequency of occurrence of balls entering the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode. If the high-frequency winning mode is higher than the low-frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the opening / closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, the high-frequency winning mode may have a longer opening limit time for one opening or a larger number of opening limits for one opening than the low-frequency winning mode. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode may be configured so that the variable winning device 36 does not substantially win a prize.

In this embodiment, a plurality of types of winning modes are not provided as the opening / closing execution mode, and the high-frequency winning mode described above is used during the opening / closing execution mode. That is, one opening of the opening / closing door 36b in the opening / closing execution mode is set to continue until 30 seconds have elapsed or until the number of game balls entering the opening / closing door 36b is 10.

In the present embodiment, when a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit lottery, the big hit type counter C2 is used to sort the big hit types. The distribution of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the distribution table storage area of the ROM 63.

FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. FIG. 8A shows a distribution table for the first starting port, and FIG. 8B shows a distribution table for the second starting port. The distribution table for the first starting port is referred to at the time of the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, and the distribution table for the second starting port is to the second starting port 34. It is referred to in the big hit lottery based on the entry of the game ball.

As shown in the distribution table for the first starting port in FIG. 8A, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot types based on the first starting port 33 are 16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, and 16R normal. A jackpot, 8R normal jackpot is set.

In the 16R probability variation jackpot and the 8R probability variation jackpot, the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, and the winning / failing lottery mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is the high probability mode. It is a big hit that the support mode after the end of is the high frequency support mode.

In the 16R normal jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot, the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, and the winning / failing lottery mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is the low probability mode. It is a big hit that the support mode after the end of is the high frequency support mode.

In the distribution table for the first starting port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 13" corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and "14 to 27" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot. "28-33" corresponds to the 16R normal jackpot, and "34-39" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as the types of jackpots. Therefore, the mode of the jackpot is diversified. When comparing these four types of jackpots, the advantage for the player is that the 16R probability variation jackpot is the highest, the 8R probability variation jackpot is the next highest, then the 16R normal jackpot, and finally the 8R normal jackpot. By setting a plurality of types of jackpots having different advantages for the player in this way, it is possible to suppress the monotonicization of the game and increase the degree of attention to the game.

As shown in the distribution table for the second starting port of FIG. 8B, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, 16R probability variation jackpot and 8R normal jackpot are set as the jackpot types based on the second starting port 34. ing. In the distribution table for the second starting port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 27" corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and "28 to 39" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot. It corresponds to.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the distribution mode of the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot is the case where the jackpot is obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, and the case where the jackpot is obtained. 2 It is different from the case where a big hit is made based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port 34, and there is a clear difference in the advantage for the player.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and also uses the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE to perform the jackpot type. Further, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to cause the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b to stop and display the segment display. Determine the display mode. In making the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the end of the above-mentioned (3) opening / closing execution mode, the launch of the game ball to the game area PA continues in the same manner. The high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode are used so that the frequency with which the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is opened per unit time is relatively high or low when compared in the above-mentioned situations. Can be set.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the probability of winning the electric role opening in the electric accessory opening lottery using the electric accessory opening counter C4 differs between the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode. .. In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role opening in the electric accessory opening lottery is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the one-time opening time of the electric accessory 34a is set longer than that in the low-frequency support mode when the electric combination opening is won.

Although it is not adopted in this embodiment, in the case where the electric accessory opening is won in the high frequency support mode and the electric accessory 34a is opened multiple times, the next after one open state is completed. The closing time until the opening state is started may be set shorter than the one opening time. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the time secured from one electric accessory opening lottery to the next electric accessory opening lottery is set to be relatively shorter than in the low frequency support mode. You may.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability that the game ball enters the second starting port 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. That is, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary gaming state that assists in the establishment of the special information acquisition condition.

FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a winning / failing table (winning / failing table for electric accessory opening lottery) used when executing the electric accessory opening lottery.

FIG. 9A shows a winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the low frequency support mode) used in the low frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 9A, in the winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the low frequency support mode), two electric accessory opening counters C4, which are the electric accessory opening winning counters, are 0 and 1. The value is set. 464 values of 2 to 465 are set as the values of the electric accessory opening counter C4 that is out of alignment. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the electric accessory opening lottery is executed in the low frequency support mode, the electric accessory opening lottery is won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric accessory opening is won in the low frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

FIG. 9B shows a winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the high frequency support mode) used in the high frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 9B, in the winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the high frequency support mode), 462 electric accessory opening counters C4, which are the electric accessory opening winning, are set as values of 0 to 461. The value is set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as the values of the electric accessory opening counter C4 that is out of alignment. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the electric accessory opening lottery is executed in the high frequency support mode, the electric accessory opening lottery is won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric accessory opening is won in the high frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery is set so that the high-frequency support mode has a higher probability of the game ball entering the second starting port 34 than the low-frequency support mode. ..

FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing in detail the configuration of the main control device 60 and the configuration of the inspection machine 320 included in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the MPU 62, the CPU 62x, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 are also referred to as a main MPU 62, a main CPU 62x, a main ROM 63, and a main RAM 64, respectively.

The main ROM 63 of the main MPU 62 is provided with a prize ball number data storage area and a calculation execution condition storage area.

In the prize ball number data storage area, the number of game balls (prize ball number data) to be paid out as a prize ball when a game ball enters each entry portion is stored. In the present embodiment, the following prize ball number data is stored in the prize ball number data storage area.
-Number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters the first starting port 33 (number of prize balls in the first starting port P ₁ ): 3
-Number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters the second starting port 34 (number of prize balls at the second starting port P ₂ ): 3
_-Number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters the first prize opening 32a (number of first prize opening prize balls PN1): 10
_-Number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters the second prize opening 32b (second prize opening number of prize balls PN2): 10
_-Number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters the third prize opening 32c (3rd prize opening number of prize balls PN3): 10
_-Number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters the large prize opening 36a (number of large prize opening prize balls PS): 15

The main MPU 62 refers to the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage area of the main side ROM 63, and pays out the game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters each entry portion. Determine the number of.

Further, in the present embodiment, the prize ball number data stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 in the initial setting process executed after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. As a result, the game history management chip 300 can grasp the prize ball number data set in the pachinko machine 10.

In the calculation execution condition storage area, the calculation execution condition, which is a condition for starting the calculation for the game history management chip 300 to calculate the game history information, is stored. In the present embodiment, it is stored as a calculation execution condition that the number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage reaches 500. The calculation execution condition stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 in the initial setting process executed after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. As a result, the game history management chip 300 can grasp the calculation execution conditions set in the pachinko machine 10.

The game history management chip 300 is a semiconductor chip that calculates various game history information based on the ball entry information of the game ball to each entry port and stores the calculated game history information. The game history management chip 300 includes a buffer 302 that acquires information on the entry of game balls from the CPU 62x into each entry port, a register 304 that stores the number of game balls that have entered each entry port, and a main ROM 63. The memory for storing the number of prize balls data acquired from, the memory for storing the number of prize balls data 306, the memory for storing the calculation execution conditions 307 for storing the calculation execution conditions acquired from the main ROM 63, and the overall control of the game history management chip 300. CPU 308, which calculates game history information based on the number of game balls entering each entry slot and the number of prize balls set at each entry slot, when the calculation execution condition is satisfied. It is provided with a calculation result storage memory 309 for storing the played game history information.

The inspection terminal 65 is a terminal for connecting the inspection machine 320 and the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 is transmitted to the inspection machine 320 via the inspection terminal 65.

The inspection machine 320 is composed of a CPU 321 that executes various control programs, a ROM 324 that records various control programs and fixed value data, a RAM 326 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data, and a game history management chip 300. It includes a display unit 328 that displays the received game history information, and a connection cable 329 for connecting to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10.

FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the contents of processing in the game history management chip 300 and the inspection machine 320.

The buffer 302 is provided between the CPU 62x of the main MPU 62 and the register 304, and acquires the ball entry information at each entry port from the CPU 62x. Specifically, the buffer 302 is provided with a plurality of bits corresponding to each entry port, and the CPU 62x turns on the bit corresponding to the entry port determined to have entered the game ball (“1”. "). For example, when the CPU 62x determines that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33, the CPU 62x turns on (“1”) the bit corresponding to the first starting port 33 of the buffer 302.

Further, the buffer 302 is also provided with a bit for grasping the game mode when the game ball enters each entry port and the state of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, also referred to as a game state). In the present embodiment, a bit for determining whether or not the user is in the normal mode (a mode that is neither in the high probability mode nor in the high frequency support mode nor in the open / close execution mode) and whether or not the mode is in the high probability mode. The upper limit is a bit for determining whether or not, a bit for determining whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect, a bit for determining whether or not the open / close execution mode is in effect, and the first hold number. A bit for determining whether or not the value is in the period, a bit for determining whether or not the second reserved quantity is in the upper limit value, and the front door frame 14 are open. A bit for determining whether or not there is a bit and a bit for determining whether or not a trouble such as a failure has occurred in the pachinko machine 10 are provided. For example, when the CPU 62x determines that the game ball is in the normal mode at the timing when the game ball enters the first start port 33, the CPU 62x turns on the bit for determining whether or not the buffer 302 is in the normal mode (“1”. ").

The register 304 stores the number of game balls that have entered each entry port. Specifically, the register 304 is composed of a plurality of counters corresponding to each entry port, and when it is determined that the bit of the buffer 302 has entry information (that is, when the bit is ON). ) Is incremented by 1 to the value of the counter corresponding to the bit determined to have the ball entry information. In this embodiment, the register 304 is composed of a non-volatile register capable of holding a memory even when the power supply is cut off.

In the present embodiment, the register 304 stores the following values by each counter corresponding to each entry port.
・ Number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening 36a = Number of balls that have entered the large winning opening _NS
-Number of game balls that have entered the first starting port 33 = Number of balls that have entered the first starting port N ₁
The number of game balls that have entered the second starting port 34 = the number of balls that have entered the second starting port N ₂
-Number of game balls entered in the first winning opening 32a = Number of entering balls in the first winning opening N _N1
-Number of game balls entered in the second winning opening 32b = Number of entering balls in the second winning opening N _N2
・ Number of game balls entered in the 3rd winning opening 32c = Number of entering balls in the 3rd winning opening N _N3
-Number of game balls that have passed through the through gate 35 = Number of game balls that have passed through the through gate _NG
・ Number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage = Number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage N _OUT
As described above, the number N _OUT of passing through the discharge passage coincides with the number of game balls fired on the game board 30.

Further, in the present embodiment, the register 304 stores the number of game balls that have entered each entry port for each game state.
・ Number of game balls that entered each entry slot during normal mode ・ Number of game balls that entered each entry slot during high-probability mode ・ Number of game balls that entered each entry slot during high-frequency support mode Number of game balls ・ Number of game balls that entered each entry slot during the open / close execution mode ・ Game balls that entered the first start port 33 during the period in which the normal mode and the first hold number is the upper limit value -Number of game balls that entered the second start port 34 during the period when the normal mode and the second hold number is the upper limit value-Game that entered each entry port while the front door frame 14 was open. Number of balls ・ Number of game balls that entered each entrance during an error

For example, it is determined that the bit corresponding to the first start port 33 of the buffer 302 has entry information (the bit is ON), and the information is in the bit for determining whether or not the mode is normal. When it is determined that there is (the bit is ON), the value of the first start port entry number counter, which is a counter for storing the number of entry of game balls that have entered the first start opening 33, is 1. Is added, and 1 is added to the value of the first start port entry number counter in the normal mode, which is a counter that stores the number of game balls that have entered the first start opening 33 during the normal mode. To.

The prize ball number data storage memory 306 is a memory for storing the prize ball number data set in the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the prize ball number data stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 and stored in the prize ball number data storage memory 306. .. Therefore, the content of the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage memory 306 is the same as the content of the prize ball number data stored in the main ROM 63.

The calculation execution condition storage memory 307 is a memory for storing the calculation execution conditions set in the pachinko machine 10. As described above, the calculation execution condition is a condition for starting the calculation for calculating the game history information. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the calculation for calculating the game history information is started every time the number of game balls passing through the discharge passage reaches 500. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the calculation execution condition stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 by the CPU 62x and stored in the calculation execution condition storage memory 307. Therefore, the content of the calculation execution condition stored in the calculation execution condition storage memory 307 is the same as the content of the calculation execution condition stored in the main ROM 63. As the calculation execution condition, the number of game balls that have passed or entered other than the discharge passage may be stored as a reference, or the number other than 500 may be stored as a reference.

The CPU 308 determines whether or not the calculation execution condition stored in the calculation execution condition storage memory 307 is satisfied, and if it is determined that the calculation execution condition is satisfied, the prize ball number data storage memory 306. Various game history information is calculated based on the prize ball number data stored in the register and the number of game balls entered into each entry port stored in the register 304. In the present embodiment, the CPU 308 calculates the following value as game history information every time the value of the number N _OUT of the number of passing through the discharge passages stored in the register 304 reaches 500.

-Character ratio = Number of game balls paid out as prize balls due to bonus operation / Total number of game balls paid out as prize balls = ( _{N 2} x _{P 2} + NS x _PS ) / (NN1) × P _N1 + N _N2 × P _N2 + N _N3 × P _N3 + N ₁ × _{P 1} + N ₂ × _{P 2} + NS × PS)
-Continuous bonus ratio = Number of game balls paid out as prize balls due to continuous bonus operation / Total number of game balls paid out as prize balls = (NS x _PS ) / (N _N1 x _{P N1} ) + N _N2 x P _N2 + N _N3 x P _N3 + N ₁ x _{P 1} + N ₂ x _{P 2} + NS x PS)
・ Ball output rate (total)
= Total number of game balls paid out as prize balls / Number of game balls fired on the game board 30 = (N _N1 x P _N1 + N _N2 x P _N2 + N _N3 x P _N3 + N ₁ x P ₁ + N ₂ x _{P 2} + NS x _PS ) / N _OUT

The basis for calculating the above values is as follows.
-Number of game balls paid out as prize balls by operating the prize = The prize balls were paid out by operating the electric bonus 34a as a normal electric bonus and the variable winning device 36 as a special electric bonus. Number of game balls = Number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 34 and the large winning opening 36a = N ₂ × _{P 2} + NS × _PS
-Number of game balls paid out as prize balls by continuous bonus operation = Number of game balls paid out as prize balls by operating the variable winning device 36 as a special electric bonus = To the large winning opening 36a Number of game _balls paid out as prize balls based on the entry of the game _balls in
-Number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the first to third prize openings 32a to 32c = N _N1 x P _N1 + N _N2 x P _N2 + N _N3 x P _N3
-Total number of game balls paid out as prize balls = Based on the entry of game balls into the first to third winning openings 32a to 32c, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, and the large winning opening 36a. Number of game balls paid out as prize balls = N _N1 x P _N1 + N _N2 x P _N2 + N _N3 x P _N3 + N ₁ x _{P 1} + N ₂ x _{P 2} + NS x PS

Further, in the present embodiment, the following game history information is calculated based on the number of game balls entered into each entry unit counted for each game state.

・ Payout ratio (in normal mode)
= Number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 during the normal mode / Based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 during the normal mode Number of game balls paid out as prize balls + Number and number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the first to third winning openings 32a to 32c during the normal mode. Ball rate (in normal mode)
= Total number of game balls paid out as prize balls during normal mode / Number of game balls fired on the game board 30 during normal mode ・ Ball ejection rate (during high frequency support mode)
= Total number of game balls paid out as prize balls during the high frequency support mode / Number of game balls fired at the game board 30 during the high frequency support mode ・ BY (during normal mode)
= The number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the first to third winning openings 32a to 32c during the normal mode + the first reserved number during the normal mode is the upper limit. The number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on the entry of the game balls into the first start port 33 during the period + the second start port during the period in which the normal mode and the second hold number are the upper limit values. Number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on the entry of game balls into 34 / Number of game balls fired on the game board 30 during normal mode-BY _MIN (in normal mode)
= Number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the first to third winning openings 32a to 32c during the normal mode / Game balls fired at the game board 30 during the normal mode Number of balls ・ Number of game balls entered into each entrance while the front door frame 14 is open / Number of game balls fired on the game board 30 ・ Error ball entry rate = Number of game balls entered into each entrance during an error / Number of game balls fired on the game board 30 The above game history information is an example, and game history information other than these is calculated. May be.

When the CPU 308 calculates the various game history information described above, the CPU 308 stores the calculated various game history information in the calculation result storage memory 309 and resets the value of each counter in the register 304 to "0". In the following, various game history information calculated every time 500 game balls are launched on the game board 30 are collectively referred to as a “short-term game history information group”.

The calculation result storage memory 309 is a memory that stores the game history information calculated by the CPU 308, and in the present embodiment, it is configured by a non-volatile memory that can retain the storage even if the power supply is cut off. Has been done. The calculation result storage memory 309 also stores information regarding the order in which the short-term game history information group is written, and the CPU 308 calculates when there is no free area for writing the calculated short-term game history information group. The short-term game history information group is stored in the area where the short-term game history information group with the oldest written order is stored. That is, the calculation result storage memory 309 is configured to be overwritten in order from the oldest short-term game history information group (first-in / first-out method), and the latest short-term game history information group is always stored. It will be in a state of being.

In the present embodiment, the calculation result storage memory 309 has a capacity capable of storing 1200 short-term game history information groups calculated each time 500 game balls are launched on the game board 30. is doing. For example, if the game balls are continuously fired for 10 hours a day, 60,000 game balls are fired a day, so 120 short-term game history information groups are calculated per day. The result is stored in the storage memory 309. Therefore, the calculation result storage memory 309 can store the short-term game history information group for the last 10 days.

When the inspection machine 320 detects that the connection cable 329 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, the inspection machine 320 transmits a transmission request command requesting transmission of the game history information to the game history management chip 300. When the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 receives the transmission request command from the inspection machine 320, the CPU 308 transmits the game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 to the inspection machine 320 via the inspection terminal 65. As a result, the inspection machine 320 acquires the game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309, and causes the display unit 328 to display the acquired game history information.

As described above, in the present embodiment, every time the number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage reaches 500, that is, every time 500 game balls are launched onto the game board 30, a game such as a bonus ratio or the like is played. The history information is calculated and stored in the calculation result storage memory 309. Then, the calculated game history information is displayed on the display unit 328 of the inspection machine 320.

A3. Details of various processes performed on the gaming machine:
Next, each process executed by the MPU 62 (CPU 62x in the present embodiment) will be described. The processing of the MPU 62 is roughly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on and a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec).

First, the main process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the main process executed by the main MPU 62. In step S10101, the initial setting process is executed. Specifically, the initial setting of each control device when the power is turned on, the determination of the validity of the data stored and held in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. Further, in the present embodiment, in the initial setting process, a process of transmitting calculation data to the game history management chip 300 is executed. Specifically, the calculation data (prize ball number data and calculation execution conditions) stored in the main ROM 63 are transmitted to the game history management chip 300. As will be described later, the game history management chip 300 that has received the calculation data stores and stores the prize ball number data and the calculation execution condition in the prize ball number data storage memory 306 and the calculation execution condition storage memory 307, respectively. Sends a setting completion command indicating that is completed to the main MPU 62. After executing step S10101, the process proceeds to step S10102.

In step S10102, it is determined whether or not the setting completion command has been received. If it is determined in step S10102 that the setting completion command has been received (S10102: YES), the process proceeds to step S10103, and interrupt permission is set in order to allow the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10102 that the setting completion command has not been received (S10102: NO), the process of step S10102 is executed again. That is, until the setting completion command is received, the process does not proceed to step S10103, and the interrupt permission for permitting the occurrence of the timer interrupt process is not set.

After executing step S10103, the process proceeds to the residual processing of steps S10104 to S10107. That is, although the main MPU 62 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process as described later, a residual time is generated between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. This residual time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, and the residual process of steps S10104 to S10107 is repeatedly executed by utilizing the irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the residual processing in steps S10104 to S10107 is an irregular processing that is executed irregularly.

In the residual processing, first, in step S10104, interrupt prohibition is set in order to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In the following step S10105, the random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and in step S10106, the variation counter update process for updating the variation type counter CS is executed. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter of the main RAM 64, a process of adding 1 to the read numerical information is executed, and then a process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0" respectively. After that, in step S10107, the interrupt enable setting for switching from the state in which the occurrence of the timer interrupt process is prohibited to the state in which the timer interrupt process is permitted is set. After executing the process of step S10107, the process returns to step S10104, and the processes of steps S10104 to S10107 are repeated.

Next, the timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 62 (CPU 62x in this embodiment) will be described.

FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the main MPU 62. The timer interrupt process is started in a specific cycle (4 msec cycle in this embodiment).

In the timer interrupt process, first, the lottery random number update process is executed in step S10201. In the lottery random number update process, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, after executing a process of sequentially reading the current numerical information from the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory opening counter C4, and adding 1 to each of the read numerical information. , Executes the process of overwriting the read source counter. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0" respectively. Then, the process proceeds to step S10202.

In step S10202, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated in the random number initial value update process, and the process proceeds to step S10203 to update the variable type counter CS in the variable type counter update process. Then, the process proceeds to step S10204.

In step S10204, the port output process is executed. In the port output process, when the output information is set in the previous timer interrupt process, the process for outputting the output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 36c and 34b is executed. For example, when the information to switch the large winning opening 36a to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the variable winning drive unit 36c is started, and when the information to switch to the closed state is set, the information to be switched is set. The output of the drive signal is stopped. Further, when the information for switching the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the electric accessory drive unit 34b is started, and the information for switching to the closed state is obtained. If it is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped. Then, the process proceeds to step S10205.

In step S10205, the reading process is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the incoming ball signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing. Then, the process proceeds to step S10206.

In step S10206, the signals received from the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h are read, and the ball entry detection process for performing the process corresponding to the read information is executed. The processing content of the ball entry detection process will be described in detail later. Then, the process proceeds to step S10207.

In step S10207, the ball entry detection information is output to the bit of the buffer 302 of the game history management chip 300. Specifically, the bit corresponding to the ball entry port determined to have entered the game ball in the ball entry detection process of step S10206 is turned ON (“1”), and the bit corresponding to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to ON (“1”). To ON (“1”). Then, the process proceeds to step S10208.

In step S10208, a timer update process for collectively updating the numerical information of a predetermined timer counter provided in the main RAM 64 is executed. After that, the process proceeds to step S10209 to execute the output setting process of the prize ball command. Then, the process proceeds to step S10210.

In step S10210, the ball entry process for the start port accompanying the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 and the second start port 34 is executed. In the ball entry process for the start port, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are based on the determination that the game ball has entered the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. Along with acquiring the value, the acquired counter value is stored in the hold information storage area 64b of the RAM 64. After executing step S10210, the process proceeds to step S10211.

In step S10211, the ball entry process for the through gate accompanying the entry (passing) of the game ball into the through gate 35 is executed. In the ball entry process for the through gate, the value of the variation type counter CS is acquired based on the determination that the game ball has entered (passed) into the through gate 35, and the acquired counter value is used as the electric power of the RAM 64. Store in the hold area 64d. After executing step S10211, the process proceeds to step S10212.

In step S10212, a game time control process for controlling a game in each game time is executed. In the game round control process, a big hit lottery and display control of the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b are performed. After executing step S10212, the process proceeds to step S10213.

In step S10213, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. In the game state transition process, a process of shifting the game state to an open / close execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or the like is executed. After executing step S10213, the process proceeds to step S10214.

In step S10214, an electric service support process for controlling the electric accessory 34a is executed. In the electric service support process, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is in the open state (electric accessory opening lottery), and if it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the electric accessory 34a is driven and controlled. After executing step S10214, the process proceeds to step S10215.

In step S10215, the game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, a process for launching a game ball into the game area PA when the operation handle 25 is operated by the player is executed. After executing step S10215, the process proceeds to step S10216.

In step S10216, the external information setting process is executed so as to control the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the timer interrupt process this time. After executing step S10216, the timer interrupt process ends.

Next, the ball entry detection process executed in step S10206 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) will be described.

In the ball entry detection process, the process of confirming the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h is executed, and at the time of the confirmation, the input port 62b of the input / output ports 62a of the main MPU 62 is confirmed. Here, prior to the description of the ball entry detection process, the configuration of the input port 62b provided in the main MPU 62 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a configuration of an input port 62b provided on the main MPU 62. The input port 62b is configured as an 8-bit parallel interface so that eight types of signals can be handled at the same time. An area in which information of "0" or "1" is stored according to the voltage of each signal is provided in a one-to-one correspondence with each terminal. That is, the 0th bit D0 to the 7th bit D7 are provided as the area.

Further, more than eight types of signals are input to the input port 62b, but in order to limit the targets to be input at the same time to eight types, the signal group to be input to the input port 62b depends on the driver IC. It is switched through switching control. In the ball entry detection process, a signal group to be input to the input port 62b is set in each ball entry detection sensor 44a to 44h.

In the situation where such a setting is made, the 0th bit D0 stores the information corresponding to the entry signal from the large winning opening detection sensor 44a, and the 1st bit D1 is the entry signal from the first starting opening detection sensor 44b. The corresponding information is stored, the second bit D2 stores the information corresponding to the ball entry signal from the second start opening detection sensor 44c, and the third bit D3 is the ball entry signal from the first winning opening detection sensor 44d. The corresponding information is stored, the 4th bit D4 stores the information corresponding to the entry signal from the 2nd winning opening detection sensor 44e, and the 5th bit D5 is the entry signal from the 3rd winning opening detection sensor 44f. The corresponding information is stored, the 6th bit D6 stores the information corresponding to the ball entry signal from the through gate detection sensor 44g, and the 7th bit D7 stores the information corresponding to the ball entry signal from the discharge passage detection sensor 44h. Stored.

In this case, each of the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h outputs an HI level signal indicating that the ball is not detected as a ball entry signal when the passage of the game ball is not detected, and the passage of the game ball. When is detected, a LOW level signal indicating that the ball is being detected is output as a ball entry signal. However, the main control board 151 is provided with an inverting circuit, and the signal state is inverted before each of the above detection signals is input to the input port 62b. Then, in the input port 62b, when the LOW level signal is received through the inverting circuit, the information of "0" (data 0 or none information) is stored in the corresponding bit, and the HI level signal is received through the inverting circuit. If so, the information of "1" (data 1 or existence information) is stored in the corresponding bit.

That is, in the situation where the passage of the game ball is not detected by the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h, the information of "0" corresponding to the information indicating that the ball is not detected is stored in the corresponding bit, and the passage of the game ball is detected. In this situation, the information of "1" corresponding to the information indicating that detection is being performed is stored in the corresponding bit.

The ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h output a LOW level signal as a ball entry signal while not detecting the passage of the game ball, and HI as a ball entry signal while detecting the passage of the game ball. It may be configured to output a level signal. In this case, the inverting circuit may not be provided.

FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a ball entry detection process executed by the main MPU 62. FIG. 15A is a flowchart showing a ball entry detection process executed by the main MPU 62. FIG. 15B is an explanatory diagram schematically showing a ball entry determination area used in the ball entry detection process. In the ball entry detection process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 15A, first, in step S10301, the information currently stored in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 is transferred to the register of the main MPU 62. 1 The process of shifting to the ball entry determination area WA1 is executed. The first ball entry determination area WA1 is composed of 8 bits as shown in FIG. 15 (b-1), and stores all the information stored in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7. It is a data capacity that can be used. In this case, the storage source bits in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 and the storage destination bits in the first ball entry determination area WA1 are predetermined to have a one-to-one correspondence, for example, the 0th bit. The information of D0 is always stored in a predetermined bit in the first ball entry determination area WA1.

In the following step S10302, a wait process for ball entry detection is executed. In the wait process, the main MPU 62 waits without executing any process until a predetermined wait time elapses. In the pachinko machine 10, the wait time is set to 10 μsec, but the effect described later by setting the wait process is sufficiently exhibited without hindering the execution of the periodic timer interrupt process. If this is possible, the specific wait time is arbitrary, but is preferably in the range of 2 μsec to 500 μsec, and more preferably in the range of 10 μsec to 100 μsec.

By the way, it takes at least 1.2 μsec to execute the process of one step. Therefore, even if the process of step S10302 is not set, a forced wait time of 1.2 μsec is generated between step S10301 and step S10303. In this regard, in step S10302, not only the minimum time required to execute the process but also an additional wait time is set between the process of step S10301 and the process of step S10303.

In the following step S10303, a process of shifting the information currently stored in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 to the second ball entry determination area WA2 in the register of the main MPU 62 is executed. Incidentally, since the information update in the input port 62b is performed at intervals shorter than the time from the completion of step S10301 to the start of step S10303, the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 are performed in step S10303. The information transferred from can be different from the case of step S10301.

Similar to the first ball entry determination area WA1, the second ball entry determination area WA2 is composed of 8 bits as shown in FIG. 15 (b-2), and is in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7. It is a data capacity that can store all of the stored information. In this case, the bit of the storage source in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 and the bit of the storage destination in the second ball entry determination area WA2 are predetermined in a one-to-one correspondence, and further, the storage source bit. The relationship between the bit and the storage destination bit is the same as in the case of the first ball entry determination area WA1.

Then, in step S10304, after the ball entry determination process is executed, the main ball entry detection process is terminated. The ball entry determination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a ball entry determination process executed by the main MPU 62. In the ball entry determination process, first, in step S10401, 8 is set in the ball entry determination counter provided in the main RAM 64. In the following step S10402, each information of the bit corresponding to the numerical information of the current ball entry determination counter in the first ball entry determination area WA1 and the second ball entry determination area WA2 is grasped. Each piece of information grasped in this case is information read from the same bit in the input port 62b.

In the following step S10403, AND processing of each information grasped in step S10402 is executed, the AND processing result is stored in the register, and in step S10404, the area WA3 after the first calculation and the area WA4 after the second calculation Among them, the AND processing result is stored in the corresponding bit on the side different from the side where the information of the result of the AND processing is stored in the ball entry detection processing in the processing round of the previous timer interrupt processing. The first post-calculation area WA3 and the second post-calculation area WA4 are composed of 8 bits as shown in FIGS. 15 (b-3) and 15 (b-4), and are the first ball entry determination area WA1. The data capacity is such that all the information of the AND processing result of each bit and each bit of the second ball entry determination area WA2 can be stored. In this case, the order of the bits in the first ball entry determination area WA1 and the second ball entry determination area WA2, which are the targets of the AND process, and the order of the bits in the first post-calculation area WA3 and the second post-calculation area WA4. Is uniquely defined.

After that, in step S10405, of the area WA3 after the first calculation and the area WA4 after the second calculation, the side where the information of the result of the AND processing is stored in the ball entry determination processing in the processing round of the previous timer interrupt processing. Therefore, the bit information corresponding to the numerical information of the current ball entry determination counter is read out. Then, in step S10406, an inversion process for inverting the read information between "0" and "1" is executed.

After that, in step S10407, the AND processing of the information of the AND processing result in step S10403 and the information of the inversion processing result in step S10406 is executed, and in the subsequent step S10408, the result of the AND processing is the ball entry detection start information. It is determined whether or not it is "1" corresponding to. If it is determined in step S10408 that the AND processing result is "1", the process proceeds to the processing of step S10409 and subsequent steps.

In step S10409, it is determined whether or not the numerical information of the current ball entry determination counter is information indicating a bit corresponding to any of the first start port 33 and the second start port 34. When it corresponds to either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, "1" is set in the starting port entry flag provided in the main RAM 64 in step S10410, and step S10411. In, the numerical information of the three prize ball counters provided in the main RAM 64 is added by one.

The start port entry flag identifies the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 by the main MPU 62, and the game ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. It is a flag for the main MPU 62 to specify that the process corresponding to the entry of the ball and the process other than the execution of the prize ball should be executed. By the way, since the ball entry detection sensors 44b and 44c are provided in the first start port 33 and the second start port 34, respectively, the ball enters the first start port 33 and the ball enters the second start port 34. And may be simultaneously grasped within the range of one processing time of the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, in order to cope with this, the start ball entry flag is provided corresponding to the number of start ports 33 and 34, and specifically, two are provided. Further, the three-prize ball counter is a counter for specifying the number of times to output the three-prize ball command instructing the execution of the three prize balls in the main MPU 62.

If a negative determination is made in step S10409, it is determined in step S10412 whether or not the numerical information of the current ball entry determination counter is information indicating a bit corresponding to the variable winning device 36. When the variable winning device 36 is supported, "1" is set in the large winning opening ball entry flag provided in the main RAM 64 in step S10413, and the main RAM 64 is provided in step S10414. Add 1 to the numerical information of the 15 prize ball counters.

The large winning opening ball entry flag is a process corresponding to the entry of the game ball into the variable winning device 36 by the main MPU 62 and the entry of the game ball into the variable winning device 36. This is a flag for the main MPU 62 to specify that a process other than execution should be executed. Further, the 15-prize ball counter is a counter for specifying the number of times to output the 15-prize ball command instructing the execution of the 15 prize balls on the main MPU 62.

When a negative determination is made in step S10412, it is determined in step S10415 whether or not the numerical information of the current ball entry determination counter is information indicating a bit corresponding to the through gate 35. When the through gate 35 is supported, "1" is set in the through passage flag provided in the main RAM 64 in step S10416.

The through pass flag specifies that the game ball has passed through the through gate 35 on the main side MPU 62, and indicates that the main side should execute the process corresponding to the entry of the game ball into the through gate 35. It is a flag for specifying by MPU62.

When a negative determination is made in step S10415, the numerical information of the current ball entry determination counter corresponds to any of the first winning opening 32a, the second winning opening 32b, and the third winning opening 32c in step S10417. It is determined whether or not the information indicates a bit. When any of the first winning opening 32a, the second winning opening 32b, and the third winning opening 32c is supported, in step S10418, the general winning opening entry flag provided in the main RAM 64 is set to "1". Is set, and in step S10419, the numerical information of the three prize ball counters provided in the main RAM 64 is incremented by 1.

The general winning opening entry flag is a flag for specifying the entry of a game ball into the first winning opening 32a, the second winning opening 32b, or the third winning opening 32c by the main MPU 62. By the way, since the ball entry detection sensors 44d, 44e, 44f are provided in each of the first winning opening 32a, the second winning opening 32b, and the third winning opening 32c, the ball enters the first winning opening 32a and the second winning opening 32a. The entry into the winning opening 32b and the entry into the third winning opening may be simultaneously grasped within the range of one processing time of the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, in order to cope with this, the general winning opening entry ball flag is provided corresponding to the number of the general winning opening 32a, 32b, 32c, and specifically, three are provided. Further, the 10-prize ball counter is a counter for specifying the number of times to output the 3-prize ball command instructing the execution of the 10 prize balls in the main MPU 62.

If a negative determination is made in step S10417, it means that the current entry ball corresponds to the discharge passage. Therefore, in step SAD20, the discharge passage passage flag provided in the main RAM 64 is set to "1". To set. The discharge passage passage flag is a flag for the main MPU 62 to specify that the game ball has passed through the discharge passage.

If a negative determination is made in step S10408, or after any of the processes of step S10411, step S10414, step S10416, step S10419, and step S10420 is executed, the process proceeds to step S10421. In step S10421, the ball entry determination counter is subtracted by 1, and then in step S10422, it is determined whether or not the ball entry determination counter is “0”.

If the ball entry determination counter is not "0", the processes of steps S10402 to S10420 are executed for the bits corresponding to the numerical information of the ball entry determination counter updated in step S10421. When the processing of steps S10402 to S10420 is executed for the numerical information set in step S10401, an affirmative determination is made in step S10422, and the main ball entry determination processing is terminated.

Next, by executing the ball entry detection process (FIG. 15), the general winning opening 32, the variable winning device 36, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the discharge passage are reached. The state in which the presence or absence of a ball has been detected will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram illustrating how the presence or absence of a ball has been detected. First, with reference to FIG. 17A, the timing for monitoring the detection results (hereinafter, also referred to as ball entry information) in the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h will be described. FIG. 17A is a timing chart for explaining the timing for monitoring each ball entry information.

As shown in FIG. 17 (A), in a configuration in which the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) is activated in a T1 (specifically, 4 msec) cycle, the process of monitoring the incoming ball information is performed at each process of the timer interrupt process. It is performed twice (step S10301, step S10303). The process of monitoring each set of ball entry information is executed so that the timing is before or after, but the process of monitoring the ball entry information on the front side (step S10301) is T2 with respect to the timing when the timer interrupt process is started. It is executed when the time of.

In this case, the timing at which the ball entry detection process is executed in the timer interrupt process is executed before the process such as the game time control process and the electric service support process in which the processing time is liable to fluctuate, and further, the ball entry is executed in the timer interrupt process. The process executed before the detection process is a process whose processing time is relatively unlikely to fluctuate. Therefore, in the timer interrupt processing of each processing time, the period until the processing for monitoring the incoming ball information on the front side is started is the same, substantially the same, or the same in T2. Therefore, among the processes for monitoring a set of ball entry information included in each process of the timer interrupt process, the process for monitoring the ball entry information on the front side is periodically executed.

Further, among the processes for monitoring each set of ball entry information, between the process for monitoring the ball entry information on the front side (step S10301) and the process for monitoring the ball entry information on the rear side (step S10303). The wait process for ball entry detection (step S10302) is executed, but the wait process does not execute any process and only waits until a certain wait time T3 elapses. Therefore, among the processes for monitoring a set of ball entry information included in each process of the timer interrupt process, the process for monitoring the ball entry information on the rear side is periodically executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 17B, the content of the calculation executed when the ball entry determination is performed will be described. FIG. 17B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of the operation executed when the ball entry determination is performed. Although various operations are actually performed in 1-bit units, the contents of the operations will be described in 1-byte units in the following description. However, the configuration may be such that the calculation in 1-byte units is actually performed as described below.

In the case of FIG. 17 (B), first, in the process of monitoring the incoming ball information on the front side in the nth timer interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 17 (B1), the first incoming ball determination area WA1 is set to "0010000". "Is set. In this case, among the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h, the entry information of the third winning opening detection sensor 44f is information that the game ball is detected (hereinafter, also referred to as information with entry). The entry information of other sensors is information that the game ball is not detected (hereinafter, also referred to as no entry information).

Further, in the process of monitoring the ball entry information on the rear side in the nth timer interrupt process, "1010000" is set in the second ball entry determination area WA2 as shown in FIG. 17 (B2). In this case, of the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h, each of the discharge passage detection sensor 44h and the third winning opening detection sensor 44f has information on the presence of a ball, and the other sensors have information on no ball entry. ..

When the information of the first ball entry determination area WA1 and the second ball entry determination area WA2 is set as described above, the AND processing result is "0010000" as shown in FIG. 17 (B3). The information is set in the area WA3 after the first calculation as the monitoring result of the incoming ball information in the timer interrupt processing of the nth processing time. When the monitoring result of the ball entry information in the n-1th timer interrupt process is set in the area WA3 after the first calculation, the monitoring result of the ball entry information in the nth timer interrupt process is the second calculation. It is set in the rear area WA4. Further, the ball entry determination process is executed using the monitoring result of the ball entry information in the n-1th time and the monitoring result of the ball entry information in the nth time, but the content of the calculation of this process is omitted here.

Next, in the process of monitoring the ball entry information on the front side in the n + 1th timer interrupt process, "10100110" is set in the first ball entry determination area WA1 as shown in FIG. 17 (B4). In this case, of the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h, each of the discharge passage detection sensor 44h, the third winning opening detection sensor 44f, the second start opening detection sensor 44c, and the first start opening detection sensor 44b is the information that the ball has entered. The other sensors are information that there is no entry.

Further, in the process of monitoring the incoming ball entry information on the rear side in the n + 1th timer interrupt process, "1010010" is set in the second incoming ball entry determination area WA2 as shown in FIG. 17 (B5). In this case, of the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h, each of the discharge passage detection sensor 44h, the third winning opening detection sensor 44f, and the first start opening detection sensor 44b is information on the presence of a ball, and the other sensors are It is information that there is no entry.

When the information of the first ball entry determination area WA1 and the second ball entry determination area WA2 is set as described above, the AND processing result is "1010010" as shown in FIG. 17 (B6). The information is set in the area WA4 after the second calculation as the monitoring result of the incoming ball information in the timer interrupt processing of the n + 1th processing round.

After that, in the ball entry determination process (FIG. 16) in the n + 1th timer interrupt process, the monitoring result of the ball entry information in the nth timer interrupt process is first read from the area WA3 after the first calculation and is read out. Inversion processing is executed for the monitoring result information. Then, as shown in FIG. 17 (B7), it becomes "11011111". Then, the monitoring result of the ball entry information in the n + 1th timer interrupt processing is ANDed with the information of the result of the inversion processing. As a result, as shown in FIG. 17 (B8), it becomes "10000010". In this case, in the ball entry determination process, it is determined that the entry of the game ball is detected by the discharge passage detection sensor 44h, and it is determined that the entry of the game ball is detected by the first start port detection sensor 44b. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 17 (B4), the second start port detection sensor 44c has the information that the ball has entered in the process of monitoring the ball entry information on the front side in the n + 1th timer interrupt process. Is caused by electrical noise. In this case, even if the switch from the information without ball entry to the information with ball entry is confirmed, it is not immediately specified that the ball has entered, but when the information with ball entry is confirmed multiple times, the ball enters. It is a configuration that identifies the occurrence. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17 (B5), in the process of monitoring the entry information on the rear side in the n + 1th timer interrupt process, the second start port detection sensor 44c is the information without entry, which is electrical. The generation of noise is not treated as the entry of a game ball.

Further, in the third winning opening detection sensor 44f, a set of ball entry information is monitored in the nth timer interrupt process and a set of ball entry information is monitored in the n + 1th timer interrupt process. Although it is information with a ball, this indicates a state in which a game ball for which the occurrence of an incoming ball has already been grasped is continuously detected. In this case, since the occurrence of the incoming ball is specified on the condition that the monitoring result of the incoming ball information in the nth timer interrupt process is "0", a plurality of incoming balls of one game ball are specified. Do not treat it as an entry ball.

When the ball entry detection process is executed as described above, the detection results are monitored by the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h, and the ball entry corresponding to the granting of the game ball is generated. Is executed to add to the 3-prize ball counter, the 10-prize ball counter, and the 15-prize ball counter according to the entry point. If any of these counters is "1" or higher, the prize ball command is set in the prize ball command output setting process (step S10209) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13), and the setting thereof is performed. The prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70. In this case, the output setting of the prize ball command is performed only once in one processing of the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, for example, even if the 15 prize ball counter is "2" or more, the 15 prize ball command is transmitted only once in one processing time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a predetermined plurality of (for example, two or three) prize ball commands may be transmitted in one processing time.

Further, it is possible that each of the three prize ball counters, the ten prize ball counters, and the fifteen prize ball counters is "1" or more, but in this case, the output of the prize ball command with a large number of prize balls is output. have priority. That is, the output of the 15-prize ball command takes precedence over the output of the 10-prize ball command and the output of the 3-prize ball command, and the output of the 10-prize ball command takes precedence over the output of the 3-prize ball command. ..

When the 15-prize ball counter is "1" or more and the 15-prize ball command is set as an output target, the 15-prize ball counter is decremented by 1. Further, when the 10-prize ball counter is "1" or more and the 10-prize ball command is set as an output target, the 10-prize ball counter is decremented by 1. Further, when the 3-prize ball counter is "1" or more and the 3-prize ball command is set as an output target, the 3-prize ball counter is decremented by 1.

Next, the process executed by the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 will be described. In the present embodiment, the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 executes the following main processing when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300.

In step S10501, it is determined whether or not the calculation data including the prize ball number data and the calculation execution condition is received. If it is determined in step S10501 that the calculation data has been received (S10501: YES), the process proceeds to step S10502. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10501 that the calculation data has not been received (S10501: NO), the process of step S10501 is executed again. That is, until the calculation data is received, the infinite loop is continued without proceeding to the processing of the next step S10502.

In step S10502, the received prize ball number data is stored in the prize ball number data storage memory 306. After that, the process proceeds to step S10503, and the received calculation execution condition is stored in the calculation execution condition storage memory 307. Then, the process proceeds to step S10504.

In step S10504, a setting completion command meaning that the storage of the prize ball number data in the prize ball number data storage memory 306 is completed and the storage of the calculation execution condition in the calculation execution condition storage memory 307 is completed. Is transmitted to the main CPU 62x. Then, the process proceeds to step S10505.

In step S10505, it is determined whether or not the bit of the buffer 302 contains the incoming ball information received from the main CPU 62x (“1” is stored in the bit). If it is determined in step S10505 that the bit of the buffer 302 contains the ball entry information received from the main CPU 62x (S10505: YES), the process proceeds to step S10506, and 1 is set in the counter of the register corresponding to the bit of the buffer 302. to add. Specifically, for example, when the bit corresponding to the first start port entry information of the buffer 302 is "1" and the bit corresponding to the normal mode is "1", the register 304 wins a big prize. 1 is added to the counter corresponding to the number of balls entering the mouth _NS , and 1 is added to the counter corresponding to the number of large winning balls entered in the normal mode. Then, the process proceeds to step S10507. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10505 that the bit of the buffer 302 does not have the ball entry information received from the main CPU 62x (S10505: NO), the process proceeds to step S10507 without executing step S10506.

In step S10507, it is determined whether or not the calculation execution condition stored in the calculation execution condition storage memory 307 is satisfied. In the present embodiment, whether or not the value of the number of discharge passages N _OUT stored in the register 304 is 500, that is, whether or not the number of game balls fired on the game board 30 has reached 500. judge. If it is determined in step S10507 that the calculation execution condition stored in the calculation execution condition storage memory 307 is satisfied (S10507: YES), the process proceeds to step S10508.

In step S10508, various game history information is based on the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage memory 306 and the number of game balls entered into each entry port stored in the register 304. Performs arithmetic processing to calculate. After that, the process proceeds to step S10509, and the calculated various game history information is stored in the calculation result storage memory 309. After that, the process proceeds to step S10510, and the number of game balls entered into each entry slot stored in the register 304 is cleared to 0. Then, the process proceeds to step S10511.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10507 that the calculation execution condition stored in the calculation execution condition storage memory 307 is not satisfied (S10507: NO), step S10511 is not executed from step S10508 to step S10511. Proceed to.

In step S10511, it is determined whether or not the game history information transmission request command has been received from the inspection machine 320, and if it is determined that the transmission request command has been received (S10511: YES), the process proceeds to step S10512. , The game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 is transmitted to the inspection machine 320. The inspection machine 320 causes the display unit 328 to display the received game history information. After executing step S10512, the process returns to step S10505 and the processing of step S10505 and the like is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10511 that the game history information transmission request command has not been received from the inspection machine 320 (S10511: NO), the process returns to step S10505 without executing the process of step S10512. The process of S10505 and below is repeated.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the game history management chip 300 can calculate game history information which is information having a correlation with the behavior of the game ball in the executed game. If the gaming machine is illegally modified or the like, the calculated gaming history information may have an unnatural value different from the expected value. Therefore, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can determine whether or not the pachinko machine 10 has been tampered with by checking the game history information. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the game history management chip 300 includes a calculation result storage memory 309 that non-volatilely stores the calculated game history information. Since the game history information is information having a correlation with the behavior of the game ball in the executed game, the game history information is different for each pachinko machine 10 and is unique information of the pachinko machine 10. That is, the game history information is information that reflects the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10. According to the present embodiment, the game history information, which is the information reflecting the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10, is stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 of the game history management chip 300 stored inside the housing of the pachinko machine 10. do. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10, the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 can be inspected by acquiring the game history information from the pachinko machine 10 itself. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, information regarding the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 can be acquired by the hall computer installed in the game hall. However, since the pachinko machine 10 is distributed in various ways, it may be placed in a state where it is not connected to the hall computer. In this case, the conventional pachinko machine 10 retains information on the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10. Can not do it. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment stores game history information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10, in the calculation result storage memory 309 of the game history management chip 300 stored inside the housing of the pachinko machine 10. Since it is stored, the game history information can be acquired from the pachinko machine 10 main body even when the pachinko machine 10 is not connected to the hall computer. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 and the game history information are always one-to-one regardless of the state (the state installed in the game hall or the distribution state) of the pachinko machine 10. It is possible to put it in a state of being linked with, and it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, both the game history management chip 300 and the main CPU 62x are mounted on the main MPU 62, and they are configured to operate by the same power source. Therefore, for example, when the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall and the game history information of the pachinko machine 10 is calculated by the hall computer, a problem occurs in the power supply system of the hall computer. Even if there is a problem in the processing of the hall computer, the game history information can be calculated as long as the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10. If the main CPU 62x and the game history management chip 300 are operated by different power sources, or if there is a problem in the power supply of the game history management chip 300, the pachinko machine 10 may be executing the game. However, there is a problem that the game history information cannot be calculated. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the main CPU 62x and the game history management chip 300 are operated by the same power source, the game history information must be calculated whenever the game can be executed. Can be done. Therefore, the reliability of the game history information can be improved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the calculation result storage memory 309 is stored inside the substrate box in which the trace of opening and closing remains. Therefore, when the memory 309 for storing the calculation result is physically contacted, a trace of opening the board box remains. Therefore, if the game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 is modified through physical contact with the calculation result storage memory 309, it can be grasped from the trace of the board box that the modification has been performed. It becomes possible to do. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the game history information. Since the pachinko machine 10 is distributed in various ways, various external contacts are made in the process of distribution, but the calculation result storage memory 309 is stored inside the board box in which traces of opening and closing remain. Therefore, even in a situation where the pachinko machines 10 are distributed one after another, it is possible to suppress unauthorized modification of the game history information by someone. Further, since the game history information is information acquired based on the executed game, it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 regarding the game by using the game history information. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 can be properly managed and inspected by preventing unauthorized modification of the game history information that reflects the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 regarding the game. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the game history management chip 300 acquires the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage area of the main ROM 63, and therefore, the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 regarding the paid out prize balls. Can be calculated. Further, even if different prize ball number data are set for each type (model) of the pachinko machine 10, the game history management chip 300 uses the prize ball number data set for each type of the pachinko machine 10 to perform a correct game. History information can be calculated. If the gaming machine is illegally modified or the like, the calculated gaming history information may have an unnatural value different from the expected value. Therefore, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can appropriately determine whether or not the pachinko machine 10 has been tampered with by confirming the correct game history information. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the main CPU 62x transmits a signal including the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage area of the main side ROM 63 to the game history management chip 300, so that the game history management The configuration in which the chip 300 cannot access the prize ball number data storage area of the main ROM 63, and the storage position of the prize ball number data stored in the game history management chip 300 in the prize ball number data storage area of the main ROM 63. Even if the configuration is such that the (memory address) cannot be grasped, the game history management chip 300 can acquire the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage area of the main ROM 63.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the main process of the main CPU 62x, the interrupt of the timer interrupt process is not permitted until the setting completion command is received, and the game ball launch control process included in the timer interrupt process is not executed. It is composed. That is, since the game ball is not fired until the storage of the prize ball number data in the prize ball number data storage memory 306 is completed, the game ball leaks from the calculation target of the game history information by the game history management chip 300. Can be suppressed.

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the game history information for each period until 500 game balls are detected by the discharge passage detection sensor 44h is calculated and stored, 500 game balls are stored by each pachinko machine 10. Even if there is a variation in the time until the detection, it is possible to calculate and store the game history information that does not affect the variation in the time. That is, even if there is a difference in the frequency at which the game ball is fired, it is possible to calculate and store highly accurate game history information that is not easily affected by the difference. In addition, the required storage capacity can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which the ball entry information to each entry port is stored as it is.

If the type (model) of the pachinko machine 10 is different, the characteristics of the game are also different, so that the optimum conditions for executing the calculation for calculating the game history information are also different. Therefore, different calculation execution conditions are stored for each type (model) of the pachinko machine 10. According to the present embodiment, the game history management chip 300 acquires the calculation execution conditions stored in the calculation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63, so that the calculation set for each type (model) of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. When the execution condition is satisfied, the operation for calculating the game history information can be executed.

Further, according to the present embodiment, after the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 executes an operation for calculating the game history information, the number of game balls entered into each entry port stored in the register 304. Since (counter value) is erased, it is possible to store information regarding the number of game balls entered in the register 304 again. Therefore, the storage capacity required for the register 304 can be reduced.

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the game history information of the pachinko machine 10 is transmitted to the inspection machine 320, the inspection machine 320 can display the game history information of the pachinko machine 10. Then, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can confirm the game history information displayed on the inspection machine 320.

A4. Another aspect of the first embodiment:
<Aspect 1>
In the first embodiment, as the calculation execution condition stored in the calculation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63, it is set that the number of game balls detected by the discharge passage detection sensor 44h reaches 500. As an execution condition, a configuration in which a time interval for executing an operation is set may be used. For example, one hour is set as a time interval for executing the calculation, and the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 may be configured to calculate the game history information every time one hour elapses. The inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can confirm the detailed game history information calculated every hour, and can appropriately judge whether the pachinko machine 10 has been tampered with or not. Become. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

If the type (model) of the pachinko machine 10 is different, the characteristics of the game are also different, so that the optimum conditions (time interval) for executing the calculation for calculating the game history information are also different. Therefore, different calculation execution conditions are stored for each type (model) of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, also in this aspect 1, since the game history management chip 300 acquires the calculation execution conditions stored in the calculation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63, it is set for each type (model) of the pachinko machine 10. The operation can be executed when the operation execution condition is satisfied.

Further, the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 measures the elapsed time since the calculation is executed, determines whether or not the game is being played by the player, and determines that the game is not being played. During the period of time, the measurement of the elapsed time may be interrupted. Specifically, for example, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes) has elapsed when there is no entry information in the bit of the buffer 302, it is determined that the game has not been performed, the measurement of the elapsed time is interrupted, and the buffer is used. When the entry information is confirmed in the bits of 302, it may be determined that the game has been restarted and the measurement of the elapsed time may be restarted. According to this configuration, the game history information can be calculated only for the period during which the game is actually performed.

The elapsed time may be measured by using a timer counter, or by providing an RTC (Real-Time Clock) and using the date and time information of the RTC. Further, the game history information may be calculated at predetermined time intervals.

<Aspect 2>
In the first embodiment, as the calculation execution condition stored in the calculation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63, it is set that the number of game balls detected by the discharge passage detection sensor 44h reaches 500. As an execution condition, it may be configured that the occurrence of power cutoff is detected. Specifically, when the power failure monitoring circuit 86 detects the occurrence of a power cutoff, the power failure monitoring circuit 86 outputs a signal indicating that the power cutoff has occurred to the game history management chip 300. The CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 that has received the signal determines that the power supply has been cut off, and calculates the game history information. In this configuration, the register 304 is composed of a volatile memory, and the information on the number of balls entered is erased. According to such a configuration, the game history information can be calculated based on the number of game balls detected during the period from the start of power supply to the pachinko machine 10 to the occurrence of power cutoff. can. That is, since the game history information is calculated for each period from the start to the end of the business of the game hall, the game history information is calculated for each business day of the game hall. Therefore, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can easily grasp whether or not the characteristics of the game history information have changed over the business days of the game hall, so that the pachinko machine 10 is illegally modified or the like. It is possible to properly judge whether or not it has been done. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

Further, if the capacitor 87 is provided to supply power to the game history management chip 300 even after the power is cut off, the CPU 308 calculates the game history information and the memory for storing the calculation result of the game history information 309. You can be sure to complete the memory of.

<Aspect 3>
In the first embodiment, the main CPU 62x may be configured to be able to access the calculation result storage memory 309, and the game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 may be displayed on the symbol display device 41. .. According to this configuration, the game history information is displayed on the symbol display device 41 of the pachinko machine 10, so that the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can use a dedicated device (inspector 320, etc.) for confirming the game history information. The game history information of the pachinko machine 10 can be confirmed without using it. It is preferable that the main CPU 62x has a configuration in which the operation result storage memory 309 can be accessed, but the data cannot be changed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game history information from being destroyed or rewritten due to noise, a bug in the program, or the like.

<Aspect 4>
In the first embodiment, the main CPU 62x is configured to be able to access the calculation result storage memory 309, and notifies that the game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 does not satisfy a predetermined condition. An LED lamp for this purpose may be provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, a predetermined portion of the main display unit 45). For example, the LED lamp may be made to emit light when a specific value (for example, a bonus ratio, a continuous bonus ratio, a payout ratio (during the normal mode)) included in the game history information is no longer included in the predetermined range. good. According to this configuration, the inspector of the pachinko machine can easily find the pachinko machine 10 in which the specific value included in the game history information is no longer included in the predetermined range. Then, by checking the game history information of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to determine whether or not the pachinko machine 10 has been tampered with. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved. In particular, if the nails near the first starting port 33 and the general winning openings (1st to 3rd winning openings 32a to 32c) are fraudulent, the above-mentioned payout ratio (during normal mode) is the design of the pachinko machine. It will sometimes deviate from the assumed predetermined range (for example, 0.60 to 0.70). Therefore, by configuring the LED lamp to emit light when the payout ratio (during the normal mode) is no longer included in the predetermined range (for example, 0.60 to 0.70), the first starting port 33 and the general prize can be won. It is possible to appropriately determine whether or not the nails in the vicinity of the mouths (first to third winning mouths 32a to 32c) are fraudulent.

Further, the light emission mode (color) of the LED lamp according to the degree of deviation from a predetermined range of specific values (for example, bonus ratio, continuous bonus ratio, payout ratio (during normal mode)) included in the game history information. It may be configured to determine. For example, when the accessory ratio is within a predetermined range (0.70 or less), the first LED lamp emits blue light, and when the accessory ratio is 0.71 to 0.80, the first LED lamp emits light. May emit light in purple, and the first LED lamp may emit light in red when the accessory ratio is 0.81 to 1.00. The second LED lamp emits blue light when the continuous accessory ratio is within a predetermined range (0.60 or less), and the second LED lamp when the continuous accessory ratio is 0.61 to 0.70. May emit red light, and when the continuous accessory ratio is 0.71 to 1.00, the second LED lamp may emit red light. When the payout ratio (during the normal mode) is within the predetermined range (0.60 to 0.70), the third LED lamp emits blue light and the payout ratio (during the normal mode) is 0.71. When the value is ~ 0.80, the third LED lamp emits purple light, and when the payout ratio (during the normal mode) is 0.81 to 1.00, the third LED lamp may emit red light. According to this configuration, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can easily grasp how much the specific value included in the game history information deviates from a predetermined range. It is preferable that the main CPU 62x has a configuration in which the operation result storage memory 309 can be accessed, but the data cannot be changed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game history information from being destroyed or rewritten due to noise, a bug in the program, or the like.

<Aspect 5>
In the first embodiment, the calculation data (prize ball number data and calculation execution conditions) stored in the main ROM 63 are transmitted to the game history management chip 300 in the initial setting process executed by the main MPU 62 (CPU 62x). However, the game history management chip 300 is configured to be able to access the prize ball number data storage area and the calculation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63, and the game history management chip 300 is concerned immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. A configuration in which the main ROM 63 is accessed to acquire calculation data (prize ball number data and calculation execution conditions), and the acquired calculation data is stored in the prize ball number data storage memory 306 and the calculation execution condition storage memory 307. May be. According to such a configuration, the processing load of the main MPU 62 can be reduced.

<Aspect 6>
In the first embodiment, the game history management chip 300 is configured to calculate the game history information such as the bonus ratio, but the number of balls entered for every 500 balls stored in the register is stored as it is, and the inspection machine 320 is used. It may be configured to calculate the game history information. According to such a configuration, the processing load of the game history management chip 300 can be reduced. Hereinafter, the details of the sixth aspect will be described focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

FIG. 19 is a block diagram showing in detail the configuration of the main control device 60 and the configuration of the inspection machine 320 included in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment of the first embodiment.

The main ROM 63 of the main MPU 62 is provided with a prize ball number data storage area and a storage execution condition storage area.

In the prize ball number data storage area, as in the first embodiment, the number of game balls (prize ball number data) to be paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters each entry portion is stored. There is. Further, as in the first embodiment, the prize ball number data stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 in the initial setting process executed after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Will be done. As a result, the game history management chip 300 can grasp the prize ball number data set in the pachinko machine 10.

The storage execution condition The storage execution condition, which is a condition for the game history management chip 300 to execute the storage process described later, is stored in the storage execution condition storage area. In this aspect 6, it is stored as a storage execution condition that the number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage reaches 500. The storage execution conditions stored in the main ROM 63 are transmitted to the game history management chip 300 in the initial setting process executed after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. As a result, the game history management chip 300 can grasp the storage execution conditions set in the pachinko machine 10.

The game history management chip 300 includes a buffer 302 that acquires information on the entry of game balls from the CPU 62x into each entry port, a register 304 that stores the number of game balls that have entered each entry port, and a main ROM 63. The memory for storing the number of prize balls data acquired from the above, the memory for storing the storage execution conditions 307a for storing the storage execution conditions acquired from the main ROM 63, and the overall control of the game history management chip 300. It is provided with a CPU 308 that controls the above, and a memory for storing the number of balls to be entered, 309a, which sequentially stores the number of balls to be entered into each entry port stored in the register 304. The above-mentioned storage process is a process of storing the number of game balls entered into each entry slot stored in the register 304 in the entry number storage memory 309a.

The inspection terminal 65 is a terminal for connecting the inspection machine 320 and the pachinko machine 10. In this aspect 6, the number of balls entered information stored in the memory for storing the number of balls entered and the number of prize balls stored in the memory for storing the number of prize balls 306 are transmitted to the inspection machine 320 via the inspection terminal 65. Will be done.

The inspection machine 320 has a CPU 321 that executes various control programs, a ROM 324 that records various control programs and fixed value data, a RAM 326 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data, and a display that displays various information. A unit 328 and a connection cable 329 for connecting to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10 are provided.

In this aspect 6, when the inspection machine 320 detects that the connection cable 329 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, the game history management chip 300 issues a transmission request command requesting transmission of ball entry number information and prize ball number data. Send to. When the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 receives the transmission request command from the inspection machine 320, the number of incoming balls stored in the memory for storing the number of incoming balls 309a via the inspection terminal 65 and the number of winning balls data are stored. The prize ball number data stored in the memory 306 is transmitted to the inspection machine 320. Then, the inspection machine 320 calculates the game history information based on the received ball entry number information and the prize ball number data, and displays the calculated game history information on the display unit 328.

FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the contents of processing in the game history management chip 300 and the inspection machine 320 according to the sixth embodiment of the first embodiment.

Since the contents of the processing in the buffer 302 and the register 304 are the same as those in the first embodiment described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

The prize ball number data storage memory 306 is a memory for storing the prize ball number data set in the pachinko machine 10. In this aspect 6, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the prize ball number data stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 and stored in the prize ball number data storage memory 306. .. Therefore, the content of the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage memory 306 is the same as the content of the prize ball number data stored in the main ROM 63.

The storage execution condition storage memory 307a is a memory for storing the storage execution condition set in the pachinko machine 10. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the storage execution condition stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 by the CPU 62x and stored in the storage execution condition storage memory 307a. Therefore, the content of the storage execution condition stored in the storage execution condition storage memory 307a is the same as the content of the storage execution condition stored in the main ROM 63.

The CPU 308 determines whether or not the storage execution condition stored in the storage execution condition storage memory 307a is satisfied, and if it is determined that the storage execution condition is satisfied, each input stored in the register 304 is stored. Information on the number of game balls entering the ball mouth is stored in the memory for storing the number of balls entered 309a, and the value of each counter of the register 304 is reset to "0". In this aspect 6, the CPU 308 relates to the number of game balls entering each entry port stored in the register 304 every time the value of the number N _OUT of the number of passing through the discharge passages stored in the register 304 reaches 500. The information is stored in the memory for storing the number of incoming balls 309a. In the following, information on the number of game balls entering each entry slot counted while 500 game balls are launched on the game board 30 is also referred to as a "short-term entry number information group".

The memory for storing the number of balls entered 309a is a memory for sequentially storing information regarding the number of balls entered (short-term number of balls entered information group) stored in the register 304, and in the present embodiment, it is stored even if the power supply is cut off. It is composed of non-volatile memory that can hold. The memory 309a for storing the number of balls entered also stores information regarding the order in which the short-term number of balls entered information group is written, and the CPU 308 has no free area for writing the short-term number of balls entered information group. The short-term entry number information group is stored in the area where the short-term entry number information group with the oldest written order is stored. That is, the memory 309a for storing the number of balls entered is configured to be overwritten in order from the oldest short-term number of balls entered information group (first-in / first-out method), and the latest short-term number of balls entered information group is always used. It will be in a memorized state.

In this aspect 6, the memory for storing the number of balls entered 309a is short-term entry which is information on the number of balls entered into each entry port counted while 500 game balls are launched on the game board 30. It has a capacity capable of storing 1200 ball number information groups. For example, if the game balls are fired continuously for 10 hours a day, 60,000 game balls are fired a day, so that 120 short-term ball entry number information groups are fired a day. It will be stored in the memory for storing the number of incoming balls 309a. Therefore, the memory for storing the number of balls entered 309a can store the short-term number of balls entered information group for the last 10 days.

As described above, when the inspection machine 320 detects that the connection cable 329 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, the inspection machine 320 transmits a transmission request command to the game history management chip 300. When the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 receives the transmission request command from the inspection machine 320, the CPU 308 transmits the short-term entry number information group and the prize ball number data to the inspection machine 320 via the inspection terminal 65. Then, the inspection machine 320 calculates the game history information such as the bonus ratio based on the short-term entry number information group and the prize ball number data, and displays the calculated game history information on the display unit 328.

Specifically, in this aspect 6, the inspection machine 320 can calculate one short-term game history information group for one short-term entry number information group, similarly to the CPU 308 of the first embodiment described above. In addition to being possible, the number of game balls entered into each entry slot stored in each of the plurality of short-term entry number information groups is added, and the added number of entry balls is used for long-term game history information. (Long-term game history information group) can be calculated. That is, the inspection machine 320 of this aspect 6 is not only a short-term game history information group based on the number of balls entered into each entrance in a short period in which 500 game balls are launched, but also, for example, 600,000 (about). It is possible to calculate a long-term game history information group based on the number of balls entering each entrance for a long period of time when the game ball (for 10 days) is launched.

In this aspect 6, the following configuration may be adopted.

The inspection machine 320 may be configured so that the received short-term entry number information group can be displayed on the display unit 328. Further, the inspection machine 320 may be configured to receive each counter value stored in the register 304 and to display each received counter value on the display unit 328.

Further, instead of the configuration in which the game history management chip 300 transmits the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage memory 306 to the inspection machine 320, the main side CPU 62x is stored in the main side ROM 63. The ball number data may be transmitted to the inspection machine 320. According to such a configuration, the memory for storing the prize ball number data 306 can be omitted, and the manufacturing cost of the game history management chip 300 can be reduced.

Further, the storage execution condition stored in the storage execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63 may be configured such that a time interval for executing the storage process is set. For example, one hour is set as a time interval for executing the storage process, and the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 may be configured to execute the storage process every time one hour elapses.

Further, the storage execution condition stored in the storage execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63 may be configured such that the occurrence of power interruption is set as the storage execution condition. Specifically, the power failure monitoring circuit 86 is configured to output a signal indicating that the power cutoff has occurred to the game history management chip 300 when it detects the occurrence of the power cutoff, and the game history management chip that has received the signal. The CPU 308 of the 300 may be configured to determine that the power supply has been cut off and execute the storage process.

Further, in the sixth aspect, the calculation for calculating the game history information is executed by the CPU 321 of the inspection machine 320, but a part or all of the calculation is executed by the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300, and the calculation is performed. The game history information as a result of the above may be transmitted to the inspection machine 320.

<Aspect 7>
In the first embodiment, the game history management chip 300 is configured to calculate the game history information such as the bonus ratio, but the ball entry information in the buffer is stored as it is, and the inspection machine 320 is based on the ball entry information. It may be configured to calculate the game history information. According to such a configuration, the processing load of the game history management chip 300 can be reduced. Hereinafter, the details of the seventh aspect will be described focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing in detail the configuration of the main control device 60 and the configuration of the inspection machine 320 included in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment.

In this aspect 7, the main MPU 62 is provided with an RTC96 (RTC: Real-Time Clock) that outputs date information and time information to the game history management chip 300. The RTC96 is provided with a backup power supply, and can update the date information and the time information even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

The main ROM 63 of the main MPU 62 is provided with a prize ball number data storage area. In this aspect 7, the calculation start condition storage area is not provided.

In the prize ball number data storage area, as in the first embodiment, the number of game balls (prize ball number data) to be paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters each entry portion is stored. There is. Further, as in the first embodiment, the prize ball number data stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 in the initial setting process executed after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Will be done. As a result, the game history management chip 300 can grasp the prize ball number data set in the pachinko machine 10.

The game history management chip 300 includes a buffer 302 for acquiring game ball entry information from the CPU 62x to each entry port, and a prize ball number data storage memory 306 for storing prize ball number data acquired from the main ROM 63. It is provided with a CPU 308 that controls the entire game history management chip 300, and a ball entry information storage memory 309b that sequentially stores game ball entry information and the like into each entry slot stored in the buffer 302. ..

The inspection terminal 65 is a terminal for connecting the inspection machine 320 and the pachinko machine 10. In this aspect 7, when the inspection machine 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, the ball entry information and the like stored in the ball entry information storage memory 309b and the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number data storage memory 306. The data is transmitted to the inspection machine 320.

The inspection machine 320 has a CPU 321 that executes various control programs, a ROM 324 that records various control programs and fixed value data, a RAM 326 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data, and a display that displays various information. A unit 328 and a connection cable 329 for connecting to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10 are provided.

In this aspect 7, when the inspection machine 320 detects that the connection cable 329 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, the game history management chip 300 issues a transmission request command requesting transmission of ball entry information and prize ball number data. Send to. When the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 receives the transmission request command from the inspection machine 320, the entry information and the like stored in the entry information storage memory 309b via the inspection terminal 65 and the prize ball number data storage are used. The prize ball number data stored in the memory 306 is transmitted to the inspection machine 320. Then, the inspection machine 320 calculates the game history information based on the received ball entry information and the prize ball number data, and displays the calculated game history information on the display unit 328.

FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an outline of processing in the game history management chip 300 and the inspection machine 320 according to the seventh embodiment of the first embodiment.

Since the content of the process in the buffer 302 is the same as that of the first embodiment described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

The ball entry information storage memory 309b is a memory that sequentially stores the ball entry information stored in the buffer 302 and the information regarding the game state when the game ball enters, and in the present embodiment, the power supply is cut off. It is composed of a non-volatile memory that can hold a memory. Further, in the present embodiment, when the entry information and the information regarding the game state are stored, the date and time information when the game ball enters each entry port is added and stored. Further, the entry information storage memory 309b also stores information regarding the order in which the entry information and the like are written, and the CPU 308 performs the entry when there is no free area for writing the entry information and the like. Information and the like are stored in the area where the entry information and the like with the oldest written order are stored. That is, the ball entry information storage memory 309b is configured to overwrite the oldest ball entry information in order (first-in / first-out method), and the latest ball entry information or the like is always stored. It becomes a state.

The prize ball number data storage memory 306 is a memory for storing the prize ball number data set in the pachinko machine 10. In this aspect 7, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the prize ball number data stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 and stored in the prize ball number data storage memory 306. .. Therefore, the content of the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage memory 306 is the same as the content of the prize ball number data stored in the main ROM 63. Further, in this aspect 7, when the inspection machine 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage memory 306 is transmitted to the inspection machine 320.

As described above, when the inspection machine 320 detects that the connection cable 329 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, the inspection machine 320 issues a transmission request command requesting transmission of ball entry information and prize ball number data to the game history management chip 300. Send to. When the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 receives the transmission request command from the inspection machine 320, the CPU 308 includes the ball entry information stored in the ball entry information storage memory 309b via the inspection terminal 65, the game status information, and the date and time information. , The prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage memory 306 is transmitted to the inspection machine 320. Then, the inspection machine 320 calculates the game history information based on the received information, and causes the display unit 328 to display the calculated game history information.

Specifically, the inspection machine 320 of this aspect 7 calculates game history information (short-term game history information group) based on the number of balls entered into each entrance in a short period of time when 500 game balls are launched. For example, game history information (long-term game history information group) is calculated based on the number of balls entering each entrance in a long period of time when 600,000 game balls (for about 10 days) are launched. It is possible to do. That is, it is possible to calculate the game history information in an arbitrary period.

Further, in this aspect 7, since the date and time information (year / month / day information and time information) is added to the ball entry information and the like, the inspection machine 320 has a range of the date and time information added to the received ball entry information and the like. It is also possible to calculate the game history information by designating the range of the date and time for which the game history information is to be calculated. Therefore, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can perform a detailed inspection based on the game history information in which the range of the date and time is specified.

In this aspect 7, the following configuration may be adopted.

The inspection machine 320 may be configured so that the received ball entry information and the like can be displayed on the display unit 328. With such a configuration, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can also grasp the date and time when the game ball is detected by each ball entry detection sensor.

Further, instead of the configuration in which the game history management chip 300 transmits the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage memory 306 to the inspection machine 320, the main side CPU 62x is stored in the main side ROM 63. The ball number data may be transmitted to the inspection machine 320. According to such a configuration, the memory for storing the prize ball number data 306 can be omitted, and the manufacturing cost of the game history management chip 300 can be reduced.

Further, in the seventh aspect, the CPU 321 of the inspection machine 320 executes the calculation for calculating the game history information, but the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 executes a part or all of the calculation, and the calculation is performed. The game history information as a result of the above may be transmitted to the inspection machine 320.

<Aspect 8>
In the first embodiment and the other aspects described above, the calculation execution condition or the storage execution condition is stored in the main ROM 63, and the game history management chip 300 is configured to acquire these conditions from the main ROM 63. The game history management chip 300 may be configured to store these conditions in a non-volatile memory from the beginning. According to this configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which inappropriate calculation execution conditions or storage execution conditions are stored in the main ROM 63 and the game history information or the number of balls entered cannot be properly stored. can. For example, an extremely short period (for example, the number of passing through the discharge passage N _OUT = 5) is stored as the calculation execution condition or the storage execution condition, and the calculation result storage memory 309 or the ball entry number storage memory 309a has been stored. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which only game history information or ball entry number information for an extremely short period (for example, about one hour) is stored.

<Aspect 9>
In the first embodiment and the other aspects described above, a function of storing the number of game balls entering each entrance, a function of calculating game history information such as a bonus ratio, and the calculated game history information are stored. Although the game history management chip 300 is provided with the function of storing, the main CPU 62x (main MPU 62 excluding the game history management chip 300) may be configured to include some of these functions. Further, the game history management chip 300 may not be provided, and the main CPU 62x (main MPU 62 excluding the game history management chip 300) may have all of these functions. According to such a configuration, it is not necessary to separately provide the game history management chip 300, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. However, according to the configuration in which the game history management chip 300 is provided, the processing load of the main CPU 62x can be reduced.

<Aspect 10>
In the first embodiment and the other aspects described above, the game history management chip 300 has a part or all of the functions provided by the functional units other than the game history management chip 300 (for example, the inspection machine 320 and the main CPU 62x). However, a part or all of the functions included in the game history management chip 300 may be provided in a functional unit other than the game history management chip 300. For example, if the game history management chip 300 is configured to include a part of the functions of the inspection machine 320, the processing load and the manufacturing cost of the inspection machine 320 can be further reduced, and the functions of the game history management chip 300 can be further reduced. If a part of the inspection machine 320 is provided, the processing load and the manufacturing cost of the game history management chip 300 can be further reduced.

<Aspect 11>
In the first embodiment, the game history management chip 300 is configured to calculate the game history information such as the bonus ratio, but the game history management chip 300 is not provided and the main CPU 62x is configured to calculate the game history information. It is also good. Hereinafter, the details of the eleventh aspect will be described focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

FIG. 23 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment of the first embodiment. In this embodiment 11, the game history management chip 300 is not provided, and the main RAM 64 is provided with a ball entry number storage area and a calculation result storage area, as described in the first embodiment (FIG. 5). It's different.

The main CPU 62x updates the number of game balls entering each entry port stored in the number of entry storage areas of the main RAM 64 based on the entry information of the game balls received from the input / output port 62a. do. When the calculation execution condition stored in the calculation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63 is satisfied, the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage area of the main ROM 63 and the main RAM 64 The game history information is calculated by executing a calculation based on the number of game balls entered in each ball entry unit stored in the ball entry number storage area, and the game history information is stored in the calculation result of the main RAM 64. Make it memorize in the area. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an outline of processing in the main MPU 62 according to the eleventh embodiment of the first embodiment. The main CPU 62x determines whether or not the calculation execution condition stored in the calculation execution condition storage area of the main side ROM 63 is satisfied, and if it is determined that the calculation execution condition is satisfied, the main CPU 62x Information on the number of game balls entered into each entry port stored in the cache is stored in the entry number storage area of the main RAM 64. In this aspect 11, the main CPU 62x obtains information regarding the number of game balls entering each entry port every time the value of the number N _OUT of the number of exit passages stored in the cache of the main CPU 62x reaches 500. , It is stored in the number of incoming balls storage area of the main RAM 64. As described above, the information regarding the number of game balls entering each entry slot counted while 500 game balls are launched on the game board 30 is also referred to as a "short-term entry number information group". ..

The ball entry number storage area of the main RAM 64 is an area for sequentially storing information regarding the number of ball entry (short-term ball entry number information group). Information regarding the order in which the short-term entry number information group is written is also stored in the entry number storage area of the main RAM 64, and the main CPU 62x does not have an empty area for writing the short-term entry number information group. In this case, the short-term entry number information group to be newly written is stored in the area where the short-term entry number information group having the oldest written order is stored. That is, the entry number storage area of the main RAM 64 is configured to be overwritten in order from the oldest short-term entry number information group (first-in / first-out method), and is always the latest short-term entry number information. The group is memorized.

In this aspect 11, the ball entry number storage area of the main RAM 64 is information regarding the number of game balls entering each entry slot counted while 500 game balls are launched on the game board 30. It has a capacity capable of storing 1200 short-term ball entry number information groups. For example, if the game balls are fired continuously for 10 hours a day, 60,000 game balls are fired a day, so that 120 short-term ball entry number information groups are fired a day. It will be stored in the ball entry number storage area of the main RAM 64. Therefore, the entry number storage area of the main RAM 64 can store the short-term entry number information group for the last 10 days.

Then, each time the calculation execution condition is satisfied, the main CPU 62x newly calculates one short-term game history information group for one newly stored short-term entry number information group. Further, each time the calculation execution condition is satisfied, the main CPU 62x is a game to each entry port stored in each of a plurality of short-term entry number information groups including a newly stored short-term entry number information group. The number of balls entered is added, and the game history information (long-term game history information group) over a long period of time is calculated using the added number of balls. That is, the main CPU 62x of this aspect 11 is not only a short-term game history information group based on the number of balls entered into each entrance in a short period in which 500 game balls are launched, but also, for example, 600,000 (about). It is possible to calculate a long-term game history information group based on the number of balls entering each entrance for a long period of time when the game ball (for 10 days) is launched. Then, these calculated game history information are stored in the calculation result storage area of the main RAM 64.

The calculation result storage area of the main RAM 64 is composed of an area for sequentially storing the short-term game history information group and an area for storing the long-term game history information group. In the area for sequentially storing the short-term game history information group, information regarding the order in which the short-term game history information group is written is also stored, and the main CPU 62x has no free area for writing the short-term game history information group. Stores the newly calculated short-term game history information group in the area where the short-term game history information group with the oldest written order is stored. That is, the area for sequentially storing the short-term game history information group of the main RAM 64 is configured to be overwritten in order from the oldest short-term game history information group (first-in / first-out method), and is always the latest short-term. The game history information group is stored. The area for storing the long-term game history information group is overwritten with the newly calculated long-term game history information group every time the calculation execution condition is satisfied. That is, in the area for storing the long-term game history information group, the latest long-term game history information group calculated based on a plurality of short-term ball entry number information groups including the latest short-term ball entry number information group is stored. become.

When the inspection machine 320 detects that the connection cable 329 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, the inspection machine 320 transmits a transmission request command to the main CPU 62x. When the main CPU 62x receives the transmission request command from the inspection machine 320, the main CPU 62x transmits the game history information stored in the main RAM 64 to the inspection machine 320. Then, the inspection machine 320 causes the display unit 328 to display the received game history information.

Further, in this aspect 11, when a predetermined operation for displaying the game history information on the symbol display device 41 is executed, the game history information stored in the main RAM 64 is controlled by voice emission control via the input / output port 62x. It is output to the device 90 and displayed on the symbol display device 41.

Further, in this aspect 11, even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, the short-term ball entry number information group and the game history information stored in the main RAM 64 are counted by the backup power supply supplied from the capacitor 87. It is configured to be retained for days.

According to such a configuration, the main CPU 62x, which is a single processing unit, executes a process for advancing the game such as a jackpot lottery process and a process for calculating and storing the game history information. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated game history management chip 300 for calculating and storing history information, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Further, the short-term entry number information group, which is information on the number of entry of the game ball to each entry port counted while 500 game balls are launched on the game board 30, is stored in the main RAM 64. Since it is configured in, the configuration is such that the entry information of the game ball is stored in the same format (for example, the configuration is stored in the format of the entry information stored in the entry information storage memory 309b of FIG. 22). In comparison, it is possible to calculate the latest short-term game history information group and long-term game history information group while significantly reducing the memory capacity required for the main RAM 64.

The main CPU 62x is not limited to the configuration of calculating both the short-term game history information group and the long-term game history information group as the game history information, and may be configured to calculate only one of them.

<Aspect 12>
FIG. 25 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth aspect of the first embodiment. The difference from the above-mentioned aspect 11 (FIG. 23) is that the main MPU 62 is provided with a flash memory 64x, which is a non-volatile memory that is rewritable and can retain memory even when the power supply is cut off. It is a point that is being done. The flash memory 64x stores the number of balls entered for storing the short-term number of balls entered in the above-mentioned aspect 11 and the short-term game history information group and the long-term game history information group in the above-mentioned aspect 11. The calculation result storage area of is provided.

The main CPU 62x of the aspect 12 is configured to store the short-term entry number information group and the calculated game history information in the flash memory 64x each time the calculation execution condition is satisfied.

According to such a configuration, the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced as compared with the configuration including the game history management chip 300. Further, even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off for a long period of time, the short-term entry number information group and the game history information are retained, so that the pachinko machine 10 is in any state (for example, the pachinko machine for a long period of time). Even if the pachinko machine 10 is placed in a distribution state where power is not supplied to the machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 and the game history information can always be linked to each other on a one-to-one basis, and the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 can be managed. , Can be inspected.

Further, since it is not necessary to provide an area for storing the short-term entry number information group and the game history information in the main RAM 64, the storage capacity of the main RAM 64 can be suppressed and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 is reduced. can do.

<Aspect 13>
In the first embodiment and the other aspects described above, the main control device 60 sets the game mode, which is a mode capable of executing the game progress process, which is the process for progressing the game, and the game history information into the inspection machine 320. The configuration may be such that it can be executed by switching between the inspection mode, which is the output mode. The game progress process is a process executed based on the detection of a game ball by the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h, and is a jackpot lottery process, a motor opening lottery process, a prize ball payout process, and a main display unit. The variable display processing of the symbol in 45, the opening / closing process of the opening / closing door 36b, the electric accessory 34a, and the like are included.

Then, in the inspection mode, even when the game ball passes through the region detected by the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h, the game progress process may not be executed.

Specifically, for example, when the mode shifts to the inspection mode, the inspection mode flag for determining whether or not the main control device 60 is in the inspection mode is turned ON. Then, the main control device 60 determines whether or not the inspection mode flag is ON, and if it is determined that the inspection mode flag is ON, the main control device 60 does not proceed to the processing flow for executing the normal game progress process. , Proceed to the processing flow for the inspection mode. As a result, even when the main control device 60 receives a signal indicating that the game ball has been detected from the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h, a process based on the reception of the signal (for example, a jackpot random number). It is configured not to execute the process of acquiring the value of the counter C1, the process of paying out the prize ball, the process of transmitting a command to the voice emission control device 90, and the like).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute in the inspection mode a process that is not preferable to be executed in parallel with the game progress process, a process in which a problem is likely to occur when the process is executed in parallel with the game progress process, and the like. .. Further, according to such a configuration, the game progress process is not executed in the inspection mode. Therefore, when developing a program for the process to be executed in the inspection mode, measures should be taken when the game progress process is executed in parallel. Since it is not necessary to consider it, it is possible to greatly improve the development efficiency of the program of the process executed in the inspection mode.

Further, the game history information is information whose contents change when the game ball is detected and the game progress process is executed. Therefore, if a configuration is adopted in which a process of outputting game history information is executed in parallel with the game progress process, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 is inspecting the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 by the game history information. The game progress process may be executed and the content of the game history information may change at any time, making it difficult to smoothly carry out the inspection. On the other hand, according to the configuration of this aspect 13, since the game history information is output in the inspection mode in which the game progress process is not executed even when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, the game history information is output. It is possible to prevent the content of the game history information from changing while the game is being played. As a result, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can smoothly carry out the inspection.

The mode of outputting the game history information in the inspection mode is not limited to the mode of outputting the game history information to the inspection machine 320 and displaying it, and may be another mode. For example, the game history information may be output to the symbol display device 41 and displayed.

Further, the information output in the inspection mode is not limited to the game history information, and may be other information. For example, it may be other information based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h, such as the entry information of the game ball and the entry number information.

<Aspect 14>
In the configuration in which the main control device 60 can switch between the game mode and the inspection mode among the first embodiment and the other embodiments described above, the game mode is changed to the inspection mode while the game progress process of the game mode is being executed. When a predetermined operation (hereinafter also referred to as "mode switching operation") for shifting to is executed by the inspector, the game is played at the timing when the game progress process being executed is completed up to a predetermined processing stage. It may be configured to shift from the mode to the inspection mode.

Specifically, for example, when the mode switching operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button is executed during the execution of the game progress processing of the game mode, each game progress processing being executed ( Up to a predetermined processing stage for each jackpot lottery process, electric role opening lottery process, prize ball payout process, symbol variation display process on the main display unit 45, opening / closing process of opening / closing door 36b and electric accessory 34a, etc.) Complete the process. Then, when the game progress processing is completed up to a predetermined processing stage, the processing after the processing stage is not executed and the game goes into a standby state. Then, the game mode shifts to the inspection mode at the timing when all of the executed game progress processes are completed up to the predetermined processing stage.

According to such a configuration, the game mode is changed to the inspection mode at the timing immediately after the mode switching operation is executed regardless of whether or not the processing is completed up to the predetermined processing stage of the game progress processing being executed. Compared with the configuration to be migrated, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of processing defects when shifting to the inspection mode.

For example, a configuration in which the game mode is changed to the inspection mode at the timing immediately after the mode switching operation is executed regardless of whether or not the processing is completed up to the predetermined processing stage of the game progress processing being executed. In the case of adoption, if the mode switching operation is executed during the period in which the change display process of the symbol on the main display unit 45 as the game progress process is executed in the game mode, the symbol on the main display unit 45 is executed. Since the inspection mode is entered in the middle of the fluctuation display, it becomes difficult to control the timing of stopping the symbol and the fluctuation time of the symbol. On the other hand, according to the configuration of this aspect 14, for example, when the mode switching operation is executed during the period in which the symbol variation display process is executed in the game mode, the symbol variation display process is performed. The inspection mode will be entered at the timing when the processing is completed up to the processing stage where the symbol is stopped after the end. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of processing problems such as difficulty in controlling the timing of stopping the symbol and the fluctuation time of the symbol.

When the mode is changed (returned) from the inspection mode to the game mode, the game progress processing of the remaining processing stages scheduled to be executed before the transition to the inspection mode may be executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from giving an unpleasant feeling that the expected game progress process ends in an incomplete state.

Further, when the mode switching operation is executed during the execution of the game progress process in the game mode, the game mode is switched to the inspection mode at the timing when all the processes of each of the running game progress processes are completed. May be. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of processing problems when the game progress processing is restarted.

Further, if the mode switching operation is executed during the execution of the game progress process in the game mode, the game execution process is interrupted and the information that enables the interrupted game progress process to be restarted is transmitted to the main RAM 64. It may be configured to memorize and shift from the game mode to the inspection mode at the timing when the memorization is completed. According to such a configuration, the pachinko machine 10 quickly shifts from the game mode to the inspection mode, so that many pachinko machines 10 can be inspected in a short period of time.

Further, the mode switching operation for shifting from the game mode to the inspection mode is not limited to the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button, and may be another mode. For example, it may be a single operation of pressing the mode switching button. Further, when the inspection machine 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, the same processing as when the mode switching operation is executed may be executed.

<Aspect 15>
In the configuration in which the main control device 60 can switch between the game mode and the inspection mode among the first embodiment and the other embodiments described above, 10 minutes from the time when the main control device 60 shifts to the inspection mode during the inspection mode When the automatic return condition that the lapse has passed is satisfied, the predetermined operation for shifting from the inspection mode to the game mode (for example, the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button) is not executed. However, it may be configured to shift from the inspection mode to the game mode.

According to such a configuration, when 10 minutes have passed from the time of shifting to the inspection mode, the inspection mode is performed even if the predetermined operation for shifting from the inspection mode to the game mode is not executed. Since it is configured to shift to the game mode from the above, it is possible to surely suppress that the game mode is not returned without executing a predetermined operation. For example, even if the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 inspects the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 by the game history information output in the inspection mode and then forgets to execute a predetermined operation, the inspection mode is set. Since the game mode is restored 10 minutes after the transition, a situation occurs in which the pachinko machine 10 cannot play a game on the pachinko machine 10 without returning to the game mode in which the game progress process can be executed. Can be suppressed.

The automatic recovery condition is not limited to the condition that 10 minutes have passed from the time when the inspection mode is entered, and may be another aspect. For example, it may be a condition that 5 minutes have passed since the transition to the inspection mode, or 10 minutes may have passed since the inspection machine 320 was removed from the inspection terminal 65.

Further, the predetermined operation for shifting from the inspection mode to the game mode is not limited to the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button, and may be another mode. For example, it may be a single operation of pressing the mode switching button.

<Aspect 16>
In the first embodiment and the other embodiments described above, the main control device 60 is provided with a RAM clear button for initializing the main RAM 64, and the power button is pressed while pressing the RAM clear button (hereinafter referred to as the operation). When the "erasing operation") is executed, the information stored in the main RAM 64 may be erased (initialized).

Further, the main control device 60 may be configured to be able to switch between the game mode and the inspection mode. Then, in the state after shifting to the inspection mode and before shifting to the game mode, for example, in the state during the inspection mode or in the state where the power is turned off as it is after shifting to the inspection mode, while pressing the RAM clear button. Even when the erasing operation of pressing the power button is executed, the information stored in the main RAM 64 may not be erased.

According to such a configuration, in the state after the transition to the inspection mode and before the transition to the game mode, the erasing operation for erasing the information stored in the main RAM 64 is executed. However, since the information stored in the main RAM 64 is not erased, the erasing operation is erroneously executed in an attempt to shift to the game mode in the state after the shift to the inspection mode and before the shift to the game mode. Even if it does, it is possible to prevent the information from being accidentally deleted.

For example, the erasing operation for erasing the information stored in the main RAM 64 is an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the RAM clear button, and the mode is shifted between the game mode and the inspection mode. In the configuration where the operation for this is the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button, the intention is to press the power button while pressing the mode switching button in order to shift from the inspection mode to the game mode, but it is incorrect. There is a risk of pressing the power button while pressing the RAM clear button. However, according to the configuration of this aspect 16, in the state after the transition to the inspection mode and before the transition to the game mode, the erasing operation of erroneously pressing the power button while pressing the RAM clear button is executed. Even if it does, it is possible to prevent the information from being accidentally deleted.

More specifically, for example, when shifting from the game mode to the inspection mode, the game progress process executed in the game mode is temporarily stopped, and the stopped game progress process is returned to the inspection mode. In the case of adopting the configuration to store the information for restarting later in the main RAM 64, I intend to press the power button while pressing the mode switching button in order to return from the inspection mode to the game mode, but I mistakenly press the RAM clear button. If the power button is pressed while pressing, the information for restarting the game progress process will be deleted, and the game progress process cannot be restarted after returning to the inspection mode, and the player There is a risk of giving a disadvantage to. On the other hand, according to the configuration of this aspect 16, in the state after the transition to the inspection mode and before the transition to the game mode, the power button is erroneously pressed while pressing the RAM clear button in an attempt to shift to the game mode. Even if you press, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the main RAM 64 from being accidentally erased, so it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged. Can be done.

The game history information may be stored in the main RAM 64. According to such a configuration, it is not necessary to separately provide a dedicated memory for storing the game history information, so that the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Further, when the erasing operation is executed, the game history stored in the main RAM 64 is stored regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10 (power on / off state, game mode or inspection mode, etc.). The information may not be erased, and only the information other than the game history information stored in the main RAM 64 (information stored for restarting the game progress process, etc.) may be erased (initialized). .. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game history information that deviates from a predetermined predetermined range from being intentionally deleted.

The erasing operation is not limited to the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the RAM clear button, and may be in another mode. For example, it may be a single operation of pressing the RAM clear button.

<Aspect 17>
In the configuration in which the main control device 60 can switch between the game mode and the inspection mode in the first embodiment and the other embodiments described above, when the main control device 60 shifts from the game mode to the inspection mode. , A game stop command, which is a command indicating that the game progress process is temporarily stopped by shifting to the inspection mode, is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90, and the game progress process that was being executed is transmitted in the inspection mode. It may be configured to be temporarily stopped. Specifically, for example, when the inspection mode is entered while the variable display of the symbol on the main display unit 45 is being executed, the display on the main display unit 45 is turned off and the variation time of the symbol on the main display unit 45 is counted. To stop. Further, when the main control device 60 shifts from the inspection mode to the game mode, a game restart command, which is a command indicating that the main control device 60 shifts to the game mode and the game progress process is restarted, is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. It may be configured to be used.

Then, the voice emission control device 90 temporarily stops the effect being executed when the game stop command is received, and then temporarily stops the effect when the game restart command is received. Is configured to restart. According to such a configuration, even when the main control device 60 shifts between the game mode and the inspection mode, the game progress process executed by the main control device 60 (for example, the symbol on the main display unit 45) is executed. (Variation display processing) and the effect controlled by the voice emission control device 90 (for example, the variation display processing of the symbol in the symbol display device 41) can be synchronized, and the player feels a sense of discomfort after shifting to the game mode. It is possible to prevent it from being lost.

The voice emission control device 90 may be configured not to stop the running effect even when the game stop command is received. Specifically, for example, when a game stop command is received during the symbol variation display on the symbol display device 41, the symbol variation display layer is maintained while the symbol variation display control on the symbol display device 41 is continued. A layer of another image (for example, a black image) is displayed on top of the layer. However, since the control of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 is continued, the variable display of the symbol is continued under the layer of the black image. Then, when the fluctuation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 elapses, the variation display of the symbol ends under the layer of the black image, but the symbol does not stop and shakes slightly.

Then, when the game restart command is received from the main control device 60, the layer of the black image displayed above the layer of the variable display of the symbol is removed, and the layer of the symbol is displayed again. At this time, the main control device 60 shifts (returns) from the inspection mode to the game mode, and restarts the stopped game progress processing (display of fluctuations in the symbol on the main display unit 45).

Then, the main control device 60 resumes the fluctuation display of the symbol on the main display unit 45, which has stopped counting the fluctuation time, and when the remaining fluctuation time has elapsed, that is, the fluctuation of the symbol on the main display unit 45 is displayed. When it is time to stop, a symbol stop command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Upon receiving the symbol stop command, the voice emission control device 90 transmits a symbol stop command to the display control device 100, and the display control device 100 displays the symbol displayed in the symbol display device 41 in a slightly shaken manner. Stop completely.

According to such a configuration, while the main control device 60 is in the inspection mode, the display on the main display unit 45 is turned off, and the display on the symbol display device 41 is a black image. Then, when the main control device 60 shifts from the inspection mode to the game mode, the fluctuation display of the symbol on the main display unit 45, which has stopped counting the fluctuation time, is resumed, and the symbol on the symbol display device 41 is variable display. It is a mode or a display mode that is slightly shaken. Then, at the timing when the symbol on the main display unit 45 stops, the symbol on the symbol display device 41 also stops. That is, it is possible to synchronize the variable display of the symbol on the main display unit 45 with the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41. Further, since the control of the running effect is not stopped even when the game stop command is received, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem by temporarily stopping the control of the running effect. As a problem, for example, when the control of the effect is restarted from the state where the control of the effect is temporarily stopped, the timing of the plurality of effects may be shifted when a plurality of effects are executed, or the symbol display device may be used. There may be a discrepancy between the moving image displayed on the 41 and the sound output from the speaker 46.

If the main control device 60 adopts a configuration in which the symbol stop command is not transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 even when it is time to stop the fluctuation of the symbol on the main display unit 45, the symbol is used. The variable display of the symbol on the display device 41 will continue to be in a small shaking mode, and then the variable command transmitted from the main control device 60 or the standby command transmitted when the hold information is not stored. Is received, the symbol in the symbol display device 41 is stopped.

<Aspect 18>
In the first embodiment and the other aspects described above, the game history information stored in the pachinko machine 10 may be displayed on the symbol display device 41 when the predetermined time is reached. Specifically, for example, the game mode may be changed to the inspection mode at 11:10 pm, and the game history information of the pachinko machine 10 may be displayed on the symbol display device 41. According to such a configuration, the game history information of each pachinko machine 10 is displayed on the symbol display device 41 at around 11:10 pm after the game hall is closed, so that the pachinko machine 10 is inspected. The person can quickly inspect and confirm the game history information of many pachinko machines 10 after the game hall is closed, without taking the trouble of shifting each pachinko machine 10 from the game mode to the inspection mode.

Further, the game history information stored in the pachinko machine 10 may be displayed on the symbol display device 41 when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer. According to such a configuration, for example, all the pachinko machines 10 installed in the game hall are simultaneously shifted to the inspection mode, and the game history information of each pachinko machine 10 is displayed on each symbol display device 41. Therefore, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can quickly inspect and confirm the game history information of many pachinko machines 10 without taking the trouble of shifting each pachinko machine 10 from the game mode to the inspection mode. It becomes.

<Aspect 19>
In the first embodiment and the other aspects described above, the game history information may always be displayed on the symbol display device 41. According to such a configuration, the player or the inspector can always check the game history information, so that if an abnormality such as the game history information deviates from a predetermined range occurs, the relevant information is immediately taken. It becomes possible to notice the incident. As a result, the soundness of the game can be ensured immediately.

<Aspect 20>
In the first embodiment and the other aspects described above, a game in which a 7-segment display composed of seven light emitting diodes is provided on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 and is stored in the pachinko machine 10 in the 7-segment display. It may be configured to display information related to history information. For example, when the main control device 60 shifts from the game mode described above to the inspection mode, whether or not the bonus ratio, the payout ratio (in the normal mode), etc. stored in the pachinko machine 10 are within a predetermined range. It may be configured to display on a 7-segment display.

More specifically, for example, when the main control device 60 shifts from the game mode to the inspection mode, "1" indicating that the display regarding the accessory ratio is performed is displayed on the 7-segment display, and then the accessory ratio is displayed. Is within a predetermined range (specifically, when the accessory ratio is 0.700 or less), "O" meaning OK is displayed on the 7-segment display, while the accessory ratio is concerned. If is not within the predetermined range, "E" indicating an error may be displayed on the 7-segment display. When "2" indicating that the display regarding the continuous bonus ratio is to be performed is displayed on the 7-segment display after the display regarding the bonus ratio is displayed, and the continuous bonus ratio is within the predetermined range (specifically). When the continuous bonus ratio is 0.600 or less), "O" meaning OK is displayed on the 7-segment display, while when the continuous bonus ratio is not within the predetermined range. , "E" indicating an error may be displayed on the 7-segment display. After displaying the continuous bonus ratio, "2" indicating that the payout ratio (in normal mode) is to be displayed is displayed on the 7-segment display, and the payout ratio (in normal mode) is within the predetermined range. (Specifically, when the payout ratio (in the normal mode) is in the range of 0.60 to 0.70), "O" meaning OK is displayed on the 7-segment display. On the other hand, if the payout ratio (in the normal mode) is not within the predetermined range, "E" indicating an error may be displayed on the 7-segment display.

With such a configuration, it is possible to easily and quickly inspect game history information such as a bonus ratio. In addition, since the 7-segment display consumes less power, even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is off, the game history information is inspected with only a small amount of power from the capacitor, battery, etc. provided inside the pachinko machine 10. It becomes possible to do.

Further, the 7-segment display may always display information related to the game history information stored in the pachinko machine 10. According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily and quickly inspect the game history information such as the bonus ratio without switching from the game mode to the inspection mode. Further, even in the pachinko machine 10 that does not have the inspection mode, it is possible to easily and quickly inspect the game history information such as the accessory ratio. Further, if the 7-segment display is provided on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10, the 7-segment display is out of the player's field of view, so that the player is concerned about the display of the 7-segment display. It is possible to prevent the player from being unable to concentrate on the game. On the other hand, when the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 inspects the game history information of the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine main body 12 supported by the hinge 15 is rotated toward the front and provided on the back surface of the pachinko machine main body 12. Since it is only necessary to confirm the display of the 7-segment display, it is possible to easily and quickly inspect the game history information such as the bonus ratio. In addition, instead of the 7-segment display, another display capable of displaying the game history information in a recognizable manner, such as a segment display composed of a number of light emitting diodes other than 7, may be adopted.

<Aspect 21>
In the first embodiment and the other aspects described above, the voice emission control device 90 may be configured to calculate game history information. Specifically, for example, the main CPU 62x of the main control device 60 transmits a signal including the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage area of the main ROM 63 to the voice emission control device 90 in the initial setting process. The voice emission control device 90 calculates game history information based on the acquired prize ball number data and the game ball entry information transmitted from the main control device 60, and the calculated game history information. May be configured to be displayed on the symbol display device 41.

According to such a configuration, the voice emission control device 90 cannot access the prize ball number data storage area of the main ROM 63, or the voice emission control device 90 is located in the prize ball number data storage area of the main ROM 63. Even if the configuration is such that the storage position (memory address) of the stored prize ball number data cannot be grasped, the sound emission control device 90 is the prize ball stored in the prize ball number data storage area of the main ROM 63. It is possible to acquire several data and calculate game history information. Further, since the voice emission control device 90 calculates the game history information instead of the main control device 60, the processing load of the main control device 60 can be significantly reduced.

<Aspect 22>
The first embodiment and the other aspects described above can be applied not only to the pachinko machine 10 capable of shifting from the gaming mode to the inspection mode, but also to the gaming machine capable of shifting from the gaming mode to another mode. .. For example, it can be applied to a gaming machine having a gaming status display mode capable of displaying the status of processing related to the game, such as the status of the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag, and the contents of stored hold information. can.

<Aspect 23>
The first embodiment and the other aspects described above can be applied not only to the pachinko machine 10 but also to other types of gaming machines. For example, it can be applied to a rotating body type gaming machine such as a pachinko type slot machine. Specifically, for example, the number of game medals won at the time of the bonus, the number of game medals obtained by the child actor drawn during the normal section, and the advantageous section (AT, ART) different from the bonus. For a configuration in which a ratio to the number of obtained game medals is calculated and the ratio is displayed on a liquid crystal display device, or a configuration in which the ratio is output to an inspection machine and the ratio is displayed on the display unit of the inspection machine. Can be applied.

<Aspect 24>
In the first embodiment and the other aspects described above, a configuration may be configured in which a part or all of the functions realized by software (realized by the CPU executing a program) are realized by hardware. For example, the game history management chip 300 may be configured to include dedicated hardware designed to execute arithmetic processing for calculating game history information. With such a configuration, it is possible to speed up the calculation process for calculating the game history information, and at the same time, the occurrence of fraud such as the calculation program being tampered with and the correct game history information not being calculated is generated. It can be suppressed. The hardware may be composed of a digital circuit or an analog circuit. If it is composed of an analog circuit, the arithmetic processing can be further speeded up as compared with a digital circuit.

<Aspect 25>
A configuration may be adopted in which one or a plurality of configurations included in the first embodiment and the above aspects 1 to 24 are appropriately replaced or combined. Further, the one or more configurations included in the first embodiment and the above aspects 1 to 24 may be combined with the one or more configurations included in the embodiments other than the first embodiment. Further, among the configurations included in the first embodiment and the above embodiments 1 to 24, non-essential configurations can be appropriately omitted as long as the purpose is not deviated.

B. Second embodiment:
B1. Structure of the gaming machine:
FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13. On the back surface of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a voice emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 with respect to the outer frame 11 and a function of locking the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window portion 18 is formed in a substantially central portion of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and illumination parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. Illuminations are composed of light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the effect of the effect by lighting or blinking at the time of the big hit lottery, the big hit winning, the reach occurrence, etc. performed by the pachinko machine 10. Further, a glass unit 19 made of two plate glasses is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 19. The details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper plate 20 and a lower plate 21 for storing game balls. The upper plate 20 is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface, and stores game balls such as rental balls rented from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game balls stored in the upper plate 20 are supplied to the game ball launch mechanism included in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball launch mechanism is driven by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player, and launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20 and is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. The lower plate 21 stores the game balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 20. On the bottom surface of the lower plate 21, a discharge port 22 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 21 is formed. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch between the closed state and the open state of the discharge port 22 by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22, and the game ball is discharged to the outside from the lower plate 21.

A staging operation button 24 as an operation receiving means is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20. The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the effect operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs a game effect reflecting the operation.

Further, on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front, an operation handle 25 for the player to operate is provided. When the player operates (rotates) the operation handle 25, the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there is a touch sensor 25a for permitting the driving of the game ball launch mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the launch of the game ball by the game ball launch mechanism by a pressing operation by the player, and an operation handle 25. A variable resistor 25c that detects the rotation operation amount of the above by the change of the electric resistance is provided. When the player grasps the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes according to the rotation operation amount. Then, the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

Further, on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 in the front view, a game ball launch button 26 for the player to operate is provided. When the game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is launched to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined firing intensity regardless of the amount of rotation of the player's operation handle 25. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball launch button 26, the game ball is launched to the front surface of the game board with the same firing strength as when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 25 is maximum. In the case of the present embodiment, when the game ball is launched by operating the game ball launch button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the front view of the game board and flows down to the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball launch button 26, the player can make a so-called "right-handed". The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the game ball is launched to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. .. That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball launch button 26 to launch the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball launch button 26. Can be realized.

In the present embodiment, the game ball launch button 26 is arranged on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 in the front view, but the game ball launch button 26 is arranged at another position. It may be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball launch button 26 is arranged inside (peripheral portion) of the operation handle 25 in the same manner as the weight button 25b. By doing so, the player can operate the operation handle 25, the weight button 25b, and the game ball launch button 26 only with his right hand.

FIG. 27 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding the game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and discharged to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicular to the game board 30, and various accessories such as a windmill are arranged. These nails 42 and the windmill disperse and organize the falling direction of the game ball flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is provided with a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display unit 45. The main display unit 45 has a special figure unit 37, a normal figure unit 38, and a round display unit 39.

The general winning openings 32 are entry openings into which game balls can enter, and a plurality of general winning openings 32 are provided on the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the general winning opening 32, 10 game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls.

The first starting port 33 is an entry port into which a game ball can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided below the center of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a big hit lottery described later is executed.

The second starting port 34 is an entry port into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls and a big hit lottery described later is executed. Further, the second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a.

The through gate 35 is provided with a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction. The through gate 35 is a through gate that serves as an opportunity to execute a lottery for opening the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control device 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory opening lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the electric service is won, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the electric service open state in which the electric service is opened in a predetermined mode. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flow direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after passing through the second starting port 34. It is possible to enter the ball into the starting port 34. In this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the prize ball is not paid out.

The variable winning device 36 includes a large winning opening 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30 and an opening / closing door 36b for opening and closing the large winning opening 36a. The opening / closing door 36b is normally closed so that the game ball cannot enter the large winning opening 36a. When the game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the main control device 60 executes a jackpot lottery (internal lottery). As a result of the big hit lottery, if the big hit or the small hit is won, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode. The opening / closing execution mode is a mode for executing the opening / closing process of the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36. Specifically, when the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 shifts to the opening / closing execution mode, the closed state in which the game ball cannot enter is changed to the open state in which the game ball can enter, and a predetermined condition is satisfied. After that, it transitions to the closed state again. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the large winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls by the payout device 71.

Further, an out port 43 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 30, and the game ball that has not entered the various entry ports is discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only is the ball discharged from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also from the game area PA after passing through the opening. A mode in which the flow of the gaming area PA is continued without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, the entry of the game ball into the general winning opening 32, the variable winning device 36, the first starting opening 33, and the second starting opening 34 is also referred to as winning.

The special symbol unit 37 includes a first symbol display unit 37a and a second symbol display unit 37b. The first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b are each composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first symbol display unit 37a is a display unit for displaying the first symbol. The first symbol is a symbol that is variablely displayed or stopped and displayed based on a jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33. The first symbol display unit 37a is used as a display mode until the segment display is displayed according to the lottery result when the big hit lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 is performed. , The variable display of the first symbol or the predetermined display is performed. When the lottery is completed, the first symbol display unit 37a causes the segment display to display the stop display of the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, the game times in which the jackpot lottery is executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 will also be referred to as the game times for the first start port.

The second symbol display unit 37b is a display unit for displaying the second symbol. The second symbol is a symbol that is variablely displayed or stopped and displayed based on a jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. The second symbol display unit 37b is used as a display mode until the segment display is displayed according to the lottery result when the big hit lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is performed. , A variable display of the second symbol or a predetermined display is performed. When the lottery is completed, the second symbol display unit 37b causes the segment display to display the stop display of the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, the game times in which the jackpot lottery is executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 34 are also referred to as the game times for the second start opening.

Here, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b to the stop display is set. Also called variable time. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a to the stop display is also referred to as the first variable time, and is displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b. The time from the start of the variable display of the displayed second symbol to the stop display is also referred to as the second variable time.

The special figure unit 37 further includes a first hold display unit 37c and a second hold display unit 37d made of LED lamps at positions adjacent to the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b.

The first hold display unit 37c displays the number of holds of the first start port 33 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be turned on. In the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the first starting port 33 are reserved.

The second hold display unit 37d displays the number of holds of the second start port 34 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be turned on. In the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the second starting port 34 are reserved.

The normal drawing unit 38 is composed of a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electric accessory opening lottery triggered by the passage of the through gate 35 is performed, the normal drawing unit 38 causes the light emitting display to display a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined mode as the display mode of the light emitting display. When the electric accessory opening lottery is completed, the normal drawing unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display unit 39 is composed of a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games generated in the open / close execution mode, or displays corresponding to the number of round games. The round game opens and closes until either the predetermined upper limit duration elapses or the predetermined upper limit number of game balls enters the variable winning device 36. This is a game in which the door 36b is kept open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the open / close execution mode is started, and ends when the open / close execution mode ends.

The special figure unit 37, the normal figure unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being composed of a segment display device or a light emitting display device using an LED lamp, and for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and the like. It may be configured by various display devices capable of showing the lottery in progress and the lottery result, such as a CRT or a dot matrix display.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the symbol display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. The configuration of the display device included in the variable display unit 40 is not limited to the symbol display device 41, and may be configured by various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first symbol display unit 37a makes a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, the symbol display device 41 displays the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol accordingly. I do. Further, when the second symbol display unit 37b makes a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol accordingly. Is displayed. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to displaying the fluctuation of the symbol or a predetermined display triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, and when a big hit is won. It also displays the effect during the open / close execution mode that shifts. Hereinafter, the details of the symbol display device 41 will be described.

FIG. 28 is an explanatory diagram showing a symbol and a display surface 41a that are variablely displayed on the symbol display device 41. FIG. 28A is an explanatory diagram showing a liquid crystal display symbol that is variablely displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. The liquid crystal display symbol is an image displayed on the symbol display device 41, and corresponds to the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b. It is a design. When the game round triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 is executed, the liquid crystal display symbol corresponding to the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a is displayed on the display surface. A liquid crystal display corresponding to the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b when the game is displayed on the 41a and triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34. The symbol is displayed on the display surface 41a.

As shown in FIG. 28 (a), the symbol display device 41 is variablely displayed as a symbol for a liquid crystal display, in which symbols indicating numbers 1 to 8 are displayed. As the symbol to be displayed in a variable manner, a symbol having a pattern such as a character may be adopted for each of the symbols showing the numbers 1 to 8.

FIG. 28B is an explanatory diagram showing a display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. As shown in the figure, the main display area MA is displayed on the display surface 41a. In the main display area MA, three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right are displayed. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the symbols 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 28 (a) are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol row has a periodicity from top to bottom or from bottom. A variable display that scrolls up is performed. As shown in FIG. 28B, after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stopped state on the effective line L. Specifically, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, a variable display in which the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity is started. Then, each scrolling symbol switches from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3. .. When the variation display of the symbol is completed and the display is stopped, if the result of the jackpot lottery by the main control device 60 is the jackpot winning, a predetermined combination of symbols is placed on the effective line L. It is formed. For example, the same combination of symbols is formed on the effective line L. The mode of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiment, and the number of symbol rows, the number of effective lines, the direction of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol row, and the symbol of each symbol row. Various modes such as numbers can be adopted as the mode of variable display of the symbol.

Here, the game times refer to the period from the start of the variable display of the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b to the end of the variable display, the stop display, and the end of the stop display. It is one unit of the process of notifying the player of the lottery result of the big hit lottery about the special information acquired based on the winning of either the first start opening 33 or the second start opening 34. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one big hit lottery for each game. When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the first symbol display unit 37a or the first symbol display unit 37a or the first symbol display unit 37a is obtained for each game. 2 In one of the symbol display units 37b, after the segment display is variablely displayed, the segment display is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays the special information for each game. After the symbol sequence is variablely displayed as the first liquid crystal display symbol or the second liquid crystal display symbol, the symbol sequence is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, the time required for one game is also referred to as a unit game time. The unit game time is composed of a variable time, which is the time from the start of the variable display to the stop display of the predetermined lottery result, and a stop time, which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. There is.

As shown in FIG. 28B, the first reserved display area Ds1 and the second reserved display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the first reserved display area Ds1, a display corresponding to the number of reserved game times based on the winning of the first starting port 33 is displayed. In the second reserved display area Ds2, a display corresponding to the number of reserved game times based on the winning of the second starting port 34 is displayed. The reserved game times are unexecuted game times, and are fluctuations for notifying the lottery result of the jackpot lottery with respect to the special information acquired based on the winning of the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. The game times that the display has not started. The number of reserved game times that can be held based on the winning of the first starting port 33 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, the hold display corresponding to the four hold game times can be displayed in the first hold display area Ds1. In addition, the number of reserved game times that can be held based on the winning of the second starting port 34 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, the second hold display area Ds2 can display the hold display corresponding to the four hold game times.

Further, as shown in FIG. 28 (b), on the display surface 41a, a blinking display and lighting synchronized with the variation display and the stop display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a of the special figure unit 37 are displayed. The first synchronous display unit Sync1 for displaying and the second synchronous display for performing blinking display and lighting display synchronized with the fluctuation display and stop display of the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b of the special figure unit 37. A unit Sync2 is provided. Specifically, when the first symbol display unit 37a is displaying a variable display, the first synchronous display unit Sync1 is blinking, and when the first symbol display unit 37a is displaying a stop, the first symbol display unit 37a is displayed. 1 Synchronous display unit Sync1 displays lighting. Further, when the second symbol display unit 37b is displaying a variable display, the second synchronous display unit Sync2 blinks, and when the second symbol display unit 37b is displaying a stop display, the second synchronous display is displayed. The unit Sync2 displays lighting.

In the present embodiment, the display surface 41a is configured to display the main display area MA, the liquid crystal display area NA, the first synchronous display unit Sync1, and the second synchronous display unit Sync2. A configuration may be adopted in which the surface 41a does not display a part or all of these displays.

B2. Electrical configuration of gaming machines:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to a block diagram.

FIG. 29 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly composed of a main control device 60, and also includes a voice emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 composed of elements having a plurality of functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 that records various control programs and fixed value data, and a RAM 64 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing a program recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. In addition, another element may have a part of the function which MPU 62 has. Further, details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85 are connected to the input side of the main control board 61. The main control board 61 receives a DC stable 24V power supply from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power source into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc. Supply power. Further, on the input side of the main control board 61, various entrances and through gates such as a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36 are provided. Various detection sensors are connected. Based on the signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not the game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each entry port, and the game ball passes through the through gate. It is determined whether or not it has been done. Further, the MPU 62 executes a jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34.

On the output side of the main control board 61, there is a variable winning drive unit 36c that opens and closes the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric accessory driving unit 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34. The opening / closing door driving unit 48b for opening / closing the opening / closing door 48a and the main display unit 45 are connected to each other. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 36c so that the opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed in the opening / closing execution mode. Further, when the electric accessory opening is won as a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory driving unit 44b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. Further, in each game, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b in the main display unit 45, and in the open / close execution mode, the round display on the main display unit 45 is performed. The display control of unit 39 is executed.

Further, the payout control device 70 and the voice emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the main control board 61. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the payout control device 70 based on the ball entry determination result. When the main control device 60 transmits a prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Specifically, when the entry of a game ball into the general winning opening 32 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the first starting port 33. When the entry of the game ball is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of the three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is specified. A prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 to pay out the prize balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

A launch control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70. The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball launch mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met. Further, an operation handle 25 is connected to the launch control device 80. As described above, the operation handle 25 includes a touch sensor 25a, a weight button 25b, and a variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes according to the rotation operation amount. The game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. Further, a game ball launch button 26 is connected to the launch control device 80. When the game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is configured to be fired on the game board provided that the touch sensor 25a is on.

The voice emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main control device 60 transmits various commands, the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to. Details of these various commands will be described later.

In addition, the voice emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 composed of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14 and the drive control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. At the same time, control of the display control device 100 is performed. Further, the effect operation button 24 is connected to the voice emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, the game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls various lamps 47, speakers 46, display control device 100, and the like.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps the variation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 and the type of the combination of the symbols to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90. , Whether or not reach has occurred, the content of the reach effect, and the content of the effect executed while the first liquid crystal display symbol and the second liquid crystal display symbol are variable display. In this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the first liquid crystal display symbol or the second liquid crystal display symbol is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the fluctuation time, the unit game round time, which is the time required for one game round, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for big hit lottery and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 performs a big hit lottery, a display setting of the main display unit 45, a symbol display setting of the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery. When sorting the jackpot types, the jackpot type counter C2 is used. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not to generate reach when the symbol sequence displayed on the symbol display device 41 is displaced and varied.

The random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, the fluctuation type counter CS is used when determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b of the main display unit 45, and the symbol display device 41. Further, the electric accessory opening counter C4 is used for the electric accessory opening lottery for whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time the counter is updated, and the counter value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

Further, the RAM 64 is provided with a hold information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. The hold information storage area 64b is provided with a first hold area Ra and a second hold area Rb. In the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the first starting port 33, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS at the timing of entering the ball are stored in the reserved information storage area. It is stored in the first holding area Ra of 64b in chronological order. Further, when the game ball enters the second starting port 34, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS at the timing of entering the ball are set in the reserved information storage area 64b. 2 It is stored in the holding area Rb in chronological order.

The details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery as described above. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 1199, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. Further, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 1199).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the updated value is set in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry. It is stored, and when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry.

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first hold area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c, collated with the hit / miss table stored in the hit / miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and is matched with the jackpot. It is determined whether or not it becomes. Further, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second hold area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c and collated with the hit / miss table stored in the hit / miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. Whether or not it will be a big hit is determined.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is such that the game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. By doing so, the process moves to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c in the order acquired. Then, the jackpot random number counter C1 moved to the execution area AE is collated with the hit / miss table stored in the hit / miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and it is determined whether or not the hit is a big hit.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 39, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0.

The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, and when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the determination processing execution area 64c. The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in. Further, the MPU 62 determines the display mode of the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b by using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2. .. In making the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

Next, the details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not reach occurs when the result of the jackpot lottery is not a jackpot. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 238, reach a maximum value, and then return to 0.

The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b. It is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the ball. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first hold area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c and then collated with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to reach. Is determined. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second hold area Rb is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c and then collated with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to reach. Is determined. However, when the result of the big hit lottery becomes a big hit and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 determines that the reach is generated regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Reach means that some of the symbols displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41 may have a combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot for some of the symbols. It is a display state in which the symbols are displayed and the remaining symbols are displayed in a variable manner. The combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment means a combination of the same symbols on a predetermined effective line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. 28B, the symbol is first stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbol as Z1 is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3. In the situation where the reach line is formed and the reach line is formed, the symbol is varied and displayed in the symbol row Z2 to reach the reach. Then, when a big hit occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the reach, in the state where the reach line is formed, the variable display of the symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows, and the reach effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen. A combination of symbols on which a reach line is formed is reduced or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform a reach effect. In addition, when the reach effect is performed or before the reach display, it is determined whether or not to display a notice using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character by using the reach random number counter C3 or another counter. You may.

Next, the details of the variable type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 62 to determine the variation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b and the variation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, reach a maximum value, and then return to 0.

The variation type counter CS is updated once every time the normal processing described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal processing. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of the variation display on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b and at the start of the variation of the symbol by the symbol display device 41. When determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b, the fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used.

Next, the details of the electric accessory opening counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 465, reach a maximum value, and then return to 0. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric service holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 stored in the electric accessory holding area 64d moves to the electric accessory execution area 64e, and then the electric accessory release in the electric accessory execution area 64e. A lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a in the open state by using the value of the counter C4. For example, if C4 = 0, 1, the electric accessory 34a is controlled in the open state, and if C4 = 2 to 465, the electric accessory 34a is maintained in the closed state.

It should be noted that at least one of the acquired value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4, and the value of the variable type counter CS is the special information in the present invention. Corresponds to. Further, at least one of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the value of the variable type counter CS stored in the first hold area Ra and the second hold area Rb is held. Also called information.

Next, the pass / fail table will be described. The hit / fail table is table data for collating with the jackpot random number counter C1 when performing a jackpot lottery based on the jackpot random number counter C1. The pachinko machine 10 has a low-probability mode and a high-probability mode set as a lottery mode for the big-hit lottery. At the time of the jackpot lottery in the probability mode, the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to.

FIG. 31 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the pass / fail table. FIG. 31 (a) shows a pass / fail table for the low probability mode (for the low probability mode), and FIG. 31 (b) shows a pass / fail table for the high probability mode.

As shown in FIG. 31A, five values 0 to 4 are set as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a jackpot in the hit / fail table for the low probability mode. Then, among the values of 0 to 1199, the values (5 to 1199) other than the five values of 0 to 4 are out of the range. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 31B, 16 values from 0 to 15 are set as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is the jackpot in the hit / fail table for the high probability mode. Then, among the values of 0 to 1199, the values other than the 16 values of 0 to 15 are out of order. As described above, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery than the low probability mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the hit / fail table for the low probability mode is the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the hit / miss table for the high probability mode. Included in the group. However, as a result of the jackpot lottery, if the probability of winning a jackpot is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the number and value of random numbers set as jackpots are arbitrary.

Although it is not adopted in the winning / failing table in this embodiment, a "small hit" may be provided as a result of the big hit lottery.

The "small hit" is a result of success or failure that does not trigger the transition to the open / close execution mode in which the variable winning device 36 is opened / closed, but does not trigger the transition in both the lottery mode and the support mode. On the other hand, "off" is a result of success or failure that does not trigger the transition of the open / close execution mode, and also does not trigger the transition of the lottery mode and the support mode.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set for the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three modes or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Number of times (number of rounds) of opening / closing the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode
(2) Mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode (3) Lottery mode (low probability mode or high probability mode) of the jackpot lottery after the opening / closing execution mode ends.

As an aspect of the opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above (2) opening / closing execution mode, the generation of a game ball into the variable winning device 36 (winning) from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode. A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequency is relatively high or low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, one opening of the opening / closing door 36b in the opening / closing execution mode is set to continue until 30 seconds have elapsed or until the number of game balls entered into the opening / closing door 36b reaches 10. can do. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, it is set to continue until 1.6 seconds have passed or until the number of balls entered into the opening / closing door 36b reaches 10 in the opening / closing execution mode. Can be done.

The opening limit time for one opening of the opening / closing door 36b and the opening limit number for one opening are the frequency of occurrence of balls entering the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode. If the high-frequency winning mode is higher than the low-frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the opening / closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, the high-frequency winning mode may have a longer opening limit time for one opening or a larger number of opening limits for one opening than the low-frequency winning mode. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode may be configured so that the variable winning device 36 does not substantially win a prize.

In this embodiment, a plurality of types of winning modes are not provided as the opening / closing execution mode, and the high-frequency winning mode described above is used during the opening / closing execution mode. That is, one opening of the opening / closing door 36b in the opening / closing execution mode is set to continue until 30 seconds have elapsed or until the number of game balls entering the opening / closing door 36b is 10.

In the present embodiment, when a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit lottery, the big hit type counter C2 is used to sort the big hit types. The distribution of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. FIG. 32 (a) shows a distribution table for the first starting port, and FIG. 32 (b) shows a distribution table for the second starting port. The distribution table for the first starting port is referred to at the time of the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, and the distribution table for the second starting port is to the second starting port 34. It is referred to in the big hit lottery based on the entry of the game ball.

As shown in the distribution table for the first starting port in FIG. 32 (a), in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot types based on the first starting port 33 are 16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, and 16R normal. A jackpot, 8R normal jackpot is set.

In the 16R probability variation jackpot and the 8R probability variation jackpot, the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, and the winning / failing lottery mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is the high probability mode. It is a big hit that the support mode after the end of is the high frequency support mode.

In the 16R normal jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot, the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, and the winning / failing lottery mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is the low probability mode. It is a big hit that the support mode after the end of is the high frequency support mode.

In the distribution table for the first starting port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 13" corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and "14 to 27" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot. "28-33" corresponds to the 16R normal jackpot, and "34-39" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as the types of jackpots. Therefore, the mode of the jackpot is diversified. When comparing these four types of jackpots, the advantage for the player is that the 16R probability variation jackpot is the highest, the 8R probability variation jackpot is the next highest, then the 16R normal jackpot, and finally the 8R normal jackpot. By setting a plurality of types of jackpots having different advantages for the player in this way, it is possible to suppress the monotonicization of the game and increase the degree of attention to the game.

As shown in the distribution table for the second starting port in FIG. 32 (b), in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, 16R probability variation jackpot and 8R normal jackpot are set as the jackpot types based on the second starting port 34. ing. In the distribution table for the second starting port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 27" corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and "28 to 39" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot. It corresponds to.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the distribution mode of the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot is the case where the jackpot is obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, and the case where the jackpot is obtained. 2 It is different from the case where a big hit is made based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port 34, and there is a clear difference in the advantage for the player.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and also uses the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE to perform the jackpot type. Further, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to cause the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b to stop and display the segment display. Determine the display mode. In making the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the end of the above-mentioned (3) opening / closing execution mode, the launch of the game ball to the game area PA continues in the same manner. The high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode are used so that the frequency with which the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is opened per unit time is relatively high or low when compared in the above-mentioned situations. Can be set.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the probability of winning the electric role opening in the electric accessory opening lottery using the electric accessory opening counter C4 differs between the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode. .. In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role opening in the electric accessory opening lottery is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the one-time opening time of the electric accessory 34a is set longer than that in the low-frequency support mode when the electric combination opening is won.

Although it is not adopted in this embodiment, in the case where the electric accessory opening is won in the high frequency support mode and the electric accessory 34a is opened multiple times, the next after one open state is completed. The closing time until the opening state is started may be set shorter than the one opening time. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the time secured from one electric accessory opening lottery to the next electric accessory opening lottery is set to be relatively shorter than in the low frequency support mode. You may.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability that the game ball enters the second starting port 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. That is, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary gaming state that assists in the establishment of the special information acquisition condition.

FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a winning / failing table (winning / failing table for electric accessory opening lottery) used when executing the electric accessory opening lottery.

FIG. 33A shows a winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the low frequency support mode) used in the low frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 33 (a), in the winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the low frequency support mode), two electric accessory opening counters C4, which are the electric accessory opening winning counters, are 0 and 1. The value is set. 464 values of 2 to 465 are set as the values of the electric accessory opening counter C4 that is out of alignment. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the electric accessory opening lottery is executed in the low frequency support mode, the electric accessory opening lottery is won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric accessory opening is won in the low frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

FIG. 33B shows a winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the high frequency support mode) used in the high frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 33 (b), in the winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the high frequency support mode), 462 electric accessory opening counters C4, which are the electric accessory opening winning, are set as values of 0 to 461. The value is set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as the values of the electric accessory opening counter C4 that is out of alignment. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the electric accessory opening lottery is executed in the high frequency support mode, the electric accessory opening lottery is won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric accessory opening is won in the high frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery is set so that the high-frequency support mode has a higher probability of the game ball entering the second starting port 34 than the low-frequency support mode. ..

B3. Outline of processing by the gaming machine:
Next, an outline of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 34 is a timing chart illustrating an outline of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. When the pachinko machine 10 wins the jackpot in the jackpot lottery, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode. In the present embodiment, the opening / closing execution mode includes an opening period, which is a period until the opening / closing process of the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 starts, and an opening / closing processing period, which is a period for executing the opening / closing process of the opening / closing door 36b. It is composed of an ending period, which is a period after the opening / closing process of the opening / closing door 36b is completed. In the present embodiment, the first opening of the opening / closing door 36b is started immediately after the start of the opening / closing processing period.

First, the process when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery in the low frequency support mode will be described with reference to FIG. 34 (A).

As shown in FIG. 34 (A), when the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery in the low frequency support mode, the opening period The opening period is started by setting the length to 10 seconds, and an opening command indicating that the opening period has started is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90.

When the voice emission control device 90 receives the opening command from the main control device 60, the voice emission control device 90 executes an opening effect for 7 seconds and a right-handed notification effect for 3 seconds regardless of the state of the support mode (game state) of the main control device 60. Set to do. That is, the voice emission control device 90 is set to continuously execute two processes (two effects in this embodiment) for one command. The opening effect is an effect that suggests to the player that the opening / closing process of the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is started by shifting to the opening / closing execution mode. The right-handed notification effect is an effect that suggests that the player is recommended to "right-handed". A player who recognizes the right-handed notification effect can understand that it is better to change from "left-handed" to "right-handed".

Here, "right-handed" means that the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 at a speed (launch intensity, momentum) of a predetermined value or more by setting the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 25 to a predetermined value or more. This is a method of distributing the made game ball to the area on the right side of the game area PA. On the other hand, "left-handed" means that the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 at a speed (launch intensity, momentum) of less than a predetermined value by setting the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 25 to less than a predetermined value. This is a method of distributing the game ball to the area on the left side of the game area PA.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variable winning device 36 is provided in the area on the right side of the game area PA. Since the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 opens / closes during the opening / closing execution mode, it is possible to insert the game ball into the large winning opening 36a provided inside the variable winning device 36. Therefore, in the opening / closing execution mode in which the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 opens / closes, "right-handed" is recommended, which is a method of distributing the game ball to the area on the right side of the game area PA. Therefore, the right-handed notification effect is executed after the opening effect.

The voice emission control device 90 is set to execute the opening effect and the right-handed notification effect, and then the display control device 100 is set to execute the opening effect and the right-handed notification effect. To send. After that, the voice emission control device 90 starts the control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the voice emission control device 90 starts voice output control so that the voice corresponding to the opening effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the opening effect. As described above, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started.

When the display control device 100 receives the opening effect command from the voice emission control device 90, the display control device 100 performs a 7-second opening effect and a 3-second right-handed notification effect regardless of the state of the support mode (game state) of the main control device 60. Set to run. That is, the display control device 100 is set to continuously execute two processes (two effects in this embodiment) for one command. After that, the display control device 100 starts the control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display the moving image corresponding to the opening effect on the symbol display device 41. In this way, the opening effect is executed by the cooperation of the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Similarly, other effects such as the right-handed notification effect and the round effect described below are also executed by the cooperation of the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100.

When the control corresponding to the opening effect for 7 seconds is completed, the voice emission control device 90 starts the control corresponding to the right-handed notification effect set to be executed next to the opening effect. Specifically, the voice emission control device 90 starts voice output control so that the voice corresponding to the right-handed notification effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps have a light emission pattern corresponding to the right-handed notification effect. The light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started so that the 47 emits light. Similarly, when the control corresponding to the opening effect for 7 seconds is completed, the display control device 100 starts the control corresponding to the right-handed notification effect set to be executed next to the opening effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display a moving image corresponding to the right-handed notification effect on the symbol display device 41.

When the opening period set to 10 seconds ends, the main control device 60 starts the opening / closing processing period, and also transmits an opening start command indicating that the opening / closing processing period has started to the voice emission control device 90. ..

The voice emission control device 90 is set to execute the round effect when the release start command is received from the main control device 60 after the control corresponding to the right-handed notification effect for 3 seconds is completed. The round effect is an effect that suggests to the player that the opening / closing process of the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is being executed.

After setting the voice emission control device 90 to execute the round effect, the voice emission control device 90 transmits a round effect command for setting the display control device 100 to execute the round effect. After that, the voice emission control device 90 starts the control corresponding to the round effect. Specifically, the voice emission control device 90 starts the sound output control so that the sound corresponding to the round effect is output from the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 emit light in the light emission pattern corresponding to the round effect. As described above, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started.

The display control device 100 is set to execute the round effect when it receives a round effect command from the voice emission control device 90 after finishing the control corresponding to the right-handed notification effect for 3 seconds, and also supports the round effect. Start the control. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display a moving image corresponding to the round effect on the symbol display device 41.

When the number of times the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened reaches a predetermined number of times and the opening / closing processing period ends, the main control device 60 starts the ending period and starts the ending period for the voice emission control device 90. Send an ending command indicating that you have done so.

When the voice emission control device 90 receives the ending command from the main control device 60, the voice emission control device 90 is set to end the control corresponding to the round effect and execute the ending effect. The ending effect is an effect that suggests to the player that the opening / closing process of the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 has been completed.

After setting the voice emission control device 90 to execute the ending effect, the voice emission control device 90 transmits an ending effect command for setting the display control device 100 to execute the ending effect. After that, the voice emission control device 90 starts the control corresponding to the ending effect. Specifically, the voice emission control device 90 starts the voice output control so that the voice corresponding to the ending effect is output from the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending effect. As described above, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started.

When the display control device 100 receives the ending effect command from the voice emission control device 90, the display control device 100 ends the control corresponding to the round effect, sets to execute the ending effect, and starts the control corresponding to the ending effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display the moving image corresponding to the ending effect on the symbol display device 41.

In this embodiment, when the open / close execution mode ends, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the present embodiment, a through gate 35, an electric accessory 34a, and a second starting port 34 are provided in the area on the right side of the game area PA. When the game ball passes through the through gate 35 during the high frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened with a high probability of winning the electric role opening lottery, so that the game ball is inserted into the second starting port 34. Will be easy. Therefore, in the present embodiment, "right-handed" is a method of distributing the game ball to the area on the right side of the game area PA even in the high-frequency support mode in which the electric accessory 34a is in the open state with high probability. Recommended. In the present embodiment, since the right-handed notification effect is executed in the open / close execution mode, many players recognize the right-handed notification effect and execute "right-handed". Then, the player who has executed "right-handed" in the open / close execution mode will continue "right-handed" as it is in the high-frequency support mode even after the open / close execution mode ends.

Next, the process when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery in the high frequency support mode will be described with reference to FIG. 34 (B). The main difference from the processing when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery in the low frequency support mode described above is that the main controller 60 sets the length of the opening period to 6.95 seconds and sends a release start command. In the case of (A) of FIG. 34, the point to be executed 6.95 seconds after the transmission of the opening command and the voice emission control device 90 receiving the opening command are set to execute the opening effect and the right-handed notification effect (A). Even though the same processing as (when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery in the low frequency support mode) is executed, the open start command is received during the execution of the opening effect and before the execution of the right-handed notification effect is started. By doing so, the round effect is executed without executing the right-handed notification effect. Hereinafter, specific processing will be described.

As shown in FIG. 34 (B), when the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery in the high frequency support mode, the opening period The opening period is started by setting the length to 7 seconds, and an opening command indicating that the opening period has started is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90.

When the voice emission control device 90 receives the opening command from the main control device 60, the voice emission control device 90 executes an opening effect for 7 seconds and a right-handed notification effect for 3 seconds regardless of the state of the support mode (game state) of the main control device 60. Set to do. That is, the voice emission control device 90 is set to continuously execute two processes (two effects in this embodiment) for one command. The voice emission control device 90 is set to execute the opening effect and the right-handed notification effect, and then the display control device 100 is set to execute the opening effect and the right-handed notification effect. To send. After that, the voice emission control device 90 starts the control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the voice emission control device 90 starts voice output control so that the voice corresponding to the opening effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the opening effect. As described above, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started.

When the display control device 100 receives the opening effect command from the voice emission control device 90, the display control device 100 performs a 7-second opening effect and a 3-second right-handed notification effect regardless of the state of the support mode (game state) of the main control device 60. Set to run. That is, the display control device 100 is set to continuously execute two processes (two effects in this embodiment) for one command. After that, the display control device 100 starts the control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display the moving image corresponding to the opening effect on the symbol display device 41.

As described above, when the control corresponding to the opening effect for 7 seconds is completed, the voice emission control device 90 starts the control corresponding to the right-handed notification effect set to be executed next to the opening effect. It is configured in. Similarly, the display control device 100 is configured to start the control corresponding to the right-handed notification effect set to be executed next to the opening effect when the control corresponding to the opening effect for 7 seconds is completed. ing. However, in the case of shifting to the open / close execution mode triggered by winning the big hit in the big hit lottery in the high frequency support mode, the main control device 60 opens / closes when the opening period set to 6.95 seconds ends. Along with starting the processing period, an opening start command indicating that the opening / closing processing period has started is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. As a result, the voice emission control device 90 receives the opening start command from the main control device 60 before starting the control corresponding to the right-handed notification effect while the control corresponding to the opening effect is being executed. Upon receiving the opening start command, the voice emission control device 90 ends the control corresponding to the opening effect being executed, and sets the round effect to be executed. That is, even though the right-handed notification effect is set to be executed, the start of control of the right-handed notification effect by the voice emission control device 90 is canceled.

After setting the voice emission control device 90 to execute the round effect, the voice emission control device 90 transmits a round effect command for setting the display control device 100 to execute the round effect. After that, the voice emission control device 90 starts the control corresponding to the round effect. Specifically, the voice emission control device 90 starts the sound output control so that the sound corresponding to the round effect is output from the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 emit light in the light emission pattern corresponding to the round effect. As described above, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started.

The display control device 100 receives a round effect command from the voice emission control device 90 before starting the control corresponding to the right-handed notification effect while the control corresponding to the opening effect is being executed. The display control device 100 that has received the round effect command ends the control corresponding to the opening effect being executed, and sets the display control device 100 to execute the round effect. After that, the display control device 100 starts the control corresponding to the round effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display a moving image corresponding to the round effect on the symbol display device 41. That is, even though the right-handed notification effect is set to be executed, the start of control of the right-handed notification effect by the display control device 100 is canceled.

When the number of times the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened reaches a predetermined number of times and the opening / closing processing period ends, the main control device 60 starts the ending period and starts the ending period for the voice emission control device 90. Send an ending command indicating that you have done so.

When the voice emission control device 90 receives the ending command from the main control device 60, the voice emission control device 90 is set to end the control corresponding to the round effect and execute the ending effect. After setting the voice emission control device 90 to execute the ending effect, the voice emission control device 90 transmits an ending effect command for setting the display control device 100 to execute the ending effect. After that, the voice emission control device 90 starts the control corresponding to the ending effect. Specifically, the voice emission control device 90 starts the voice output control so that the voice corresponding to the ending effect is output from the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending effect. As described above, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started.

When the display control device 100 receives the ending effect command from the voice emission control device 90, the display control device 100 ends the control corresponding to the round effect, sets to execute the ending effect, and starts the control corresponding to the ending effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display the moving image corresponding to the ending effect on the symbol display device 41.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the player wins the jackpot in the jackpot lottery in the low frequency support mode in which the player is executing "left-handed", the opening effect and the right-handed notification effect are executed. It is possible to suggest to the player that the player has moved to the execution mode and recommend "right-handed", and also to be a big hit in the big hit lottery during the high frequency support mode in which the player has already executed "right-handed". If the player wins, the right-handed notification effect is not executed, so that a sense of speed can be given to the game and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the state where the opening / closing execution mode is not performed and the high frequency support mode is not performed, the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is not opened, and the electric accessory 34a is hardly opened. "Left-handed" is recommended, which allows the ball to enter the starting port 33. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is recommended to change from "right-handed" to "left-handed" when the open / close execution mode ends and then the high-frequency support mode ends and the low-frequency support mode shifts to. Executes a left-handed notification effect.

Next, an outline of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the comparative example will be described.

FIG. 35 is a timing chart illustrating an outline of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the comparative example. The main difference from the process executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the above-described embodiment is that the voice emission control device 90 is set to execute only the opening effect when the opening command is received, and the voice emission control device 90. The main control device 60 transmits a right-handed notification command to the voice emission control device 90 when the right-handed notification effect is to be executed. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

First, the process when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery in the low frequency support mode will be described with reference to FIG. 35 (A).

As shown in FIG. 35 (A), when the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the comparative example shifts to the open / close execution mode when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery in the low frequency support mode. , The length of the opening period is set to 10 seconds to start the opening period, and an opening command indicating that the opening period has started is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90.

When the voice emission control device 90 receives the opening command from the main control device 60, the voice emission control device 90 is set to execute the opening effect for 7 seconds. After setting the voice emission control device 90 to execute the opening effect, the voice emission control device 90 transmits an opening effect command for setting the display control device 100 to execute the opening effect. After that, the voice emission control device 90 starts the control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the voice emission control device 90 starts voice output control so that the voice corresponding to the opening effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the opening effect. As described above, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started.

Upon receiving the opening effect command from the voice emission control device 90, the display control device 100 is set to execute the opening effect for 7 seconds, and starts the control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display the moving image corresponding to the opening effect on the symbol display device 41.

When the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery in the low frequency support mode, the main control device 60 notifies the voice emission control device 90 of right-handed strike at the timing when 7 seconds have elapsed from the start of the opening period. A right-handed notification command indicating that it is time to execute the effect is transmitted. As will be described later, when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery in the high frequency support mode, the main control device 60 does not transmit the right-handed notification command.

The voice emission control device 90 is set to execute the right-handed notification effect for 3 seconds when the right-handed notification command is received from the main control device 60 after the control corresponding to the opening effect for 7 seconds is completed. After setting the voice emission control device 90 to execute the right-handed notification effect, the voice emission control device 90 transmits a right-handed notification effect command for setting the display control device 100 to execute the right-handed notification effect. After that, the voice emission control device 90 starts the control corresponding to the right-handed notification effect. Specifically, the voice emission control device 90 starts voice output control so that the voice corresponding to the right-handed notification effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps have a light emission pattern corresponding to the right-handed notification effect. The light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started so that the 47 emits light.

The display control device 100 is set to execute the right-handed notification effect for 3 seconds when it receives the right-handed notification effect command from the voice emission control device 90 after finishing the control corresponding to the opening effect for 7 seconds. , Starts the control corresponding to the right-handed notification effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display a moving image corresponding to the right-handed notification effect on the symbol display device 41.

When the opening period set to 10 seconds ends, the main control device 60 starts the opening / closing processing period, and also transmits an opening start command indicating that the opening / closing processing period has started to the voice emission control device 90. ..

The voice emission control device 90 is set to execute the round effect when the release start command is received from the main control device 60 after the control corresponding to the right-handed notification effect for 3 seconds is completed. After setting the voice emission control device 90 to execute the round effect, the voice emission control device 90 transmits a round effect command for setting the display control device 100 to execute the round effect. After that, the voice emission control device 90 starts the control corresponding to the round effect. Specifically, the voice emission control device 90 starts the sound output control so that the sound corresponding to the round effect is output from the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 emit light in the light emission pattern corresponding to the round effect. As described above, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started.

The display control device 100 is set to execute the round effect when it receives a round effect command from the voice emission control device 90 after finishing the control corresponding to the right-handed notification effect for 3 seconds, and also supports the round effect. Start the control. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display a moving image corresponding to the round effect on the symbol display device 41.

When the number of times the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened reaches a predetermined number of times and the opening / closing processing period ends, the main control device 60 starts the ending period and starts the ending period for the voice emission control device 90. Send an ending command indicating that you have done so.

When the voice emission control device 90 receives the ending command from the main control device 60, the voice emission control device 90 is set to end the control corresponding to the round effect and execute the ending effect. After setting the voice emission control device 90 to execute the ending effect, the voice emission control device 90 transmits an ending effect command for setting the display control device 100 to execute the ending effect. After that, the voice emission control device 90 starts the control corresponding to the ending effect. Specifically, the voice emission control device 90 starts the voice output control so that the voice corresponding to the ending effect is output from the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending effect. As described above, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started.

When the display control device 100 receives the ending effect command from the voice emission control device 90, the display control device 100 ends the control corresponding to the round effect, sets to execute the ending effect, and starts the control corresponding to the ending effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display the moving image corresponding to the ending effect on the symbol display device 41.

Next, the process when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery in the high frequency support mode will be described with reference to FIG. 35 (B). The main difference from the processing when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery in the low frequency support mode described above is that the main controller 60 sets the length of the opening period to 7 seconds, and the main controller 60 is on the right. The point that the beating notification command is not transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 and the point that the opening start command is transmitted 7 seconds after the transmission of the opening command. Hereinafter, specific processing will be described.

As shown in FIG. 35 (B), when the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the comparative example shifts to the open / close execution mode when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery in the high frequency support mode. , The length of the opening period is set to 7 seconds to start the opening period, and an opening command indicating that the opening period has started is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90.

When the voice emission control device 90 receives the opening command from the main control device 60, the voice emission control device 90 is set to execute the opening effect for 7 seconds. After setting the voice emission control device 90 to execute the opening effect, the voice emission control device 90 transmits an opening effect command for setting the display control device 100 to execute the opening effect. After that, the voice emission control device 90 starts the control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the voice emission control device 90 starts voice output control so that the voice corresponding to the opening effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the opening effect. As described above, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started.

Upon receiving the opening effect command from the voice emission control device 90, the display control device 100 is set to execute the opening effect for 7 seconds, and starts the control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display the moving image corresponding to the opening effect on the symbol display device 41.

When the opening period set to 10 seconds ends, the main control device 60 starts the opening / closing processing period, and also transmits an opening start command indicating that the opening / closing processing period has started to the voice emission control device 90. .. Since the main control device 60 is the case where the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery in the high frequency support mode, unlike the case shown in FIG. 35 (A) described above, the voice emission control device 90 is compared with the voice emission control device 90. Do not send the right-handed notification command. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 35 (B), the right-handed notification effect is not executed.

The voice emission control device 90 is set to execute the round effect when the release start command is received from the main control device 60 after the control corresponding to the opening effect for 7 seconds is completed. After setting the voice emission control device 90 to execute the round effect, the voice emission control device 90 transmits a round effect command for setting the display control device 100 to execute the round effect. After that, the voice emission control device 90 starts the control corresponding to the round effect. Specifically, the voice emission control device 90 starts the sound output control so that the sound corresponding to the round effect is output from the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 emit light in the light emission pattern corresponding to the round effect. As described above, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started.

The display control device 100 is set to execute the round effect when it receives the round effect command from the voice emission control device 90 after finishing the control corresponding to the opening effect for 7 seconds, and the control corresponding to the round effect. To start. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display a moving image corresponding to the round effect on the symbol display device 41.

When the number of times the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened reaches a predetermined number of times and the opening / closing processing period ends, the main control device 60 starts the ending period and starts the ending period for the voice emission control device 90. Send an ending command indicating that you have done so.

When the voice emission control device 90 receives the ending command from the main control device 60, the voice emission control device 90 is set to end the control corresponding to the round effect and execute the ending effect. After setting the voice emission control device 90 to execute the ending effect, the voice emission control device 90 transmits an ending effect command for setting the display control device 100 to execute the ending effect. After that, the voice emission control device 90 starts the control corresponding to the ending effect. Specifically, the voice emission control device 90 starts the voice output control so that the voice corresponding to the ending effect is output from the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending effect. As described above, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started.

When the display control device 100 receives the ending effect command from the voice emission control device 90, the display control device 100 ends the control corresponding to the round effect, sets to execute the ending effect, and starts the control corresponding to the ending effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display the moving image corresponding to the ending effect on the symbol display device 41.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this comparative example, as shown in FIG. 35 (B), when two effects of the opening effect and the round effect are executed, the main control device 60 is the opening. Two commands, a command and a release start command, may be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90, but on the other hand, as shown in FIG. 35 (A), an opening effect, a right-handed notification effect, and a round effect are performed. When executing the three effects, the main control device 60 needs to transmit three commands, an opening command, a right-handed notification command, and an opening start command, to the voice emission control device 90. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the comparative example, when executing the right-handed notification effect, the main control device 60 needs to transmit the right-handed notification command.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 34 (A), there is a case where three effects of an opening effect, a right-handed notification effect, and a round effect are executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 34 (B), even when the two effects of the opening effect and the round effect are executed without executing the right-handed notification effect, the main control device 60 is used for the opening. Two commands, a command and a release start command, may be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the main control device 60 does not have to transmit the right-handed notification command regardless of whether the right-handed notification effect is executed or not. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the frequency of transmission of commands of the main control device 60 can be reduced, and the processing load of the main control device 60 can be reduced. Further, according to the present embodiment, since the right-handed notification command shown in the comparative example of FIG. 35 becomes unnecessary, the data capacity required for storing the right-handed notification command is reduced from the data ROM of the main ROM 63. can do. Further, there is no need for a process of determining the state of the support mode (game state) when the main control device 60 wins the jackpot in the jackpot lottery, and determining whether or not to transmit the right-handed notification command based on the determination result. Therefore, the processing time of the main control device 60 can be shortened, and the program for the processing becomes unnecessary. Therefore, in order to store the program for realizing the processing from the program ROM of the main ROM 63. The required capacity can be reduced.

B4. Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific control executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. The process executed by the main control device 60 will be described first, and then the process executed by the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

In order to advance the game of each game, the main MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. The main MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing activated by inputting a power failure signal in addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, but description of these processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is periodically (for example, 2 msec cycle) started by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60.

In step S20101, the reading process of various detection sensors 67a to 67e is executed. That is, the states of the various detection sensors 67a to 67e connected to the main control device 60 are read, the states of the sensors are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. Then, the process proceeds to step S20102.

In step S20102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step S20103.

In step S20103, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory opening counter C4, and when each of these counter values reaches the maximum value, each of them is added. Clear to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step S20104.

In step S20104, the ball entry process for the start port accompanying the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 and the second start port 34 is executed. The details of the ball entry process for the starting port in step S20104 will be described later. After executing step S20104, the process proceeds to step S20105.

In step S20105, the ball entry process for the through gate accompanying the entry of the game ball into the through gate 35 is executed. The details of the ball entry process for the through gate in step S20105 will be described later. After executing step S20105, this timer interrupt process ends.

<Incoming ball entry process for the starting port>
Next, the ball entry process for the starting port will be described. The ball entry process for the start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt process (FIG. 36: S20104).

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a ball entry process for the starting port. In step S20201, whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting opening 33 (starting entry) is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting opening 33. If it is determined in step S20201 that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (S20201: YES), the process proceeds to step S20202, and a prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Set the command. Then, the process proceeds to step S2203.

In step S20203, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33. Then, the process proceeds to step S20204.

In step S20204, the start hold number RaN (hereinafter, also referred to as the first start hold number RaN), which is a value stored in the hold number storage area of the first hold area Ra, is read, and the first start hold number RaN will be described later. Set as the processing target. The first start hold number RaN indicates the hold number based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 33. Then, the process proceeds to step S2020.

If it is determined in step S20201 that the game ball has not entered the first starting port 33 (S20201: NO), the process proceeds to step S20205 and whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 34. Is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34.

If it is determined in step S20205 that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (S20205: YES), the process proceeds to step S20206, and the payout control device 70 is made to pay out four game balls. Set the command. Then, the process proceeds to step S20207. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20205 that the game ball has not entered the second starting port 34 (S20205: NO), the ball entering process for the main starting port is terminated.

In step S20207, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34. Then, the process proceeds to step S20208.

In step S20208, the start hold number RbN (hereinafter, also referred to as the second start hold number RbN), which is a value stored in the hold number storage area of the second hold area Rb, is read, and the second start hold number RbN will be described later. Set as the processing target. The second start hold number RbN indicates the hold number based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 34. Then, the process proceeds to step S2020.

In step S20209, it is determined whether or not the start hold number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S20204 or step S20208 described above is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). In step S2020, when the start hold number N is not less than the upper limit value (S20209: NO), that is, when the start hold number N is not more than the upper limit value, the ball entry process for the main start port is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S2020, if the start hold number N is less than the upper limit value (S20209: YES), the process proceeds to step S20210, 1 is added to the start hold number N of the corresponding hold area, and then the process proceeds to step S20211. , 1 is added to the value stored in the total reserved quantity storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total reserved quantity CRN). The total hold quantity CRN indicates the total value of the first start hold quantity RaN and the second start hold quantity RbN. Then, the process proceeds to step S20212.

In step S20212, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S20103 (FIG. 36) are stored in the first storage area of the corresponding reserved area, that is, step. In S20210, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved number obtained by adding 1. Specifically, when the first start pending number RaN is set as the processing target, each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S20103 (FIG. 36). The value is stored in the first storage area in the free storage area of the first hold area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start hold number RaN to which 1 is added in step S20210. When the second start hold quantity RbN is set as the processing target, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S20103 (FIG. 36) are set. It is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area of the second hold area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start hold number RbN obtained by adding 1 in step S20210. After executing step S20212, the process proceeds to step S20213.

In step S20213, the first determination process is executed. The pre-judgment process is based on the information (holding information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. It is a process of executing the determination of the presence / absence of the presence / absence, etc. before the pending information becomes the target of the jackpot lottery by the main control device 60. The details of the pre-determination process will be described later. After executing step S20213, the process proceeds to step S20214.

In step S20214, a process of setting a hold command is executed. Specifically, the determination result of the prior determination process executed based on the information (holding information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is set as a hold command.

The hold command holds the determination result by the prior determination process based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 and the hold information acquired based on the entry. This is a command for the sub-side control device to confirm the information before the information is subject to the jackpot lottery by the main control device 60. The hold command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 40: step S20503) of the normal process described later.

Further, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the hold command transmitted based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, the voice emission control device 90 displays the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41. A command for changing in response to an increase in the number of pending items is transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holds. On the other hand, when the hold command transmitted based on the entry into the second start port 34 is received, the voice emission control device 90 displays the number of holds in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41. A command for changing according to the increase is transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holds.

After executing step S20214, the main MPU 62 ends the ball entry process for the main starting port.

<First judgment process>
Next, the prior determination process will be described. The pre-determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 37: S20213) of the winning process for the starting port.

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the prior determination process. As described above, in the prior determination process, based on the pending information, the determination results such as the winning / failing determination of the jackpot lottery, the determination of the type of the jackpot, and the determination of the presence / absence of reach are determined, and the pending information is the jackpot by the main control device 60. This is a process to be executed before the lottery target.

In step S20301, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area due to the entry of the game ball into the start opening in the entry process for the start opening (FIG. 37) is read out. After that, the process proceeds to step S20302, and the lottery mode at the time when the big hit lottery due to the current entry is executed as a game round is determined. Specifically, the judgment result of the pre-judgment process executed by the previous ball entry is read from the corresponding storage area, and the presence or absence of the probable change jackpot that occurs before the big hit lottery due to the current ball entry. By determining, the lottery mode at the time when the big hit lottery due to the current entry is executed as a game round is determined.

If it is determined in step S20302 that the lottery mode is the low probability mode at the time when the big hit lottery due to the current entry is executed as a game round, the process proceeds to step S20303 and the winning / failing table is stored. Refer to the pass / fail table for the low probability mode stored in the area 63a. After that, the process proceeds to step S20305, and as a result of referring to the hit / miss table for the low probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value information of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

On the other hand, in step S20302, if it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low probability mode at the time when the big hit lottery due to the current entry is executed as a game round (S20302: NO), the process proceeds to step S20304 and the high probability mode is performed. As a result of referring to the winning / failing table for the game, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot. After that, the process proceeds to step S20305, and as a result of referring to the hit / miss table for the high probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

If it is determined in step S20305 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read out this time corresponds to the jackpot (S20305: YES), the process proceeds to step S20306, and the ball is stored in the storage area by entering the starting port this time. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is read out. After that, the process proceeds to step S20307, and the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b is referred to. Specifically, when the jackpot type counter C2, which is the target of distribution this time, is acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, the distribution table for the first starting port Refer to the second starting port distribution table when the game ball is acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34. After executing step S20307, the process proceeds to step S20308.

In step S20308, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 read out this time corresponds to the probability variation jackpot. If it is determined in step S20308 that the probability variation jackpot is supported (S20308: YES), the process proceeds to step S20309, and the probability variation jackpot information is stored in the prior determination processing result storage area 64f. After that, the first determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20308 that the probability variation jackpot is not supported (S20308: NO), the process proceeds to step S20310, and the normal jackpot information is stored in the prior determination processing result storage area 64f. After that, the first determination process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S20305 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read out this time does not correspond to the jackpot (S20305: NO), the process proceeds to step S20311, and the ball enters the storage area this time. The value of the stored reach random number counter C3 is read out. After that, the process proceeds to step S20312, and the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step S20313, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

If it is determined in step S20313 that the reach generation is supported (S20313: YES), the process proceeds to step S20314, and the reach generation information is stored in the prior determination processing result storage area 64f. After that, the first determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20313 that the reach generation is not supported (S20313: NO), the prior determination process is terminated as it is.

<Ball entry process for through gate>
Next, the ball entry process for the through gate will be described. The ball entry process for the through gate is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 36: S20105).

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the ball entry process for the through gate. In step S20401, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered (passed) through the through gate 35. If it is determined in step S20401 that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (S20401: YES), the process proceeds to step S20402, and whether the number of reserved items SN is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). Judge whether or not. The number of reserved items SN is a value indicating the number of balls entered into the through gate 35 that is reserved for performing the electric accessory opening lottery. In the present embodiment, the maximum value of the number of reserved items SN is 4. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20401 that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (S20401: NO), the ball entry process for this through is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2402 that the value is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) of the number of reserved items SN (S20402: YES), the process proceeds to step S20403, and 1 is added to the number of reserved items SN. Then, the process proceeds to step S20404.

In step S20404, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S20103 (FIG. 36) is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area of the electric service holding area 64c of the RAM 64. After that, the ball entry process for through is completed.

On the other hand, in step S2402, when it is determined that the value of the number of reserved items SN is not less than the upper limit value (S2402: NO), that is, when it is determined that the value of the number of reserved items SN is equal to or more than the upper limit value, The ball entry process for through is completed without storing the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be described. The normal process is a process started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power is turned on. In the normal process, the main process of the game is executed.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step S20501, the start-up process is executed. Specifically, the initial setting of each control device when the power is turned on, the determination of the validity of the data stored and held in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S2052.

In step S2052, a start-up command is set. The start-up command is a command for starting a demo movie for each control device on the sub side when the power is turned on. Then, the process proceeds to step S20503.

In step S20503, output data such as a start-up command set in step S2052 and a command set in the timer interrupt process or the normal process executed last time is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. Further, when commands related to the effect such as a start-up command, a variable command, a type command, and a hold command are set, they are transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. After executing step S20503, the process proceeds to step S20504.

In step S20504, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the variable type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step S20505.

In step S20505, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step S20506. In step S20506, a game time control process for controlling a game in each game time is executed. In the game round control process, a big hit lottery, setting of a symbol variation display by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first symbol display unit 37a, the second symbol display unit 37b, and the like are performed. The details of the game times control process will be described later. After executing step S20506, the process proceeds to step S20507.

In step S20507, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. By executing the game state transition process, the game state shifts to the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, and the like. The details of the game state transition process will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step S20508.

In step S20508, an electric service support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided in the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric service support process, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is in the open state. The details of the processing for electric service support will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step S20509.

In step S20509, when the standby state elapses for a predetermined time, each control device on the sub side executes a standby process for starting the demo moving image. Then, the process proceeds to step S20510.

In step S20510, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the normal process this time (strictly speaking, the start of the command output process in step S20503). That is, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached. If it is determined in step S20510 that a predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed from the start of the current normal process (S20510: NO), in step S20511 and step S20512, until the execution timing of the next normal process is reached. Within the remaining time of, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step S20511, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Further, in step S20512, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20510 that a predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed from the start of the normal process this time (S20510: YES), the process returns to step S20503 and each process from step S20503 to step S20508 is performed. Run.

Since the execution time of each process from step S20503 to step 507 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be updated at random.

<Game times control process>
Next, the game times control process will be described. The game times control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 40: S20506) of the normal process.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the game times control process. In step S20601, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. As will be described later, the open / close execution mode flag is turned on at the timing when the change of the symbol in the game times won by the jackpot ends and shifts to the open / close execution mode, and is turned off at the timing when the open / close execution mode ends.

If it is determined in step S20601 that the open / close execution mode flag is ON (S20601: YES), it is determined that the open / close execution mode is in progress, and this game is performed without executing any of the processes after step S20602. End the control process. That is, in the open / close execution mode, the game rotation is not started regardless of whether or not the game ball has entered the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. .. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20601 that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (S20601: NO), the process proceeds to step S20602.

In step S20602, it is determined whether or not the main display unit 45 is in the variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not either the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b is in variable display. This determination is made by determining whether or not the variable display flag in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The variable display flag is turned on when starting variable display for either the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b, and is turned off when the variable display ends.

If it is determined in step S20602 that the main display unit 45 is not in the variable display (S20602: NO), the process proceeds to the game round start process of steps S20603 to S20605. In step S20603, it is determined whether or not the total reserved quantity CRN is “0”. When the total reserved quantity CRN is "0", it means that the starting reserved quantity is "0" for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. Therefore, if it is determined in step S20603 that the total reserved number CRN is "0" (S20603: YES), the game round control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20603 that the total number of reserved pieces CRN is not "0" (S20603: NO), the process proceeds to step S20604.

In step S20604, a data setting process for setting the data stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20605. The details of the data setting process will be described later.

In step S20605, a variation start process for starting the variation display on the main display unit 45 and the variation display on the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation start processing will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step S20606.

In step S20606, the value of the game count counter PNC is subtracted by 1. The game count counter PNC is a counter for counting the number of game times executed in the high frequency support mode. After executing step S20606, the process proceeds to step S20607.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20602 that the main display unit 45 is in the variable display (S20602: YES), the process proceeds to step S20607.

In step S20607, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the current game round has elapsed. As described above, the fluctuation time is the time from the start of fluctuation of the symbol row to the stop of all the symbol rows, and is a part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step S20607, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time counter area (various counter areas 64d) of the RAM 64 is "0". The value of the fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time setting process (FIG. 44) described later. The value of the set fluctuation time information is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started.

If it is determined in step S20607 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S20607: NO), the process proceeds to step S20608 to execute the fluctuation display process. The variable display process is a process for changing the display mode in the result display unit related to the current game round. After executing step S20608, the game round control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S20607 that the fluctuation time has elapsed (S20607: YES), the process proceeds to step S20609 and the fluctuation end processing is executed. In the variation end process, the stop symbol determined in the variation start process (FIG. 43), which will be described later, is stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 as a result of the current game round. After executing step S20609, the process proceeds to step S20610.

In step S20610, it is determined whether or not any of the jackpot flags stored in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The jackpot flag is a flag that is turned ON when a jackpot is won in the fluctuation start processing (FIG. 43) described later. If it is determined in step S20610 that any of the jackpot flags is ON (S20610: YES), the process proceeds to step S20611 and the open / close execution mode flag is turned ON. After that, the game round control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20610 that none of the jackpot flags is ON (S20610: NO), the game round control process is terminated.

<Data setting process>
Next, the data setting process will be described. The data setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 41: S20604) of the game turn control process.

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the data setting process. In step S20701, it is determined whether or not the hold area to be processed for executing the data setting process is the first hold area Ra. Specifically, among the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra (FIG. 269) in time series, the hold information stored first (hold stored in the first area of the first hold area Ra). Information) is stored in the first area of the second hold area Rb (information), which is the earliest hold information stored in the second hold area Rb (FIG. 269) in time series. If it is stored in the hold area before the hold information), it is determined that the hold area to be processed is the first hold area Ra. On the other hand, among the reserved information stored in the first reserved area Ra (FIG. 269) in chronological order, the reserved information stored first is stored in the second reserved area Rb (FIG. 269) in chronological order. When the reserved information stored first among the reserved information is stored in the reserved area first, it is determined that the reserved area to be processed is the second reserved area Rb. That is, by executing the process of step S20701, the hold information can be processed in the order stored in the first hold area Ra or the second hold area Rb.

If it is determined in step S20701 that the hold area to be processed is the first hold area Ra (step S20701: YES), the data setting process for the first hold area in steps S2072 to S20707 is executed. On the other hand, in step S20701, when it is determined that the reserved area to be processed is not the first reserved area Ra, that is, when it is determined that the reserved area to be processed is the second reserved area Rb (step S20701: NO). ), The data setting process for the second reserved area in steps S20708 to S20713 is executed.

In step S20702, after subtracting 1 from the first start hold quantity Ra in the first hold area Ra, the process proceeds to step S20703 and the total hold quantity CRN is subtracted by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step S20704. In step S20704, the data stored in the first area of the first holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. Then, the process proceeds to step S20705.

In step S20705, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first hold area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted such as the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area. After executing step S20705, the process proceeds to step S20706.

In step S20706, when the second symbol display unit flag of the various flag storage areas 64e is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and when it is not ON, the state is maintained. The second symbol display unit flag is information for specifying whether the target for starting the variation display this time is the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b. After that, the process proceeds to step S20707.

In step S20707, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the voice emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that the data in the hold area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information that the hold area targeted for the current data shift corresponds to the first hold area Ra, that is, corresponding to the first start port 33. A shift command including the information of the presence is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. After that, the data setting process is terminated.

The shift command set in step S20707 is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step S20503 in the normal process (FIG. 40). The voice emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a command for changing the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds, based on the received shift command. do. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds.

In step S20701, when it is determined that the reserved area to be processed is not the first reserved area Ra, that is, when it is determined that the reserved area to be processed is the second reserved area Rb (step S20701: NO). Step S20708 proceeds.

In step S20708, the second start hold quantity RbN of the second hold area Rb is subtracted by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step S20709. In step S20709, the total number of reserved pieces CRN is subtracted by 1, and the process proceeds to step S20710, and the data stored in the first area of the second reserved area Rb is moved to the execution area AE. Then, the process proceeds to step S20711.

In step S20711, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second holding area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted such as the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area. After executing step S20711, the process proceeds to step S20712.

In step S20712, if the second symbol display unit flag of the various flag storage areas 64e is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and if it is ON, that state is maintained. Then, the process proceeds to step S20713.

In step S20713, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the voice emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that the data in the hold area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information that the hold area targeted for the current data shift corresponds to the second hold area Rb, that is, corresponding to the second start port 34. A shift command including the information of the presence is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. After that, this data setting process is terminated.

The shift command set in step S20713 is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step S20503 in the normal process (FIG. 40). The voice emission control device 90 gives a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds, based on the received shift command. Send. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds.

<Variation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start processing will be described. The variation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 41: S20605) of the game turn control process.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing. In step S20801, it is determined whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The high-probability mode flag is a flag for the MPU 62 to specify whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high-probability mode. After that, it is turned off when the normal jackpot is won. If it is determined in step S20801 that the mode is high probability mode (S20801: YES), the process proceeds to step S20802.

In step S20802, the pass / fail determination is performed with reference to the pass / fail table for the high probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the winning / failing table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. 31 (b). Is determined. Then, the process proceeds to step S20804. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20801 that the mode is not in the high probability mode (S20801: NO), the process proceeds to step S20803.

In step S20803, the pass / fail determination is performed with reference to the pass / fail table for the low probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the winning / failing table for the low probability mode shown in FIG. 31 (a). Is determined. Then, the process proceeds to step S20804.

In step S20804, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination (big hit lottery) in step S20802 or step S20803 is a big hit winning. In step S20804, when the result of the winning / failing determination is a big hit (S20804: YES), in steps S20805 to S20812, in order to set the process for setting the game result in the case of the big hit winning and the stop result. Executes the processing of.

In step S20805, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display unit flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S20805 that the second symbol display unit flag is not ON (S20805: NO), the process proceeds to step S20806, and the distribution table for the first starting port (see FIG. 271 (a)) is referred to. Then, the distribution is determined. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of the numerical range of 16R probability variation jackpot, the numerical range of 8R probability variation jackpot, the numerical range of 16R normal jackpot, and the numerical range of 8R normal jackpot. Determine if it is included in.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20805 that the second symbol display unit flag is ON (S20805: YES), the process proceeds to step S20807, and the distribution table for the second starting port (see FIG. 271 (b)). The distribution is determined with reference to. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of the numerical range of 16R probability variation jackpot, the numerical range of 8R probability variation jackpot, the numerical range of 16R normal jackpot, and the numerical range of 8R normal jackpot. Determine if it is included in. After executing the process of step S20806 or step S20807. The process proceeds to step S20808.

In step S20808, it is determined whether or not the type of jackpot distributed in step S20806 or step S20807 is a probabilistic jackpot. If it is determined in step S20808 that the game result is a probabilistic jackpot (S20808: YES), the process proceeds to step S20809.

In step S20809, the stop result setting process for the probability change jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for the probabilistic jackpot varies depending on which stop result is displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b in the current game round in which the probabilistic jackpot is won. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the probability variation jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step S20806 or step S20807 can be obtained. It is acquired and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S20809, the process proceeds to step S20810.

In step S20810, the flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S20806 or step S20807 is turned ON. Specifically, when it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, the 16R probability variation flag is turned ON, and when it is an 8R probability variation jackpot, the 8R probability variation flag is ON. Then, the process proceeds to step S20814.

In step S20808, if it is determined that the type of jackpot distributed in step S20806 or step S20807 is not a probabilistic jackpot (S20808: NO), that is, if the type of jackpot distributed is a normal jackpot, step S20811 is performed. move on.

In step S20811, a stop result setting process for a normal jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for the normal jackpot varies depending on which stop result is displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b in the current game round in which the normal jackpot is won. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the normal jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of the jackpot distributed in step S20806 or step S20807 can be obtained. It is acquired and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S20811, the process proceeds to step S20812.

In step S20812, the flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S20806 or step S20807 is turned ON. Specifically, when it is a 16R normal jackpot, the 16R normal flag is turned ON, and when it is an 8R normal jackpot, the 8R normal flag is turned ON. Then, the process proceeds to step S20814.

In step S20804, if the result of the jackpot lottery in step S20802 or step S20803 is not the jackpot winning (S20804: NO), the process proceeds to step S20813, and the stop result setting process for the time of loss is executed. The stop result setting process for the time of disengagement is to end the variable display in the state where either the stop result is displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b in the current game time which is the disengagement result. It is a process for setting. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the out-of-order time in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is acquired. Then, the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S20813, the process proceeds to step S20814.

In step S20814, the variable time setting process is executed. The fluctuation time setting process is to set the fluctuation time, which is the time required for the current game round in the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b, based on the presence / absence of a big hit and the presence / absence of reach. It is the processing of. The details of the fluctuation time setting process will be described later. After executing step S20814, the process proceeds to step S20815.

In step S20815, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display unit flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S20815 that the second symbol display unit flag of the RAM 64 is not ON (S20815: NO), the process proceeds to step S20816, and the first variation command is set. The first variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning of the first starting port 33, and whether or not reach has occurred. And the information of the fluctuation time set in step S20814 are included. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20815 that the second symbol display unit flag is ON (S20815: YES), the process proceeds to step S20817, and the second variation command is set. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning of the second starting port 34, and whether or not a reach has occurred. And the information of the fluctuation time set in step S20814 are included. After executing step S20816 or step S20817, the process proceeds to step S20818.

In step S20818, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence / absence of a big hit and the result of the distribution determination. That is, the type command includes 16R probability variation jackpot information, 8R probability variation jackpot information, 16R normal jackpot information, 8R normal jackpot information, or missed result information as the jackpot type information.

The variation command and the type command set in steps S20816 to S20818 are transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 by step S20503 in the normal process (FIG. 40). The voice emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game round based on the received variable command and the type command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. After executing step S20818, the process proceeds to step S20819.

In step S20819, among the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b, the symbol display unit corresponding to the current game round is started to display the variation of the symbol. Specifically, when the second symbol display unit flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the symbol display unit corresponding to the current game round is specified to be the first symbol display unit 37a, and the variable display is started. When the second symbol display unit flag is ON, it is specified that the symbol display unit corresponding to the current game round is the second symbol display unit 37b, and the variable display is started. After executing step S20819, this fluctuation start process ends.

<Variable time setting process>
Next, the variable time setting process will be described. The variation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 43: S20814) of the variation start process.

FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing a variable time setting process. In step S20901, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Then, the process proceeds to step S20902.

In step S20902, it is determined whether or not the jackpot lottery related to the current game round is a winner. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability variation jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON, and if any of the flags is ON (S20902: YES), the process proceeds to step S20903.

In step S20903, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the jackpot fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the game times won in the big hit lottery is constant. After that, the process proceeds to step S20904, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S20902 that the jackpot lottery related to the current game round is not a winning (S20902: NO), the process proceeds to step S20905, and it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round. Since this process (S20905) is executed when the jackpot lottery related to the current game round is not won in step S20902, in step S20905, reach occurs among the game rounds not won in the jackpot lottery. It is determined whether or not the game is a game. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of reach, it is determined that reach will occur (S20905: YES), and the process proceeds to step S20906. When specifying whether or not reach has occurred using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to.

In step S20906, the variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired with reference to the reach generation variation time table stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time for reaching is constant. After that, the process proceeds to step S20904, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S20905 that reach does not occur in the current game round (S20905: NO), the process proceeds to step S20907, and the variation time table storage area 63d is stored with reference to the variation time table for non-reach generation. Then, the fluctuation time corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. After that, the process proceeds to step S20904, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process is terminated.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time information stored in the reach non-generation fluctuation time table is set so that the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the total number of reserved pieces CRN increases. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration that does not depend on the total number of reserved quantity CRNs may be used, and the fluctuation time may be set to be shorter as the number of total reserved quantity CRNs is smaller. Further, when the second start hold number RbN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start hold number RaN increases, and when the second start hold number RbN is "1" or more. May be set so that the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number of the second start hold number RbN increases. Further, when the second start hold number RbN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes longer as the number of the first start hold number RaN increases, and when the second start hold number RbN is "1" or more. May be set so that the fluctuation time becomes longer as the number of the second start reserved numbers RbN increases, or becomes constant without depending on the respective reserved numbers RaN and RbN.

Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the reach does not occur so that the shorter fluctuation time is selected as compared with the case where the number of pending information is the same as in the situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode. A variable time table may be set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected fluctuation times may be the same, and the above relationship may be reversed.

Further, the above configuration may be applied to the fluctuation time at the time of reach occurrence, and the fluctuation time that is easy to be selected and the fluctuation time that is difficult to be selected at the time of winning the jackpot and the time of losing reach may be different. good. Further, the variable time table for the probabilistic jackpot, the variable time table for the normal jackpot, the variable time table for the missed reach, and the variable time table for the complete miss may be set individually.

<Game state transition process>
Next, the game state transition process will be described. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 40: S20507) of the normal process.

FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the game state transition process. In step S21001, it is determined whether or not the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned on at the beginning of the ending period and turned off at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the open / close execution mode.

If it is determined in step S21001 that the ending period flag is not ON (S21001: NO), the process proceeds to step S21002 to determine whether or not the open / close processing period flag is ON. The open / close processing period flag is turned on at the start of the open / close processing period and turned off at the end of the open / close processing period.

If it is determined in step S21002 that the open / close processing period flag is not ON (S21002: NO), the process proceeds to step S21003, and it is determined whether or not the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned on at the beginning of the opening period and turned off at the end of the opening period. The opening period is a period for executing the opening effect in the open / close execution mode.

If it is determined in step S21003 that the opening period flag is not ON (S21003: NO), the process proceeds to step S21004, and the timing at which the symbol variation display on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b ends. It is determined whether or not it is. If it is determined in step S21004 that it is not the timing when the variation display is finished (S21004: NO), the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in step S21004 that it is the timing when the variation display is finished (S21004: YES), the process proceeds to step S21005, and the result of the jackpot lottery for this game round corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode. Determine if it exists. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined that the open / close execution mode flag is not ON (S21005: NO), the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S21005 that the result of the jackpot lottery for this game round corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode (S21005: YES), the process proceeds to step S21006 and the high probability mode flag is turned off. do. Then, the process proceeds to step S21007. If the high probability mode flag is OFF in step S21006, the process proceeds to step S21007 as it is.

In step S21007, the opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the time length of the opening period (hereinafter, also referred to as an opening time). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the third timer counter area T3 that determines the opening time. The third timer counter area T3 is provided in various timer counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. The details of the opening time setting process will be described later. After executing step S21007, the process proceeds to step S21008.

In step S21008, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step S20503 in the normal process (FIG. 40). The voice emission control device 90 is set to execute the opening effect and the right-handed notification effect based on the reception of the opening command, and starts controlling various devices so that these effects are sequentially executed. After executing step S21008, the process proceeds to step S21009, and the opening period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S21003 that the opening period flag is ON (S21003: YES), the process proceeds to step S21010.

In step S21010, it is determined whether or not the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step S21010 that the opening period has ended (S21010: YES), the process proceeds to step S21011 and the opening period flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step S21012.

In step S21012, a round display start process for notifying the type of the opening / closing execution mode this time is executed. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is confirmed. Then, based on the confirmed address information, the stop result data corresponding to the above address information is specified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is specified from the specified stop result data. Confirm. After that, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45. As a result, the round display unit 39 displays the round information related to the output. After executing step S21012, the process proceeds to step S21013.

In step S21013, the number of rounds of the opening / closing execution mode this time is set. Specifically, the jackpot type flags (16R probability variation flag, 8R probability variation flag, 16R normal flag, 8R normal flag) stored in the RAM 64 are confirmed, and the number of rounds corresponding to the flags is determined by various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. It is set in the first round counter area RC1 provided in. The first round counter area RC1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the opening / closing door 36b is opened. After executing step 13913, the process proceeds to step S21014.

In step S21014, the open / close processing period flag is turned ON. After that, the process proceeds to step S21015, and the release start command is set. The set release start command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step S20503 in the normal process (FIG. 40). This release start command includes information on the number of rounds in the current open / close execution mode. The voice emission control device 90 is set to execute the round effect of the content corresponding to the number of rounds based on the received release start command, and controls various devices so that the round effect of the set content is executed. Start. After executing step S21015, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S21002 that the open / close process period flag is ON (S21002: YES), the process proceeds to step S21016 to execute the large winning opening open / close process. Specifically, when the large winning opening 36a is closed, the variable winning driving unit 36c is set to the driving state on condition that the first round counter area RC1 is "1" or more, and the large winning is won. Open the mouth 36a. Further, when the large winning opening 36a is open, the opening limit time has elapsed since the opening of the large winning opening 36a, or the opening limit number of game balls has been entered. The drive state of the variable winning drive unit 36c is stopped, and the large winning opening 36a is closed. The details of the opening and closing process of the big winning opening will be described later. After executing step S21016, the process proceeds to step S21017.

In step S21017, it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S21016: NO), the game state transition process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S21017: YES), the process proceeds to step S21018 and the open / close processing period flag is turned off. After executing step S21018, the process proceeds to step S21019.

In step S21019, the round display end processing is executed. In this process, the display control of the round display unit 39 is terminated so that the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is turned off. After executing step S21019, the process proceeds to step S21020.

In step S21020, the ending time setting process is executed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting the time length of the ending period (hereinafter, also referred to as an ending time). In the present embodiment, the ending time of the same constant length is set in each ending period. Specifically, "3000" (that is, 6 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 that determines the ending time. The fourth timer counter area T4 is provided in various timer counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. After executing step S21020, the process proceeds to step S21021.

In step S21021, an ending command is set. The set ending command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step S20503 in the normal process (FIG. 40). The voice emission control device 90 is set to execute the ending effect based on the reception of the ending command, and starts controlling various devices so that the ending effect is executed. After executing step S21021, the process proceeds to step S21022.

In step S21022, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S21001 that the ending period flag is ON (S21001: YES), the process proceeds to step S21023.

In step S21023, it is determined whether or not the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (S21019), it is determined whether or not the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is “0”. If it is determined in step S21023 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not "0" (S21023: NO), the game state transition process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21023 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0" (S21023: YES), the process proceeds to step S21024.

In step S21024, the ending period flag is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step S21025, and the migration process at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of the game times after the end of the current ending period. Details of the migration process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step S21025, the process proceeds to step S21026 to turn off the open / close execution mode flag. After that, the game state transition process is terminated.

<Opening time setting process>
Next, the opening time setting process will be described. The opening time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 45: S21007) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the opening time setting process. In step S21011, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag is ON. In step S21011, when it is determined that the high frequency support mode flag is not ON, that is, when the jackpot is won in the big hit lottery in the low frequency support mode, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode (S21101: NO). ), Proceeds to step S21102, sets (sets) a value of "5000" corresponding to 10 seconds in the third timer counter area T3, and ends the opening time setting process.

On the other hand, in step S21101, when it is determined that the high frequency support mode flag is ON, that is, when the jackpot is won in the big hit lottery in the high frequency support mode, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode (S21101). : YES), the process proceeds to step S21103, the value of "3475" corresponding to 6.95 seconds is set (set) in the third timer counter area T3, and the opening time setting process is completed.

<Large winning opening opening / closing process>
Next, the process of opening and closing the large winning opening will be described. The large winning opening opening / closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 45: S21016) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing a large winning opening opening / closing process. In step S2121, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening 36a is being opened. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the variable winning driving unit 36c. If it is determined in step S22011 that the large winning opening 36a is not open (S22011: NO), the process proceeds to step S21202, and it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". If it is determined in step S21202 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S21202: YES), the main prize opening opening / closing process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21202 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S21202: NO), the process proceeds to step S2123.

In step S2123, it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer counter area T1 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is “0”. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the large winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S2123 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (S2123: NO), the main prize opening opening / closing process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2123 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (S21203: YES), the process proceeds to step S21204, and the variable winning drive unit is used to open the large winning opening 36a. The drive state is 36c. Then, the process proceeds to step S21205.

In step S21205, the setting process for each round is executed. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, since all the set winning modes are high-frequency winning modes, "15000" (that is, 30 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. Further, in order to count the number of winnings of the game ball to the large winning opening 36a, "10" is set in the winning counter area PC provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. The count value set in the first timer counter area T1 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec. If the pachinko machine 10 is set to the low frequency winning mode, for example, "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1 and "6" is set in the winning counter area PC. May be set. After executing step S21205, the process proceeds to step S21206.

In step S21206, an open command is set. After that, the opening / closing process of the winning opening is completed. The release command is a command including information for causing the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are control devices on the sub side, to recognize that the opening of the large winning opening 36a has started, and is a command of normal processing. It is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 by the command output process (FIG. 40: step S20503). The voice emission control device 90 identifies that the opening of the large winning opening 36a for one round has started based on the received opening command, and also displays the production contents of the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 with the large winning opening 36a. Update to the content corresponding to the start of opening of. Further, the voice emission control device 90 transmits the release command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 100 identifies that the opening of the large winning opening 36a for one round has started based on the received opening command, and at the same time, the opening of the large winning opening 36a indicates the effect content of the symbol display device 41. Update to the content corresponding to what was started.

If it is determined in step S21201 that the large winning opening 36a is open (step S21201: YES), the process proceeds to step S21207, and it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0". do. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the large winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S21207 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (S21207: NO), the process proceeds to step S21208.

In step S21208, whether or not a game ball has entered the large winning opening 36a is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the variable winning device 36. If it is determined in step S21208 that no ball has been entered (S21208: NO), the main prize opening opening / closing process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21208 that a ball has been entered (S21208: YES), the process proceeds to step S21209, and the value of the winning counter area PC is subtracted by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step S21210.

In step S21210, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter area PC is “0”. If it is determined in step S21210 that the value of the winning counter area PC is not "0" (S21210: NO), the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is terminated as it is.

When it is determined in step S21207 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (S21207: YES), or when it is determined in step S21210 that the value of the winning counter area PC is "0". (S21210: YES), the process proceeds to step S21211, and the large winning opening closing process is executed. Specifically, the variable winning drive unit 36c is set to a non-driving state in order to close the large winning opening 36a. Then, the process proceeds to step S21212.

In step S21212, the value of the first round counter area RC1 is subtracted by 1. After that, the process proceeds to step S21213, and it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”. If it is determined in step S21213 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S21213: YES), the main prize opening opening / closing process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21213 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S21213: NO), "1000" (that is, 2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the large winning opening 36a. After executing step S21214, the process proceeds to step S21215 to set the closing command. After that, the process of opening and closing the large winning opening is completed.

This set closing command is a command including information for causing the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are the control devices on the sub side, to recognize that the opening of the large winning opening 36a has been completed, and is a normal process. In the command output process (FIG. 40: step S20503) of the above, it is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. The voice emission control device 90 identifies that the opening of the large winning opening 36a for one round has been completed based on the received closing command, and at the same time, the effect contents of the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 are displayed on the large winning opening 36a. Update to the content corresponding to the end of opening. Further, the voice emission control device 90 transmits the closing command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. Based on the received closing command, the display control device 100 identifies that the opening of the large winning opening 36a for one round has been completed, and at the same time, the opening of the large winning opening 36a has been completed for the effect content in the symbol display device 41. Update to the content corresponding to what you did.

<Migration process at the end of the ending period>
Next, the migration process at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 45: S21024) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the transition process at the end of the ending period. In step S2301, it is determined whether or not the flag corresponding to the probabilistic jackpot as the jackpot type flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the 16R probability change flag or the 8R probability change flag of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step S2301 that the 16R probability change flag or the 8R probability change flag of the RAM 64 is ON (S2301: YES), the process proceeds to step S21302 to execute the flag erasing process. Specifically, when the 16R probability variation flag, the 8R probability variation flag, the 16 normal flag, the 8R normal flag, and the high frequency support mode flag are ON, they are turned OFF, and when they are not ON, the state is maintained. .. After executing step S21302, the process proceeds to step S21303.

In step S21303, the high probability mode flag is turned ON, and then the process proceeds to step S21304, and the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON. As a result, after ending the open / close execution mode, the game state shifts to the game state in which the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. It should be noted that these high-probability modes and high-frequency support modes are maintained at least until the next big hit. Then, the process proceeds to step S21305.

In step S21305, a high-probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the control device on the sub-side recognize that the winning / failing lottery mode is the high-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. do. Then, the process proceeds to step S21309.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2301 that the 16R normal flag or the 8R normal flag of the RAM 64 is ON (S2301: NO), the process proceeds to step S21306 to execute the flag erasing process. Specifically, when the 16R probability variation flag, the 8R probability variation flag, the 16 normal flag, the 8R normal flag, and the high frequency support mode flag are ON, they are turned OFF, and when they are not ON, the state is maintained. .. Then, the process proceeds to step S21307.

In step S21307, after turning on the high frequency support mode flag, the process proceeds to step S21308, and 100 is set in the game count counter PNC provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. The value set in the game count counter PNC is a value indicating the number of games when the high frequency support mode is executed by limiting the number of games. Then, the process proceeds to step S21309.

In step S21309, the high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the control device on the sub-side recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is used as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Set. After that, the migration process at the end of the ending period ends.

<Processing for electric service support>
Next, the processing for electric service support will be described. The electric service support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 40: S20508) of the normal process.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the electric service support process. In step S21401, it is determined whether or not the support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supported flag of the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The supporting flag is a flag that is turned on when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is opened and turned off when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step S21401 that the supporting flag is not ON (S21401: NO), the process proceeds to step S21402.

In step S21402, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag of the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is turned on when the open state is won in the electric accessory opening lottery for whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a, and is turned off when the supporting flag is ON. Is. If it is determined in step S21402 that the support winning flag is not ON (S21402: NO), the process proceeds to step S21403.

In step S21403, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal diagram unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec.

If it is determined in step S21403 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S21403: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S21403: YES), the process proceeds to step S21404.

In step S21404, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the fluctuation display of the symbol in the normal diagram unit 38. If it is determined in step S21404 that it is the end timing of the variation display (S21404: YES), the process proceeds to step S21405, the off display is set, and then the main electric service support process is terminated. By setting the off display, the variable display of the symbol in the normal figure unit 38 is terminated in the state where the off display is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21404 that it is not the end timing of the variation display (S21404: NO), the process proceeds to step S21406.

In step S21406, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of reserved items SN is larger than "0". If it is determined in step S21406 that the value of the number of reserved items SN is "0" (S21406: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21406 that the value of the number of reserved items SN is larger than "0" (S21406: YES), the process proceeds to step S21407.

In step S21407, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress, and then the process proceeds to step S21408 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. If the mode is not the open / close execution mode (S21407: NO) in step S21407 and the high frequency support mode is set in step S21408 (S21408: YES), the process proceeds to step S21409 to perform an electric accessory opening lottery. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric service holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory release lottery is performed. You will be elected. Further, "750" (that is, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started. Then, the process proceeds to step S21410.

In step S21410, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step S21409 is a support winning. If it is determined in step S21410 that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is the support winning (S21410: YES), the process proceeds to step S21411, the support winning flag is turned ON, and the counter area 64d of the RAM 64 is provided. Set "3" in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is opened. Then, the process proceeds to step S21412. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21410 that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is not a support winning (S21410: NO), the process proceeds to step S21412 without executing the process of step S21411.

In step S21412, it is determined whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode. If it is determined in step S21412 that the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode (S21412: YES), the process proceeds to step S21413. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21412 that the winning / failing lottery mode is not the low probability mode (S21412: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is.

In step S21413, it is determined whether or not the game count counter area is “0”. The game count counter is decremented by 1 each time one game is completed in the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. If it is determined in step S21413 that the game count counter area is not "0" (S21413: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21413 that the game count counter area is "0", the process proceeds to step S21414 and the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step S21415.

In step S21415, a low-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the control device on the sub-side recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is used as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Set. After that, the processing for electric service support is terminated.

The low-frequency support mode command set in step S21415 is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 40: step S20503) of the normal process. The voice emission control device 90 identifies that the support mode is the low frequency support mode based on the reception of the low frequency support mode command, and executes the corresponding processing.

If it is determined in step S21407 that the open / close execution mode is set (S21407: YES), or if it is determined in step S21418 that the mode is not the high frequency support mode (S21408: NO), the process proceeds to step S21416 and the motorized accessory opening lottery is performed. I do. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric service holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory release lottery is performed. You will be elected. Further, "14750" (that is, 29.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery. Then, the process proceeds to step S21417.

In step S21417, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step S21416 is the support winning. If it is determined in step S21417 that the support is not won (S21417: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21417 that the support is won (S21417: YES), the process proceeds to step S21418, the support winning flag is turned ON, and "1" is set in the second round counter area RC2. , End the processing for main electric service support.

If it is determined in step S21402 that the support winning flag is ON (S21402: YES), the process proceeds to step S21419, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal diagram unit 38. If it is determined in step S21419 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S21419: NO), the pattern variation is being displayed in the normal drawing unit 38, so that the main electric service support process is performed as it is. To finish. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21419 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S21419: YES), the process proceeds to step S21420.

In step S21420, the hit display is set. As a result, the variable display of the pattern in the normal drawing unit 38 is terminated with the hit display stopped and displayed. After that, the process proceeds to step S21421, the supporting flag is turned ON, and the support winning flag is turned OFF. After that, the processing for main electric service support is terminated.

If it is determined in step S21401 that the supporting flag is ON (S21401: YES), the process proceeds to step S21422 to execute the electric function opening / closing control process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 34a. After that, the processing for main electric service support is terminated.

<Electrical function opening / closing control processing>
Next, the electric function opening / closing control process will be described. The electric service opening / closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 49: S21422) of the electric service support process.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an electric function opening / closing control process. In step S21501, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive unit 34b is in the driving state. If it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is open (S21501: YES), the process proceeds to step S21502.

In step S21502, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step S21502 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S2152: NO), the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated as it is. That is, if the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the main electric accessory opening / closing control process ends.

If it is determined in step S21502 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S21502: YES), the process proceeds to step S21503, and a closing process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the closed state is performed. “250” (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as the means for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated this time. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step S21503, the process proceeds to step S21504.

In step S21504, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process proceeds to step S21505, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”. If it is determined in step S21505 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (S21505: NO), the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21505 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (S21505: YES), the process proceeds to step S21506 and the supporting flag is turned off. After that, the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S21501 that the electric accessory 34a is not open (S21501: NO), the process proceeds to step S21507, and it is determined whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step S21507 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S21507: NO), the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1507 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S21507: YES), the process proceeds to step S21508, and an opening process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the open state is executed. .. Then, the process proceeds to step S21509.

In step S21509, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress, and if it is determined that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (S21509: NO), the process proceeds to step S21510 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. do.

If it is determined in step S21510 that the high frequency support mode is in progress (S21510: YES), the process proceeds to step S21511, and "800" (that is, 1.6 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21509 that the open / close execution mode is set (S21509: YES), or if it is determined in step S21510 that the mode is not the high frequency support mode (S21510: NO), the process proceeds to step S21512 and the second step is performed. The timer counter area T2 is set to "100" (that is, 0.2 sec). After that, the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated.

B5. Electrical configuration of voice emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configuration of the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 51 is a block diagram showing mainly the electrical configurations of the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Some configurations of the power supply device 85 and the like are omitted.

The MPU 92 is mounted on the voice emission control board 91 provided in the voice emission control device 90. The MPU 92 is an element having a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like.

Various control programs, fixed value data, tables, etc. executed by the MPU 92 are stored in the ROM 93. For example, an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like are provided in a part of the area of the ROM 93.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. For example, various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like are provided in a part of the area of the RAM 94. It is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A main control device 60 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main control device 60. An effect operation button 24, a speaker 46, and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, and a display control device 100 is connected to the output side.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Is installed. It is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the voice emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 105). ..

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when executing various programs by the MPU 102.

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is made into an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip having a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, and the like to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the image data stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

The character ROM 106 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table referred to when determining an expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106. Further, it is also possible to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 in the character ROM 106.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107.

In the following, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, the main ROM 63, and the main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the audio emission control device 90 are the sound light side MPU 92 and the sound light side, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound / light side RAM 94 are also referred to, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also referred to as a display side MPU 102.

B6. Various processes executed in the voice emission control device and the display control device:
Next, an example of specific control executed in the voice emission control device and the display control device will be described. The process executed by the voice emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the process executed by the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processes executed in the voice emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt processing executed in the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 will be described.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed in the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed with a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 msec). Hereinafter, the processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing will be described.

In step S21601, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound / light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main MPU 62. The sound and light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the main MPU 62, and the commands received from the main MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , Read sequentially according to the stored order. After executing step S21601, the process proceeds to step S21602.

In step S21602, the command correspondence process is executed. The command correspondence process is a process executed in response to the command received from the main MPU 62. The details of the command correspondence process will be described later. After executing step S21602, the process proceeds to step S21603.

In step S21603, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read in the command correspondence process in step S21602. After executing step S21603, the process proceeds to step S21604.

In step S21604, an audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the voice output control process, the voice output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the voice output data read in the command correspondence process of step S21602. After executing step S21604, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

<Command support processing>
Next, the command correspondence process will be described. The command correspondence process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine of timer interrupt process (FIG. 52: S21602).

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing a command correspondence process executed in the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90. In step S21701, it is determined whether or not a high frequency support mode command is received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S21701 that the high frequency support mode command has been received (S21701: YES), the process proceeds to step S21702, and the sound light side high frequency support mode flag stored in the sound light side RAM 94 is turned ON. To. The sound light side high frequency support mode flag is a flag for the sound light side MPU 92 to grasp the state of the support mode type in the main control device 60. After executing step S21702, the process proceeds to step S21703. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21701 that the high frequency support mode command has not been received (S21701: NO), the process proceeds to step S21703 without executing the process of step S21702.

In step S21703, it is determined whether or not the low frequency support mode command is received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S21703 that the low frequency support mode command has been received (S21703: YES), the process proceeds to step S21704 and the sound light side high frequency support mode flag stored in the sound light side RAM 94 is turned off. To. After that, the process proceeds to step S21705, and the left-handed notification effect is set to be executed. Specifically, it is set to start the voice output control and the light emission control corresponding to the left-handed notification effect. After that, the process proceeds to step S21706, and a left-handed notification effect command for setting the display control device 100 to execute the left-handed notification effect is transmitted. Then, the process proceeds to step S21707.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21703 that the low frequency support mode command has not been received (S21703: NO), the process proceeds to step S21707 without executing the processes of steps S21704 to S21706.

In step S21707, it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S21707 that the opening command has been received (S21707: YES), the process proceeds to step S21708, and the opening effect for 7 seconds and the right-handed notification effect for 3 seconds are set to be executed. Specifically, it is set to start the voice output control and the light emission control corresponding to the opening effect, and after the control corresponding to the opening effect for 7 seconds is completed, the sound output corresponding to the right-handed notification effect is output. Set to start control and light emission control. After that, the process proceeds to step S21709, and an opening effect command for setting the display control device 100 to execute the opening effect and the right-handed notification effect is transmitted. Then, the process proceeds to step S21710.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21707 that the opening command has not been received (S21707: NO), the process proceeds to step S21710 without executing the processes of step S21708 and step S21709.

In step S21710, it is determined whether or not the release start command is received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S21710 that the opening start command has been received (S21710: YES), the process proceeds to step S21711 and the round effect is set to be executed. Specifically, it is set to start the audio output control and the light emission control corresponding to the round effect. At this time, if the control corresponding to the opening effect is being executed and the right-handed notification effect is already set to be executed, the control corresponding to the opening effect is terminated and the right-handed notification effect is performed. Cancel the setting and set to start the control corresponding to the round effect. Therefore, if the opening start command is received 6.95 seconds after receiving the opening command, the right-handed notification effect is not executed, while the opening start command is received 10 seconds after receiving the opening command. If this is the case, the right-handed notification effect will be executed. After executing step S21711, the process proceeds to step S21712, and a round effect command for setting the display control device 100 to execute the round effect is transmitted. Then, the process proceeds to step S21713.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21710 that the release start command has not been received (S21710: NO), the process proceeds to step S21713 without executing the processes of step S21711 and step S21712.

In step S21713, it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S21713 that the ending command has been received (S21713: YES), the process proceeds to step S21714, and the ending effect is set to be executed. Specifically, it is set to start the audio output control and the light emission control corresponding to the ending effect. After that, the process proceeds to step S21715, and an ending effect command for setting the display control device 100 to execute the ending effect is transmitted. Then, the process proceeds to step S21716.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21713 that the ending command has not been received (S21713: NO), the process proceeds to step S21716 without executing the processes of step S21714 and step S21715.

In step S21716, when another command is received, the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a variation command and a type command are received, the type of the effect to be executed in the game round is determined based on these commands, and the determined effect is set to be executed. After that, the processing corresponding to this command is terminated.

<Various processes executed in the display control device>
Next, the process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processes executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 are mainly the main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and the processes that are executed when a command is received from the voice emission control device 90. There is a command interrupt process and a V interrupt process executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes the main process after the power is turned on, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. If the command is received and the V interrupt signal is detected at the same time, the command interrupt process is preferentially executed. Therefore, the V interrupt process can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the voice emission control device 90.

<Main processing>
Next, the main process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a main process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Hereinafter, the processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described.

In step S21801, the initial setting process is executed. Specifically, first, the process of initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read out, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Further, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. Also, make other settings necessary for initialization. Then, the process proceeds to step S21802.

In step S21802, the interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing described below are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, the command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process executed every time a command is received from the voice emission control device 90.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step S21901, the command storage process is executed. In the command storage process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read out by the command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, the V interrupt process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process executed by detecting the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105. In the V interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area are executed by the command interrupt processing, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, the image is drawn and drawn on the VDP 105. Execute the display instruction.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal generated in VDP105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, when the MPU 102 executes the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is performed every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. Therefore, since the VDP 105 does not receive the drawing instruction of the next image at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image is started or displayed during the drawing of the image. It is possible to suppress the expansion of an image accompanying a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information in the image is stored. Hereinafter, the processing details of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described.

In step S22001, the command correspondence process is executed. In the command correspondence process, the content of the command stored in the command storage area is analyzed by the command interrupt process (FIG. 55), and the process corresponding to the command is executed. The details of the command correspondence process will be described later.

In the command correspondence process (S22001), all the commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and the processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so that there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the voice emission control device 90 and the effect is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode of the staging such as the advance notice effect and the stop symbol set by the voice emission control device 90, and display the staging image according to the mode. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the device 41. The details of the command correspondence process will be described later.

In step S2002, the display setting process is executed. In the display setting process, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the symbol display device 41 is specified based on the type of the screen to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 set by the command correspondence process (S22001) or the like. .. Then, the process proceeds to step S2203.

In step S2203, task processing is executed. In the task process, the type of character (sprite, display object) constituting the image is determined based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 specified by the display setting process (S22002). In addition to specifying, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. are determined for each character (sprite). Then, the process proceeds to step S22004.

In step S2204, the drawing process is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters constituting one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character determined by the task process (S2203) are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes image drawing processing based on these information, and also displays the image drawn based on the information received at the time of the previous V interrupt processing on the symbol display device 41 together with the drive signal. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. After that, the process proceeds to step S2205, other processing is executed, and then the V interrupt processing is terminated.

<Command support processing>
Next, the command correspondence process will be described. The command correspondence process is executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 as a subroutine of V interrupt process (FIG. 56: S22001).

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing a command correspondence process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step S22101, it is determined whether or not the left-handed notification effect command is received from the sound-light side MPU 92. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the left-handed notification effect command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. If it is determined in step S22101 that the left-handed notification effect command is stored (S22101: YES), the process proceeds to step S22102, and the left-handed notification effect is set to be executed. Specifically, it is set to start the control of drawing and displaying the image corresponding to the left-handed notification effect. After executing step S22102, the process proceeds to step S22103. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22101 that the left-handed notification effect command is not stored (S22101: NO), the process proceeds to step S22103 without executing the process of step S22102.

In step S22103, it is determined whether or not the opening effect command is received from the sound light side MPU 92. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening effect command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. If it is determined in step S22103 that the opening effect command is stored (S22103: YES), the process proceeds to step S22104, and the opening effect for 7 seconds and the right-handed notification effect for 3 seconds are set to be executed. Specifically, it is set to start the control of drawing and displaying the image corresponding to the opening effect, and after the control corresponding to the opening effect for 7 seconds is completed, the drawing of the image corresponding to the right-handed notification effect is completed. And set to start control of the display. After executing step S22104, the process proceeds to step S22105. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22103 that the opening effect command is not stored (S22103: NO), the process proceeds to step S22105 without executing the process of step S22104.

In step S22105, it is determined whether or not a round effect command is received from the sound light side MPU 92. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the round effect command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. If it is determined in step S22105 that the round effect command is stored (S22105: YES), the process proceeds to step S22106, and the round effect is set to be executed. Specifically, it is set to start the control of drawing and displaying the image corresponding to the round effect. At this time, if the control corresponding to the opening effect is being executed and the right-handed notification effect is already set to be executed, the control corresponding to the opening effect is terminated and the right-handed notification effect is performed. Cancel the setting and set to start the control corresponding to the round effect. Therefore, if the round effect command is received 6.95 seconds after receiving the opening effect command, the right-handed notification effect is not executed, while the round effect command is received 10 seconds after receiving the opening effect command. Is received, the right-handed notification effect is executed. After executing step S22106, the process proceeds to step S22107. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22105 that the round effect command is not stored (S22105: NO), the process proceeds to step S22107 without executing the process of step S22106.

In step S22107, it is determined whether or not the ending effect command is received from the sound light side MPU 92. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the ending effect command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. If it is determined in step S22107 that the ending effect command is stored (S22107: YES), the process proceeds to step S22108, and the ending effect is set to be executed. Specifically, it is set to start the control of drawing and displaying the image corresponding to the ending effect. After executing step S22108, the process proceeds to step S22109. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22107 that the ending effect command is not stored (S22107: NO), the process proceeds to step S22109 without executing the process of step S22108.

In step S22109, it is determined whether or not another command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104, and the process corresponding to the stored command is executed. After that, the processing corresponding to this command is terminated.

According to the present embodiment described above, the following effects are obtained.

In the normal pachinko machine 10, when the voice emission control device 90 sequentially executes a plurality of effects, the main control device 60 issues a command for causing the voice emission control device 90 to execute each effect. Send to 90 respectively. Therefore, as the number of effects to be executed by the voice emission control device 90 increases, the number of times the main control device 60 transmits a command to the voice emission control device 90 increases.

Specifically, as shown in the comparative example of FIG. 35, when the voice emission control device 90 is made to execute the opening effect, the right-handed notification effect is executed, and then the round effect is executed. The main control device 60 transmits an opening command to the voice emission control device 90, then a right-handed notification command, and further transmits a release start command. In this case, the main control device 60 transmits the command to the voice emission control device 90 three times. Further, when the voice emission control device 90 is made to execute the opening effect and then the round effect is executed without executing the right-handed notification effect, the main control device 60 transmits an opening command to the voice emission control device 90. After that, the release start command is sent without sending the right-handed notification command. In this case, the main control device 60 will transmit the command to the voice emission control device 90 twice. That is, in the normal pachinko machine 10, when the voice emission control device 90 does not execute the right-handed notification effect, the main control device 60 may transmit a command to the voice emission control device 90 twice, but the voice emission control device 90 may emit a command. When the control device 90 is made to execute the right-handed notification effect, the main control device 60 transmits the command to the voice emission control device 90 three times.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the release start command while sequentially executing a plurality of effects set by receiving the opening command, the effect being executed is being executed. Is executed and the round effect is executed. Therefore, even when the round effect is executed by the voice emission control device 90 after all the effects among the plurality of effects are executed, the round effect is also executed among the plurality of effects. Even when the round effect is executed by the voice emission control device 90 without executing a part of the effect, the main control device 60 may send an opening command and an opening start command to the voice emission control device 90. .. That is, in any case, the main control device 60 may transmit the command to the voice emission control device 90 twice.

Specifically, according to the present embodiment, the voice emission control device 90 is set to sequentially execute the opening effect and the right-handed notification effect when the opening command is received. Then, if the opening start command is received at the timing before the right-handed notification effect is executed while the opening effect is being executed, the running opening effect is terminated and the setting is set to be executed after the opening effect. The round effect is executed without executing the right-handed notification effect. That is, when the open start command is received while the opening effect is being executed, the voice emission control device 90 of the present embodiment executes an overwrite process, not a parallel process, a standby process, or an invalid process. The overwrite process means that when a new command to set another effect to be executed is received while the effect is being executed, the effect being executed is terminated, and the effect is executed after the effect being executed. If there is an effect that is set to be performed, the setting is deleted, the effect is overwritten so that the effect corresponding to the newly received command is executed, and the set effect is executed. be. In addition, the parallel processing means that when a command for setting another effect to be executed is newly received while the effect is being executed, the effect being executed and the effect corresponding to the received command are input. It is a process that is executed in parallel at the same time. The standby process is set to be executed after the executing effect and the executing effect when a new command for setting another effect to be executed is received while the effect is being executed. This is a process of waiting until the effects are completed, and after these effects are completed, the effects corresponding to the received commands are executed. The invalidation process means that if a new command to be set to execute another effect is received while the effect is being executed, the received command is invalidated and the effect corresponding to the received command is not executed. It is a process.

According to the present embodiment, even when the voice emission control device 90 executes the round effect after executing the opening effect and the right-handed notification effect, the right-handed notification effect is also executed after the opening effect is executed. Even when the round effect is executed by the voice emission control device 90 without being executed, the main control device 60 may transmit the opening command and the opening start command to the voice emission control device 90. That is, the main control device 60 may or may not cause the voice emission control device 90 to execute the right-handed notification effect, the command may be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 twice. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the frequency of transmission of commands of the main control device 60 can be reduced, and the processing load of the main control device 60 can be reduced. Further, according to the present embodiment, since the right-handed notification command shown in the comparative example of FIG. 35 becomes unnecessary, it is not necessary to store the right-handed notification command in the command information storage area 63f of the main ROM 63. .. Therefore, of the storage capacity of the main ROM 63, the storage capacity required for storing the right-handed notification command can be effectively utilized for other purposes.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the mode of the effect executed by the voice emission control device 90 is different due to the difference in the transmission interval when the main control device 60 transmits the opening command and then the opening start command. As compared with the configuration in which the main control device 60 transmits commands of various contents to the voice emission control device 90 in order to cause the voice emission control device 90 to perform various contents of the effect. The processing load of the control device 60 can be reduced, and the storage capacity required for the command information storage area 63f of the main ROM 63 can be reduced.

Specifically, according to the present embodiment, the main control device 60 has a first transmission mode (FIG. 34 (A)) in which the opening start command is transmitted 10 seconds after the opening command is transmitted. It is possible to execute the second transmission mode ((B) of FIG. 34) in which the opening start command is transmitted after 6.95 seconds have elapsed after the opening command is transmitted. Then, when the main control device 60 executes the first transmission mode, the voice emission control device 90 becomes an effect mode in which the right-handed notification effect is executed after the opening effect is executed, and the main control device 60 is the second mode. When the transmission mode of is executed, the right-handed notification effect is not executed after the opening effect is executed. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, even when the voice emission control device 90 is made to execute the opening effect and then the right-handed notification effect is executed, the voice emission control device 90 is made to execute the opening effect. Even when the right-handed notification effect is not executed, the main control device 60 may transmit the opening start command after transmitting the opening command. Therefore, for example, for causing the voice emission control device 90 to execute the opening effect. When the opening command is transmitted and the right-handed notification effect is executed after the opening effect is executed, the right-handed notification command for executing the right-handed notification effect is transmitted, and the right after the opening effect is executed. The main control is compared with the configuration (configuration of the comparative example shown in FIG. 35) in which the right-handed notification command for executing the right-handed notification effect is not transmitted when the hit notification effect is not executed. The processing load of the apparatus 60 can be reduced, and the storage capacity required for the command information storage area 63f of the main ROM 63 can be reduced.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the voice emission control device 90 executes the opening effect and the right-handed notification effect when the main control device 60 executes the first transmission mode ((A) of FIG. 34). After that, the round effect is executed, and when the main control device 60 executes the second transmission mode ((B) in FIG. 34), the right-handed notification effect is not executed after the opening effect is executed. It becomes an effect mode to execute a round effect. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, even in the case where the voice emission control device 90 is made to execute the opening effect, then the right-handed notification effect is executed, and then the round effect is executed, the voice emission control device 90 is also executed. Even when the round effect is executed without executing the right-handed notification effect after the opening effect is executed, the main control device 60 may transmit the opening start command and then the opening start command. For example, when an opening command for executing an opening effect is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 and a right-handed notification effect is executed after the opening effect is executed, the right-handed notification effect is executed. If the right-handed notification effect is not executed after the hitting notification command is transmitted and the opening effect is executed, the right-handed notification command for executing the right-handed notification effect is not transmitted, and the opening effect or the right-handed notification effect is not transmitted. When the round effect is executed after the execution of The processing load of the control device 60 can be reduced, and the storage capacity required for the command information storage area 63f of the main ROM 63 can be reduced.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the main control device 60 sequentially transmits the opening command and the opening start command based on the state of the support mode when the jackpot winning lottery is executed. The voice emission control device 90, which determines the interval and receives the opening command and the opening start command, is in the support mode state when the jackpot lottery is executed based on the difference in the intervals at which these commands are received. Perform the corresponding production. Therefore, the main control device is compared with the configuration in which the main control device 60 transmits various commands having different contents to the voice emission control device 90 in order to cause the voice emission control device 90 to execute the effect corresponding to the state of the support mode. The processing load of 60 can be reduced, and the storage capacity required for the command information storage area 63f of the main ROM 63 can be reduced.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the recommended launch mode (striking method) of the game ball changes from "left-handed" to "right-handed" by the start of the opening / closing processing period of the opening / closing execution mode ("left-handing"). If a big hit is won during the low frequency support mode), a right-handed notification effect is executed, and the recommended launch mode (striking method) of the game ball is also changed by the start of the opening / closing processing period of the opening / closing execution mode. If it does not change as "right-handed" (when a big hit is won during the high-frequency support mode during "right-handed"), the right-handed notification effect is not executed. Therefore, while reducing the processing load of the main control device 60, it is possible to perform an appropriate mode of production corresponding to the state of the support mode when the jackpot is won.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the main control device 60 determines the length of the opening period based on the state of the support mode, and the voice emission control device 90 determines the opening effect and right-handed regardless of the state of the support mode. Despite executing the same process of setting to execute the notification effect, the content of the effect to be executed in the opening period is configured to be different depending on the state of the support mode. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the voice emission control device 90 can execute the production of the content suitable for the length of the opening period without executing different processing depending on the state of the support mode. That is, the voice emission control device 90 has an opening period that changes according to the state of the support mode without having to grasp the state of the support mode of the main control device 60 and execute processing according to the state of the support mode. Since the effect of the content suitable for the length can be executed, the processing load of the voice emission control device 90 can be reduced.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the opening command, the voice emission control device 90 sequentially executes a plurality of effects (opening effect and right-handed notification effect) regardless of the state of the support mode. If the release start command is received while the multiple processes set by receiving the opening command are being executed in sequence, the process being executed is terminated and the round effect is executed. .. In the present embodiment, the interval from the reception of the opening command to the reception of the opening start command by the voice emission control device 90 differs depending on the state of the support mode, and therefore, it is set by receiving the opening command. Of the plurality of effects performed, the effect actually executed is smaller as the interval is shorter, and increases as the interval is longer. That is, according to the present embodiment, by executing a simple process of setting the voice emission control device 90 to sequentially execute a plurality of effects regardless of the state of the support mode when the opening command is received. It is possible to make the content of the effect executed during the opening period different depending on the state of the support mode.

More specifically, in the present embodiment, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the opening command, the opening effect and the right-handed notification effect are sequentially performed as a plurality of effects regardless of the state of the support mode. If the open start command is received after the opening command is received and before the right-handed notification effect is executed, the round effect is executed without executing the right-handed notification effect. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the right-handed notification effect is executed because the interval from the reception of the opening command to the reception of the opening start command differs depending on the state of the support mode. It may or may not be. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the opening command, the opening effect and the right-handed notification effect are set to be sequentially executed regardless of the state of the support mode. By executing this, it is possible to make it different depending on the state of the support mode whether or not the right-handed notification effect is executed during the opening period.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when a big hit is won in the big hit lottery in the high frequency support mode, the main control device 60 informs the length of the opening period by right-handed notification after the opening effect starts. Is set to a time shorter than 7 seconds (6.95 seconds in this embodiment), which is the time until the start of Even if is delayed, it is possible to prevent the voice emission control device 90 from receiving the opening start command after the execution of the right-handed notification effect is started. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the right-handed notification effect from being executed even though the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery in the high-frequency support mode ((B) in FIG. 34).

Further, according to the present embodiment, even if there is a problem that the voice emission control device 90 does not receive the release start command, the right-handed notification effect is only executed after the opening effect. Since the player may perform "right-handed" during the opening / closing process, even if the right-handed notification effect is executed in a situation unintended in terms of control, no disadvantageous situation occurs for the player. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 10 that performs control that does not cause a disadvantageous situation to the player even if a defect occurs.

B7. Modification example of the second embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and can be carried out in various embodiments without departing from the gist thereof, and for example, the following modifications are also possible. In the modified example described below, the description of the same configuration and processing as in the above embodiment will be omitted.

B7-1. Modification 1: Modification 1:
FIG. 58 is a timing chart illustrating an outline of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the first modification of the second embodiment. The main difference from the second embodiment described above is that when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery in the high frequency support mode, the main controller 60 sets the length of the opening period to 4 seconds, and the voice. Whether the light emission control device 90 knows the type of support mode and is set to execute the opening effect for 7 seconds and the right-handed notification effect for 3 seconds when the opening command is received, or rather than the opening effect. It is a point to decide whether to set to execute the short opening effect that is completed (finished) in a short time (4 seconds in this modification) based on the type of the support mode. Hereinafter, specific processing will be described.

First, the process when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery in the low frequency support mode will be described with reference to FIG. 58 (A).

As shown in FIG. 58 (A), when the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery in the low frequency support mode, the opening period The opening period is started by setting the length to 10 seconds, and an opening command indicating that the opening period has started is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90.

Upon receiving the opening command from the main control device 60, the voice emission control device 90 determines whether or not the current support mode type is the high frequency support mode. As will be described later, when the main control device 60 shifts from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode, the voice emission control device 90 indicates to the voice emission control device 90 that the high frequency support mode has been changed. When the voice emission control device 90 receives the high frequency support mode command from the main control device 60, the voice emission control device 90 turns on the sound light side high frequency support mode flag stored in the sound light side RAM 94. Then, when the main control device 60 shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode, the main control device 60 transmits a low frequency support mode command indicating the shift to the low frequency support mode to the voice emission control device 90. When the voice emission control device 90 receives the low frequency support mode command from the main control device 60, the voice emission control device 90 turns off the sound light side high frequency support mode flag stored in the sound light side RAM 94. Therefore, the voice emission control device 90 can always grasp the type of the support mode of the main control device 60 by referring to the sound light side support mode flag. Then, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the opening command from the main control device 60 and determines that the type of the current support mode is not the high frequency support mode, the opening effect for 7 seconds and the opening effect for 3 seconds are performed. Set to execute the right-handed notification effect of. That is, the voice emission control device 90 is set to continuously execute two processes (two effects in this embodiment) for one command.

The voice emission control device 90 is set to execute the opening effect and the right-handed notification effect, and then the display control device 100 is set to execute the opening effect and the right-handed notification effect. To send. After that, the voice emission control device 90 starts the control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the voice emission control device 90 starts voice output control so that the voice corresponding to the opening effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the opening effect. As described above, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started.

When the display control device 100 receives the opening effect command from the voice emission control device 90, the display control device 100 is set to execute the opening effect for 7 seconds and the right-handed notification effect for 3 seconds. That is, the display control device 100 is set to continuously execute two processes (two effects in this embodiment) for one command. After that, the display control device 100 starts the control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display the moving image corresponding to the opening effect on the symbol display device 41.

When the control corresponding to the opening effect for 7 seconds is completed, the voice emission control device 90 starts the control corresponding to the right-handed notification effect set to be executed next to the opening effect. Specifically, the voice emission control device 90 starts voice output control so that the voice corresponding to the right-handed notification effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps have a light emission pattern corresponding to the right-handed notification effect. The light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started so that the 47 emits light. Similarly, when the control corresponding to the opening effect for 7 seconds is completed, the display control device 100 starts the control corresponding to the right-handed notification effect set to be executed next to the opening effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display a moving image corresponding to the right-handed notification effect on the symbol display device 41.

When the opening period set to 10 seconds ends, the main control device 60 starts the opening / closing processing period, and also transmits an opening start command indicating that the opening / closing processing period has started to the voice emission control device 90. ..

The voice emission control device 90 is set to execute the round effect when the release start command is received from the main control device 60 after the control corresponding to the right-handed notification effect for 3 seconds is completed. After setting the voice emission control device 90 to execute the round effect, the voice emission control device 90 transmits a round effect command for setting the display control device 100 to execute the round effect. After that, the voice emission control device 90 starts the control corresponding to the round effect. Specifically, the voice emission control device 90 starts the sound output control so that the sound corresponding to the round effect is output from the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 emit light in the light emission pattern corresponding to the round effect. As described above, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started.

The display control device 100 is set to execute the round effect when it receives a round effect command from the voice emission control device 90 after finishing the control corresponding to the right-handed notification effect for 3 seconds, and also supports the round effect. Start the control. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display a moving image corresponding to the round effect on the symbol display device 41.

When the number of times the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened reaches a predetermined number of times and the opening / closing processing period ends, the main control device 60 starts the ending period and starts the ending period for the voice emission control device 90. Send an ending command indicating that you have done so.

When the voice emission control device 90 receives the ending command from the main control device 60, the voice emission control device 90 is set to end the control corresponding to the round effect and execute the ending effect. After setting the voice emission control device 90 to execute the ending effect, the voice emission control device 90 transmits an ending effect command for setting the display control device 100 to execute the ending effect. After that, the voice emission control device 90 starts the control corresponding to the ending effect. Specifically, the voice emission control device 90 starts the voice output control so that the voice corresponding to the ending effect is output from the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending effect. As described above, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started.

When the display control device 100 receives the ending effect command from the voice emission control device 90, the display control device 100 ends the control corresponding to the round effect, sets to execute the ending effect, and starts the control corresponding to the ending effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display the moving image corresponding to the ending effect on the symbol display device 41.

Also in the present modification 1, as in the above embodiment, when the opening / closing execution mode ends, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Also in this modification 1, "right-handed" is recommended, which is a method of distributing the game ball to the area on the right side of the game area PA during the high-frequency support mode. Also in the present modification 1, since the right-handed notification effect is executed in the open / close execution mode, many players recognize the right-handed notification effect and execute "right-handed". Then, the player who has executed "right-handed" in the open / close execution mode will continue "right-handed" as it is in the high-frequency support mode even after the open / close execution mode ends.

Next, the process when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery in the high frequency support mode will be described with reference to FIG. 58 (B). The main difference from the processing when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery in the low frequency support mode described above is that the main controller 60 sets the length of the opening period to 4 seconds and sends the opening command to the opening command. Set to execute the short opening effect by determining that the voice emission control device 90 that received the opening command is not in the high frequency support mode, and execute the right-handed notification effect. The point is to execute a round effect without doing it. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

As shown in FIG. 58 (B), when the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery in the high frequency support mode, the opening period The opening period is started by setting the length to 4 seconds, and an opening command indicating that the opening period has started is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90.

Upon receiving the opening command from the main control device 60, the voice emission control device 90 determines whether or not the current support mode type is the high frequency support mode. Then, the voice emission control device 90 is set to execute the short opening effect for 4 seconds when it is determined that the type of the current support mode is the high frequency support mode. After setting the voice emission control device 90 to execute the short opening effect, the voice emission control device 90 transmits a short opening effect command for setting the display control device 100 to execute the short opening effect. After that, the voice emission control device 90 starts the control corresponding to the short opening effect. Specifically, the voice emission control device 90 starts the sound output control so that the sound corresponding to the short opening effect is output from the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 have a light emission pattern corresponding to the short opening effect. The light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started so as to emit light.

When the display control device 100 receives the short opening effect command from the voice emission control device 90, the display control device 100 is set to execute the short opening effect for 4 seconds, and starts the control corresponding to the short opening effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display the moving image corresponding to the short opening effect on the symbol display device 41.

When the opening period set to 4 seconds ends, the main control device 60 starts the opening / closing processing period, and also transmits an opening start command indicating that the opening / closing processing period has started to the voice emission control device 90. ..

The voice emission control device 90 is set to execute the round effect when the release start command is received from the main control device 60 after the control corresponding to the short opening effect for 4 seconds is completed. After setting the voice emission control device 90 to execute the round effect, the voice emission control device 90 transmits a round effect command for setting the display control device 100 to execute the round effect. After that, the voice emission control device 90 starts the control corresponding to the round effect. Specifically, the voice emission control device 90 starts the sound output control so that the sound corresponding to the round effect is output from the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 emit light in the light emission pattern corresponding to the round effect. As described above, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started.

The display control device 100 is set to execute the round effect when it receives a round effect command from the voice emission control device 90 after finishing the control corresponding to the short opening effect for 4 seconds, and also supports the round effect. Start control. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display a moving image corresponding to the round effect on the symbol display device 41.

When the number of times the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened reaches a predetermined number of times and the opening / closing processing period ends, the main control device 60 starts the ending period and starts the ending period for the voice emission control device 90. Send an ending command indicating that you have done so.

When the voice emission control device 90 receives the ending command from the main control device 60, the voice emission control device 90 is set to end the control corresponding to the round effect and execute the ending effect. After setting the voice emission control device 90 to execute the ending effect, the voice emission control device 90 transmits an ending effect command for setting the display control device 100 to execute the ending effect. After that, the voice emission control device 90 starts the control corresponding to the ending effect. Specifically, the voice emission control device 90 starts the voice output control so that the voice corresponding to the ending effect is output from the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending effect. As described above, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started.

When the display control device 100 receives the ending effect command from the voice emission control device 90, the display control device 100 ends the control corresponding to the round effect, sets to execute the ending effect, and starts the control corresponding to the ending effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display the moving image corresponding to the ending effect on the symbol display device 41.

As described above, in this modification, when the player wins the jackpot in the jackpot lottery in the low frequency support mode in which the player is executing "left-handed", the opening effect and the right-handed notification effect are executed. It is possible to suggest to the player that the player has moved to the execution mode and recommend "right-handed", and also to be a big hit in the big hit lottery during the high frequency support mode in which the player has already executed "right-handed". If the player wins, the short opening effect shorter than the opening effect is executed and the right-handed notification effect is not executed. Therefore, the game can be further speeded up as compared with the second embodiment described above, and the interest of the game is improved. Can be planned.

<Various processes executed in the main controller of Modification 1>
Next, the process executed in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 of the first modification will be described. Hereinafter, the processing different from that of the second embodiment will be described, and the description of the same processing as that of the second embodiment will be omitted.

<Opening time setting process>
The opening time setting process in the first modification will be described. The opening time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 45: S21007) of the game state transition process. The main difference from the opening time setting process in the second embodiment described above is that the length of the opening time when the high frequency support mode flag is ON is set to 4 seconds. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing an opening time setting process executed in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 of the first modification. In step S2221, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag is ON. In step S2221, when it is determined that the high frequency support mode flag is not ON, that is, when the jackpot is won in the big hit lottery in the low frequency support mode, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode (S22201: NO). ), Proceeds to step S22220, sets (sets) a value of "5000" corresponding to 10 seconds in the third timer counter area T3, and ends the opening time setting process.

On the other hand, in step S2221, when it is determined that the high frequency support mode flag is ON, that is, when the jackpot is won in the big hit lottery in the high frequency support mode, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode (S22220). : YES), the process proceeds to step S2223, the value of "2000" corresponding to 4 seconds is set (set) in the third timer counter area T3, and the opening time setting process is completed.

<Various processes executed in the voice emission control device of Modification 1>
Next, the process executed in the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 of the first modification will be described. Hereinafter, the processing different from that of the second embodiment will be described, and the description of the same processing as that of the second embodiment will be omitted.

<Command support processing>
A command correspondence process executed in the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 of the first modification will be described. The command correspondence process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine of timer interrupt process (FIG. 52: S21602). The main difference from the command correspondence process (FIG. 53) in the second embodiment described above is that the short opening effect is set to be executed when the sound light side high frequency support mode flag is ON. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a command correspondence process executed in the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 of the modification 1. In step S22301, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode command is received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S22301 that the high frequency support mode command has been received (S22301: YES), the process proceeds to step S22302, and the sound light side high frequency support mode flag stored in the sound light side RAM 94 is turned ON. To. The sound light side high frequency support mode flag is a flag for the sound light side MPU 92 to grasp the state of the support mode type in the main control device 60. After executing step S22302, the process proceeds to step S22303. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22301 that the high frequency support mode command has not been received (S22301: NO), the process proceeds to step S22303 without executing the process of step S22302.

In step S22303, it is determined whether or not the low frequency support mode command is received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S22303 that the low frequency support mode command has been received (S22303: YES), the process proceeds to step S22304, and the sound light side high frequency support mode flag stored in the sound light side RAM 94 is turned off. To. After that, the process proceeds to step S22305, and the left-handed notification effect is set to be executed. Specifically, it is set to start the voice output control and the light emission control corresponding to the left-handed notification effect. After that, the process proceeds to step S22306, and an opening effect command for setting the display control device 100 to execute the left-handed notification effect is transmitted. Then, the process proceeds to step S22307.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22303 that the low frequency support mode command has not been received (S22303: NO), the process proceeds to step S22307 without executing the processes of steps S22304 to S22306.

In step S22307, it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S22307 that the opening command has not been received (S22307: NO), the process proceeds from step S22308 to step S22312, which will be described later, without executing the process of step S22312. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22307 that the opening command has been received (S22307: YES), the process proceeds to step S22308, and it is determined whether or not the sound / light side high frequency support mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step S22308 that the high frequency support mode flag on the sound / light side is not ON (S22308: NO), the process proceeds to step S22309 to execute a 7-second opening effect and a 3-second right-handed notification effect. Set to. Specifically, it is set to start the voice output control and the light emission control corresponding to the opening effect, and after the control corresponding to the opening effect for 7 seconds is completed, the sound output corresponding to the right-handed notification effect is output. Set to start control and light emission control. After that, the process proceeds to step S22310, and an opening effect command for setting the display control device 100 to execute the opening effect and the right-handed notification effect is transmitted. After that, the process proceeds to step S22313. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22308 that the high frequency support mode flag on the sound / light side is ON (S22308: YES), the process proceeds to step S22311 and the short opening effect for 4 seconds is set to be executed. Specifically, it is set to start the audio output control and the light emission control corresponding to the short opening effect. After that, the process proceeds to step S22310, and a short opening effect command for setting the display control device 100 to execute the short opening effect is transmitted. After that, the process proceeds to step S22313.

In step S22313, it is determined whether or not the release start command is received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S22313 that the opening start command has been received (S22313: YES), the process proceeds to step S22314, and the round effect is set to be executed. Specifically, it is set to start the audio output control and the light emission control corresponding to the round effect. Here, in the present modification 1, when the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode during the low frequency support mode, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 transmits the open start command 10 seconds after the opening command is transmitted. Then, when the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 shifts to the open / close execution mode during the low frequency support mode, when it receives the opening command, it executes an opening effect for 7 seconds and a right-handed notification effect for 3 seconds. Set. Therefore, when the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode during the low frequency support mode, the opening effect for 7 seconds is executed, the right-handed notification effect for 3 seconds is executed, and then the round effect is executed. Become. On the other hand, when the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode during the high frequency support mode, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 transmits the open start command 4 seconds after the opening command is transmitted. Then, the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 is set to execute a short opening effect for 4 seconds when the opening command is received in the case of shifting to the open / close execution mode during the high frequency support mode. Therefore, when the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode during the high frequency support mode, the round effect is executed after the short opening effect for 4 seconds is executed. After executing step S22314, the process proceeds to step S22315, and a round effect command for setting the display control device 100 to execute the round effect is transmitted. Then, the process proceeds to step S22316.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22313 that the release start command has not been received (S22313: NO), the process proceeds to step S22316 without executing the processes of step S22314 and step S22315.

In step S22316, it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S22316 that the ending command has been received (S22316: YES), the process proceeds to step S22317, and the ending effect is set to be executed. Specifically, it is set to start the audio output control and the light emission control corresponding to the ending effect. After that, the process proceeds to step S22318, and an ending effect command for setting the display control device 100 to execute the ending effect is transmitted. Then, the process proceeds to step S22319.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22316 that the ending command has not been received (S22316: NO), the process proceeds to step S22319 without executing the processes of steps S22317 and S22318.

In step S22319, when another command is received, the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a variation command and a type command are received, the type of the effect to be executed in the game round is determined based on these commands, and the determined effect is set to be executed. After that, the processing corresponding to this command is terminated.

<Various processes executed in the display control device of Modification 1>
Next, the process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 of the modification 1 will be described. Hereinafter, the processing different from that of the second embodiment will be described, and the description of the same processing as that of the second embodiment will be omitted.

<Command support processing>
The command correspondence process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 of the modification 1 will be described. The command correspondence process is executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 as a subroutine of V interrupt process (FIG. 56: S22001). The main difference from the command correspondence process (FIG. 57) in the second embodiment described above is that the short opening effect is set to be executed when the short opening effect command is received. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing a command correspondence process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 of the modification 1. In step S2241, it is determined whether or not the left-handed notification effect command is received from the sound-light side MPU 92. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the left-handed notification effect command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. If it is determined in step S22401 that the left-handed notification effect command is stored (S22401: YES), the process proceeds to step S22402, and the left-handed notification effect is set to be executed. Specifically, it is set to start the control of drawing and displaying the image corresponding to the left-handed notification effect. After executing step S22402, the process proceeds to step S22403. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22401 that the left-handed notification effect command is not stored (S22401: NO), the process proceeds to step S22403 without executing the process of step S22402.

In step S22403, it is determined whether or not the opening effect command is received from the sound light side MPU 92. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening effect command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. If it is determined in step S22403 that the opening effect command is stored (S22403: YES), the process proceeds to step S22404, and the opening effect and the right-handed notification effect are set to be executed. Specifically, it is set to start the control of drawing and displaying the image corresponding to the opening effect, and after the control corresponding to the opening effect for 7 seconds is completed, the drawing of the image corresponding to the right-handed notification effect is completed. And set to start control of the display. After executing step S22404, the process proceeds to step S22405. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22403 that the opening effect command is not stored (S22403: NO), the process proceeds to step S22405 without executing the process of step S22404.

In step S22405, it is determined whether or not the short opening effect command is received from the sound light side MPU 92. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the short opening effect command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. If it is determined in step S22405 that the short opening effect command is stored (S22405: YES), the process proceeds to step S22406, and the short opening effect is set to be executed. Specifically, it is set to start the control of drawing and displaying the image corresponding to the short opening effect. After executing step S22406, the process proceeds to step S22407. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22405 that the short opening effect command is not stored (S22405: NO), the process proceeds to step S22407 without executing the process of step S22406.

In step S22407, it is determined whether or not the round effect command is received from the sound light side MPU 92. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the round effect command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. If it is determined in step S22407 that the round effect command is stored (S22407: YES), the process proceeds to step S22408, and the round effect is set to be executed. Specifically, it is set to start the control of drawing and displaying the image corresponding to the round effect. Here, in the present modification 1, when the mode is changed to the open / close execution mode during the low frequency support mode, the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 transmits the round effect command 10 seconds after the opening effect command is transmitted. do. Then, when the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 shifts to the open / close execution mode during the low frequency support mode, when it receives the opening effect command, it executes the opening effect for 7 seconds and the right-handed notification effect for 3 seconds. Set. Therefore, when the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode during the low frequency support mode, the opening effect for 7 seconds is executed, the right-handed notification effect for 3 seconds is executed, and then the round effect is executed. Become. On the other hand, when the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode during the high frequency support mode, the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 transmits the round effect command 4 seconds after the short opening effect command is transmitted. Then, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is set to execute the short opening effect for 4 seconds when the short opening effect command is received in the case of shifting to the open / close execution mode during the high frequency support mode. Therefore, when the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode during the high frequency support mode, the round effect is executed after the short opening effect for 4 seconds is executed. After executing step S22408, the process proceeds to step S22409. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22407 that the round effect command is not stored (S22407: NO), the process proceeds to step S22409 without executing the process of step S22408.

In step S22409, it is determined whether or not the ending effect command is received from the sound light side MPU 92. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the ending effect command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. If it is determined in step S22409 that the ending effect command is stored (S22409: YES), the process proceeds to step S22410, and the ending effect is set to be executed. Specifically, it is set to start the control of drawing and displaying the image corresponding to the ending effect. After executing step S22410, the process proceeds to step S22411. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22409 that the ending effect command is not stored (S22409: NO), the process proceeds to step S22411 without executing the process of step S2241.

In step S22411, it is determined whether or not another command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104, and the process corresponding to the stored command is executed. After that, the processing corresponding to this command is terminated.

According to the present modification 1 described above, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of the second embodiment described above.

According to the first modification, the voice emission control device 90 can grasp the state of the support mode of the main control device 60, and receives a command having the same content from the main control device 60. However, since different effects are executed depending on the state of the support mode of the main control device 60, the main control device 60 commands various contents in order to cause the voice emission control device 90 to execute various effects. Can be reduced in the processing load of the main control device 60 and the storage capacity required for the command information storage area 63f of the main ROM 63 can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. ..

Specifically, according to the present modification 1, the voice emission control device 90 executes the opening effect when the opening command is received during the low frequency support mode, and receives the opening command during the high frequency support mode. If so, a short opening effect is executed. Therefore, even when the voice emission control device 90 is made to execute the opening effect or the voice emission control device 90 is made to execute the short opening effect, the main control device 60 has the same opening contents. Since the command may be transmitted, for example, when the voice emission control device 90 is to execute the opening effect, the command for executing the opening effect is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 and short-circuited to the voice emission control device 90. When the opening effect is executed, the processing load of the main control device 60 can be reduced and the main side can be compared with the configuration in which the command for executing the short opening effect is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. The storage capacity required for the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63 can be reduced.

Further, according to the present modification 1, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the opening command during the low frequency support mode, the right-handed notification effect is executed after the opening effect is executed. Therefore, for example, the main The control device 60 transmits an opening command for causing the voice emission control device 90 to execute the opening effect, and further transmits a right-handed notification command for executing the right-handed notification effect (comparative example shown in FIG. 35). The processing load of the main control device 60 can be reduced, and the storage capacity required for the command information storage area 63f of the main ROM 63 can be reduced.

Further, according to the present modification 1, the main control device 60 transmits a high frequency support mode command or a low frequency support mode command when the support mode changes, and the voice emission control device 90 transmits a high frequency support mode command. Is received, the high frequency support mode flag on the sound light side is turned ON, and when the low frequency support mode command is received, the high frequency support mode flag on the sound light side is turned OFF. Then, the voice emission control device 90 can grasp the state of the support mode of the main control device 60 by referring to the sound light side high frequency support mode flag. Therefore, since the main control device 60 does not have to include the information regarding the state of the support mode in the opening command in order for the voice emission control device 90 to grasp the state of the support mode, the main control device 60 transmits the opening command. It is possible to reduce the processing load at the time of performing.

Further, according to the present modification 1, when the result of the big hit lottery becomes a big hit during the low frequency support mode, the opening for 10 seconds after the game round (change of the symbol) which became the big hit is completed. If the opening / closing processing period is started after the period has elapsed and the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot during the high frequency support mode, 4 seconds after the game round (change of the symbol) that became the jackpot is completed. Since the opening / closing processing period is started after the opening period has elapsed, it is possible to give a sense of speed to the game in the high frequency support mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Specifically, during the high-frequency support mode, which is advantageous to the player, the jackpot lottery will be executed frequently, so the expectation that the jackpot will be won in the jackpot lottery and the opening / closing processing period will start. Will be higher. Therefore, the player is playing the game with the expectation that the opening / closing processing period will be started earlier than the opening / closing processing period itself. That is, during the high frequency support mode, the player demands a sense of speed from the game. According to the present modification 1, in the high frequency support mode, the opening / closing processing period is started in a shorter time after the game round in which the result of the big hit lottery is a big hit is completed, as compared in the low frequency support mode. Therefore, it is possible to give a sense of speed to the game in the high frequency support mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the present modification 1, when the opening command is received during the low frequency support mode, the opening effect for 7 seconds and the right-handed notification effect for 3 seconds are executed in the opening period of 10 seconds, and the frequency is high. When an opening command is received during the support mode, a 4-second short opening effect is executed during the 4-second opening period, so an effect of a length suitable for each of the 10-second opening period or the 4-second opening period is performed. Can be executed.

B7-2. Modification 2:
FIG. 62 is a timing chart illustrating an outline of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment of the modified example 2. The main difference from the first modification of the second embodiment described above is that the main control device 60 sets the length of the opening period to 10 seconds regardless of the type of support mode when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery. And, the voice emission control device 90 knows the type of the support mode, and when the opening command is received, is it set to execute the opening effect for 7 seconds and the right-handed notification effect for 3 seconds, or the opening? The point is to determine whether to set to execute the long opening effect that is completed (finished) in a longer time than the effect (10 seconds in this modification) based on the type of the support mode. In the present embodiment, the content of the 7-second effect from the start to 7 seconds in the 10-second long opening effect is the same as the content of the 7-second opening effect, which is 3 seconds from 7 seconds to 10 seconds. The content of the production is a production of another newly added content (for example, a production in which another character that does not appear in the opening production for 7 seconds appears). Hereinafter, specific processing will be described.

First, the process when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery in the low frequency support mode will be described with reference to FIG. 62 (A).

As shown in FIG. 62 (A), the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 sets the length of the opening period to 10 seconds regardless of the type of support mode when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery. At the same time as starting the opening period, an opening command indicating that the opening period has started is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90.

Upon receiving the opening command from the main control device 60, the voice emission control device 90 determines whether or not the current support mode type is the high frequency support mode by referring to the sound / light side support mode flag. Then, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the opening command from the main control device 60 and determines that the type of the current support mode is not the high frequency support mode, the opening effect for 7 seconds and the opening effect for 3 seconds are performed. Set to execute the right-handed notification effect of. That is, the voice emission control device 90 is set to continuously execute two processes (two effects in this embodiment) for one command.

The voice emission control device 90 is set to execute the opening effect and the right-handed notification effect, and then the display control device 100 is set to execute the opening effect and the right-handed notification effect. To send. After that, the voice emission control device 90 starts the control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the voice emission control device 90 starts voice output control so that the voice corresponding to the opening effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the opening effect. As described above, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started.

When the display control device 100 receives the opening effect command from the voice emission control device 90, the display control device 100 is set to execute the opening effect for 7 seconds and the right-handed notification effect for 3 seconds. That is, the display control device 100 is set to continuously execute two processes (two effects in this embodiment) for one command. After that, the display control device 100 starts the control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display the moving image corresponding to the opening effect on the symbol display device 41.

When the control corresponding to the opening effect for 7 seconds is completed, the voice emission control device 90 starts the control corresponding to the right-handed notification effect set to be executed next to the opening effect. Specifically, the voice emission control device 90 starts voice output control so that the voice corresponding to the right-handed notification effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps have a light emission pattern corresponding to the right-handed notification effect. The light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started so that the 47 emits light. Similarly, when the control corresponding to the opening effect for 7 seconds is completed, the display control device 100 starts the control corresponding to the right-handed notification effect set to be executed next to the opening effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display a moving image corresponding to the right-handed notification effect on the symbol display device 41.

When the opening period set to 10 seconds ends, the main control device 60 starts the opening / closing processing period, and also transmits an opening start command indicating that the opening / closing processing period has started to the voice emission control device 90. ..

The voice emission control device 90 is set to execute the round effect when the release start command is received from the main control device 60 after the control corresponding to the right-handed notification effect for 3 seconds is completed. After setting the voice emission control device 90 to execute the round effect, the voice emission control device 90 transmits a round effect command for setting the display control device 100 to execute the round effect. After that, the voice emission control device 90 starts the control corresponding to the round effect. Specifically, the voice emission control device 90 starts the sound output control so that the sound corresponding to the round effect is output from the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 emit light in the light emission pattern corresponding to the round effect. As described above, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started.

The display control device 100 is set to execute the round effect when it receives a round effect command from the voice emission control device 90 after finishing the control corresponding to the right-handed notification effect for 3 seconds, and also supports the round effect. Start the control. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display a moving image corresponding to the round effect on the symbol display device 41.

When the number of times the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened reaches a predetermined number of times and the opening / closing processing period ends, the main control device 60 starts the ending period and starts the ending period for the voice emission control device 90. Send an ending command indicating that you have done so.

When the voice emission control device 90 receives the ending command from the main control device 60, the voice emission control device 90 is set to end the control corresponding to the round effect and execute the ending effect. After setting the voice emission control device 90 to execute the ending effect, the voice emission control device 90 transmits an ending effect command for setting the display control device 100 to execute the ending effect. After that, the voice emission control device 90 starts the control corresponding to the ending effect. Specifically, the voice emission control device 90 starts the voice output control so that the voice corresponding to the ending effect is output from the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending effect. As described above, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started.

When the display control device 100 receives the ending effect command from the voice emission control device 90, the display control device 100 ends the control corresponding to the round effect, sets to execute the ending effect, and starts the control corresponding to the ending effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display the moving image corresponding to the ending effect on the symbol display device 41.

Next, the process when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery in the high frequency support mode will be described with reference to FIG. 62 (B). The main difference from the processing when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery in the low frequency support mode described above is that the voice emission control device 90 that has received the opening command is determined not to be in the high frequency support mode, and a long opening effect is produced. It is a point to set to execute. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

As shown in FIG. 62 (B), the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 sets the length of the opening period to 10 seconds regardless of the type of support mode when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery. At the same time as starting the opening period, an opening command indicating that the opening period has started is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90.

Upon receiving the opening command from the main control device 60, the voice emission control device 90 determines whether or not the current support mode type is the high frequency support mode by referring to the sound / light side support mode flag. Then, the voice emission control device 90 is set to execute a long opening effect for 10 seconds when it is determined that the type of the current support mode is the high frequency support mode. After setting the voice emission control device 90 to execute the long opening effect, the voice emission control device 90 transmits a long opening effect command for setting the display control device 100 to execute the long opening effect. After that, the voice emission control device 90 starts the control corresponding to the long opening effect. Specifically, the voice emission control device 90 starts the sound output control so that the sound corresponding to the long opening effect is output from the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 have a light emission pattern corresponding to the long opening effect. The light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started so as to emit light.

When the display control device 100 receives the long opening effect command from the voice emission control device 90, the display control device 100 is set to execute the long opening effect for 10 seconds, and starts the control corresponding to the long opening effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display the moving image corresponding to the long opening effect on the symbol display device 41.

When the opening period set to 10 seconds ends, the main control device 60 starts the opening / closing processing period, and also transmits an opening start command indicating that the opening / closing processing period has started to the voice emission control device 90. ..

The voice emission control device 90 is set to execute the round effect when the opening start command is received from the main control device 60 after the control corresponding to the long opening effect for 10 seconds is completed. After setting the voice emission control device 90 to execute the round effect, the voice emission control device 90 transmits a round effect command for setting the display control device 100 to execute the round effect. After that, the voice emission control device 90 starts the control corresponding to the round effect. Specifically, the voice emission control device 90 starts the sound output control so that the sound corresponding to the round effect is output from the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 emit light in the light emission pattern corresponding to the round effect. As described above, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started.

The display control device 100 is set to execute the round effect when it receives a round effect command from the voice emission control device 90 after finishing the control corresponding to the long opening effect for 10 seconds, and also supports the round effect. Start control. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display a moving image corresponding to the round effect on the symbol display device 41.

When the number of times the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened reaches a predetermined number of times and the opening / closing processing period ends, the main control device 60 starts the ending period and starts the ending period for the voice emission control device 90. Send an ending command indicating that you have done so.

When the voice emission control device 90 receives the ending command from the main control device 60, the voice emission control device 90 is set to end the control corresponding to the round effect and execute the ending effect. After setting the voice emission control device 90 to execute the ending effect, the voice emission control device 90 transmits an ending effect command for setting the display control device 100 to execute the ending effect. After that, the voice emission control device 90 starts the control corresponding to the ending effect. Specifically, the voice emission control device 90 starts the voice output control so that the voice corresponding to the ending effect is output from the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending effect. As described above, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started.

When the display control device 100 receives the ending effect command from the voice emission control device 90, the display control device 100 ends the control corresponding to the round effect, sets to execute the ending effect, and starts the control corresponding to the ending effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display the moving image corresponding to the ending effect on the symbol display device 41.

According to the present modification 2 described above, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of the above-described embodiment and modification 1.

According to the second modification, the voice emission control device 90 can grasp the state of the support mode of the main control device 60, and receives a command having the same content from the main control device 60. However, since different effects are executed depending on the state of the support mode of the main control device 60, the main control device 60 commands various contents in order to cause the voice emission control device 90 to execute various effects. Can be reduced in the processing load of the main control device 60 and the storage capacity required for the command information storage area 63f of the main ROM 63 can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. ..

Specifically, according to the present modification 2, the voice emission control device 90 executes the opening effect when the opening command is received during the low frequency support mode, and receives the opening command during the high frequency support mode. If so, a long opening effect is executed. Therefore, even when the voice emission control device 90 is made to execute the opening effect or the voice emission control device 90 is made to execute the long opening effect, the main control device 60 has the same opening contents. Since the command may be transmitted, for example, when the voice emission control device 90 is to execute the opening effect, the command for executing the opening effect is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90, and the voice emission control device 90 is long. When the opening effect is executed, the processing load of the main control device 60 can be reduced and the main side can be compared with the configuration in which the command for executing the long opening effect is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. The storage capacity required for the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63 can be reduced.

Further, according to the second modification, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the opening command during the low frequency support mode, the right-handed notification effect is executed after the opening effect is executed. Therefore, for example, the main The control device 60 transmits an opening command for causing the voice emission control device 90 to execute the opening effect, and further transmits a right-handed notification command for executing the right-handed notification effect (comparative example shown in FIG. 35). The processing load of the main control device 60 can be reduced, and the storage capacity required for the command information storage area 63f of the main ROM 63 can be reduced.

Further, according to the present modification 2, the main control device 60 transmits a high frequency support mode command or a low frequency support mode command when the support mode changes, and the voice emission control device 90 transmits a high frequency support mode command. Is received, the high frequency support mode flag on the sound light side is turned ON, and when the low frequency support mode command is received, the high frequency support mode flag on the sound light side is turned OFF. Then, the voice emission control device 90 can grasp the state of the support mode of the main control device 60 by referring to the sound light side high frequency support mode flag. Therefore, since the main control device 60 does not have to include the information regarding the state of the support mode in the opening command in order for the voice emission control device 90 to grasp the state of the support mode, the main control device 60 transmits the opening command. It is possible to reduce the processing load at the time of performing.

Further, according to the second modification, the voice emission control device 90 can grasp the state of the support mode of the main control device 60, and the opening command is based on the state of the support mode of the main control device 60. Since the main control unit 60 determines the content of the effect to be executed in the opening period, which is the period from the reception of It is not necessary to change the mode of transmitting and, and the opening command and the opening start command can be transmitted in the same transmission mode each time. Therefore, it is possible to omit the control required for the main control device 60 to change the transmission mode for transmitting the opening command and the open start command according to the state of the support mode, and the processing load of the main control device 60 can be reduced. Can be reduced. Further, since the program for executing the control can be deleted, the program capacity of the main ROM 63 can be reduced. Further, according to the second modification, the main control device 60 issues commands of various contents to the voice emission control device 90 in order to cause the voice emission control device 90 to perform various effects according to the state of the support mode. The processing load of the main control device 60 can be reduced as compared with the configuration for transmitting.

Further, according to the present modification 2, the main control device 60 has an opening period regardless of whether the support mode state when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery is the low frequency support mode or the high frequency support mode. Set the length of to 10 seconds. That is, the main control device 60 transmits the opening command and the opening start command at the same interval even if the state of the support mode when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery is different. Therefore, according to the present modification 2, the control required for the main control device 60 to change the interval for transmitting the opening command and the opening start command according to the state of the support mode can be omitted. The processing load of the control device 60 can be reduced. Further, since the program for executing the control can be deleted, the program capacity of the main ROM 63 can be reduced.

Further, according to the present modification 2, when the state of the support mode when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery is the low frequency support mode, the voice emission control device 90 produces an opening effect in the front part of the opening period. Execute, and execute the right-handed notification effect in the latter part of the opening period. Then, when the state of the support mode when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery is the high frequency support mode, 0 to 7 seconds of the long opening effect having the same content as the opening effect in the front part of the opening period. The part up to is executed, and the part from 7 seconds to 10 seconds of the long opening effect is executed in the latter part of the opening period. Therefore, according to the present modification 2, in the front part of the opening period, the same effect is executed regardless of the state of the support mode of the main control device 60, and in the rear part of the opening period, the main control device 60 Since different effects are executed according to the state of the support mode, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to how the contents of the effects will change from the front part to the rear part of the opening period. .. Further, according to the present modification 2, in the latter part of the opening period, it is possible to execute an effect including contents suitable for the state of the support mode of the main control device 60.

B7-1. Modification 3:
FIG. 63 is a timing chart illustrating an outline of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the third modification of the second embodiment. The main difference from the first modification of the second embodiment described above is that the main control device 60 sets the length of the opening period to 10 seconds regardless of the type of support mode when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery. And, the voice emission control device 90 knows the type of the support mode, and when the opening command is received, is it set to execute the opening effect for 7 seconds and the right-handed notification effect for 3 seconds, or 7 It is a point to decide whether to set to execute the opening effect and the round effect for a second based on the type of the support mode. Hereinafter, specific processing will be described.

First, the process when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery in the low frequency support mode will be described with reference to FIG. 63 (A).

As shown in FIG. 63 (A), the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 sets the length of the opening period to 10 seconds regardless of the type of support mode when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery. At the same time as starting the opening period, an opening command indicating that the opening period has started is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90.

Upon receiving the opening command from the main control device 60, the voice emission control device 90 determines whether or not the current support mode type is the high frequency support mode by referring to the sound / light side support mode flag. Then, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the opening command from the main control device 60 and determines that the type of the current support mode is not the high frequency support mode, the opening effect for 7 seconds and the opening effect for 3 seconds are performed. Set to execute the right-handed notification effect of. That is, the voice emission control device 90 is set to continuously execute two processes (two effects in this embodiment) for one command.

The voice emission control device 90 is set to execute the opening effect and the right-handed notification effect, and then the display control device 100 is set to execute the opening effect and the right-handed notification effect. To send. After that, the voice emission control device 90 starts the control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the voice emission control device 90 starts voice output control so that the voice corresponding to the opening effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the opening effect. As described above, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started.

When the display control device 100 receives the opening effect command from the voice emission control device 90, the display control device 100 is set to execute the opening effect for 7 seconds and the right-handed notification effect for 3 seconds. That is, the display control device 100 is set to continuously execute two processes (two effects in this embodiment) for one command. After that, the display control device 100 starts the control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display the moving image corresponding to the opening effect on the symbol display device 41.

When the control corresponding to the opening effect for 7 seconds is completed, the voice emission control device 90 starts the control corresponding to the right-handed notification effect set to be executed next to the opening effect. Specifically, the voice emission control device 90 starts voice output control so that the voice corresponding to the right-handed notification effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps have a light emission pattern corresponding to the right-handed notification effect. The light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started so that the 47 emits light. Similarly, when the control corresponding to the opening effect for 7 seconds is completed, the display control device 100 starts the control corresponding to the right-handed notification effect set to be executed next to the opening effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display a moving image corresponding to the right-handed notification effect on the symbol display device 41.

When the opening period set to 10 seconds ends, the main control device 60 starts the opening / closing processing period, and also transmits an opening start command indicating that the opening / closing processing period has started to the voice emission control device 90. ..

When the voice emission control device 90 receives the release start command from the main control device 60 after finishing the control corresponding to the right-handed notification effect for 3 seconds, whether or not the control corresponding to the round effect is already being executed. If it is determined that the control corresponding to the round effect is not being executed, the round effect is set to be executed. After setting the voice emission control device 90 to execute the round effect, the voice emission control device 90 transmits a round effect command for setting the display control device 100 to execute the round effect. After that, the voice emission control device 90 starts the control corresponding to the round effect. Specifically, the voice emission control device 90 starts the sound output control so that the sound corresponding to the round effect is output from the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 emit light in the light emission pattern corresponding to the round effect. As described above, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started.

The display control device 100 is set to execute the round effect when it receives a round effect command from the voice emission control device 90 after finishing the control corresponding to the right-handed notification effect for 3 seconds, and also supports the round effect. Start the control. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display a moving image corresponding to the round effect on the symbol display device 41.

When the number of times the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened reaches a predetermined number of times and the opening / closing processing period ends, the main control device 60 starts the ending period and starts the ending period for the voice emission control device 90. Send an ending command indicating that you have done so.

When the voice emission control device 90 receives the ending command from the main control device 60, the voice emission control device 90 is set to end the control corresponding to the round effect and execute the ending effect. After setting the voice emission control device 90 to execute the ending effect, the voice emission control device 90 transmits an ending effect command for setting the display control device 100 to execute the ending effect. After that, the voice emission control device 90 starts the control corresponding to the ending effect. Specifically, the voice emission control device 90 starts the voice output control so that the voice corresponding to the ending effect is output from the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending effect. As described above, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started.

When the display control device 100 receives the ending effect command from the voice emission control device 90, the display control device 100 ends the control corresponding to the round effect, sets to execute the ending effect, and starts the control corresponding to the ending effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display the moving image corresponding to the ending effect on the symbol display device 41.

Next, the process when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery in the high frequency support mode will be described with reference to FIG. 63 (B). The main difference from the processing when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery in the low frequency support mode described above is that the voice emission control device 90 that has received the opening command is determined not to be in the high frequency support mode, and the opening effect and the round. It is a point to set to execute the production. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

As shown in FIG. 63 (B), the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 sets the length of the opening period to 10 seconds regardless of the type of support mode when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery. At the same time as starting the opening period, an opening command indicating that the opening period has started is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90.

Upon receiving the opening command from the main control device 60, the voice emission control device 90 determines whether or not the current support mode type is the high frequency support mode by referring to the sound / light side support mode flag. When the voice emission control device 90 receives the opening command from the main control device 60 and determines that the current support mode type is the high frequency support mode, the voice emission control device 90 has a 7-second opening effect and a round effect. Is set to execute. That is, the voice emission control device 90 is set to continuously execute two processes (two effects in this embodiment) for one command.

After setting the voice emission control device 90 to execute the opening effect and the round effect, the voice emission control device 90 transmits an opening-round effect command for setting the display control device 100 to execute the opening effect and the round effect. do. After that, the voice emission control device 90 starts the control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the voice emission control device 90 starts voice output control so that the voice corresponding to the opening effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the opening effect. As described above, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started.

When the display control device 100 receives the opening-round effect command from the voice emission control device 90, the display control device 100 is set to execute the opening effect and the round effect for 7 seconds. That is, the display control device 100 is set to continuously execute two processes (two effects in this embodiment) for one command. After that, the display control device 100 starts the control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display the moving image corresponding to the opening effect on the symbol display device 41.

When the control corresponding to the opening effect for 7 seconds is completed, the voice emission control device 90 starts the control corresponding to the round effect set to be executed next to the opening effect. Specifically, the voice emission control device 90 starts the sound output control so that the sound corresponding to the round effect is output from the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 emit light in the light emission pattern corresponding to the round effect. As described above, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started. Similarly, when the control corresponding to the opening effect for 7 seconds is completed, the display control device 100 starts the control corresponding to the round effect set to be executed next to the opening effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display a moving image corresponding to the round effect on the symbol display device 41.

When the opening period set to 10 seconds ends, the main control device 60 starts the opening / closing processing period, and also transmits an opening start command indicating that the opening / closing processing period has started to the voice emission control device 90. ..

Upon receiving the release start command from the main control device 60, the voice emission control device 90 determines whether or not the control corresponding to the round effect is already being executed, and determines that the control corresponding to the round effect is being executed. If it is determined, the release start command is discarded, and the control corresponding to the round effect already being executed is continued. Therefore, in this case, the round effect command for setting the display control device 100 to execute the round effect is not transmitted. However, the display control device 100 continues the control corresponding to the round effect already being executed.

When the number of times the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened reaches a predetermined number of times and the opening / closing processing period ends, the main control device 60 starts the ending period and starts the ending period for the voice emission control device 90. Send an ending command indicating that you have done so.

When the voice emission control device 90 receives the ending command from the main control device 60, the voice emission control device 90 is set to end the control corresponding to the round effect and execute the ending effect. After setting the voice emission control device 90 to execute the ending effect, the voice emission control device 90 transmits an ending effect command for setting the display control device 100 to execute the ending effect. After that, the voice emission control device 90 starts the control corresponding to the ending effect. Specifically, the voice emission control device 90 starts the voice output control so that the voice corresponding to the ending effect is output from the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending effect. As described above, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started.

When the display control device 100 receives the ending effect command from the voice emission control device 90, the display control device 100 ends the control corresponding to the round effect, sets to execute the ending effect, and starts the control corresponding to the ending effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display the moving image corresponding to the ending effect on the symbol display device 41.

According to the present modification 3 described above, in addition to the effects of the above-described embodiment, modification 1 and modification 2, the following effects are exhibited.

According to the third modification, the voice emission control device 90 can grasp the state of the support mode of the main control device 60, and receives a command having the same content from the main control device 60. However, since different effects are executed depending on the state of the support mode of the main control device 60, the main control device 60 commands various contents in order to cause the voice emission control device 90 to execute various effects. Can be reduced in the processing load of the main control device 60 and the storage capacity required for the command information storage area 63f of the main ROM 63 can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. ..

Specifically, according to the third modification, the voice emission control device 90 executes the opening effect when the opening command is received during the low frequency support mode, and receives the opening command during the high frequency support mode. If so, the round effect is executed after the opening effect is executed. Therefore, even if the voice emission control device 90 is made to execute the opening effect, or the voice emission control device 90 is made to execute the opening effect and then the round effect is executed, the main control device 60 is used. Since the opening command having the same contents may be transmitted, for example, when the voice emission control device 90 is to execute the opening effect, the command for executing the opening effect is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90, and the voice is emitted. When the light emission control device 90 is made to execute the opening effect and then the round effect is executed, it is compared with the configuration in which the command for executing the round effect is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 after the opening effect is executed. Therefore, the processing load of the main control device 60 can be reduced, and the storage capacity required for the command information storage area 63f of the main ROM 63 can be reduced.

Further, according to the third modification, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the opening command during the low frequency support mode, the right-handed notification effect is executed after the opening effect is executed. Therefore, for example, the main The control device 60 transmits an opening command for causing the voice emission control device 90 to execute the opening effect, and further transmits a right-handed notification command for executing the right-handed notification effect (comparative example shown in FIG. 35). The processing load of the main control device 60 can be reduced, and the storage capacity required for the command information storage area 63f of the main ROM 63 can be reduced.

Further, according to the present modification 3, the voice emission control device 90 can grasp the state of the support mode of the main control device 60, and the opening command is based on the state of the support mode of the main control device 60. Since the main control unit 60 determines the content of the effect to be executed in the opening period, which is the period from the reception of It is not necessary to change the mode of transmitting and, and the opening command and the opening start command can be transmitted in the same transmission mode each time. Therefore, it is possible to omit the control required for the main control device 60 to change the transmission mode for transmitting the opening command and the open start command according to the state of the support mode, and the processing load of the main control device 60 can be reduced. Can be reduced. Further, since the program for executing the control can be deleted, the program capacity of the main ROM 63 can be reduced. Further, according to the present modification 3, the main control device 60 issues commands of various contents to the voice emission control device 90 in order to cause the voice emission control device 90 to perform various effects according to the state of the support mode. The processing load of the main control device 60 can be reduced as compared with the configuration for transmitting.

Further, according to the present modification 3, the main control device 60 has an opening period regardless of whether the support mode state when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery is the low frequency support mode or the high frequency support mode. Set the length of to 10 seconds. That is, the main control device 60 transmits the opening command and the opening start command at the same interval even if the state of the support mode when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery is different. Therefore, according to the present modification 3, the control required for the main control device 60 to change the interval for transmitting the opening command and the opening start command according to the state of the support mode can be omitted. The processing load of the control device 60 can be reduced. Further, since the program for executing the control can be deleted, the program capacity of the main ROM 63 can be reduced.

Further, according to the present modification 3, when the state of the support mode when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery is the low frequency support mode, the voice emission control device 90 produces an opening effect in the front part of the opening period. Execute, and execute the right-handed notification effect in the latter part of the opening period. Then, when the state of the support mode when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery is the high frequency support mode, the opening effect is executed in the front part of the opening period, and the round effect is executed in the rear part of the opening period. Therefore, according to the present modification 3, in the front part of the opening period, the same effect is executed regardless of the state of the support mode of the main control device 60, and in the rear part of the opening period, the main control device 60 Since different effects are executed according to the state of the support mode, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to how the contents of the effects will change from the front part to the rear part of the opening period. .. Further, according to the present modification 3, in the latter part of the opening period, it is possible to execute an effect including contents suitable for the state of the support mode of the main control device 60.

B7-4. Modification 4:
In the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the voice emission control device 90 is configured to sequentially execute two effects (opening effect and right-handed notification effect) when an opening command is received. It may be configured to execute one or more effects in sequence. According to this configuration, the timing at which the voice emission control device 90 receives the release start command changes, so that the number of the effects actually executed out of the three or more set effects changes. Therefore, by controlling and changing the timing at which the main control device 60 transmits the release start command, it is possible to change the number of effects to be executed by the voice emission control device 90.

B7-5. Modification 5:
In the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the main control device 60 is configured to transmit an opening start command to the voice emission control device 90 triggered by the start of the opening / closing processing period, but the main control device 60 is variable. The opening / closing door 36b of the winning device 36 may be configured to transmit an opening start command to the voice emission control device 90 when the opening / closing door 36b is actually opened.

B7-6. Modification 6:
In the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 are configured to execute the right-handed notification effect after the opening effect is completed when the right-handed notification effect is executed. , The display of the right-handed notification effect and the output of the sound may be superimposed and executed while the display of the opening effect and the output of the sound are continued. For example, the right-handed notification effect may be executed by displaying a small character such as "right-handed!" On the upper layer of the display while continuing the display of the opening effect.

B7-7. Modification 7:
In the above embodiment and the above modification 1, the length of the opening period when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery in the high frequency support mode is the length of the opening period when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery in the low frequency support mode. Although it is configured to be shorter than the length, the length of the opening period when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery in the high probability mode is set to the opening when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery in the low probability mode. It may be configured to be shorter than the length of the period.

B7-8. Modification 8:
In the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, when the voice emission control device 90 receives a plurality of commands from the main control device 60, the voice emission control device 90 measures the reception interval of the plurality of commands and is based on the measured reception interval. It may be configured to determine the type of effect to be executed. According to such a configuration, since the main control device 60 does not have to transmit various commands corresponding to each effect, the processing load of the main control device 60 can be reduced.

B7-9. Modification 9:
In the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, when the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 receive a command for executing another effect while the effect is being executed, the effect being executed is being executed. May be terminated to execute the effect corresponding to the received command. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty in recognizing each effect due to the duplicate execution of a plurality of unrelated effects.

B7-10. Modification 10:
In the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the configuration is such that the high-frequency support mode is entered after the open / close execution mode ends, but the high-frequency support mode is not changed even after the open / close execution mode ends. May be good. Further, the configuration may include a jackpot type that shifts to the high-frequency support mode after the open / close execution mode ends, and a jackpot type that does not shift to the high-frequency support mode.

B7-11. Modification 11:
The configurations of the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications can be applied to other configurations in which commands are transmitted and received between the two devices.

For example, the main control device 60 transmits a variation command (variation pattern command) including information on the variation time to the voice emission control device 90, and then transmits a confirmation command for stopping (confirming) the symbol. It can also be applied to the configuration to be used. Specifically, for example, the voice emission control device 90 that has received the variable command is set to sequentially execute a plurality of effects such as a notice effect, a reach effect, and a super reach effect, and the plurality of effects are sequentially executed. If a confirmation command is received during the operation, the effect being executed may be terminated and the confirmation effect for stopping the symbol may be executed.

Further, for example, the main control device 60 transmits an open command indicating the start of a round (for example, a first round open command) to the voice emission control device 90, and then an open command indicating the start of the next round (for example). For example, it can be applied to a configuration for transmitting a second round open command). Specifically, for example, the voice emission control device 90 that has received the first round release command is set to execute the first round effect corresponding to the first round, and 2 during the execution of the first round effect. When the round opening command is received, the first round effect being executed may be terminated and the second round effect may be executed. The first round effect, the second round effect, and the like are realized by sequentially executing a plurality of processes by the voice emission control device 90.

Further, for example, the voice emission control device 90 transmits an effect command instructing the display control device 100 to execute a predetermined effect, and then an effect operation indicating that the effect operation button 24 is pressed by the player. It can also be applied to configurations that send commands. Specifically, for example, the display control device 100 that has received the panel selection effect command has a panel selection effect for selecting one panel from a plurality of panels (for example, an effect that a plurality of panels rotate or move). , The effect that the frame of the panel moves) is set to be executed, and if the effect operation command is received while the panel selection effect is being executed, the panel selection effect being executed is terminated and the plurality of panels are executed. It may be configured to execute the production of the contents corresponding to the predetermined panel included in the panel. The panel selection effect is realized by the display control device 100 sequentially executing a plurality of processes.

Further, for example, the main control device 60 transmits to the voice emission control device 90 a variation command (variation pattern command) including information on the variation time and a type command including information on the result of the jackpot lottery. It can also be applied to configurations. Specifically, for example, the voice emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect to be executed in the game round and the content of the effect to be executed in the opening period based on the interval at which the variable command and the type command are received. It may be configured.

B7-12. Modification 12:
In the above embodiment, the voice emission control device 90 may or may not execute the right-handed notification effect due to the difference in the reception interval of the opening command and the opening start command, but it is included in the opening command. Depending on the content of the information, the voice emission control device 90 may or may not execute the right-handed notification effect.

C. Third embodiment:
C1. Structure of the gaming machine:
The structure of the gaming machine in this embodiment will be described.

FIG. 64 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13. On the back surface of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a voice emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 with respect to the outer frame 11 and a function of locking the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window portion 18 is formed in a substantially central portion of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and illumination parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. Illuminations are composed of light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the effect of the effect by lighting or blinking at the time of the big hit lottery, the big hit winning, the reach occurrence, etc. performed by the pachinko machine 10. Further, a glass unit 19 made of two plate glasses is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 19. The details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper plate 20 and a lower plate 21 for storing game balls. The upper plate 20 is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface, and stores game balls such as rental balls rented from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game balls stored in the upper plate 20 are supplied to the game ball launch mechanism included in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball launch mechanism is driven by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player, and launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20 and is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. The lower plate 21 stores the game balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 20. On the bottom surface of the lower plate 21, a discharge port 22 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 21 is formed. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch between the closed state and the open state of the discharge port 22 by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22, and the game ball is discharged to the outside from the lower plate 21.

A staging operation button 24 as an operation receiving means is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20. The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the effect operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs a game effect reflecting the operation.

Further, on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front, an operation handle 25 for the player to operate is provided. When the player operates (rotates) the operation handle 25, the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there is a touch sensor 25a for permitting the driving of the game ball launch mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the launch of the game ball by the game ball launch mechanism by a pressing operation by the player, and an operation handle 25. A variable resistor 25c that detects the rotation operation amount of the above by the change of the electric resistance is provided. When the player grasps the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes according to the rotation operation amount. Then, the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

Further, on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 in the front view, a game ball launch button 26 for the player to operate is provided. When the game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is launched to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined firing intensity regardless of the amount of rotation of the player's operation handle 25. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball launch button 26, the game ball is launched to the front surface of the game board with the same firing strength as when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 25 is maximum. In the case of the present embodiment, when the game ball is launched by operating the game ball launch button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the front view of the game board and flows down to the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball launch button 26, the player can make a so-called "right-handed". The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the game ball is launched to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. .. That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball launch button 26 to launch the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball launch button 26. Can be realized.

In the present embodiment, the game ball launch button 26 is arranged on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 in the front view, but the game ball launch button 26 is arranged at another position. It may be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball launch button 26 is arranged inside (peripheral portion) of the operation handle 25 in the same manner as the weight button 25b. By doing so, the player can operate the operation handle 25, the weight button 25b, and the game ball launch button 26 only with his right hand.

FIG. 65 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, and a third control unit 53. Specifically, these mechanical portions are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13.

The first control unit 51 includes a main control device 60. The main control device 60 has a main control board having a function of controlling the main control of the game and a function of monitoring the power supply. The main control board is housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material.

The second control unit 52 includes a voice emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The voice emission control device 90 controls light emission means such as a speaker and various lamps provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the symbol display device based on the command transmitted from the voice emission control device 90. The design display device includes a liquid crystal display that displays a design or an image for directing.

The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70 and a launch control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. The launch control device 80 launches a game ball having a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player when an instruction to launch the game ball is input from the main control device 60. Controls the ball launch mechanism. In addition, on the back surface of the inner frame 13, a tank 54 to which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a slope connected below the tank 54 and gently inclined so that the game balls flow to the downstream side. A predetermined number of game balls are paid out according to an instruction from the payout control device 70 by receiving the supply of game balls from the tank rail 55 having the tank rail 55, the case rail 56 vertically connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, and the case rail 56. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as the payout device 71, are provided.

FIG. 66 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding the game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and discharged to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicular to the game board 30, and various accessories such as a windmill are arranged. These nails 42 and the windmill disperse and organize the falling direction of the game ball flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is provided with a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning mechanism KH. As shown in the figure, the variable winning mechanism KH is a mechanism including a first variable winning device 57 and a second variable winning device 58. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display unit 45. The main display unit 45 has a special figure unit 37, a normal figure unit 38, and a round display unit 39.

The general winning openings 32 are entry openings into which game balls can enter, and a plurality of general winning openings 32 are provided on the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the general winning opening 32, 10 game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls.

The first starting port 33 is an entry port into which a game ball can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided below the center of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a big hit lottery described later is executed.

The second starting port 34 is an entry port into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls and a big hit lottery described later is executed. Further, the second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a.

The through gate 35 is provided with a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction. The through gate 35 is a through gate that serves as an opportunity to execute a lottery for opening the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control device 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory opening lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the electric service is won, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the electric service open state in which the electric service is opened in a predetermined mode. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flow direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after passing through the second starting port 34. It is possible to enter the ball into the starting port 34. In this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the prize ball is not paid out.

The first variable winning device 57 includes a first large winning opening 57a leading to the back side of the game board 30, and a first opening / closing door 57b for opening and closing the first large winning opening 57a. The first opening / closing door 57b is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter the first large winning opening 57a. When a big hit is made in the big hit lottery described later, the first opening / closing door 57b is opened, and the game ball can enter the first big winning opening 57a.

The second variable winning device 58 includes a second large winning opening 58a leading to the back side of the game board 30, and a second opening / closing door 58b for opening and closing the second large winning opening 58a. The second opening / closing door 58b is normally closed so that the game ball cannot enter the second large winning opening 58a. When a big hit is made in the big hit lottery, the second opening / closing door 58b is opened, and the game ball can enter the second big winning opening 58a.

The second large winning opening 58a of the second variable winning device 58 has a V winning region FV and a non-V winning region FNV. The V winning area FV and the non-V winning area FNV will be described later.

The second variable winning device 58 is arranged downstream of the first variable winning device 57. The game ball that has reached the first variable winning device 57 at the timing when the first opening / closing door 57b of the first variable winning device 57 is closed passes over the first opening / closing door 57b and reaches the second variable winning device 58. do. At this time, if the second opening / closing door 58b is in the open state, the game ball enters the second large winning opening 58a.

Hereinafter, the first variable winning device 57 and the second variable winning device 58 are also simply referred to as "variable winning devices". Further, the first large winning opening 57a and the second large winning opening 58a are also simply referred to as "large winning openings", and the first opening / closing door 57b and the second opening / closing door 58b are also simply referred to as "opening / closing doors".

When the game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the main control device 60 executes a jackpot lottery (internal lottery). As a result of the big hit lottery, if the big hit or the small hit is won, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode. The opening / closing execution mode is a mode for executing opening / closing processing of the first opening / closing door 57b of the first variable winning device 57 and the second opening / closing door 58b of the second variable winning device 58. Specifically, when the first opening / closing door 57b and the second opening / closing door 58b shift to the opening / closing execution mode, the game ball enters the first large winning opening 57a and the second large winning opening 58a in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. It transitions to a possible open state, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, it transitions to a closed state again. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first prize opening 57a or the second prize opening 58a, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls by the payout device 71. The number of prize balls to be paid out by the payout device 71 when the game ball enters the first prize opening 57a and the payout device 71 when the game ball enters the second big prize opening 58a. A configuration different from the number of prize balls may be adopted.

Further, an out port 43 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 30, and the game ball that has not entered the various entry ports is discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only is the ball discharged from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also from the game area PA after passing through the opening. A mode in which the flow of the gaming area PA is continued without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, the entry of the game ball into the general winning opening 32, the first variable winning device 57, the second variable winning device 58, the first starting opening 33, and the second starting opening 34 is also referred to as winning. ..

The special symbol unit 37 includes a first symbol display unit 37a and a second symbol display unit 37b. The first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b are each composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first symbol display unit 37a is a display unit for displaying the first symbol. The first symbol is a symbol that is variablely displayed or stopped and displayed based on a jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33. The first symbol display unit 37a is used as a display mode until the segment display is displayed according to the lottery result when the big hit lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 is performed. , The variable display of the first symbol or the predetermined display is performed. When the lottery is completed, the first symbol display unit 37a causes the segment display to display the stop display of the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, the game times in which the jackpot lottery is executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 will also be referred to as the game times for the first start port.

The second symbol display unit 37b is a display unit for displaying the second symbol. The second symbol is a symbol that is variablely displayed or stopped and displayed based on a jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. The second symbol display unit 37b is used as a display mode until the segment display is displayed according to the lottery result when the big hit lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is performed. , A variable display of the second symbol or a predetermined display is performed. When the lottery is completed, the second symbol display unit 37b causes the segment display to display the stop display of the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, the game times in which the jackpot lottery is executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 34 are also referred to as the game times for the second start opening.

Here, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b to the stop display is set. Also called variable time. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a to the stop display is also referred to as the first variable time, and is displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b. The time from the start of the variable display of the displayed second symbol to the stop display is also referred to as the second variable time.

The special figure unit 37 further includes a first hold display unit 37c and a second hold display unit 37d made of LED lamps at positions adjacent to the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b.

The first hold display unit 37c displays the number of holds of the first start port 33 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be turned on. In the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the first starting port 33 are reserved.

The second hold display unit 37d displays the number of holds of the second start port 34 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be turned on. In the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the second starting port 34 are reserved.

The normal drawing unit 38 is composed of a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electric accessory opening lottery triggered by the passage of the through gate 35 is performed, the normal drawing unit 38 causes the light emitting display to display a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined mode as the display mode of the light emitting display. When the electric accessory opening lottery is completed, the normal drawing unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display unit 39 is composed of a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games generated in the open / close execution mode, or displays corresponding to the number of round games. The round game means that either a predetermined upper limit duration elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enters the first variable winning device 57 or the second variable winning device 58. It is a game in which the first opening / closing door 57b or the second opening / closing door 58b is continuously opened until one of the conditions is satisfied. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the open / close execution mode is started, and ends when the open / close execution mode ends.

The special figure unit 37, the normal figure unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being composed of a segment display device or a light emitting display device using an LED lamp, and for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and the like. It may be configured by various display devices capable of showing the lottery in progress and the lottery result, such as a CRT or a dot matrix display.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the symbol display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. The configuration of the display device included in the variable display unit 40 is not limited to the symbol display device 41, and may be configured by various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first symbol display unit 37a makes a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, the symbol display device 41 displays the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol accordingly. I do. Further, when the second symbol display unit 37b makes a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol accordingly. Is displayed. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to displaying the fluctuation of the symbol or a predetermined display triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, and when a big hit is won. It also displays the effect during the open / close execution mode that shifts. Hereinafter, the details of the symbol display device 41 will be described.

FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram showing a symbol and a display surface 41a that are variablely displayed on the symbol display device 41. FIG. 67A is an explanatory diagram showing a liquid crystal display symbol that is variablely displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. The liquid crystal display symbol is an image displayed on the symbol display device 41, and corresponds to the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b. It is a design. When the game round triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 is executed, the liquid crystal display symbol corresponding to the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a is displayed on the display surface. A liquid crystal display corresponding to the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b when the game is displayed on the 41a and triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34. The symbol is displayed on the display surface 41a.

As shown in FIG. 67 (a), the symbol display device 41 variablely displays the symbols showing the numbers 1 to 8 as the liquid crystal display symbols. As the symbol to be displayed in a variable manner, a symbol having a pattern such as a character may be adopted for each of the symbols showing the numbers 1 to 8.

FIG. 67B is an explanatory diagram showing a display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. As shown in the figure, the main display area MA is displayed on the display surface 41a. In the main display area MA, three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right are displayed. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the symbols 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 67 (a) are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol row has a periodicity from top to bottom or from bottom. A variable display that scrolls up is performed. As shown in FIG. 67 (b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stopped state on the effective line L. Specifically, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, a variable display in which the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity is started. Then, each scrolling symbol switches from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3. .. When the variation display of the symbol is completed and the display is stopped, if the result of the jackpot lottery by the main control device 60 is the jackpot winning, a predetermined combination of symbols is placed on the effective line L. It is formed. For example, the same combination of symbols is formed on the effective line L. The mode of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiment, and the number of symbol rows, the number of effective lines, the direction of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol row, and the symbol of each symbol row. Various modes such as numbers can be adopted as the mode of variable display of the symbol.

Here, the game times refer to the period from the start of the variable display of the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b to the end of the variable display, the stop display, and the end of the stop display. It is one unit of the process of notifying the player of the lottery result of the big hit lottery about the special information acquired based on the winning of either the first start opening 33 or the second start opening 34. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one big hit lottery for each game. When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the first symbol display unit 37a or the first symbol display unit 37a or the first symbol display unit 37a is obtained for each game. 2 In one of the symbol display units 37b, after the segment display is variablely displayed, the segment display is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays the special information for each game. After the symbol sequence is variablely displayed as the first liquid crystal display symbol or the second liquid crystal display symbol, the symbol sequence is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, the time required for one game is also referred to as a unit game time. The unit game time is composed of a variable time, which is the time from the start of the variable display to the stop display of the predetermined lottery result, and a stop time, which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. There is.

As shown in FIG. 67 (b), the first reserved display area Ds1 and the second reserved display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the first reserved display area Ds1, a display corresponding to the number of reserved game times based on the winning of the first starting port 33 is displayed. In the second reserved display area Ds2, a display corresponding to the number of reserved game times based on the winning of the second starting port 34 is displayed. The reserved game times are unexecuted game times, and are fluctuations for notifying the lottery result of the jackpot lottery with respect to the special information acquired based on the winning of the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. The game times that the display has not started. The number of reserved game times that can be held based on the winning of the first starting port 33 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, the hold display corresponding to the four hold game times can be displayed in the first hold display area Ds1. In addition, the number of reserved game times that can be held based on the winning of the second starting port 34 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, the second hold display area Ds2 can display the hold display corresponding to the four hold game times.

Further, as shown in FIG. 67 (b), on the display surface 41a, a blinking display and lighting synchronized with the variation display and the stop display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a of the special figure unit 37 are displayed. The first synchronous display unit Sync1 for displaying and the second synchronous display for performing blinking display and lighting display synchronized with the fluctuation display and stop display of the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b of the special figure unit 37. A unit Sync2 is provided. Specifically, when the first symbol display unit 37a is displaying a variable display, the first synchronous display unit Sync1 is blinking, and when the first symbol display unit 37a is displaying a stop, the first symbol display unit 37a is displayed. 1 Synchronous display unit Sync1 displays lighting. Further, when the second symbol display unit 37b is displaying a variable display, the second synchronous display unit Sync2 blinks, and when the second symbol display unit 37b is displaying a stop display, the second synchronous display is displayed. The unit Sync2 displays lighting.

In the present embodiment, the display surface 41a is configured to display the main display area MA, the liquid crystal display area NA, the first synchronous display unit Sync1, and the second synchronous display unit Sync2. A configuration may be adopted in which the surface 41a does not display a part or all of these displays.

C2. Electrical configuration of gaming machines:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to a block diagram.

FIG. 68 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly composed of a main control device 60, and also includes a voice emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 composed of elements having a plurality of functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 that records various control programs and fixed value data, and a RAM 64 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing a program recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. In addition, another element may have a part of the function which MPU 62 has. Further, details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85 are connected to the input side of the main control board 61. The main control board 61 receives a DC stable 24V power supply from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power source into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc. Supply power. Further, on the input side of the main control board 61, there are a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device (first variable winning device 57, second variable winning device 58). ) And various detection sensors provided in various entrances and through gates are connected. Based on the signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not the game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each entry port, and the game ball passes through the through gate. It is determined whether or not it has been done. Further, the MPU 62 executes a jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34.

On the output side of the main control board 61, a first opening / closing operation of an electric accessory driving unit 34b for opening / closing the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 and a first opening / closing door 57b of the first variable winning device 57 are performed. The variable winning drive unit 57c, the second variable winning drive unit 58c that opens and closes the second opening / closing door 58b of the second variable winning device 58, and the main display unit 45 are connected to each other. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, the MPU 62 drives and controls the first variable winning drive unit 57c and the second variable winning drive unit 58c so that the first opening / closing door 57b and the second opening / closing door 58b are opened / closed in the open / close execution mode. To execute. Further, when the electric accessory opening is won as a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory driving unit 44b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. Further, in each game, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b in the main display unit 45, and in the open / close execution mode, the round display on the main display unit 45 is performed. The display control of unit 39 is executed.

Further, the payout control device 70 and the voice emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the main control board 61. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the payout control device 70 based on the ball entry determination result. When the main control device 60 transmits a prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Specifically, when the entry of a game ball into the general winning opening 32 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the first starting port 33. When the entry of the game ball is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of the three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is specified. A prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 to pay out the prize balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

A launch control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70. The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball launch mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met. Further, an operation handle 25 is connected to the launch control device 80. As described above, the operation handle 25 includes a touch sensor 25a, a weight button 25b, and a variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes according to the rotation operation amount. The game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. Further, a game ball launch button 26 is connected to the launch control device 80. When the game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is configured to be fired on the game board provided that the touch sensor 25a is on.

The voice emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main control device 60 transmits various commands, the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to. Details of these various commands will be described later.

In addition, the voice emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 composed of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14 and the drive control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. At the same time, control of the display control device 100 is performed. Further, the effect operation button 24 is connected to the voice emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, the game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls various lamps 47, speakers 46, display control device 100, and the like.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps the variation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 and the type of the combination of the symbols to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90. , Whether or not reach has occurred, the content of the reach effect, and the content of the effect executed while the first liquid crystal display symbol and the second liquid crystal display symbol are variable display. In this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the first liquid crystal display symbol or the second liquid crystal display symbol is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the fluctuation time, the unit game round time, which is the time required for one game round, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for big hit lottery and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 performs a big hit lottery, a display setting of the main display unit 45, a symbol display setting of the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery. When sorting the jackpot types, the jackpot type counter C2 is used. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not to generate reach when the symbol sequence displayed on the symbol display device 41 is displaced and varied.

The random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, the fluctuation type counter CS is used when determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b of the main display unit 45, and the symbol display device 41. Further, the electric accessory opening counter C4 is used for the electric accessory opening lottery for whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time the counter is updated, and the counter value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

Further, the RAM 64 is provided with a hold information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. The hold information storage area 64b is provided with a first hold area Ra and a second hold area Rb. In the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the first starting port 33, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS at the timing of entering the ball are stored in the reserved information storage area. It is stored in the first holding area Ra of 64b in chronological order. Further, when the game ball enters the second starting port 34, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS at the timing of entering the ball are set in the reserved information storage area 64b. 2 It is stored in the holding area Rb in chronological order.

The details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery as described above. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 1199, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. Further, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 1199).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the updated value is set in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry. It is stored, and when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry.

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first hold area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c, collated with the hit / miss table stored in the hit / miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and is matched with the jackpot. It is determined whether or not it becomes. Further, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second hold area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c and collated with the hit / miss table stored in the hit / miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. Whether or not it will be a big hit is determined.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is such that the game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. By doing so, the process moves to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c in the order acquired. Then, the jackpot random number counter C1 moved to the execution area AE is collated with the hit / miss table stored in the hit / miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and it is determined whether or not the hit is a big hit.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 39, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0.

The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, and when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the determination processing execution area 64c. The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in. Further, the MPU 62 determines the display mode of the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b by using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2. .. In making the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

Next, the details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not reach occurs when the result of the jackpot lottery is not a jackpot. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 238, reach a maximum value, and then return to 0.

The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b. It is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the ball. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first hold area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c and then collated with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to reach. Is determined. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second hold area Rb is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c and then collated with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to reach. Is determined. However, when the result of the big hit lottery becomes a big hit and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 determines that the reach is generated regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Reach means that some of the symbols displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41 may have a combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot for some of the symbols. It is a display state in which the symbols are displayed and the remaining symbols are displayed in a variable manner. The combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment means a combination of the same symbols on a predetermined effective line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. 67 (b), the symbol is first stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbol as Z1 is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3. In the situation where the reach line is formed and the reach line is formed, the symbol is varied and displayed in the symbol row Z2 to reach the reach. Then, when a big hit occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the reach, in the state where the reach line is formed, the variable display of the symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows, and the reach effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen. A combination of symbols on which a reach line is formed is reduced or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform a reach effect. In addition, when the reach effect is performed or before the reach display, it is determined whether or not to display a notice using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character by using the reach random number counter C3 or another counter. You may.

Next, the details of the variable type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 62 to determine the variation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b and the variation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, reach a maximum value, and then return to 0.

The variation type counter CS is updated once every time the normal processing described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal processing. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of the variation display on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b and at the start of the variation of the symbol by the symbol display device 41. When determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b, the fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used.

Next, the details of the electric accessory opening counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 465, reach a maximum value, and then return to 0. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric service holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 stored in the electric accessory holding area 64d moves to the electric accessory execution area 64e, and then the electric accessory release in the electric accessory execution area 64e. A lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a in the open state by using the value of the counter C4. For example, if C4 = 0, 1, the electric accessory 34a is controlled in the open state, and if C4 = 2 to 465, the electric accessory 34a is maintained in the closed state.

It should be noted that at least one of the acquired value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4, and the value of the variable type counter CS is the special information in the present invention. Corresponds to. Further, at least one of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the value of the variable type counter CS stored in the first hold area Ra and the second hold area Rb is held. Also called information.

Next, the pass / fail table will be described. The hit / fail table is table data for collating with the jackpot random number counter C1 when performing a jackpot lottery based on the jackpot random number counter C1. The pachinko machine 10 has a low-probability mode and a high-probability mode set as a lottery mode for the big-hit lottery. At the time of the jackpot lottery in the probability mode, the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to. Further, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 collates with the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting port 33. The hit / miss table and the hit / miss table for collating with the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c at the timing when the game ball enters the second start port 34 are stored as separate table data. ing. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a pass / fail table for the first start port (for low probability mode), a pass / fail table for the first start port (for high probability mode), and a pass / fail table for the second start port (low). Four hit / miss tables, one for the probability mode) and the hit / miss table for the second start port (for the high probability mode), are stored in the hit / miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63.

FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the hit / fail table for the first starting port. FIG. 70 (a) shows a hit / miss table for the first starting port (for low probability mode), and FIG. 70 (b) shows a hit / miss table for the first starting port (for high probability mode).

As shown in FIG. 70A, five values 0 to 4 are set as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a jackpot in the hit / fail table (for low probability mode) for the first starting port. There is. Then, among the values of 0 to 1199, the values (5 to 1199) other than the five values of 0 to 4 are out of the range. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 70 (b), 16 values from 0 to 15 are set as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a jackpot in the hit / fail table (for high probability mode) for the first starting port. Has been done. Then, among the values of 0 to 1199, the values other than the 16 values of 0 to 15 are out of order. As described above, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery than the low probability mode.

FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the hit / fail table for the second starting port. FIG. 71 (a) shows a hit / miss table for the second starting port (for the low probability mode), and FIG. 71 (b) shows a hit / miss table for the second starting port (for the high probability mode).

As shown in FIG. 71 (a), five values 0 to 4 are set as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is the jackpot in the hit / fail table (for the low probability mode) for the second starting port. There is. Then, among the values of 0 to 1199, the values (5 to 1199) other than the five values of 0 to 4 are out of the range. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), 16 values from 0 to 15 are set as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a jackpot in the hit / fail table (for high probability mode) for the second starting port. Has been done. Then, among the values of 0 to 1199, the values other than the 16 values of 0 to 15 are out of order. As described above, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery than the low probability mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the hit / fail table for the low probability mode is the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the hit / miss table for the high probability mode. Included in the group. However, as a result of the jackpot lottery, if the probability of winning a jackpot is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the number and value of random numbers set as jackpots are arbitrary.

Although it is not adopted in the winning / failing table in this embodiment, a "small hit" may be provided as a result of the big hit lottery.

The "small hit" is an opportunity to shift to the open / close execution mode in which the variable winning device (first variable winning device 57, second variable winning device 58) is opened / closed, but both in the lottery mode and the support mode. This is a result of success or failure that does not trigger a transition. On the other hand, "off" is a result of success or failure that does not trigger the transition of the open / close execution mode, and also does not trigger the transition of the lottery mode and the support mode.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set for the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three modes or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Number of times (number of rounds) the opening / closing door of the variable winning device in the opening / closing execution mode
(2) Mode of opening / closing control of variable winning device in open / close execution mode (3) Lottery mode of big hit lottery after the end of open / close execution mode (low probability mode or high probability mode)

As an aspect of opening / closing control of the variable winning device in the above (2) opening / closing execution mode, an opening / closing pattern of the first opening / closing door 57b of the first variable winning device 57 and the second opening / closing door 58b of the second variable winning device 58 ( Hereinafter, a plurality of types (also simply referred to as “opening / closing patterns”) may be provided, and one type of opening / closing pattern may be set correspondingly for each type of jackpot. In the present embodiment, one type of opening / closing pattern is set correspondingly for each type of jackpot, and the opening / closing mode of the first opening / closing door 57b and the opening / closing mode of the second opening / closing door 58b are set for each opening / closing pattern. different. The opening / closing patterns of the first opening / closing door 57b and the second opening / closing door 58b in the present embodiment will be described later.

In addition, as an aspect of opening / closing control of the variable winning device in the opening / closing execution mode, the variable winning device (first variable winning device 57, second variable winning device 58) from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode is provided. A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequency of winning (winning) of a game ball is relatively high or low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, one opening of the opening / closing door 36b in the opening / closing execution mode is set to continue until 5 seconds have elapsed or until the number of game balls entered into the opening / closing door 36b reaches 7. can do. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, it is set to continue until 1.6 seconds have passed or until the number of balls entered into the opening / closing door 36b reaches 7 in the opening / closing execution mode. Can be done.

The opening limit time for one opening of the opening / closing door 36b and the opening limit number for one opening are variable winning devices (first variable winning device 57, first variable winning device 57, first) from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode. 2 If the frequency of ball entry into the variable winning device 58) is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing door (first opening / closing door 57b, second opening / closing door 58b) The opening mode is arbitrary. Specifically, the high-frequency winning mode may have a longer opening limit time for one opening or a larger number of opening limits for one opening than the low-frequency winning mode. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the open / close execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode is substantially a variable winning device (first variable winning device 57, second variable winning device 58). It may be configured so that no prize is generated. In this embodiment, the low-frequency winning mode is not provided, and the high-frequency winning mode is set for all jackpots.

In the present embodiment, when a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit lottery, the big hit type counter C2 is used to sort the big hit types. The distribution of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. FIG. 72 (a) shows a distribution table for the first starting port, and FIG. 72 (b) shows a distribution table for the second starting port. The distribution table for the first starting port is referred to at the time of the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, and the distribution table for the second starting port is to the second starting port 34. It is referred to in the big hit lottery based on the entry of the game ball.

As shown in the distribution table for the first starting port in FIG. 72 (a), the distribution table for the first starting port has a jackpot type based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33. 8R type 1 jackpot and 8R type 2 jackpot are set. In the present embodiment, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 27" corresponds to the 8R type 1 jackpot, and "28 to 39" corresponds to the 8R type 2 jackpot. Is set to.

In the 8R type 1 jackpot, the total number of times the first opening / closing door 57b of the first variable winning device 57 is opened and the number of times the second opening / closing door 58b of the second variable winning device 58 is opened in the open / close execution mode is 8 times (8). Round), and the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device (first variable winning device 57, second variable winning device 58) in the opening / closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. In addition, the 8R type 1 jackpot is a variable winning device (first variable winning device 57, second variable winning device 57, so that the game ball can easily enter the V winning area FV of the second winning opening 58a during the opening / closing execution mode. The opening / closing control of the opening / closing door (first opening / closing door 57b, second opening / closing door 58b) of the device 58) is performed. Then, when the game ball enters the V winning area FV, the lottery mode of the jackpot lottery after the opening / closing execution mode ends becomes the high probability mode.

In the present embodiment, in the 8R type 1 jackpot, the number of times the first opening / closing door 57b of the first variable winning device 57 is opened and the opening of the second opening / closing door 58b of the second variable winning device 58 in the opening / closing execution mode are performed. The total of the number of times is 8 times (8 rounds), that is, one of the first opening / closing door 57b and the second opening / closing door 58b is opened once during one round, but as another aspect, A mode may be adopted in which the opening / closing doors (first opening / closing door 57b, second opening / closing door 58b) are opened a plurality of times during one round. In the present embodiment, for control purposes, the number of rounds in the open / close execution mode is controlled by subtracting (decrementing) the numerical value set in the round counter area, which will be described later, by 1 each time one round is completed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is controlled so that either the first opening / closing door 57b or the second opening / closing door 58b is opened once by the time when the numerical value set in the round counter area is decremented once. .. As another embodiment, the opening / closing door (first opening / closing door 57b, second opening / closing door 58b) may be opened a plurality of times before the numerical value set in the round counter area is decremented once.

In the 8R type 2 jackpot, the total number of times the first opening / closing door 57b of the first variable winning device 57 is opened and the number of times the second opening / closing door 58b of the second variable winning device 58 is opened in the open / close execution mode is 8 times (8). Round), and the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device (first variable winning device 57, second variable winning device 58) in the opening / closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. Further, the 8R type 2 jackpot is a variable winning device (first variable winning device 57, second variable winning device 58) so that the game ball does not easily enter the V winning area FV of the big winning opening 58a during the opening / closing execution mode. ) Opening / closing doors (first opening / closing door 57b, second opening / closing door 58b) are controlled to open / close. However, if a game ball enters the V winning area FV, the lottery mode of the jackpot lottery after the opening / closing execution mode ends becomes the high probability mode.

In this way, the first-class jackpot is easier for the game ball to enter the V winning area FV during the round game than the second-class jackpot, so the lottery mode of the jackpot lottery after the opening / closing execution mode ends is higher. There is a high probability that it will be in probability mode. On the other hand, in the second type jackpot, compared to the first type jackpot, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the V winning area FV during the round game, so the lottery mode of the jackpot lottery after the opening / closing execution mode ends is a high probability mode. The probability of becoming is low.

As shown in the distribution table for the second starting port in FIG. 72 (b), the distribution table for the second starting port has a jackpot type based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34. 16R type 1 jackpot and 8R type 2 jackpot are set. In the present embodiment, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 27" corresponds to the 16R type 1 jackpot, and "27 to 39" corresponds to the 8R type 2 jackpot. Is set to.

In the 16R type 1 jackpot, the total number of times the first opening / closing door 57b of the first variable winning device 57 is opened and the number of times the second opening / closing door 58b of the second variable winning device 58 is opened in the opening / closing execution mode is 16 times (16). Round), and the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device (first variable winning device 57, second variable winning device 58) in the opening / closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. Further, the 16R type 1 jackpot is a variable winning device (first variable winning device 57, second variable winning device 57, so that the game ball can easily enter the V winning area FV of the second winning opening 58a during the opening / closing execution mode. The opening / closing control of the opening / closing door (first opening / closing door 57b, second opening / closing door 58b) of the device 58) is performed. Then, when the game ball enters the V winning area FV, the lottery mode of the jackpot lottery after the opening / closing execution mode ends becomes the high probability mode.

As described above, the 8R type 2 jackpot is the total of the number of times the first open / close door 57b of the first variable winning device 57 is opened and the number of times the second open / close door 58b of the second variable winning device 58 is opened in the open / close execution mode. Is 8 times (8 rounds), and the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device (first variable winning device 57, second variable winning device 58) in the opening / closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. In addition, the 8R type 2 jackpot is a variable winning device (first variable winning device 57, second variable winning device 57) so that the game ball does not easily enter the V winning area FV of the second winning opening 58a during the opening / closing execution mode. The opening / closing control of the opening / closing door (first opening / closing door 57b, second opening / closing door 58b) of the device 58) is performed. However, if a game ball enters the V winning area FV, the lottery mode of the jackpot lottery after the opening / closing execution mode ends becomes the high probability mode.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the distribution mode of the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot is the case where the jackpot is obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, and the case where the jackpot is obtained. 2 It is different from the case where a big hit is made based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port 34, and there is a clear difference in the advantage for the player.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and also uses the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE to perform the jackpot type. Further, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to cause the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b to stop and display the segment display. Determine the display mode. In making the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the end of the above-mentioned (3) opening / closing execution mode, the launch of the game ball to the game area PA continues in the same manner. The high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode are used so that the frequency with which the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is opened per unit time is relatively high or low when compared in the above-mentioned situations. Can be set.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the probability of winning the electric role opening in the electric accessory opening lottery using the electric accessory opening counter C4 differs between the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode. .. In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role opening in the electric accessory opening lottery is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the one-time opening time of the electric accessory 34a is set longer than that in the low-frequency support mode when the electric combination opening is won.

Although it is not adopted in this embodiment, in the case where the electric accessory opening is won in the high frequency support mode and the electric accessory 34a is opened multiple times, the next after one open state is completed. The closing time until the opening state is started may be set shorter than the one opening time. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the time secured from one electric accessory opening lottery to the next electric accessory opening lottery is set to be relatively shorter than in the low frequency support mode. You may.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability that the game ball enters the second starting port 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. That is, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary gaming state that assists in the establishment of the special information acquisition condition.

FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a winning / failing table (winning / failing table for electric accessory opening lottery) used when executing the electric accessory opening lottery.

FIG. 73A shows a winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the low frequency support mode) used in the low frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 73 (a), in the winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the low frequency support mode), two electric accessory opening counters C4, which are the electric accessory opening winning counters, are 0 and 1. The value is set. 464 values of 2 to 465 are set as the values of the electric accessory opening counter C4 that is out of alignment. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the electric accessory opening lottery is executed in the low frequency support mode, the electric accessory opening lottery is won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric accessory opening is won in the low frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

FIG. 73B shows a winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the high frequency support mode) used in the high frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 73 (b), in the winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the high frequency support mode), 462 electric accessory opening counters C4, which are the electric accessory opening winning, are set as values of 0 to 461. The value is set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as the values of the electric accessory opening counter C4 that is out of alignment. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the electric accessory opening lottery is executed in the high frequency support mode, the electric accessory opening lottery is won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric accessory opening is won in the high frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery is set so that the high-frequency support mode has a higher probability of the game ball entering the second starting port 34 than the low-frequency support mode. ..

C3. Outline of processing by the gaming machine:
Next, an outline of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 74 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the variable winning mechanism KH. As described above, the variable winning mechanism KH includes a first variable winning device 57 and a second variable winning device 58. FIG. 74A shows a perspective view of the variable winning mechanism KH when the first opening / closing door 57b and the second opening / closing door 58b are in the closed state. For convenience of explanation, as shown in the figure, the point where the game ball launched on the right side of the game board 30 first reaches the variable winning mechanism KH is called a reference point P0, and a plane on the variable winning mechanism KH including the reference point P0. The part is called a flat part SF.

The plane including the first opening / closing door 57b, the second opening / closing door 58b, and the flat surface portion SF is inclined downward from the right side of the game board 30 toward the center. The game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 toward the right side of the game board 30 flows down the right side of the game board 30 and reaches the reference point P0 of the flat surface portion SF. When the first opening / closing door 57b and the second opening / closing door 58b are in the closed state, the game ball that has reached the reference point P0 flows down in the order of the reference point P0 → the first opening / closing door 57b → the second opening / closing door 58b. As shown in the figure, for convenience of explanation, the direction in which the game ball flows down from the reference point P0 is defined as the X direction. As shown in the figure, the game ball passes through the upper surface of the closed first opening / closing door 57b in the X direction in about 0.4 seconds.

Further, six columnar convex portions 59 are arranged on the upper surface of the second opening / closing door 58b. The convex portion 59 is arranged on the upper surface of the second opening / closing door 58b so that its longitudinal direction is substantially perpendicular to the X direction. The convex portion 59 arranged on the upper surface of the second opening / closing door 58b adjusts the speed of the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the second opening / closing door 58b. The time required to pass the upper surface of 58b (passing time) is adjusted.

Two convex portions 59 are arranged in the region corresponding to the non-V winning region FNV on the upper surface of the second opening / closing door 58b. Further, four convex portions 59 are arranged in the region corresponding to the V winning region FV on the upper surface of the second opening / closing door 58b. By arranging the convex portion 59 in this way, the game ball passes through the region corresponding to the non-V winning region FNV on the upper surface of the second open / close door 58b in the closed state in about 2 seconds, and the second in the closed state. It passes through the area corresponding to the V winning area FV on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 58b in about 4 seconds.

FIG. 74 (b) shows the variable winning mechanism KH when the first opening / closing door 57b is in the open state. FIG. 74 (c) shows the variable winning mechanism KH when the second opening / closing door 58b is in the open state. During the period in which the opening / closing execution mode of the pachinko machine 10 is being executed, the first opening / closing door 57b and the second opening / closing door 58b transition between the open state and the closed state according to a predetermined opening / closing pattern. While the opening / closing execution mode is being executed, the first opening / closing door 57b and the second opening / closing door 58b are not opened at the same time, and the first opening / closing door 57b and the second opening / closing door 58b are shown in FIG. 74. It is one of the states shown in (a), the state shown in FIG. 74 (b), and the state shown in FIG. 74 (c). That is, there is an exclusive relationship between the case where the first opening / closing door 57b is in the open state and the case where the second opening / closing door 58b is in the open state.

FIG. 75 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a case where a game ball enters the first large winning opening 57a. FIG. 75A shows the game ball GB1 circulating on the upper surface of the first opening / closing door 57b immediately before the first opening / closing door 57b opens, and upstream from the first opening / closing door 57b immediately before the first opening / closing door 57b opens. It shows the game ball GB2 in circulation.

FIG. 75B shows a state immediately after the first opening / closing door 57b is opened. When the first opening / closing door 57b is opened, the game ball GB1 circulating on the upper surface of the first opening / closing door 57b immediately before the opening of the first opening / closing door 57b enters the first large winning opening 57a. After that, as shown in FIG. 75 (c), just before the opening of the first opening / closing door 57b, the game ball GB2 circulating upstream from the first opening / closing door 57b flows down and enters the first large winning opening 57a. do.

In this way, the game ball that circulates on the upper surface of the first opening / closing door 57b just before the first opening / closing door 57b opens, and the game ball that circulates upstream from the first opening / closing door 57b just before the first opening / closing door 57b opens. After the first opening / closing door 57b is opened, the ball enters the first large winning opening 57a.

FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a case where a game ball enters the non-V winning area FNV of the second large winning opening 58a. In FIG. 76A, the game ball GB3 circulating in the region corresponding to the non-V winning region FNV on the upper surface of the second opening / closing door 58b and the second opening / closing door 58b are opened immediately before the second opening / closing door 58b is opened. Immediately before, the game ball GB4 circulating upstream from the second opening / closing door 58b is shown.

FIG. 76B shows a state immediately after the second opening / closing door 58b is opened. When the second opening / closing door 58b is opened, the game ball GB3 that has been distributed in the area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV on the upper surface of the second opening / closing door 58b immediately before the opening of the second opening / closing door 58b is the second large winning opening 58a. Enter the non-V winning area FNV. After that, as shown in FIG. 76 (c), just before the second opening / closing door 58b opens, the game ball GB4 circulating upstream from the second opening / closing door 58b flows down, and the non-V of the second large winning opening 58a Enter the winning area FNV.

As described above, the game ball circulating in the area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV on the upper surface of the second opening / closing door 58b immediately before the opening of the second opening / closing door 58b, and the second opening / closing door 58b immediately before opening. The game ball circulating upstream from the opening / closing door 58b enters the non-V winning area FNV of the second large winning opening 58a after the second opening / closing door 58b is opened.

FIG. 77 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a case where a game ball enters the V winning area FV of the second large winning opening 58a. FIG. 77 (a) shows the game ball GB5 circulating in the area corresponding to the V winning area FV on the upper surface of the second opening / closing door 58b immediately before the opening of the second opening / closing door 58b, and immediately before the opening of the second opening / closing door 58b. 2 shows the game ball GB6 that circulates in the area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV on the upper surface of the second opening / closing door 58b.

FIG. 77 (b) shows a state immediately after the second opening / closing door 58b is opened. When the second opening / closing door 58b is opened, the game ball GB5 that has been distributed in the area corresponding to the V winning area FV on the upper surface of the second opening / closing door 58b immediately before the opening of the second opening / closing door 58b is the second large winning opening 58a. Enter the V winning area FV. On the other hand, the game ball GB6 that was distributed in the area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV on the upper surface of the second opening / closing door 58b immediately before the opening of the second opening / closing door 58b became the non-V winning area FNV of the second large winning opening 58a. Enter the ball and do not enter the V winning area FV.

In this way, the game ball that was distributed in the area corresponding to the V winning area FV on the upper surface of the second opening / closing door 58b immediately before the opening of the second opening / closing door 58b received the second big prize after the second opening / closing door 58b was opened. The game ball that enters the V winning area FV of the mouth 58a, but is distributed in the area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV on the upper surface of the second opening / closing door 58b immediately before the opening of the second opening / closing door 58b is the second. After the opening / closing door 58b is opened, the ball does not enter the V winning area FV of the second large winning opening 58a.

FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an opening / closing pattern of the first opening / closing door 57b and the second opening / closing door 58b in the opening / closing execution mode executed by the first type jackpot, and an example of the behavior of the game ball in the opening / closing pattern. be. The lower part of FIG. 78 shows a time chart showing the opening / closing patterns of the first opening / closing door 57b and the second opening / closing door 58b, and the upper part of FIG. 78 shows a graph showing an example of the behavior of the game ball in the opening / closing pattern. rice field. The horizontal axis shown between the time chart shown in the lower part of FIG. 78 and the graph shown in the upper part of FIG. 78 indicates the time (seconds) commonly used in the two figures.

As shown in the lower part of FIG. 78, in the opening / closing pattern in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the first type jackpot, the opening / closing operation of the first opening / closing door 57b is executed once as the first round of the round game. After that, the opening / closing operation of the second opening / closing door 58b is executed until the number of rounds of the jackpot is reached. For example, in the case of the 8R type 1 jackpot, the opening / closing operation of the first opening / closing door 57b is executed once as the first round, and then the opening / closing operation of the second opening / closing door 58b is executed seven times as the second to eighth rounds. The door. Further, in the case of the 16R type 1 jackpot, the opening / closing operation of the first opening / closing door 57b is executed once as the first round, and then the opening / closing operation of the second opening / closing door 58b is executed 15 times as the second to 16th rounds. Will be done. For convenience of illustration, FIG. 79 shows the opening / closing operation of the second opening / closing door 58b up to the fourth time.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the first type jackpot and the second type jackpot, the opening / closing doors (first opening / closing door 57b, second opening / closing door 58b) shift from the open state to the closed state. The conditions to be met (hereinafter, also referred to as "closed conditions") are as follows.
・ Seven game balls have entered the large winning opening corresponding to the open / close door. ・ 10 seconds have passed with the open / close door open. If either one of the above two items is satisfied. The opening / closing door (first opening / closing door 57b, second opening / closing door 58b) shifts from the open state to the closed state.

Further, in addition to the above-mentioned closing conditions, the opening / closing control of the opening / closing door (first opening / closing door 57b, second opening / closing door 58b) of the variable winning device (first variable winning device 57, second variable winning device 58) is the opening / closing door. Is controlled by an open scenario, which is a program in which the conditions for transitioning to an open state are recorded. Opening scenarios are prepared for each type of jackpot. In this embodiment, there are three programs: 16R type 1 jackpot opening scenario, 8R type 1 jackpot opening scenario, and 8R type 2 jackpot opening scenario. Is prepared. Further, in each opening scenario prepared for each type of jackpot, the time until the opening / closing door is changed from the closed state to the open state, and the opening / closing door (first opening / closing door 57b, second opening / closing door 58b) are opened. The order of is recorded for each round in the open / close execution mode. For example, in the open / close execution mode in the 8R type 1 jackpot, the first open / close door 57b shifts from the open state to the closed state to end the first round, and then the second open / close door 58b is in the open state as the second round. However, the time from when the first opening / closing door 57b shifts to the closed state to when the second opening / closing door 58b shifts to the open state is set in the 8R type 1 jackpot opening scenario.

If the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery, the main CPU 62 reads the opening scenario corresponding to the type of the jackpot, and whether or not the first opening / closing door 57b and the second opening / closing door 58b should be opened according to the read opening scenario. Make a judgment. In this way, the opening / closing control of the opening / closing door based on the closing condition and the opening scenario is executed by the main CPU 62.

As described above, when the first type jackpot is won, the variable winning device (first variable winning device) so that the game ball can easily enter the V winning area FV of the second winning opening 58a during the opening / closing execution mode. The opening / closing control of the opening / closing doors (first opening / closing door 57b, second opening / closing door 58b) of the device 57 and the second variable winning device 58) is performed. In the present embodiment, by controlling the timing of shifting the opening / closing door to the open state based on the opening scenario, the game ball can easily enter the V winning area FV of the second large winning opening 58a.

Specifically, the period from the closing of the second opening / closing door 58b to the next opening of the second opening / closing door 58b (hereinafter, also referred to as "second opening / closing door closing period CLT") is the period of the second opening / closing door 58b. The time until the game ball passes through the area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV on the upper surface (2 seconds in this embodiment) and the entire upper surface of the second opening / closing door 58b (the area corresponding to the V winning area FV). By setting the non-V winning area (the area including the area corresponding to the FNV) to be less than the time until the game ball passes (6 seconds in this embodiment), during the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the first type jackpot. , The game ball is controlled so as to easily enter the V winning area FV of the second large winning opening 58a. Hereinafter, the time until the game ball passes through the region corresponding to the non-V winning region FNV on the upper surface of the second opening / closing door 58b is also referred to as “non-V winning region transit time NVT”. Further, the time until the game ball passes over the entire upper surface of the second opening / closing door 58b is also referred to as "total passage time ALT". That is, in the present embodiment, in the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the first type jackpot, the second opening / closing door closing period CLT is set to the non-V winning area passage time NVT ≤ the second opening / closing door closing period CLT <total passage time ALT. By setting so as to be, the game ball is controlled so as to be easy to enter the V winning area FV of the second large winning opening 58a. The principle will be described below.

Non-V winning area transit time NVT ≤ 2nd opening / closing door closing period By setting CLT, the game ball that reaches the uppermost stream of the upper surface of the 2nd opening / closing door 58b after the 2nd opening / closing door 58b is closed is the second. It is possible to pass the region corresponding to the non-V winning region FNV on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 58b and flow down to the region corresponding to the V winning region FV on the upper surface of the second opening / closing door 58b. Therefore, the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 at intervals of 0.6 seconds reaches the reference point P0 of the variable winning mechanism KH every 0.6 seconds, and the uppermost stream portion of the upper surface of the second opening / closing door 58b. By setting the non-V winning area passage time NVT ≤ second opening / closing door closing period CLT to the uppermost stream of the second opening / closing door 58b after the second opening / closing door 58b is closed. The game ball that reaches the portion first is passed through the area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV on the upper surface of the second opening / closing door 58b, and is distributed to the area corresponding to the V winning area FV on the upper surface of the second opening / closing door 58b. Can be made to. That is, during the period when the second opening / closing door 58b is closed, at least one game ball is present in the region corresponding to the V winning region FV on the upper surface of the second opening / closing door 58b. Therefore, by setting the second opening / closing door closing period CLT to a value equal to or greater than the non-V winning area transit time NVT and shifting the second opening / closing door 58b to the open state, it is easy to enter the game ball into the V winning area FV. can do.

Further, by setting the second opening / closing door closing period CLT <total passage time ALT, the second opening / closing door 58b is opened before the game ball passes through the most downstream portion of the upper surface of the second opening / closing door 58b. Then, the game ball can be entered into the V winning area FV. That is, the game ball that reaches the most upstream portion of the second opening / closing door 58b after the second opening / closing door 58b is closed can be entered into the second large winning opening 58a (V winning area FV). As a result, in the opening / closing execution mode, the variable winning mechanism KH was reached during the period from the time when the opening / closing door was started to open in the second round to the time when the opening / closing door which was in the open state in the last round was changed to the closed state. It is possible to prevent the game ball from passing through the variable winning mechanism KH and entering the out opening 43 without entering the first large winning opening 57a or the second large winning opening 58a. .. In other words, in the open / close execution mode, the variable winning mechanism KH is distributed during the period from the time when the open / close door is started to open in the second round to the time when the open / close door, which is in the open state in the last round, shifts to the closed state. Almost all the game balls to be played can be entered into the first large winning opening 57a or the second large winning opening 58a. Therefore, when the player hits right during a round game corresponding to the type 1 jackpot (8R type 1 jackpot, 16R type 1 jackpot), the player does not miss the game ball that has reached the variable winning mechanism KH. The ball can be entered into the winning opening (first large winning opening 57a or second large winning opening 58a). Therefore, the player can efficiently obtain the privilege (prize ball) during the round game.

In the present embodiment, as the value of the second opening / closing door closing period CLT satisfying the above conditions, the second opening / closing door closing period CLT = 3 seconds is set in the opening scenario. Further, the period from the time when the first opening / closing door 57b opened in the first round shifts to the closed state to the time when the second opening / closing door 58b shifts to the open state is also set to 3 seconds depending on the opening scenario. After the first opening / closing door 57b opened in the first round shifts to the closed state, the game ball that reaches the upper surface of the first opening / closing door 57b first passes the most downstream of the upper surface of the second opening / closing door 58b. 2 By shifting the opening / closing door 58b to the open state, the game ball that has reached the upper surface of the second opening / closing door 58b from the end of the first round to the start of the second round also enters the second large winning opening 58a. Can be made to. As a result, in the opening / closing execution mode, the variable winning mechanism KH is distributed during the period from the time when the opening / closing door is started to open in the first round until the opening / closing door which is in the open state in the last round shifts to the closed state. Almost all game balls can be entered into the first large winning opening 57a or the second large winning opening 58a. For this reason, in the present embodiment, the period from the time when the first opening / closing door 57b opened in the first round shifts to the closed state to the time when the second opening / closing door 58b shifts to the open state is an opening scenario. Is set to 3 seconds.

The reason for opening the first opening / closing door 57b in the first round of the round game in the first-class jackpot is the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing door in the opening / closing execution mode of the second-class jackpot, which will be described later, and the first-class jackpot described above. This is to make it similar to the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing door in the opening / closing execution mode, and to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the opening / closing door is a first-class jackpot or a second-class jackpot from the behavior of the opening / closing door. The reason for opening the first opening / closing door 57b in the first round of the round game in the second type jackpot will be described later.

Next, the behavior of the game ball when the opening / closing pattern in the opening / closing execution mode of the first type jackpot is executed will be described. As described above, a graph showing an example of the behavior of the game ball when the opening / closing pattern in the opening / closing execution mode of the first type jackpot is executed is shown in the upper part of FIG. 78. The vertical axis of the graph shows the distance in the X direction with respect to the reference point P0 (see FIG. 74 (a)) of the variable winning mechanism KH as the origin. Further, on the vertical axis, a region corresponding to the first winning opening 57a (upper surface of the first opening / closing door 57b) and a region corresponding to the second winning opening 58a (upper surface of the second opening / closing door 58b) in the X direction are shown. Indicated.

As described above, the horizontal axis of the graph is time (seconds). The solid line and the broken line shown in the graph show the behavior of one game ball. That is, the solid line and the broken line show the behavior of the game ball flowing down in the X direction from the reference point P0 of the variable winning mechanism KH with the passage of time. In the graph shown in this explanation, the game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 at intervals of 0.6 seconds reaches the reference point P0 of the variable winning mechanism KH every 0.6 seconds, and the variable winning mechanism KH is set. The behavior of the game ball when it is distributed in the X direction is shown.

The solid thick rectangular area shown in the graph corresponds to the open state of the first open / close door 57b and the second open / close door 58b in the open / close pattern of the first open / close door 57b and the second open / close door 58b of the first type jackpot. The area to be used (hereinafter, also referred to as an open area) is shown. When the solid line showing the behavior of the game ball overlaps with the open area, the game ball has entered the large winning opening (first large winning opening 57a or second large winning opening 58a) corresponding to the open area. Is shown. The broken line showing the behavior of the game ball shows the behavior of the game ball in the X direction when the game ball does not enter the big winning opening.

Further, the point "・" shown at the intersection of the solid line showing the behavior of the game ball and the open area indicates that the game ball enters the big winning opening (first big winning opening 57a or second big winning opening 58a). Shows. That is, the number of points "・" in contact with one open area is increased by opening and closing the opening / closing door (first opening / closing door 57b or second opening / closing door 58b) corresponding to the open area. Alternatively, it is the number of game balls that have entered the second large winning opening 58a). As described above, in the present embodiment, as a closing condition, when seven game balls enter the large winning opening corresponding to the opening / closing door in the open state, the opening / closing door shifts from the open state to the closed state. Therefore, seven points "." Are in contact with each of the open area corresponding to one opening of the first opening / closing door 57b and the opening area corresponding to one opening of the second opening / closing door 58b.

In addition, among the points "・" that touch each open area, the points "・" that touch the vertical side of the rectangle indicating the open area have already circulated on the upper surface of the open door before the open / close door is opened. At the same time as the opening / closing door is opened, it indicates that the ball has entered the large winning opening (or winning area) corresponding to the opening / closing door. That is, it corresponds to the behavior of the game ball GB1 shown in FIG. 75, the game ball GB3 shown in FIG. 76, the game ball GB5 and the game ball GB6 shown in FIG. 77.

On the other hand, of the points "・" that touch each open area, the points “・” that touch the side of the rectangle indicating the open area circulate upstream from each open / close door before the open / close door is opened. After opening the opening / closing door, it indicates that the ball has reached the large winning opening (or winning area) corresponding to the opening / closing door and entered the large winning opening (or winning area). That is, it corresponds to the behavior of the game ball GB2 shown in FIG. 75 and the game ball GB4 shown in FIG. 76.

In the present embodiment, in the opening scenario for the first type jackpot (16R type 1 jackpot, 8R type 1 jackpot), the second opening / closing door closing period CLT = 3 seconds is set. Therefore, the condition of the above-mentioned "non-V winning area transit time NVT (2 seconds) ≤ second opening / closing door closing period CLT (3 seconds)" is satisfied. Therefore, as can be seen from the graph, at least one game ball has entered the V winning area FV area of the second large winning opening 58a in each round after the second round.

Further, the condition of the above-mentioned "second opening / closing door closing period CLT (3 seconds) <total passage time ALT (6 seconds)" is satisfied. Therefore, for convenience of illustration, only the fifth round can be shown, but after the start of the second round, almost all the game balls circulating in the variable winning mechanism KH have the first big winning opening 57a or the second big winning opening 58a. You can see that you are in the ball.

In this embodiment, the second opening / closing door closing period CLT = 3 seconds is set in the opening scenario for the first type jackpot (16R type 1 jackpot, 8R type 1 jackpot), but the second opening / closing door is closed. By further increasing the value of the period CLT, it is possible to control so that more game balls enter the V winning area FV area of the second large winning opening 58a in each round after the second round. For example, a value such as 4 seconds or 5 seconds can be set as the value of the second open / close door closing period CLT that satisfies the non-V winning area transit time NVT ≦ the second open / close door closing period CLT <total passage time ALT. ..

FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an opening / closing pattern of the first opening / closing door 57b and the second opening / closing door 58b in the opening / closing execution mode executed by the second type jackpot, and an example of the behavior of the game ball in the opening / closing pattern. be. The lower part of FIG. 79 shows a time chart showing the opening / closing patterns of the first opening / closing door 57b and the second opening / closing door 58b, and the upper part of FIG. 79 shows a graph showing an example of the behavior of the game ball in the opening / closing pattern. rice field. The horizontal axis shown between the time chart shown in the lower part of FIG. 79 and the graph shown in the upper part of FIG. 79 indicates the time (seconds) commonly used in the two figures.

As shown in the lower part of FIG. 79, the opening / closing pattern in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the type 2 jackpot is the same as the opening / closing pattern in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the type 1 jackpot described above, and is one round of the round game. As an eye, the opening / closing operation of the first opening / closing door 57b is executed once. After that, the opening / closing operation of the second opening / closing door 58b is executed until the number of rounds of the jackpot is reached.

Further, in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the second type jackpot, the closing condition, which is a condition for shifting from the open state to the closed state of the opening / closing door (first opening / closing door 57b, second opening / closing door 58b), is applied. .. Further, as the opening scenario, the opening scenario for 8R type 2 jackpot is applied.

As described above, the type 2 jackpot is a variable winning device (first variable winning device 57, second) so that the game ball does not easily enter the V winning area FV of the second winning opening 58a during the opening / closing execution mode. The opening / closing control of the opening / closing door (first opening / closing door 57b, second opening / closing door 58b) of the variable winning device 58) is performed. In the present embodiment, by controlling the timing of shifting the opening / closing door to the open state based on the opening scenario, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the V winning area FV of the second large winning opening 58a.

First, the opening / closing control of the second opening / closing door 58b in the second and subsequent rounds will be described. In the second and subsequent rounds, the second opening / closing door closing period CLT <non-CLT <non- V Winning area transit time Set to NVT. With this setting, the game ball that reaches the uppermost stream of the upper surface of the second opening / closing door 58b after the second opening / closing door 58b is closed corresponds to the non-V winning area FNV on the upper surface of the second opening / closing door 58b. The second opening / closing door 58b opens before passing through. Further, the game ball that reaches the uppermost stream portion of the upper surface of the second opening / closing door 58b after the second opening / closing door 58b is closed enters the non-V winning area FNV. During the period when the second opening / closing door 58b is in the open state, the game ball that has reached the upper surface of the second opening / closing door 58b enters the non-V winning area FNV. Then, when the second opening / closing door 58b is closed again, the game ball that has reached the uppermost stream portion of the upper surface of the second opening / closing door 58b forms a region corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV on the upper surface of the second opening / closing door 58b. However, since the second opening / closing door 58b is opened before the game ball passes through the area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV, the game ball enters the non-V winning area FNV. Therefore, in the second and subsequent rounds, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to enter the V winning area FV by setting the second opening / closing door closing period CLT <non-V winning area passing time NVT. In the present embodiment, as the value of the second opening / closing door closing period CLT satisfying the above conditions, the second opening / closing door closing period CLT = 1.8 seconds is set in the opening scenario.

Next, the reason for opening the first opening / closing door 57b in the first round will be described. As described above, in the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the second type jackpot, the second opening / closing door 58b is opened / closed multiple times, and the game ball is controlled so as not to easily enter the V winning area FV of the second winning opening 58a. do. At this time, if the player is hitting right before the opening / closing execution mode is started, if the second opening / closing door 58b is opened from the first round, the second opening / closing door 58b of the first round is opened. At the time of opening, there is a possibility that the game ball exists in the V winning area FV on the upper surface of the second opening / closing door 58b. I will enter the winning area FV. Therefore, in the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the second type jackpot, when the second opening / closing door 58b is first opened, a state in which the game ball does not exist in the V winning area FV on the upper surface of the second opening / closing door 58b is ensured. Therefore, the first opening / closing door 57b is opened in the first round.

After the first opening / closing door 57b shifts to the closed state, the game ball that first reaches the uppermost stream portion of the upper surface of the first opening / closing door 57b passes through the upper surface of the first opening / closing door 57b, and the second opening / closing door 58b. By opening the second opening / closing door 58b as the second round before passing through the area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV on the upper surface of the above, the game ball becomes the non-V winning area FNV of the second large winning opening 58a. You can enter the ball. That is, the time from the transition of the first opening / closing door 57b to the closed state to the transition of the second opening / closing door 58b to the open state is the first in the uppermost stream portion of the upper surface of the first opening / closing door 57b. In a time shorter than the time required for the reached game ball to advance to the most downstream portion of the region corresponding to the non-V winning region FNV on the upper surface of the second opening / closing door 58b (less than 2.6 seconds in this embodiment). It is necessary to be.

Further, a game ball that has passed the most downstream of the upper surface of the first opening / closing door 57b before opening the first opening / closing door 57b in the first round (for example, before opening the first opening / closing door 57b in the first round) is shown in FIG. The area corresponding to the V winning area FV on the upper surface of the second opening / closing door 58b when the first round ends and the second round starts) in the game ball circulating at the position of the game ball GB4 shown in (a). If the second opening / closing door 58b is opened as the second round, the game ball will enter the V winning area FV. Therefore, during the time from the transition of the first opening / closing door 57b to the open state in the first round to the transition of the second opening / closing door 58b to the open state in the second round, the game ball is on the upper surface of the first opening / closing door 57b. It is necessary that the time is longer than the time required to pass through the most downstream of the second opening / closing door 58b and pass through the most downstream of the upper surface of the second opening / closing door 58b (6.2 seconds or more in this embodiment).

In the present embodiment, 2.5 seconds is set as the opening scenario as the period from the transition of the first opening / closing door 57b opened in the first round to the opening of the second opening / closing door 58b in the second round. It is set. By setting in this way, the time from the transition of the first opening / closing door 57b to the closed state to the transition of the second opening / closing door 58b to the open state in the second round is 2.5 seconds, and the first opening / closing door The time is shorter than the time required to pass the upper surface of 57b (less than 2.6 seconds in this embodiment). In addition, the time from shifting the first opening / closing door 57b to the open state in the first round to shifting the second opening / closing door 58b to the open state in the second round is 6.2 seconds or more, and the game ball is the first. The time is longer than the time required to flow through the most downstream of the upper surface of the first opening / closing door 57b and pass through the most downstream of the upper surface of the second opening / closing door 58b. Therefore, in the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the second type jackpot, when the second opening / closing door 58b is first opened, the game ball does not exist in the area corresponding to the V winning area FV on the upper surface of the second opening / closing door 58b. Can be secured.

Next, the behavior of the game ball when the opening / closing pattern in the opening / closing execution mode of the second type jackpot is executed will be described. As described above, a graph showing an example of the behavior of the game ball when the opening / closing pattern in the opening / closing execution mode of the second type jackpot is executed is shown in the upper part of FIG. 79. Similar to FIG. 78, in the graph shown in this description, the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 at intervals of 0.6 seconds reaches the reference point P0 of the variable winning mechanism KH every 0.6 seconds. , The behavior of the game ball when the variable winning mechanism KH is distributed in the X direction is shown.

In the present embodiment, in the opening scenario for the second type jackpot (8R for the second type jackpot), the second opening / closing door closing period CLT = 1.8 seconds is set. Therefore, the condition of the above-mentioned "second opening / closing door closing period CLT (1.8 seconds) <non-V winning area transit time NVT (2 seconds)" is satisfied. Therefore, as can be seen from the graph, the game ball enters the V winning area FV of the second large winning opening 58a even though the second opening / closing door 58b has been opened / closed multiple times since the start of the opening / closing execution mode. I haven't. Further, for convenience of illustration, only the fifth round can be shown, but after the start of the first round, almost all the game balls circulating in the variable winning mechanism KH have the first big winning opening 57a or the second big winning opening 58a. You can see that you are in the ball.

In this embodiment, the second opening / closing door closing period CLT = 1.8 seconds is set in the opening scenario for the second type jackpot, but the value of the second opening / closing door closing period CLT in the second type jackpot is Since the second opening / closing door closing period CLT <non-V winning area transit time NVT may be satisfied, the value of the second opening / closing door closing period CLT can be further shortened. The outline of the processing by the gaming machine has been described above.

C4. Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of a specific process executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. The process executed by the main control device 60 will be described first, and then the process executed by the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is periodically (for example, 2 msec cycle) started by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60.

In step S30101, the reading process of various detection sensors is executed. That is, the state of various detection sensors connected to the main control device 60 is read, the state of the sensor is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. Then, the process proceeds to step S30102.

In step S30102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step S30103.

In step S30103, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory opening counter C4, and when each of these counter values reaches the maximum value, each of them is added. Clear to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step S30104. The value of the variable type counter CS is updated in the normal processing (FIG. 86) described later.

In step S30104, a winning process for the starting port accompanying the winning of the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is executed. The details of the winning process for the starting port in step S30104 will be described later. After executing step S30104, the process proceeds to step S30105.

In step S30105, a winning process for passing through is executed in association with winning the winning through the through gate 35. The details of the winning process for through in step S30105 will be described later. After executing step S30105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Prize processing for starting port>
Next, the winning process for the starting port will be described. The winning process for the start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 80: S30104).

FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing a winning process for the starting port. In step S20301, whether or not the game ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first starting opening 33 is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting opening 33. If it is determined in step S20301 that the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 33 (S30201: YES), the process proceeds to step S30202, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. To set. After that, the process proceeds to step S30203.

In step S30203, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 33. Then, the process proceeds to step S30204.

In step S30204, the start hold number RaN (hereinafter, also referred to as the first start hold number RaN), which is a value stored in the hold number storage area of the first hold area Ra, is read, and the first start hold number RaN will be described later. Set as the processing target. The first start hold number RaN indicates the hold number based on the winning of the first start port 33. Then, the process proceeds to step S30209.

If it is determined in step S20301 that the game ball has not won the first start opening 33 (S20301: NO), the process proceeds to step S30205, and it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the second start opening 34. 2 Judgment is made based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the starting port 34.

If it is determined in step S30205 that the game ball has won a prize in the second starting port 34 (S30205: YES), the process proceeds to step S30206, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. To set. Then, the process proceeds to step S30207. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S30205 that the game ball has not won a prize in the second starting opening 34 (S30205: NO), the winning process for the main starting opening is terminated.

In step S30207, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won a prize in the second starting port 34. Then, the process proceeds to step S30208.

In step S30208, the start hold number RbN (hereinafter, also referred to as the second start hold number RbN), which is a value stored in the hold number storage area of the second hold area Rb, is read, and the second start hold number RbN will be described later. Set as the processing target. The second start hold number RbN indicates the hold number based on the winning of the second start port 34. Then, the process proceeds to step S30209.

In step S30209, it is determined whether or not the start hold number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S30204 or step S30208 described above is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). In step S30209, if the starting hold number N is not less than the upper limit value (S30209: NO), the winning process for the main starting port is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S30209, if the start hold number N is less than the upper limit value (S30209: YES), the process proceeds to step S30210, 1 is added to the start hold number N of the corresponding hold area, and then the process proceeds to step S30211. , 1 is added to the value stored in the total reserved quantity storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total reserved quantity CRN). The total hold quantity CRN indicates the total value of the first start hold quantity RaN and the second start hold quantity RbN. Then, the process proceeds to step S30212.

In step S30212, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S30103 (FIG. 80), and the variable type counter CS updated in the normal processing (FIG. 86) are converted into values. It is stored in the first storage area in the free storage area of the corresponding hold area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the number of holds in which 1 is added in step S30210. Specifically, when the first start pending number RaN is set as the processing target, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the jackpot random number counter C3 updated in step S30103 (FIG. 80), and Each value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the first storage area in the free storage area of the first hold area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start hold number RaN to which 1 is added in step S30210. When the second start hold quantity RbN is set as the processing target, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter updated in step S30103 (FIG. 80). Each value of CS is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area of the second hold area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start hold number RbN obtained by adding 1 in step S30210. After executing step S30212, the process proceeds to step S30213.

In step S30213, the prior determination process is executed. The pre-judgment process is based on the information (holding information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS, and the jackpot lottery winning / failing determination result (lottery result) and the jackpot. This is a process for determining the type of the game, the presence / absence of reach, the fluctuation time of the game round, and the like before the reserved information becomes the target of the jackpot lottery by the main control device 60. The details of the pre-determination process will be described later. After executing step S30213, the process proceeds to step S30214.

In step S30214, a process of setting a hold command is executed. Specifically, the judgment result (first judgment information) of the first judgment processing executed based on the information (holding information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS. ) Is set as a hold command.

The hold command holds the determination result (first determination information) by the advance determination process based on the fact that a prize has been generated in the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 and the hold information acquired based on the prize. This is a command for the sub-side control device to confirm the information before the information is subject to the jackpot lottery by the main control device 60. The hold command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 86: step S30703) of the normal process described later.

Further, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the hold command transmitted based on the winning of the first start port 33, the number of hold display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 is increased. A command for making a change corresponding to the above is transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holds. On the other hand, when the hold command transmitted based on the winning of the second start port 34 is received, the voice emission control device 90 increases the number of holds the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41. A command for making a change corresponding to the above is transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holds.

After executing step S30214, the main MPU 62 ends the winning process for the main starting port.

<First judgment process>
Next, the prior determination process will be described. The pre-determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 81: S30213) of the winning process for the starting port.

FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the prior determination process. As described above, in the prior determination process, based on the pending information, the pending information is mainly used for determining whether or not the jackpot lottery is successful, determining the type of jackpot, determining whether or not a reach has occurred, determining the fluctuation time of the game times, and the like. This is a process to be executed before the target of the jackpot lottery by the control device 60.

In step S30301, the jackpot / reach information acquisition process is executed. This process is a process for determining whether or not a jackpot lottery is successful, determining the type of jackpot, and determining whether or not a reach has occurred. The details of the jackpot / reach information acquisition process will be described later. After executing step S30301, the process proceeds to step S30302.

In step S30302, the variable time information acquisition process is executed. This process is a process for determining the fluctuation time of the game times. The details of the variable time information acquisition process will be described later.

After executing step S30302, the destination determination process ends.

<Big hit / reach information acquisition process>
Next, the jackpot / reach information acquisition process will be described. The jackpot / reach information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 82: S30301) of the prior determination process.

FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the jackpot / reach information acquisition process. In step S30401, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area due to the winning of the starting port in the winning process for the starting port (FIG. 81) is read out. After that, the process proceeds to step S30402, and the lottery mode at the time when the big hit lottery by this winning prize is executed as a game round is determined. Specifically, the judgment result of the pre-judgment process executed by the previous prize is read from the corresponding storage area, and the lottery result of the big hit lottery executed before the big hit lottery by this prize is read. By the determination, the lottery mode at the time when the big hit lottery by this prize is executed as a game round is determined.

If it is determined in step S30402 that the lottery mode is the low probability mode at the time when the jackpot lottery due to the current winning is executed as a game round, the process proceeds to step S30403 (S30402: YES), and the winning / failing table storage area Refer to the pass / fail table for the low probability mode stored in 63a. After that, the process proceeds to step S30405, and as a result of referring to the hit / miss table for the low probability mode, it is determined whether or not the information of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

On the other hand, in step S30402, if it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low probability mode at the time when the big hit lottery due to the current winning is executed as the game round (S30402: NO), the process proceeds to step S30404 for the high probability mode. As a result of referring to the winning / failing table of, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot. After that, the process proceeds to step S30405, and as a result of referring to the hit / fail table for the high probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

If it is determined in step S30405 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read out this time corresponds to the jackpot (S30405: YES), the process proceeds to step S30406 and is stored in the storage area by winning a prize at the starting port this time. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is read out. After that, the process proceeds to step S30407, and the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b is referred to. Specifically, when the jackpot type counter C2, which is the target of distribution this time, is acquired based on the winning of the first starting port 33, refer to the distribution table for the first starting port. If it is acquired based on the winning of the second starting port 34, the distribution table for the second starting port is referred to. After executing step S30407, the process proceeds to step S30408.

In step S30408, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 read out this time corresponds to the type 1 jackpot. If it is determined in step S30408 that it corresponds to the first-class jackpot (S30408: YES), the process proceeds to step S30409, and the first-class jackpot information is stored in the first determination processing result storage area 64f. After that, the first determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S30408 that it does not correspond to the first type jackpot (S30408: NO), the process proceeds to step S30410, and the second type jackpot information is stored in the first determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the first determination process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S30405 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read out this time does not correspond to the jackpot (S30405: NO), the process proceeds to step S30411 and is stored in the storage area by winning a prize at the starting port this time. The value of the reached random number counter C3 is read out. After that, the process proceeds to step S30412, and the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step S30413, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

If it is determined in step S30413 that the reach generation is supported (S30413: YES), the process proceeds to step S30414, and the reach generation information is stored in the prior determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the first determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S30413 that the reach generation is not supported (S30413: NO), the prior determination process is terminated as it is.

<Variable time information acquisition process>
Next, the variable time information acquisition process will be described. The variation time information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 82: S30302) of the prior determination process.

FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the variable time information acquisition process. In step S30501, the value of the variable type counter CS stored in the storage area due to the winning of the starting port in the winning process for the starting port (FIG. 81) is acquired. Then, the process proceeds to step S30502.

In step S30502, it is determined whether or not the jackpot lottery related to this game round is a winner. Specifically, the presence or absence of a jackpot is determined based on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery determined by the jackpot / reach information acquisition process, and if it is a jackpot (S30502: YES), the process proceeds to step S30503.

In step S3053, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the jackpot fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. After executing step S30503, the process proceeds to step S30507.

In step S30507, the acquired fluctuation time information is stored in the pre-determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64. After that, the present variable time information acquisition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S30502 that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is not a jackpot (step S30502: NO), the process proceeds to step S30504 to determine whether or not reach occurs. If it is determined in step S30504 that reach will occur (S30504: YES), the process proceeds to step S30505.

In step S30505, the variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the reach generation variation time table stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. After that, the process proceeds to step S30507, the acquired fluctuation time information is stored in the pre-determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64, and then the fluctuation time information acquisition processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S30504 that reach does not occur in the current game round (step S30504: NO), the process proceeds to step S30506, and the variation time table for non-reach storage stored in the variation time table storage area 63d is displayed. With reference to this, the fluctuation time corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS this time is acquired. After that, the process proceeds to step S30507, the acquired fluctuation time information is stored in the pre-determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64, and then the fluctuation time information acquisition processing is terminated.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time table is set so that the larger the values of the first start hold number RaN and the second start hold number RbN, the shorter the fluctuation time. There is. That is, even if the value of the variation type counter CS is the same, the data of the variation time table to be referred to by the values of the first start hold number RaN and the second start hold number RbN when determining the variation time of the game round. Is different. At the time when the variable time acquisition process is executed as one process of the prior determination process, that is, at the time when the variable time of the reserved game times that is the target of the prior determination process is acquired, the reserved game that is the target of the process. The number of holdings at the time when the times are executed as game times is unknown. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time when it is assumed that the first start hold number RaN = 0 (and the second start hold number RbN = 0) is acquired. Therefore, the value of the variable time acquired by the present variable time acquisition process may be different from the actual variable time when the reserved game times targeted for the prior determination process are executed as the game times. In the present embodiment, the variable time acquired in the variable time acquisition process executed as one process of the prior determination process is also referred to as “temporary variable time Th”.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time table is set so that the larger the values of the first start hold number RaN and the second start hold number RbN, the shorter the fluctuation time. However, in addition, for example, the larger the value of the total number of reserved pieces CRN, the shorter the fluctuation time may be set. Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration that does not depend on the total number of reserved quantity CRNs may be used, and the fluctuation time may be set to be shorter as the number of total reserved quantity CRNs is smaller. Further, when the second start hold number RbN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start hold number RaN increases, and when the second start hold number RbN is "1" or more. May be set so that the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number of the second start hold number RbN increases. Further, when the second start hold number RbN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes longer as the number of the first start hold number RaN increases, and when the second start hold number RbN is "1" or more. May be set so that the fluctuation time becomes longer as the number of the second start reserved numbers RbN increases, or becomes constant without depending on the respective reserved numbers RaN and RbN.

Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the reach does not occur so that the shorter fluctuation time is selected as compared with the case where the number of pending information is the same as in the situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode. A variable time table may be set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected fluctuation times may be the same, and the above relationship may be reversed.

Further, the above configuration may be applied to the fluctuation time at the time of reach occurrence, and the fluctuation time that is easy to be selected and the fluctuation time that is difficult to be selected at the time of winning the jackpot and the time of losing reach may be different. good. Further, the variable time table for the type 1 jackpot, the variable time table for the type 2 jackpot, the variable time table for the missed reach, and the variable time table for the complete miss may be set individually.

<Prize processing for through>
Next, the winning process for through will be described. The winning process for thru is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 80: step S30105).

FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing a winning process for thru. In step S30601, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the through gate 35. If it is determined in step S30601 that the game ball has won the through gate 35 (S30601: YES), the process proceeds to step S30602, and whether or not the number of reserved items SN is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). Is determined. The number of reserved items SN is a value indicating the number of winnings to the through gate 35 reserved for performing the electric accessory opening lottery. In the present embodiment, the maximum value of the number of reserved items SN is 4. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S30601 that the game ball has not won the through gate 35 (S30601: NO), the winning process for this through is terminated.

If it is determined in step S30602 that the value is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) of the number of reserved items SN (S30602: YES), the process proceeds to step S30603, and 1 is added to the number of reserved items SN. Then, the process proceeds to step S30604.

In step S30604, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S30103 (FIG. 80) is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area of the electric service holding area 64c of the RAM 64. After that, the winning process for through is completed.

On the other hand, in step S30602, when it is determined that the value of the accessory holding number SN is not less than the upper limit value (S30602: NO), that is, when it is determined that the value of the accessory holding number SN is the upper limit value, the electric motor is used. The winning process for through is completed without storing the value of the accessory opening counter C4.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be described. The normal process is a process started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power is turned on. In the normal process, the main process of the game is executed.

FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step S30701, the start-up process is executed. Specifically, the initial setting of each control device when the power is turned on, the determination of the validity of the data stored and held in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S30702.

In step S30702, a start-up command is set. The start-up command is a command for starting a demo movie for each control device on the sub side when the power is turned on. Then, the process proceeds to step S30703.

In step S30703, output data such as a start-up command set in step S30702 and a command set in the timer interrupt process or the normal process executed last time is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. Further, when commands related to the effect such as a start-up command, a variable command, a type command, and a hold command are set, they are transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. After executing step S30703, the process proceeds to step S30704.

In step S30704, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the variable type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step S30705.

In step S30705, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step S30706. In step S30706, a game time control process for controlling a game in each game time is executed. In the game round control process, a big hit lottery, setting of a symbol variation display by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first symbol display unit 37a, the second symbol display unit 37b, and the like are performed. The details of the game times control process will be described later. After executing step S30706, the process proceeds to step S30707.

In step S30707, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. By executing the game state transition process, the game state shifts to the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, and the like. The details of the game state transition process will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step S30708.

In step S30708, an electric service support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided in the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric service support process, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is in the open state. The details of the processing for electric service support will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step S30709.

In step S30709, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the normal process this time (strictly speaking, the start of the command output process in step S30703). That is, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached. If it is determined in step S30709 that a predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed from the start of the current normal process (S30709: NO), in step S30710 and step S30711 until the execution timing of the next normal process is reached. Within the remaining time of, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step S30710, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Further, in step S3071, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S30709 that a predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed from the start of the normal process this time (S30709: YES), the process returns to step S30703 and each process from step S30703 to step S30708 is performed. Run.

Since the execution time of each process from step S30703 to step S30708 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be updated at random.

<Game times control process>
Next, the game times control process will be described. The game times control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 86: S30706) of the normal process.

FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the game times control process. In step S30801, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode flag is ON. The open / close execution mode flag is a flag that is turned on at the start of the open / close execution mode and turned off at the end of the open / close execution mode.

If it is determined in step S30801 that the open / close execution mode flag is ON (S30801: YES), it is determined that the open / close execution mode is in progress, and the game times control is performed without executing any of the processes after step S30802. End the process. That is, in the open / close execution mode, the game round is not started regardless of whether or not the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 has won a prize. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S30801 that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (S30801: NO), the process proceeds to step S30802.

In step S30802, it is determined whether or not the main display unit 45 is in the variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not either the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b is in variable display. This determination is made by determining whether or not the variable display flag in the variable display flag storage area in the various jackpot flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The variable display flag is turned on when starting variable display for either the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b, and is turned off when the variable display ends.

If it is determined in step S30802 that the main display unit 45 is not in the variable display (S30802: NO), the process proceeds to the process for starting the game round in steps S30803 to S30806. In step S30803, it is determined whether or not the total reserved quantity CRN is “0”. When the total reserved quantity CRN is "0", it means that the starting reserved quantity is "0" for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. Therefore, if it is determined in step S30803 that the total reserved number CRN is “0” (S30803: YES), the game round control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S30803 that the total number of reserved pieces CRN is not "0" (S30803: NO), the process proceeds to step S30804.

In step S30804, a data setting process for setting the data stored in the first reserved area Ra or the second reserved area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30805. The details of the data setting process will be described later.

In step S30805, a variation start process for starting the variation display on the main display unit 45 and the variation display on the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation start processing will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step S30806.

In step S30806, the value of the game count counter PNC is subtracted by 1. The game count counter PNC is a counter for counting the number of game times executed in the high frequency support mode. After executing step S30806, the game round control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S30802 that the main display unit 45 is in the variable display (S30802: YES), the process for advancing the game rounds of steps S30807 to S30811 is executed.

In step S30807, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the current game round has elapsed. As described above, the fluctuation time is the time from the start of fluctuation of the symbol row to the stop of all the symbol rows, and is a part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step S30807, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time counter area (various counter areas 64f) of the RAM 64 is "0". The value of the fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time setting process (FIG. 90) described later. The value of the set fluctuation time information is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started.

If it is determined in step S30807 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S30807: NO), the process proceeds to step S30808 to execute the fluctuation display process. The variable display process is a process for changing the display mode in the symbol display unit related to the current game round. After executing step S30808, the game times control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S30807 that the fluctuation time has elapsed (S30807: YES), the process proceeds to step S30809 to execute the fluctuation end processing. In the variation end processing, the symbol display unit is displayed so that the mode of the symbol to be displayed on the symbol display unit determined in the variation start processing (FIG. 89) described later is displayed on the symbol display unit related to the current game round. Display control. After executing step S30809, the process proceeds to step S30810.

In step S30810, it is determined whether or not any of the jackpot flags (16R type 1 jackpot flag, 8R type 1 jackpot flag, 8R type 2 jackpot flag) is ON. If any of the jackpot flags is ON in step S30810 (S30810: YES), the process proceeds to step S30811.

In step S30811, the open / close execution flag is turned ON. After that, the game round control process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S30810, if none of the jackpot flags is ON (S30810: NO), the game round control process is terminated without executing step S30811.

<Data setting process>
Next, the data setting process will be described. The data setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 87: S30804) of the game turn control process.

FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the data setting process. In step S30901, it is determined whether or not the hold area to be processed for executing the data setting process is the first hold area Ra. Specifically, among the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra (FIG. 69) in time series, the hold information stored first (hold stored in the first area of the first hold area Ra). Information) is stored in the first area of the second hold area Rb (information), which is the earliest hold information stored in the second hold area Rb (FIG. 69) in time series. If it is stored in the hold area before the hold information), it is determined that the hold area to be processed is the first hold area Ra. On the other hand, the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb in time series is earlier than the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra in time series. If the stored hold information is stored in the hold area first, it is determined that the hold area to be processed is the second hold area Rb. That is, by executing the process of step S30901, the reserved information can be processed in the order stored in the first reserved area Ra or the second reserved area Rb.

If it is determined in step S30901 that the hold area to be processed is the first hold area Ra (step S3091: YES), the data setting process for the first hold area in steps S30902 to S30907 is executed. On the other hand, in step S30901, when it is determined that the reserved area to be processed is not the first reserved area Ra, that is, when it is determined that the reserved area to be processed is the second reserved area Rb (step S3091: NO). ), The data setting process for the second reserved area in steps S30908 to S30913 is executed.

In step S30902, after subtracting 1 from the first start hold number RaN in the first hold area Ra, the process proceeds to step S30903 and the total hold number CRN is subtracted by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step S30904. In step S30904, the data stored in the first area of the first holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. Then, the process proceeds to step S30905.

In step S30905, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first holding area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted such as the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area. After executing step S30905, the process proceeds to step S30906.

In step S30906, when the second symbol display unit flag of the various jackpot flag storage areas 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and when it is not ON, the state is maintained. The second symbol display unit flag is information for specifying whether the target for starting the variation display this time is the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b. Then, the process proceeds to step S30907.

In step S30907, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the voice emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that the data in the hold area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information that the hold area targeted for the current data shift corresponds to the first hold area Ra, that is, corresponding to the first start port 33. A shift command including the information of the presence is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. After that, the data setting process is terminated.

The shift command set in step S30907 is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step S30703 in the normal process (FIG. 86). The voice emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a command for changing the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds, based on the received shift command. do. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds.

In step S30901, when it is determined that the reserved area to be processed is not the first reserved area Ra, that is, when it is determined that the reserved area to be processed is the second reserved area Rb (step S3091: NO). Step S30908 proceeds.

In step S30908, the second start hold quantity RbN of the second hold area Rb is subtracted by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step S30909. In step S30909, the total number of reserved pieces CRN is subtracted by 1, and the process proceeds to step S30910 to move the data stored in the first area of the second reserved area Rb to the execution area AE. Then, the process proceeds to step S30911.

In step S3091, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second holding area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted such as the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area. After executing step S30911, the process proceeds to step S30912.

In step S30912, if the second symbol display unit flag of the various jackpot flag storage areas 64g is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and if it is ON, that state is maintained. Then, the process proceeds to step S30913.

In step S30913, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the voice emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that the data in the hold area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information that the hold area targeted for the current data shift corresponds to the second hold area Rb, that is, corresponding to the second start port 34. A shift command including the information of the presence is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. After that, this data setting process is terminated.

The shift command set in step S30913 is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step S30703 in the normal process (FIG. 86). The voice emission control device 90 gives a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds, based on the received shift command. Send. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds.

<Variation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start processing will be described. The variation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 87: S30805) of the game turn control process.

FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing. In step S31001, it is determined whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag of the various jackpot flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The high-probability mode flag is a flag for the MPU 62 to specify whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high-probability mode. After that, it is turned off when the second kind jackpot is won. If it is determined in step S31001 that the mode is in the high probability mode (S31001: YES), the process proceeds to step S31002.

In step S31002, the pass / fail determination is performed with reference to the pass / fail table for the high probability mode. Specifically, when the fluctuation start process is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first start port 33, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the value matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the winning / failing table (for high probability mode) for the first starting port shown in 70 (b). Further, when the fluctuation start process is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is shown in FIG. 71 (b). ), It is determined whether or not the value matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the winning / failing table for the second starting port (for the high probability mode). Then, the process proceeds to step S31004. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31001 that the mode is not in the high probability mode (S31001: NO), the process proceeds to step S31003.

In step S31003, the pass / fail determination is performed with reference to the pass / fail table for the low probability mode. Specifically, when the fluctuation start process is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first start port 33, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the value matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the winning / failing table (for the low probability mode) for the first starting port shown in 70 (a). Further, when the fluctuation start process is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is FIG. 71 (a). ), It is determined whether or not the value matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the winning / failing table for the second starting port (for the low probability mode). Then, the process proceeds to step S31004.

In step S31004, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination (big hit lottery) in step S31002 or step S31003 is the big hit winning. In step S31004, when the result of the winning / failing determination is a big hit (S31004: YES), in steps S31005 to S31012, in order to set the process for setting the game result in the case of the big hit winning and the stop result. Executes the processing of.

In step S31005, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display unit flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S31005 that the second symbol display unit flag is not ON (S31005: NO), the process proceeds to step S31006, and the distribution table for the first starting port (see FIG. 72 (a)) is referred to. Then, the distribution is determined. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of the 8R type 1 jackpot or the numerical range of the 8R type 2 jackpot.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31005 that the second symbol display unit flag is ON (S31005: YES), the process proceeds to step S31007, and the distribution table for the second starting port (see FIG. 72 (b)). The distribution is determined with reference to. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of the 16R type 1 jackpot or the numerical range of the 8R type 2 jackpot. After executing the process of step S31006 or step S31007. The process proceeds to step S31008.

In step S31008, it is determined whether or not the type of jackpot distributed in step S31006 or step S31007 is the first type jackpot. If it is determined in step S31008 that the game result is a first-class jackpot (S31008: YES), the process proceeds to step S31009.

In step S31009, the stop result setting process for the first type jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for the first type jackpot is to display any stop result on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b in this game round in which the first type jackpot is won. This is a process for setting whether to end the variable display in the state where it has been set. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the first type jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address of the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step S31006 or step S31007. Information is acquired, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S31009, the process proceeds to step S31010.

In step S31010, the flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S31006 or step S31007 is turned ON. Specifically, when it is a 16R type 1 jackpot, the 16R type 1 jackpot flag is turned ON, and when it is an 8R type 1 jackpot, the 8R type 1 jackpot flag is turned ON. Then, the process proceeds to step S31016.

On the other hand, in step S31008, when it is determined that the type of jackpot distributed in step S31006 or step S31007 is not the first type jackpot (S31008: NO), that is, when the type of the distributed jackpot is the second type jackpot. To step S31011.

In step S31011, the stop result setting process for the second type jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for the second type jackpot is to display any stop result on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b in this game round in which the second type jackpot is won. This is a process for setting whether to end the variable display in the state where it has been set. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the second type jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address of the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step S31006 or step S31007. Information is acquired, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S31011, the process proceeds to step S31012.

In step S31012, the flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S31006 or step S31007 is turned ON. In the present embodiment, the type of the type 2 jackpot is only the 8R type 2 jackpot, so the 8R type 2 jackpot flag is turned ON. If a plurality of types of type 2 jackpots are set, the corresponding type 2 jackpot flags are turned ON. Then, the process proceeds to step S31016.

In step S31004, if the result of the jackpot lottery in step S31002 or step S31003 is not a jackpot win (S31004: NO), the process proceeds to step S31013, and it is determined whether or not reach occurs in the game round. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is one with the value set as the occurrence of reach in the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c. Determine if you are doing it.

If it is determined in step S31013 that reach will occur in the game round (S31013: YES), the process proceeds to step S31014.

In step S31014, the stop result setting process for reach is executed. In this game, which is the stop result for reach, it is a process to set which stop result is displayed in the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b to end the variable display. be. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for reach in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is acquired. , The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S31014, the process proceeds to step S31016.

If it is determined in step S31013 that reach does not occur in the game round (S31013: NO), the process proceeds to step S31015.

In step S31015, the stop result setting process for disconnection is executed. The stop result setting process for the time of disengagement is to end the variable display with either the stop result displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b in the current game time, which is the disengagement result. It is a process for setting. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the out-of-order time in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is acquired. Then, the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S31015, the process proceeds to step S31016.

In step S31016, the variable time setting process is executed. The fluctuation time setting process is to set the fluctuation time, which is the time required for the current game round in the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b, based on the presence / absence of a big hit and the presence / absence of reach. It is the processing of. The details of the fluctuation time setting process will be described later. After executing step S31016, the process proceeds to step S31017.

In step S31017, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display unit flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S31017 that the second symbol display unit flag of the RAM 64 is not ON (S31017: NO), the process proceeds to step S31018, and the first variation command is set. The first variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning of the first starting port 33, and whether or not reach has occurred. And the information of the fluctuation time set in step S31016 are included.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31017 that the second symbol display unit flag is ON (S31017: YES), the process proceeds to step S31019, and the second variation command is set. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning of the second starting port 34, and whether or not a reach has occurred. And the information of the fluctuation time set in step S31016 are included. After executing step S31018 or step S31019, the process proceeds to step S31020.

In step S31020, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence / absence of a big hit, the result of the distribution determination, and the presence / absence of reach. That is, in the type command, as the type information of the jackpot, 16R type 1 jackpot information, 8R type 1 jackpot information, 8R type 2 jackpot information, or information on whether or not reach has occurred and the result of the loss. Contains information.

The variation command and the type command set in steps S31018 to S31020 are transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 by step S30703 in the normal process (FIG. 86). The voice emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game round based on the received variable command and the type command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. After executing step S31020, the process proceeds to step S31021.

In step S31021, among the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b, the symbol display unit corresponding to the current game round is started to display the variation of the symbol. Specifically, when the second symbol display unit flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the symbol display unit corresponding to the current game round is specified to be the first symbol display unit 37a, and the variable display is started. When the second symbol display unit flag is ON, it is specified that the symbol display unit corresponding to the current game round is the second symbol display unit 37b, and the variable display is started. After executing step S31021, this fluctuation start process ends.

<Variable time setting process>
Next, the variable time setting process will be described. The variation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 89: S31016) of the variation start process.

FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing a variable time setting process. In step S31101, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the execution area AE is acquired. After that, the process proceeds to step S31102.

In step S31102, it is determined whether or not the jackpot lottery related to this game round is a winner. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the jackpot flags (16R type 1 jackpot flag, 8R type 1 jackpot flag, 8R type 2 jackpot flag) of the RAM 64 is ON, and one of the flags is determined. If is ON (S31102: YES), the process proceeds to step S31103.

In step S31103, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the jackpot fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. After that, the process proceeds to step S31107, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S31102 that the jackpot lottery related to the current game round is not a win (S31102: NO), the process proceeds to step S31104, and it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round. Since this process (S31104) is executed when the jackpot lottery related to the current game round is not won in step S31102, reach occurs among the game rounds not won in the jackpot lottery in step S31104. It is determined whether or not the game is a game. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of reach, it is determined that reach occurs (S31104: YES), and the process proceeds to step S31105. When specifying whether or not reach has occurred using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to.

In step S31105, the variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired with reference to the reach generation variation time table stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time for reaching is constant. After that, the process proceeds to step S31107, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S31104 that reach does not occur in the current game round (S31104: NO), the process proceeds to step S31106, and the variation time table storage area 63d is stored with reference to the variation time table for non-reach generation. Then, the fluctuation time corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. After that, the process proceeds to step S31107, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process is terminated.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time table is such that the larger the values of the first start hold number RaN and the second start hold number RbN, the more the fluctuation time. It is set to be short. That is, even if the value of the variation type counter CS is the same, the data of the variation time table to be referred to by the values of the first start hold number RaN and the second start hold number RbN when determining the variation time of the game round. Is different.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time table is set so that the larger the values of the first start hold number RaN and the second start hold number RbN, the shorter the fluctuation time. However, in addition, for example, the larger the value of the total number of reserved pieces CRN, the shorter the fluctuation time may be set. Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration that does not depend on the total number of reserved quantity CRNs may be used, and the fluctuation time may be set to be shorter as the number of total reserved quantity CRNs is smaller. Further, when the second start hold number RbN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start hold number RaN increases, and when the second start hold number RbN is "1" or more. May be set so that the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number of the second start hold number RbN increases. Further, when the second start hold number RbN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes longer as the number of the first start hold number RaN increases, and when the second start hold number RbN is "1" or more. May be set so that the fluctuation time becomes longer as the number of the second start reserved numbers RbN increases, or becomes constant without depending on the respective reserved numbers RaN and RbN.

Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the reach does not occur so that the shorter fluctuation time is selected as compared with the case where the number of pending information is the same as in the situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode. A variable time table may be set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected fluctuation times may be the same, and the above relationship may be reversed.

Further, the above configuration may be applied to the fluctuation time at the time of reach occurrence, and the fluctuation time that is easy to be selected and the fluctuation time that is difficult to be selected at the time of winning the jackpot and the time of losing reach may be different. good. Further, the variable time table for the type 1 jackpot, the variable time table for the type 2 jackpot, the variable time table for the missed reach, and the variable time table for the complete miss may be set individually.

<Game state transition process>
Next, the game state transition process will be described. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 86: S30707) of the normal process.

FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the game state transition process. In step S32011, it is determined whether or not the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned on at the end of the large winning opening opening / closing processing period (at the beginning of the ending period) in the opening / closing execution mode, and turned off at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the open / close execution mode.

If it is determined in step S31201 that the ending period flag is not ON (S31201: NO), the process proceeds to step S31202 to determine whether or not the open / close processing period flag is ON. The open / close processing period flag is a period during which the opening period ends in the open / close execution mode, and the open / close operation of the first open / close door 57b of the first variable winning device 57 and the second open / close door 58b of the second variable winning device 58 is executed. It is turned on at the timing when the large winning opening opening / closing processing period is started, and is turned off at the timing when the opening / closing operation of the first opening / closing door 57b and the second opening / closing door 58b is completed.

If it is determined in step S31202 that the open / close processing period flag is not ON (S31202: NO), the process proceeds to step S31203 to determine whether or not the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned on at the beginning of the opening period and turned off at the end of the opening period.

If it is determined in step S31203 that the opening period flag is not ON (S31203: NO), the process proceeds to step S31204, and the timing at which the symbol variation display on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b ends. It is determined whether or not it is. If it is determined in step S31204 that the timing is not the end of the variation display (S31204: NO), the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in step S31204 that the variation display has ended (S31204: YES), the process proceeds to step S31205 to determine whether or not the open / close execution mode flag is ON.

If it is determined in step S31205 that the open / close execution mode flag is ON (S31205: YES), the process proceeds to step S31205. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31205 that the open / close execution mode flag is OFF (S31205: NO), the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

In step S31206, the high probability mode flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step S31207.

In step S31207, an opening scenario corresponding to the jackpot type is set. Specifically, in the case of a 16R type 1 jackpot, an opening scenario for a 16R type 1 jackpot is set, and in the case of an 8R type 1 jackpot, an opening scenario for an 8R type 1 jackpot is set. If it is an 8R type 2 jackpot, set an open scenario for the 8R type 2 jackpot. After executing step S31207, the process proceeds to step S31208.

In step S31208, the opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the time length of the opening period (hereinafter, also referred to as an opening time) in the open / close execution mode. In the present embodiment, the same constant length of opening time is set in each opening period. Specifically, "3000" (that is, 6 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3 that determines the opening time. The third timer counter area T3 is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After executing step S31208, the process proceeds to step S31209.

In step S31209, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step S30703 in the normal process (FIG. 86). This opening command includes information on the set opening time and the number of rounds in the current open / close execution mode. The voice emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening time and the large winning opening opening / closing processing period based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content is executed. After executing step S31209, the process proceeds to step S32101, and the opening period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S31203 that the opening period flag is ON (S31203: YES), the process proceeds to step S312111.

In step S31211, it is determined whether or not the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step S31211 that the opening period has ended (S31211: YES), the process proceeds to step S3212 and the opening period flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step S31213.

In step S31213, a round display start process for notifying the type of the opening / closing execution mode this time is executed. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is confirmed. Then, based on the confirmed address information, the stop result data corresponding to the above address information is specified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is specified from the specified stop result data. Confirm. After that, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45. As a result, the round display unit 39 displays the round information related to the output. After executing step S31213, the process proceeds to step S32141.

In step S32141, the open / close processing period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S31202 that the open / close execution mode flag is ON (S31202: YES), the process proceeds to step S31215 to execute the large winning opening open / close process. The process of opening and closing the large winning opening will be described later. After executing step S31215, the process proceeds to step S31216.

In step S31216, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening opening / closing process is completed, and if it is determined that the large winning opening opening / closing process is completed (S31216: YES), the process proceeds to step S31217. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31216 that the large winning opening opening / closing process has not been completed (S31216: NO), the large winning opening opening / closing process is terminated as it is.

In step S31217, the open / close processing period flag is turned off, and then the process proceeds to step S31218.

In step S31218, the round display end processing is executed. In this process, the display control of the round display unit 39 is terminated so that the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is turned off. After executing step S31218, the process proceeds to step S31219.

In step S31219, the ending time setting process is executed. The ending time setting process is a process for setting the time length of the ending period (hereinafter, also referred to as an ending time) in the open / close execution mode. In the present embodiment, the ending time of the same constant length is set in each ending period. Specifically, "3000" (that is, 6 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 that determines the ending time. The fourth timer counter area T4 is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After executing step S31219, the process proceeds to step S31220.

In step S31220, an ending command is set. This set ending command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step S30603 in the normal process (FIG. 86). The voice emission control device 90 ends the effect corresponding to the open / close execution mode based on the reception of the ending command. After executing step S31220, the process proceeds to step S31221.

In step S31221, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S31201 that the ending period flag is ON (S31201: YES), the process proceeds to step S31222.

In step S31222, it is determined whether or not the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (S31219), it is determined whether or not the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is “0”. If it is determined in step S31222 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0" (S31222: YES), the process proceeds to step S31223.

In step S31223, the ending period flag is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step S31224, and the migration process at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of the game times after the end of the current ending period. Details of the migration process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step S31224, the process proceeds to step S31225 to turn off the open / close execution mode flag. After that, the game state transition process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31222 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not "0" (S31222: NO), the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

<Large winning opening opening / closing process>
Next, the process of opening and closing the large winning opening will be described. The large winning opening opening / closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 91: S31215) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing a large winning opening opening / closing process. In step S3301, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing door is open. That is, it is determined whether or not the first opening / closing door 57b or the second opening / closing door 58b is open. If it is determined in step S31301 that the opening / closing door is not open (S31301: NO), the process proceeds to step S31302.

In step S31302, it is determined whether or not the opening condition of the set opening scenario is satisfied. Specifically, each opening / closing is performed by counting the number of rounds to be executed and counting with a timer counter whether the time for maintaining the closed state of the opening / closing door has elapsed and the timing for opening has been reached in the running round. It is determined whether or not the condition for shifting the door (first opening / closing door 57b, second opening / closing door 58b) to the open state is satisfied. If it is determined in step S31302 that the opening condition of the opening scenario is not satisfied (S31302: NO), the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31302 that the opening condition of the opening scenario is satisfied (S31302: YES), the process proceeds to step S31303.

In step S31303, the open doors ((first opening / closing door 57b, second opening / closing door 58b) determined to satisfy the opening conditions are opened. After executing step S31303, the main prize opening opening / closing process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S31301 that the open / close door is open (S31301: YES), the process proceeds to step S31304. In step S31304, it is determined whether or not the entry of the game ball into the V winning area FV of the second large winning opening 58a is detected. If it is detected in step S31304 that the game ball has entered the V winning area FV of the second large winning opening 58a (S31304: YES), the process proceeds to step S31305.

In step S31305, the V winning flag is turned ON. The V winning flag is a flag indicating that a game ball has entered the V winning area FV, and the lottery mode in the normal game times executed after the end of the round game is either a high probability mode or a low probability mode. It is used to judge whether to set to. After executing step S31305, the process proceeds to step S31306.

In step S31306, a V winning command is set. The V winning command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 86: step S30703) of the normal process. The voice emitting device that has received the V winning command executes the setting for executing the V winning effect. The V winning effect is an effect for notifying the player that the game ball has entered the V winning area FV. After executing step S31306, the process proceeds to step S31307. On the other hand, if the entry of the game ball into the V winning area FV of the second large winning opening 58a is not detected in step S31304 (S31304: NO), the process proceeds to step S31307 without executing steps S31305 and S31306. move on.

In step S31307, it is determined whether or not the closing condition is satisfied. As described above, the closing condition is either "seven game balls hit the big winning opening corresponding to the open / close door" or "10 seconds have passed in the open state". That is. If it is determined in step S31307 that the closing condition is not satisfied (S31307: NO), the main prize opening opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31307 that the closing condition is satisfied (S31307: YES), the process proceeds to step S31308.

In step S31308, the open / close door is closed. After that, the opening / closing process of the winning opening is completed.

<Migration process at the end of the ending period>
Next, the migration process at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 91: S31226) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the migration process at the end of the ending period. In step S34011, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag is ON.

If it is determined in step S31401 that the V winning flag is ON (S31401: YES), the process proceeds to step S31402 to execute the flag erasing process. Specifically, when the 16R type 1 jackpot flag, the 8R type 1 jackpot flag, the 8R type 2 jackpot flag, and the high frequency support mode flag are ON, they are turned off, and when they are not ON, they are turned off. Maintain that state. Also, the V winning flag is turned off. After executing step S31402, the process proceeds to step S31403.

In step S31403, the high probability mode flag is turned ON, and then the process proceeds to step S31404 to turn the high frequency support mode flag ON. As a result, after ending the open / close execution mode, the game state shifts to the game state in which the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. It should be noted that these high-probability modes and high-frequency support modes are maintained at least until the next big hit. Then, the process proceeds to step S31405.

In step S31405, 100 is set in the game count counter PNC provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. The value set in the game count counter PNC is a value indicating the number of games when the high frequency support mode is executed by limiting the number of games. Then, the process proceeds to step S31406.

In step S31406, a high-probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the control device on the sub-side recognize that the winning / failing lottery mode is the high-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. do. Then, the process proceeds to step S31410.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31401 that the V winning flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step S31407 (S31401: NO), and the flag erasing process is executed. Specifically, when the 16R type 1 jackpot flag, the 8R type 1 jackpot flag, the 8R type 2 jackpot flag, and the high frequency support mode flag are ON, they are turned off, and when they are not ON, they are turned off. Maintain that state. Then, the process proceeds to step S31408.

In step S31408, after turning on the high frequency support mode flag, the process proceeds to step S31409, and 100 is set in the game count counter PNC provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step S31410.

In step S31410, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the control device on the sub-side recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is used as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Set. After that, the migration process at the end of the ending period ends.

<Processing for electric service support>
Next, the processing for electric service support will be described. The electric service support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 86: S30708) of the normal process.

FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the electric service support process. In step S31501, it is determined whether or not the support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supported flag of the various jackpot flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The supporting flag is a flag that is turned on when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is opened and turned off when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step S3151 that the supporting flag is not ON (S3151: NO), the process proceeds to step S31502.

In step S31502, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag of the various jackpot flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is turned on when the open state is won in the electric accessory opening lottery for whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a, and is turned off when the supporting flag is ON. Is. If it is determined in step S31502 that the support winning flag is not ON (S31502: NO), the process proceeds to step S31503.

In step S31503, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal diagram unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec.

If it is determined in step S31503 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S31503: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S31503: YES), the process proceeds to step S31504.

In step S31504, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the variation display of the symbol in the normal diagram unit 38. If it is determined in step S31504 that it is the end timing of the variation display (S31504: YES), the process proceeds to step S31505, the off display is set, and then the main electric service support process is terminated. By setting the off display, the variable display of the symbol in the normal figure unit 38 is terminated in the state where the off display is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31504 that it is not the end timing of the variation display (S31504: NO), the process proceeds to step S31506.

In step S31506, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of reserved items SN is larger than "0". If it is determined in step S31506 that the value of the number of reserved items SN is "0" (S31506: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31506 that the value of the number of reserved items SN is larger than "0" (S31506: YES), the process proceeds to step S31507.

In step S31507, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress, and then the process proceeds to step S31508 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. If the mode is not the open / close execution mode in step S31507 (S31507: NO) and the high frequency support mode is in step S31508 (S31508: YES), the process proceeds to step S31509 to perform an electric accessory opening lottery. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric service holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 461, the electric accessory release lottery is performed. Winning (see FIG. 73 (b)). Further, "750" (that is, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started. After that, the process proceeds to step S31510.

In step S31510, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step S31509 is a support winning. If it is determined in step S31510 that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is the support winning (S31510: YES), the process proceeds to step S31511, the support winning flag is turned on, and the counter area 64d of the RAM 64 is provided. Set "3" in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is opened. Then, the process proceeds to step S31512. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31510 that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is not a support winning (S31510: NO), the process proceeds to step S31512 without executing the process of step S31511.

In step S31512, it is determined whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode. If it is determined in step S31512 that the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode (S31512: YES), the process proceeds to step S31513. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31512 that the winning / failing lottery mode is not the low probability mode (S31512: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is.

In step S31513, it is determined whether or not the game count counter area is “0”. The game count counter is decremented by 1 each time one game is completed in the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. If it is determined in step S31513 that the game count counter area is not "0" (S31513: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31513 that the game count counter area is "0", the process proceeds to step S31514 and the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step S31515.

In step S31515, a low-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the control device on the sub-side recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is used as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Set. After that, the processing for electric service support is terminated.

The low-frequency support mode command set in step S31515 is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the external output process (FIG. 86: step S30703) of the normal process. The voice emission control device 90 identifies that the support mode is the low frequency support mode based on the reception of the low frequency support mode command, and executes the corresponding processing.

If it is determined in step S31507 that the open / close execution mode is set (S31507: YES), or if it is determined in step S31518 that the mode is not the high frequency support mode (S31508: NO), the process proceeds to step S31516 and the electric accessory opening lottery is performed. I do. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric service holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory release lottery is performed. You will be elected. Further, "14750" (that is, 29.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery. Then, the process proceeds to step S31517.

In step S31517, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step S31516 is the support winning. If it is determined in step S31517 that the support is not won (S31517: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31517 that the support is won (S31517: YES), the process proceeds to step S31518, the support winning flag is turned ON, and "1" is set in the second round counter area RC2. , End the processing for main electric service support.

If it is determined in step S31502 that the support winning flag is ON (S31502: YES), the process proceeds to step S31519, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal diagram unit 38. If it is determined in step S31519 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S31519: NO), the pattern variation is being displayed in the normal drawing unit 38, so that the main electric service support process is performed as it is. To finish. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31519 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S31519: YES), the process proceeds to step S31520.

In step S31520, the hit display is set. As a result, the variable display of the pattern in the normal drawing unit 38 is terminated with the hit display stopped and displayed. After that, the process proceeds to step S31521, the supporting flag is turned ON, and the support winning flag is turned OFF. After that, the processing for main electric service support is terminated.

If it is determined in step S3151 that the supporting flag is ON (S3151: YES), the process proceeds to step S31522, and an electric function opening / closing control process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 34a is executed. After that, the processing for main electric service support is terminated.

<Electrical function opening / closing control processing>
Next, the electric function opening / closing control process will be described. The electric service opening / closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 94: S31522) of the electric service support process.

FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the electric function opening / closing control process. In step S31601, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive unit 34b is in the driving state. If it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is open (S31601: YES), the process proceeds to step S31602.

In step S31602, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step S31602 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S31602: NO), the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated as it is. That is, if the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the main electric accessory opening / closing control process ends.

If it is determined in step S31602 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S31602: YES), the process proceeds to step S31603, and a closing process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the closed state is performed. “250” (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as the means for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated this time. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step S31603, the process proceeds to step S31604.

In step S31604, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process proceeds to step S31605, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”. If it is determined in step S31605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (S31605: NO), the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (S31605: YES), the process proceeds to step S31606 and the supporting flag is turned off. After that, the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S31601 that the electric accessory 34a is not open (S31601: NO), the process proceeds to step S31607, and it is determined whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step S31607 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S31607: NO), the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31507 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S31607: YES), the process proceeds to step S31608 to execute an opening process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the open state. .. Then, the process proceeds to step S31609.

In step S31609, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress, and if it is determined that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (S31609: NO), the process proceeds to step S31610 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. do.

If it is determined in step S31610 that the high frequency support mode is in progress (S31610: YES), the process proceeds to step S31611, and "800" (that is, 1.6 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31609 that the open / close execution mode is set (S31609: YES), or if it is determined in step S31610 that the mode is not the high frequency support mode (S31610: NO), the process proceeds to step S31612 and the second step is performed. The timer counter area T2 is set to "100" (that is, 0.2 sec). After that, the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated.
C5. Electrical configuration of voice emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configuration of the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 96 is a block diagram showing mainly the electrical configurations of the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Some configurations of the power supply device 85 and the like are omitted. The MPU 92 is mounted on the voice emission control board 91 provided in the voice emission control device 90. The MPU 92 is an element having a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like.

Various control programs, fixed value data, tables, etc. executed by the MPU 92 are stored in the ROM 93. For example, an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like are provided in a part of the area of the ROM 93.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. For example, various jackpot flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like are provided in a part of the area of the RAM 94. It is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A main control device 60 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main control device 60. An effect operation button 24, a speaker 46, and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, and a display control device 100 is connected to the output side.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Is installed. It is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the voice emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 105). ..

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when executing various programs by the MPU 102.

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is made into an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip having a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, and the like to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the image data stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

The character ROM 106 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table referred to when determining an expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106. Further, it is also possible to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 in the character ROM 106.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107.

In the following, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, the main ROM 63, and the main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the audio emission control device 90 are the sound light side MPU 92 and the sound light side, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound / light side RAM 94 are also referred to, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also referred to as a display side MPU 102.

C6. Various processes executed in the voice emission control device and the display control device:
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt processing executed by the sound-light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed in the sound light side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed with a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 msec). Hereinafter, the processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing will be described.

In step S31701, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound / light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main MPU 62. The sound and light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the main MPU 62, and the commands received from the main MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , Read sequentially according to the stored order. After executing step S31701, the process proceeds to step S31702.

In step S31702, a command correspondence process for performing a process corresponding to the received command is executed. The details of the command correspondence process will be described later. After executing step S31702, the process proceeds to step S31703.

In step S31703, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read in the command correspondence process in step S31702. After executing step S31703, the process proceeds to step S31704.

In step S31704, the audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the voice output control process, the voice output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the voice output data read in the command correspondence process of step S31702. After executing step S31704, the timer interrupt process ends.

<Command support processing>
Next, the command correspondence process will be described. The command correspondence process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine of timer interrupt process (FIG. 97: S31702).

FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the command correspondence process. As described above, in the command correspondence process, the process corresponding to the command received from the main MPU 62 is executed. Hereinafter, the processing of each step executed in the command correspondence processing will be described.

In step S31801, it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received from the main CPU 62. The opening command is a command transmitted from the main CPU 62 to the sound / light side MPU 92 at the start of the opening period (FIG. 91: S31209) of the open / close execution mode executed when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery. If it is determined in step S3181 that the opening command has been received from the main CPU 62 (S3181: YES), the process proceeds to step S31802.

In step S3182, the opening effect and the right-handed notification effect are set to be executed. Specifically, the light emission data of various lamps for the opening effect and the right-handed notification are set, and the voice output data is set. The opening effect and the right-handed notification effect are effects executed during the opening period of the open / close execution mode. In the present embodiment, as an opening effect, an effect for notifying the player that the opening / closing execution mode has been started is executed. In addition, as a right-handed notification effect, an effect of urging the game ball to be launched on the right side of the game board 30 and an effect of urging the game ball to enter the V winning area FV of the second large winning opening 58a are executed. do. After executing step S31802, the process proceeds to step S31703.

In step S31703, the opening effect command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. Upon receiving the opening effect command, the display-side MPU 102 sets image data for the opening effect and right-handed notification, and causes the symbol display device 41 to display an image based on the image data. After executing step S31803, the process proceeds to step S31804.

In step S31804, it is determined whether or not a V winning command has been received from the main CPU 62. The V winning command is a command transmitted from the main CPU 62 to the sound / light side MPU 92 when the game ball enters the V winning area FV during the execution of the large winning opening opening / closing process in the opening / closing execution mode. After executing step S31804, the process proceeds to step S31805.

In step S31805, it is set to execute the V winning effect. Specifically, the light emission data of various lamps for the V winning effect and the audio output data are set. This is an effect of notifying the player that the game ball has entered the V winning area FV. After executing step S31805, the process proceeds to step S31806.

In step S31806, the V winning effect command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. When the display side MPU 102 receives the V winning effect command, the display side MPU 102 sets the image data for the V winning effect and causes the symbol display device 41 to display the image based on the image data. After executing step S31806, the process proceeds to step S31807.

In step S31807, processing for responding to other commands received from the main CPU 62 is executed. After executing step S31807, the process corresponding to this command is terminated.

<Various processes executed in the display control device>
Next, the process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processes executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 are mainly the main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and the processes that are executed when a command is received from the voice emission control device 90. There is a command interrupt process and a V interrupt process executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes the main process after the power is turned on, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. If the command is received and the V interrupt signal is detected at the same time, the command interrupt process is preferentially executed. Therefore, the V interrupt process can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the voice emission control device 90.

<Main processing>
Next, the main process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Hereinafter, the processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described.

In step S31901, the initial setting process is executed. Specifically, first, the process of initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read out, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Further, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. Also, make other settings necessary for initialization. Then, the process proceeds to step S31902.

In step S31902, the interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing described below are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, the command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process executed every time a command is received from the voice emission control device 90.

FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step S32001, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read out by the command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, the V interrupt process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process executed by detecting the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105. In the V interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area are executed by the command interrupt processing, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, the image is drawn and drawn on the VDP 105. Execute the display instruction.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal generated in VDP105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, when the MPU 102 executes the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is performed every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. Therefore, since the VDP 105 does not receive the drawing instruction of the next image at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image is started or displayed during the drawing of the image. It is possible to suppress the expansion of an image accompanying a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information in the image is stored. Hereinafter, the processing details of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described.

In step S32101, the command correspondence process is executed. In the command correspondence process, the content of the command stored in the command storage area is analyzed by the command interrupt process (FIG. 100), and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when the effect command is stored, the image drawing and display control is started so that the effect mode specified by the effect command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

When the effect operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the acceptance period for pressing the effect operation button 24, and when it is determined that it is the acceptance period for pressing the effect operation button 24, the effect operation is performed. Control of drawing and displaying an image is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the acceptance period for pressing the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In the command correspondence process (S32101), all the commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and the processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so that there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the voice emission control device 90 and the effect is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode of the staging effect set by the voice emission control device 90, the pattern for the liquid crystal display, and the like, and to display the effect image according to the mode. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the display device 41.

In step S32102, the display setting process is executed. In the display setting process, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the symbol display device 41 is specified based on the type of the screen to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 set by the command correspondence process (S32101) or the like. .. After that, the process proceeds to step S32103.

In step S32103, task processing is executed. In the task process, the type of character (sprite, display object) constituting the image is determined based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 specified by the display setting process (S32102). In addition to specifying, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. are determined for each character (sprite). Then, the process proceeds to step S32104.

In step S32104, the drawing process is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters constituting one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character determined by the task process (S32103) are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes image drawing processing based on these information, and also displays the image drawn based on the information received at the time of the previous V interrupt processing on the symbol display device 41 together with the drive signal. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. After that, the process proceeds to step S32105, other processing is executed, and then the V interrupt processing is terminated.

As described above, the second large winning opening 58a is configured such that the V winning area FV and the non-V winning area FNV are adjacent to each other, and the second large winning opening 58a is opened and closed by the second opening / closing door 58b. , The entry control of the game ball into the two winning areas of the V winning area FV and the non-V winning area FNV can be performed by opening / closing control of one opening / closing door (second large winning opening 58a).

In the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the first type jackpot, the value of the second opening / closing door closing period CLT is set so that the non-V winning area transit time NVT ≤ the second opening / closing door closing period CLT, and the second major A game ball can be entered into the V winning area FV area of the winning opening 58a. Furthermore, by setting the value of the second opening / closing door closing period CLT so that the second opening / closing door closing period CLT <total passage time ALT, almost all the variable winning mechanism KH is distributed after the start of the second round. A game ball can be entered into the second large winning opening 58a.

Further, in the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the second type jackpot, the value of the second opening / closing door closing period CLT is set so that the second opening / closing door closing period CLT <non-V winning area passage time NVT is set. 2 Even though the opening / closing door 58b is opened / closed a plurality of times, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the V winning area FV of the second large winning opening 58a.

In this way, by controlling the value of the second open / close door closing period CLT, it is possible to control the entry of the game ball into the V winning region FV and the non-V winning region FNV.

Here, when compared with a general gaming machine, in a general gaming machine, a guidance lever for guiding the gaming ball to the V winning region in order to execute control for entering the gaming ball into the V winning region. Is installed, and the operation of the guidance lever is controlled to control the entry of the game ball into the V winning area. Therefore, it is necessary to control the operation of the guide lever separately from the operation control of the opening / closing door of the large winning opening, which complicates the control.

On the other hand, since the gaming machine in the present embodiment can control the entry of the gaming ball into the V winning area FV by controlling the operation of the second opening / closing door 58b, the control can be simplified. As a result, the control program can be simplified, and the storage capacity for recording the program can also be reduced.

Further, in the case of a general gaming machine having a large winning opening on the upstream side of the flow path and a large winning opening (V winning opening) having a V winning area FV on the downstream side, the gaming ball enters the V winning area FV. When executing the difficult opening / closing execution mode, in order to prevent the game ball from entering the V winning area FV, the opening / closing door of the V winning opening is controlled so as not to transition to the open state almost (or at all). It is necessary to set the open state time to an extremely short time. In addition, it is necessary to provide a guide valve inside the V winning opening on the downstream side for controlling whether or not the game ball is allowed to enter the V winning area FV. In the case of such a gaming machine, the operation control for changing the state of the opening / closing door between the open state and the closed state becomes complicated, and it is necessary to perform the operation control of the induction valve described above separately from the operation control. Therefore, the control becomes more complicated, and it is necessary to secure a storage area for storing a program for executing the control. Further, when the opening / closing door of the V winning opening hardly (or at all) transitions to the open state, or when the open state time is extremely short, the expectation in the open execution mode is reduced even from the player's point of view. Resulting in.

On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine in the present embodiment, a large winning opening (first large winning opening 57a) having a large winning opening (first large winning opening 57a) on the upstream side of the flow path and a large winning opening (second large winning opening 58a) having a V winning area FV on the downstream side. The configuration is similar to that of the above-mentioned general gaming machine, but in the case of the gaming machine in the present embodiment, the non-V winning region FNV is provided on the upstream side of the V winning region FV, so that the non-V winning region FNV is provided. It is possible to control which of the two winning areas FV and the V winning area FV the game ball is to be controlled by the operation control of the second opening / closing door 58b. Therefore, as compared with the above-mentioned general gaming machine, the control can be simplified and the storage area required for storing the program for executing the operation control of the induction valve can be reduced. Further, even in the open / close execution mode in which the game ball is set so that it is difficult for the game ball to enter the V winning area FV, the second open / close door 58b can be opened for a certain period of time. It is possible to give a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency.

Further, the gaming machine of the present embodiment includes a convex portion 59 as an adjusting means for adjusting the time required for the gaming ball to pass through the upper surface of the second opening / closing door 58b. Therefore, by adjusting the number of the convex portions 59 arranged on the upper surface of the second opening / closing door 58b, the time required for the game ball to pass through the upper surface of the second opening / closing door 58b can be adjusted. As described above, in the present embodiment, in order to control the entry of the game ball into the V winning area FV, in the opening / closing execution mode in the first type jackpot, the non-V winning area passing time NVT ≦ the second opening / closing. It is necessary to control so as to satisfy the conditions of the door closing period CLT and the second opening / closing door closing period CLT <total passage time ALT, but the number of convex portions 59 arranged on the upper surface of the second opening / closing door 58b is adjusted. By doing so, the non-V winning area transit time NVT and the total transit time ALT can be adjusted. Therefore, as an adjustment for satisfying the condition, in addition to the adjustment of the value of the second opening / closing door closing period CLT, the number of the convex portions 59 arranged on the upper surface of the second opening / closing door 58b can be adjusted. 2 Opening / closing door closing period The setting range of the CLT value can be widened.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first large winning opening 57a is provided on the upstream side of the second large winning opening 58a. Then, by opening the first opening / closing door 57b in the first round in the opening / closing execution mode, when the second opening / closing door 58b is first opened, the game ball is placed in the V winning area FV on the upper surface of the second opening / closing door 58b. Can be ensured that does not exist. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the V winning area FV even though the opening / closing execution mode corresponds to the second type jackpot.

C7. Modifications The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and can be carried out in various embodiments without departing from the gist thereof. For example, the following modifications are also possible.

C7-1. Modification 1: Modification 1:
FIG. 102 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the variable winning mechanism KH in the first modification of the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 102 (a), the variable winning mechanism KH in the first modification includes a plate-shaped member MD1 on the upper portion of the second large winning opening 58a. Further, the variable winning mechanism KH includes a magnetic member MD2 on the distribution surface on which the game ball is distributed and on the upstream side of the second opening / closing door 58b.

The functions of the plate-shaped member MD1 and the magnetic material member MD2 will be described with reference to FIG. 102 (b). In the plate-shaped member MD1, when the game ball reaches the upstream side of the second large winning opening 58a, the second opening / closing door 58b is in the open state, and the game ball is in the non-V winning area FNV of the second large winning opening 58a. Despite being able to enter the ball, the game ball traveling along the flow path floats from the flow path on the upstream side of the second large winning opening 58a due to some factor, and enters the non-V winning area FNV. It has a function of suppressing the passage without passing through. As shown in FIG. 102 (b), even if the game ball floats from the flow path on the upstream side of the second winning opening 58a, the game ball is made to collide with the plate-shaped member MD1 to play a game. The course direction of the ball can be changed to the direction of the non-V winning area FNV, and the game ball can be entered into the non-V winning area FNV. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from passing through the non-V winning area FNV without entering the non-V winning area FNV even though the game ball can enter the non-V winning area FNV of the second large winning opening 58a.

As the plate-shaped member MD1, a rubber material, a resin, a cushioning member having a cushioning property, or the like may be adopted. Further, instead of the plate-shaped member MD1, a plurality of nails may be arranged at the positions of the plate-shaped member MD1. Further, the shape of the plate-shaped member MD1 may be a corrugated surface, a concave surface, or an uneven surface that collides with the game ball.

Similar to the plate-shaped member MD1, the magnetic member MD2 has the second opening / closing door 58b open when the game ball reaches the upstream side of the second large winning opening 58a, and the game ball has the second large winning prize. Despite the fact that the non-V winning area FNV of the door 58a can be entered, the game ball traveling along the flow path floats from the flow path on the upstream side of the second large winning opening 58a for some reason. It has a function of suppressing passing through the non-V winning area FNV without entering the ball. The magnetic material member MD2 is a member made of a magnetic material, and its magnetic force attracts a game ball toward the magnetic material member MD2. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from floating from the flow path surface. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from passing through the non-V winning area FNV without entering the non-V winning area FNV even though the game ball can enter the non-V winning area FNV of the second large winning opening 58a. ..

Instead of the magnetic material member MD2, a cushioning member such as a resin or a rubber material that cushions the impact between the game ball and the flow path may be arranged at the position of the magnetic material member MD2. When the cushioning member is arranged, the force in the direction in which the game ball floats from the flow path is reduced by cushioning the impact between the game ball and the flow path, and the game ball is prevented from floating from the flow path. Can be done.

C7-2. Modification 2:
FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the variable winning mechanism KH in the second modification of the third embodiment. In the second modification, as shown in FIG. 103 (a), the first special winning opening 57a and the second special winning opening 58a are provided on the side surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows. Further, the first opening / closing door 57b and the second opening / closing door 58b are provided on the flow path surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows. The first opening / closing door 57b includes a first ball entry prevention member 57d for preventing the game ball from entering the first large winning opening 57a when the first opening / closing door 57b is in the closed state. Further, the second opening / closing door 58b includes a second ball entry prevention member 58d for preventing the game ball from entering the second large winning opening 58a when the second opening / closing door 58b is in the closed state.

The first ball entry prevention member 57d has a function of narrowing the opening of the first large winning opening 57a so that the game ball does not enter the opening when the first opening / closing door 57b is closed. Further, the second ball entry prevention member 58d has a function of narrowing the opening to a size that does not allow the game ball to enter the opening of the second large winning opening 58a when the second opening / closing door 58b is in the closed state. ..

As shown in FIG. 103 (b), the first opening / closing door 57b shifts from the closed state to the open state by inclining in the direction of the first winning opening 57a. By tilting the first opening / closing door 57b toward the first winning opening 57a, the opening of the first winning opening 57a becomes large enough for the game ball to enter. Further, by tilting the first opening / closing door 57b in the direction of the first winning opening 57a, the game ball circulating through the open first opening / closing door 57b is guided in the direction of the first winning opening 57a, and the first opening / closing door 57b is guided. Enter the ball into the 1st prize opening 57a.

Further, since the step D1 is generated between the upper surface of the first opening / closing door 57b and the flow path surface due to the inclination of the first opening / closing door 57b, it is a game ball that circulates through the first opening / closing door 57b at a relatively high speed. However, it is possible to reduce the speed and guide the game ball in the direction of the first large winning opening 57a by impacting the step, and as a result, the game ball is allowed to enter the first large winning opening 57a in the open state. It is possible to prevent the vehicle from passing through without passing through.

As shown in FIG. 103 (c), the second opening / closing door 58b shifts from the closed state to the open state by inclining in the direction of the second special winning opening 58a. By tilting the second opening / closing door 58b toward the second winning opening 58a, the opening of the second winning opening 58a (non-V winning area FNV and V winning area FV) is for a game ball to enter. It will be large enough. Further, by tilting the second opening / closing door 58b toward the second winning opening 58a, the game ball circulating through the open second opening / closing door 58b is guided in the direction of the second winning opening 58a, and the second opening / closing door 58b is guided. Enter the two major winning openings 58a.

Further, when the second opening / closing door 58b is inclined, between the region corresponding to the non-V winning region FNV on the upper surface of the second opening / closing door 58b and the region corresponding to the V winning region FV on the upper surface of the second opening / closing door 58b. The intervening wall member W does not incline like the second opening / closing door 58b, but has a region corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV on the upper surface of the inclined second opening / closing door 58b and an inclined upper surface of the second opening / closing door 58b. It has the function of a wall separating the area corresponding to the V winning area FV. Therefore, when the second opening / closing door 58b is inclined, even if the game ball circulates in the region corresponding to the non-V winning region FNV on the upper surface of the second opening / closing door 58b at a relatively high speed, the wall member. By impacting W, it is possible to reduce the speed and guide the game ball in the direction of the non-V winning area FNV of the second large winning opening 58a, and as a result, the game ball does not enter the non-V winning area FNV. It is possible to prevent it from passing through.

Further, when the second opening / closing door 58b is inclined, a step D2 is generated between the area corresponding to the V winning area FV on the upper surface of the inclined second opening / closing door 58b and the flow path surface, so that the second opening / closing door 58b is second at a relatively high speed. Even if the game ball circulates in the area corresponding to the V winning area FV on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 58b, the speed is reduced by impacting the step D2 in the direction of the V winning area FV of the second large winning opening 58a. It is possible to guide the game ball, and as a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from passing through the V winning area FV without entering the ball.

Further, the variable winning mechanism KH in the second modification is a magnetic member on the upper surface of the second opening / closing door 58b as an adjusting means for adjusting the time required for the game ball to pass through the upper surface of the second opening / closing door 58b. 59a is arranged. Since the magnetic member 59a slows down the speed of the game ball by its magnetic force, the upper surface of the second opening / closing door 58b is covered with the game ball by adjusting the number of the magnetic member 59a arranged on the upper surface of the second opening / closing door 58b. You can adjust the time required for the door to pass. Further, the action of the magnetic force exerted by the magnetic member 59a on the game ball causes the game ball circulating on the upper surface of the second opening / closing door 58b to make a peculiar movement, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

C7-3. Modification 3:
The opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing door in the opening / closing execution mode is not limited to the opening / closing pattern shown in the third embodiment, and various opening / closing patterns can be adopted.

FIG. 104 shows, as a modification 3, an example of the opening / closing patterns of the first opening / closing door 57b and the second opening / closing door 58b in the opening / closing execution mode executed by the first type jackpot, and the behavior of the game ball in the opening / closing pattern. It is explanatory drawing to explain. The lower part of FIG. 104 shows a time chart showing the opening / closing patterns of the first opening / closing door 57b and the second opening / closing door 58b, and the upper part of FIG. 104 shows a graph showing an example of the behavior of the game ball in the opening / closing pattern. rice field. The horizontal axis shown between the time chart shown in the lower part of FIG. 104 and the graph shown in the upper part of FIG. 104 indicates the time (seconds) commonly used in the two figures.

As shown in the figure, in the opening / closing pattern of the modified example 3, the first opening / closing door 57b and the second opening / closing door 58b alternately open and close. In the case of this opening / closing pattern, by controlling the time from the transition of the first opening / closing door 57b to the opening of the second opening / closing door 58b, the game ball is placed in the V winning area FV of the second large winning opening 58a. It is possible to control whether or not to enter the ball. The time from when the first opening / closing door 57b shifts to the closed state until the second opening / closing door 58b opens can be set in the opening scenario.

For example, the time from when the first opening / closing door 57b is closed to when the second opening / closing door 58b is opened is the time from when the game ball enters the most upstream portion of the first opening / closing door 57b to when the second opening / closing door 58b is opened. When the time is set shorter than the time required to advance the most downstream portion of the region corresponding to the non-V winning region FNV on the upper surface of the above, as shown in the opening of the second opening / closing door 58b in the second round of FIG. In addition, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the V winning area FV. On the other hand, the time from when the first opening / closing door 57b is closed to when the second opening / closing door 58b is opened is the time from when the game ball enters the most upstream portion of the first opening / closing door 57b to when the second opening / closing door 58b is opened. When the time required to advance the most downstream portion of the region corresponding to the non-V winning region FNV on the upper surface of the above is set longer than the time required to advance, as shown in the opening of the second opening / closing door 58b in the fourth round of FIG. In addition, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the V winning area FV.

In this way, it is possible to combine various opening / closing operations of the first opening / closing door 57b and the second opening / closing door 58b in a series of opening patterns. Further, by setting and controlling the timing for opening the first opening / closing door 57b and the second opening / closing door 58b in the opening scenario, it is possible to control the entry of the game ball into the V winning area FV.

In addition, as the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing door, an opening / closing pattern in which only the first opening / closing door 57b opens / closes or an opening / closing pattern in which only the second opening / closing door 58b opens / closes may be set in the opening scenario.

Further, in the third embodiment, the opening / closing pattern in which the game ball easily enters the V winning area FV and the opening / closing pattern in which the game ball does not easily enter the V winning area FV are set in the opening scenario. , The opening / closing pattern in which the probability that the game ball enters the V winning area FV during the execution of the open / close mode and the probability that the game ball does not enter the V winning area FV are approximately equal, or the V winning area FV during the execution of the open / close mode. An opening / closing pattern in which the probability that the game ball will enter may be set to an open scenario. In the case of such an opening / closing pattern, depending on the behavior of the game ball, there are cases where the ball enters the V winning area FV and cases where the ball does not enter the V winning area FV, thus giving the player a sense of expectation and urgency. be able to.

C7-4. Modification 4:
In the third embodiment, the opening / closing control of the two winning regions of the non-V winning region FNV and the V winning region FV is performed by one opening / closing door (second opening / closing door 58b), but the configuration is not limited to such a configuration. By adopting a configuration in which one opening / closing door controls the opening / closing of an arbitrary number of entry areas and controlling the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing door, it is possible to control the entry of game balls into each entry area. .. Further, the area where the game ball enters is not limited to the large winning opening, and various entrances may be applied. In this modification, it will be generalized and described as an entry area where a game ball can enter.

FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a variable winning mechanism KH as a modification 4. As shown in the figure, the variable winning mechanism KH has three adjacent ball entry areas (ball entry area U1 and ball entry area) from the upstream to the downstream of the flow path with reference to the distribution direction of the game ball flowing through the flow path. It has U2 and a ball entry area U3). Further, the variable winning mechanism KH includes an opening / closing door R that controls opening / closing of three ball entry areas. That is, by opening and closing the opening / closing door R, the three entry areas are in a non-entry state in which the game ball cannot enter or is difficult, and a state in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter. The transition is synchronized with the state in which the ball can be entered. The operation of the opening / closing door R is controlled by the main control device 60, similarly to the first opening / closing door 57b and the second opening / closing door 58b in the third embodiment.

FIG. 106 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing door R and an example of the behavior of the game ball in the opening / closing pattern as a modification 4 of the third embodiment. The lower part of FIG. 106 shows a time chart showing the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing door R, and the upper part of FIG. 106 shows a graph showing an example of the behavior of the game ball in the opening / closing pattern. The horizontal axis shown between the time chart shown in the lower part of FIG. 106 and the graph shown in the upper part of FIG. 106 indicates the time (seconds) commonly used in the two figures.

In the case of the opening / closing pattern shown in FIG. 106, the game ball enters each entry area by controlling the time from when the opening / closing door R shifts to the closed state until the next opening / closing door R opens. Control can be done. The time from when the opening / closing door R shifts to the closed state until the next opening / closing door R opens can be set in the opening scenario.

As shown in the figure, in this modification, the game ball is controlled to enter only the entry area U1 by the first opening of the opening / closing door R, and the entry area U1 is controlled by the second opening of the opening / closing door R. And the game ball is controlled to enter the ball entry area U2, and the game ball is controlled to enter the ball entry area U1, the ball entry area U2, and the ball entry area U3 by opening the opening / closing door R for the third time. Then, as with the first opening of the opening / closing door R, the game ball is controlled to enter only the entry area U1, and the fifth opening of the opening / closing door R is the second opening. Similarly, the game ball was controlled to enter the entry area U1 and the entry area U2.

In this way, by adopting a configuration that controls the opening and closing of an arbitrary number of entry areas with one opening / closing door and controlling the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing door, the entry of the game ball into each entry area is controlled. can do. Further, since the state transitions of the plurality of ball entry regions are executed in synchronization, the control can be simplified as compared with the case where the state transitions are controlled for each ball entry area.

Further, since the ball entry area U1, the ball entry area U2, and the ball entry area U3 are arranged adjacent to each other from the upstream side to the downstream side of the flow path, a plurality of ball entry areas U1 and the ball entry area U2 correspond to the behavior of the game ball flowing through the flow path. When the transition of the state of the ball entry region is executed synchronously, it is possible to execute the control corresponding to the behavior of a small number of game balls. Specifically, in order to synchronously execute the transition of the states of a plurality of entry regions in response to the behavior of the game balls circulating in the flow path, the game balls circulating in the peripheral region of each entry region. It is necessary to understand the behavior of. For example, as a comparative example, when a plurality of entry areas are arranged at separate positions, the transition of the state of the plurality of entry areas is synchronously executed according to the behavior of the game balls in circulation. In order to do so, it is necessary to perform control corresponding to the behavior of the game ball circulating in the peripheral area of each ball entry area located at a distance, which complicates the control. That is, the total area including the peripheral areas of each ball entry area is relatively large, and the number of game balls circulating in the entire area is also relatively large. The number increases and the control becomes complicated. On the other hand, since the plurality of ball entry regions in this modification are arranged adjacent to each other, the entire area including the peripheral areas of each ball entry area is smaller than that in the above comparative example, and the entire area is circulated. Since the number of game balls is also reduced, the number of game balls for which the behavior is to be grasped is reduced, and the control can be simplified. Further, in this modification, since the plurality of entry regions are arranged from the upstream to the downstream of the flow path, it is easy to grasp the behavior of the game ball reaching each entry region, and the control is further simplified. can do. Specifically, since the plurality of ball entry areas are arranged from the upstream to the downstream of the flow path, the direction of the game ball reaching each ball entry area is a certain direction, and each ball entry area is present. It is possible to reduce the variation in the behavior of each game ball reaching each entry area, such as the speed of the game ball reaching the target is small in the variation of each game ball. As a result, it becomes easier to grasp the behavior of the game ball reaching each entry area, and the control can be further simplified.

C7-5. Modification 5:
A configuration may be adopted in which a discharge delaying means for delaying the discharge of the game ball that has entered the second prize-winning opening 58a from the inside of the second prize-winning opening 58a is provided. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

Inside the second big winning opening 58a, a detection sensor is provided for determining whether or not all the game balls that have entered the second big winning opening 58a are discharged from the inside of the second big winning opening 58a. ing. Then, when the second major winning opening 58a transitions to the open state and then transitions to the closed state as one round, it is detected whether or not all the game balls have been ejected from the inside of the second major winning opening 58a. Judgment is made using a sensor. After that, the next round is executed on condition that all the game balls are discharged from the second prize opening 58a. Normally, the period until all the game balls are ejected from the inside of the second big winning opening 58a, rather than the period from the transition of the second big winning opening 58a to the next open state. Since it is shorter, it is possible to shift the second large winning opening 58a to the open state at the timing of opening set in the opening scenario.

In this modification, an ejection delaying means for delaying the ejection of the game ball from the inside of the second winning opening 58a is provided inside the second winning opening 58a. As the discharge delay means, a circular crune having a concave shape on the upper surface, a detour flow path provided in front of the discharge port of the second prize-winning port 58a, or the like can be adopted. In addition, any configuration may be adopted as long as it is configured to delay the ejection of the game ball from the inside of the second large winning opening 58a.

The timing at which all the game balls are ejected from the inside of the second major winning opening 58a due to the function of the ejection delay means is the timing at which the second major winning opening 58a set in the opening scenario is transitioned to the open state. In the latter case, 58a may transition to the open state at a timing later than the timing set in the open scenario. That is, depending on the degree of time that the discharge delay means delays the discharge of the game ball, the second large winning opening 58a may transition to the open state at the timing set in the open scenario, or may be delayed from the timing set in the open scenario. May transition to the open state. Therefore, it is possible to change the timing for transitioning the second large winning opening 58a to the open state to a timing different from the preset timing.

As a result, for example, in the jackpot lottery, the second type jackpot is won, and in the opening / closing execution mode, the opening / closing of the first major winning opening 57a and the second major winning opening 58a at the timing when it is difficult for the game ball to enter the V winning area FV. Even if an open scenario is set so that the operation is executed, the first large winning opening 57a and the timing at which the game ball can easily enter the V winning area FV by the function of the discharge delay means The opening / closing operation of the second winning opening 58a may be executed, and a feeling of expectation and a feeling of tension can be given to the player. That is, by providing the discharge delay means, the player is given a sense of expectation and tension regardless of the type of big hit (or small hit) when the open / close execution mode is started. can do.

In this modification, the discharge delay means is provided inside the second large winning opening 58a, but it may be provided in the first large winning opening 57a, or the first large winning opening may be provided. It may be provided in either 57a or the second large winning opening 58a.

C7-6. Modification 6:
In the third embodiment, the V winning area FV is a winning area set as a condition for the game ball to execute the high probability mode, but other configurations may be adopted. .. For example, the V winning area FV may be a winning area set as a condition for winning a big hit of a game ball. For example, a gaming machine that wins a predetermined small hit by a big hit lottery and wins a big hit when a game ball enters the V winning area FV in the open / close execution mode executed by the small hit (so-called). It may be adopted as a V winning area in a 1-kind 2-kind mixer).

C7-7. Modification 7:
FIG. 107 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the variable winning mechanism KH in the modified example 7 of the third embodiment. As shown in the figure, the variable winning mechanism KH in the modified example 7 is a jumping promotion member JP having a function of jumping the distributed game ball on the distribution surface on which the game ball is distributed and upstream of the second opening / closing door 58b. To prepare for.

When the game ball circulating the variable winning mechanism KH circulates the jumping promotion member JP at a predetermined speed or higher, the game ball emerges, and when the second opening / closing door 58b is in the open state, the non-V winning area It is possible to jump over the FNV and enter the V winning area FV. Therefore, even if the opening / closing pattern that makes it difficult to enter the V winning area FV in the opening / closing execution mode is set as the opening scenario, the game ball can enter the V winning area FV by the function of the jumping promotion member JP. As a result, even if the open / close execution mode is started by any kind of big hit (or small hit), it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and tension. can.

Further, the gaming machine in the modification 7 includes a speed reducing mechanism LT that slows down the speed of the gaming ball on the distribution path until the gaming ball reaches the variable winning mechanism KH. The speed of the game ball that has passed through the speed reduction mechanism LT is slower than that of the game ball that circulates the variable winning mechanism KH without distributing the speed reduction mechanism LT, and the jumping promotion member JP is distributed. Even if it emerges, it cannot jump over the non-V winning area FNV and enters the non-V winning area FNV.

As described above, by providing the speed reduction mechanism LT, it is possible to attract the player's attention as to whether or not the game ball circulates through the speed reduction mechanism LT. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

D. Application to other configurations:
When a pachinko machine of another type different from each of the above embodiments, for example, a pachinko machine in which the electric accessory is opened a predetermined number of times when the game ball enters a specific area of the special device, or a game ball enters a specific area of the special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that becomes a big hit when a right is generated, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrange ball machine, a game machine such as a sparrow ball, and the like.

In addition, a non-bullet type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction is provided, the reels are started to rotate by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. After the reels have stopped after a predetermined time has passed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line that can be seen from the display window, a privilege such as paying out a medal is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the main body of the gaming machine, which is supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, is equipped with a storage unit and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused to start rotation of a reel.

Further, a part of the functions realized by the software in the above embodiment may be realized by the hardware, or a part of the functions realized by the hardware may be realized by the software.

E. Inventions extracted from each of the above embodiments:
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in each of the above embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic A group>
The feature A group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature A1]
Launch means (game ball launch mechanism 81) that launches a game ball toward the game area,
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area, and
A process execution means (game history management chip 300) that executes a predetermined process, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The processing execution means is
Information storage means (register 304, calculation result storage memory 309) that is stored inside the housing of the game machine and non-volatilely stores the detection information that is the information acquired based on the detection by the detection means. )When,
A transmission means (CPU 308) that transmits information stored in the information storage means to a predetermined device connected to the gaming machine, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature A1, the processing execution means includes an information storage means for non-volatilely storing the detection information which is the information acquired based on the detection by the detection means. Since the detection information is information having a correlation with the behavior of the gaming ball in the executed game, the detection information is different for each gaming machine and is information unique to the gaming machine. That is, the detection information is information that reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine. According to the feature A1, the detection information, which is the information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, is stored in the information storage means of the processing execution means stored inside the housing of the gaming machine main body. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, the characteristics of the gaming machine can be inspected by acquiring the detection information from the gaming machine main body itself. When the gaming machine is installed in the gaming hall, information on the characteristics of the gaming machine can be acquired by the hall computer installed in the gaming hall. However, since the gaming machine is distributed from time to time, it may be placed in a state where it is not connected to the hall computer. In this case, the conventional gaming machine may retain information on the characteristics of the gaming machine. Can not. The gaming machine of the feature A1 stores the detection information, which is the information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, in the information storage means of the processing execution means stored inside the housing of the gaming machine main body, so that the gaming machine can be used as a hall computer. Detection information can be acquired from the gaming machine main body even when it is not connected. That is, the gaming machine of feature A1 is in a state in which the gaming machine and the detection information are always linked one-to-one regardless of the state in which the gaming machine is placed (the state of being installed in the gaming hall or the distribution state). It is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the gaming machine. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature A2]
The gaming machine described in Feature A1.
It is equipped with a control means (main side CPU 62x) that controls the execution of the game.
The processing execution means is a gaming machine characterized in that it operates by the same power source as the control means.

According to the feature A2, since the processing execution means operates by the same power source as the control means, for example, when the gaming machine is installed in the gaming hall, the hall computer can be used to provide information on the characteristics of the gaming machine. If there is a problem with the power supply system of the hall computer, or if there is a problem with the processing of the hall computer, the power is being supplied to the gaming machine. , Detection information can be acquired. If the control means and the process execution means are operated by different power sources, and if there is a problem in the power supply of the process execution means, the detection information is acquired even though the game is being executed by the gaming machine. There is a problem that it cannot be done. On the other hand, according to the feature A2, since the control means and the process execution means are operated by the same power source, the detection information can be always acquired if the game can be executed. Therefore, the reliability of the detection information can be improved.

[Feature A3]
The gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2.
The information storage means is a gaming machine characterized in that the detection information is stored for each period until a predetermined number (500) of game balls are detected by a predetermined detection means (discharge passage detection sensor 44h).

According to the feature A3, since the detection information for each period until the specified number of game balls are detected by the predetermined detection means is stored, the time until the specified number of game balls are detected by each game machine varies. Even if there is, it is possible to acquire detection information that does not affect the variation in time. That is, even if there is a difference in the frequency at which the game ball is fired, it is possible to acquire highly accurate detection information that is not easily affected by the difference.

[Feature A4]
The gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2.
The information storage means is a gaming machine characterized by storing the detection information for each predetermined period (every hour).

According to the feature A4, since the information storage means stores the detection information for each predetermined period, it is possible to perform statistical processing using the concept of time using the detection information.

[Feature A5]
The gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2.
The information storage means is a gaming machine characterized in that the detection information is stored for each period from the start of supplying power to the gaming machine to the time when the power is cut off.

According to the feature A5, the information storage means stores the detection information for each period from the start of the power supply to the gaming machine to the occurrence of the power cutoff. Therefore, for example, the gaming machine is placed in the gaming hall. If it is installed, it is possible to acquire detection information for each business day of the game hall.

[Feature A6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to the feature A5.
A payout means (payout device 71) that pays out a game ball as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means.
Equipped with
The processing execution means is
Prize ball number information for acquiring prize ball number information (prize ball number data) which is information on the number of game balls (prize ball number) paid out from the payout means as prize balls set in each of the plurality of detection means. Acquisition method and
An operation executing means (CPU 308) that executes a predetermined operation based on the detection information and the prize ball number information, and
Equipped with
The information storage means is a gaming machine characterized in that it stores calculation result information which is information on a calculation result (character ratio and the like) by the calculation execution means.

According to the feature A6, the processing execution means stores the calculation result information. Since the calculation result information is information calculated based on the detection information and the prize ball number information, the information regarding the prize ball number paid out by the gaming machine is reflected. Therefore, according to the feature A6, it is possible to acquire the characteristics of the gaming machine related to the paid out prize balls. As a result, it is possible to manage the characteristics of the gaming machine regarding the paid out prize balls.

<Characteristic B group>
The feature B group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature B1]
A control means (main CPU 62x) that controls the execution of the game, and
An arithmetic execution means (CPU308) that executes arithmetic processing based on the first information acquired based on the executed game and the preset second information to acquire the third information, and
An information storage means (memory 309 for storing calculation results) that non-volatilely stores the third information, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the arithmetic execution means and the information storage means are operated by the same power source as the control means.

According to the feature B1, the first information is the information acquired based on the executed game, and the third information is the information acquired based on the first information. Therefore, the third information includes information about the played game. Therefore, since the information storage means stores the third information including the information about the executed game, the information about the game executed in the past is used by using the third information stored in the information storage means. It is possible to get. Therefore, by using the third information, it is possible to manage the game-related characteristics of the gaming machine. Since the arithmetic execution means and the information storage means are operated by the same power source as the control means, the third information can be acquired if the power is supplied to the gaming machine. If the arithmetic execution means and the information storage means and the control means are operated by different power sources, or if there is a problem in the power supply of the arithmetic execution means and the information storage means, the game is executed by the gaming machine. Nevertheless, there is a problem that the third information cannot be obtained. On the other hand, according to the feature B2, since the arithmetic execution means, the information storage means, and the control means are operated by the same power source, the third information is always acquired if the game can be executed. be able to. Therefore, the reliability of the third information can be improved. As a result, the reliability of the inspection of the gaming machine can be improved, and the soundness of the gaming machine can be improved.

[Feature B2]
The gaming machine described in feature B1.
A gaming machine comprising a transmission means (CPU 308) for transmitting the third information stored in the information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the gaming machine.

According to the feature B2, since the transmission means for transmitting the third information stored in the information storage means to a predetermined device connected to the gaming machine is provided, the third information can be stored by using the predetermined device. It becomes possible to manage the characteristics related to the game of the used gaming machine.

[Feature B3]
The gaming machine according to feature B1 or feature B2.
Launch means (game ball launch mechanism 81) that launches a game ball toward the game area,
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area, and
A payout means (payout device 71) that pays out a game ball as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means.
Equipped with
The first information is information acquired based on the detection by the detection means.
The second information is information on the number of game balls (number of prize balls) to be paid out from the payout means as prize balls set in each of the plurality of detection means.
The third information is information on the number of prize balls paid out by the gaming machine in the executed game.

According to the feature B3, the third information is the information regarding the number of prize balls paid out by the gaming machine in the executed game. Therefore, it is possible to manage the characteristics of the gaming machine regarding the prize balls actually paid out by using the third information stored in the information storage means.

<Characteristic C group>
The feature C group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature C1]
A control means (main CPU 62x) that controls the execution of the game, and
Information storage means (register 304, operation result storage memory 309) that non-volatilely stores the first information acquired based on the executed game, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The information storage means is a gaming machine characterized in that it is housed inside a housing (a board box to which a sealing sticker is affixed) in which traces of opening and closing remain.

According to the feature C1, the information storage means is stored inside the housing in which the trace of opening and closing remains. Therefore, when physical contact is made with the information storage means, a trace of opening the housing remains. Therefore, if the first information stored in the information storage means is modified through physical contact with the information storage means, it is possible to grasp the modification from the trace of the housing. Become. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the first information. Since some gaming machines are distributed one after another, various external contacts are made in the process of distribution, but since the information storage means is stored inside the housing where traces of opening and closing remain, the gaming machine is used. It is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the first information by someone even in a situation where the information is distributed from time to time. Further, since the first information is the information acquired based on the executed game, it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the gaming machine regarding the game by using the first information. Therefore, according to the feature C1, the gaming machine can be properly managed and inspected by preventing an unauthorized modification of the first information reflecting the gaming characteristics of the gaming machine. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature C2]
The gaming machine described in Feature C1.
The information storage means is a gaming machine characterized in that it operates by the same power source as the control means.

According to the feature C2, since the information storage means operates by the same power source as the control means, the first information can be acquired if the power is supplied to the gaming machine. If the information storage means and the control means are operated by different power sources, if there is a problem in the power supply of the information storage means, the first information is executed even though the game is executed by the gaming machine. There is a problem that it cannot be obtained. On the other hand, according to the feature C2, since the information storage means and the control means are operated by the same power source, the first information can be always acquired if the game can be executed. Therefore, the reliability of the first information can be improved. As a result, the reliability of the inspection of the gaming machine can be improved, and the soundness of the gaming machine can be improved.

[Feature C3]
The gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2.
A gaming machine comprising a transmission means (CPU 308) for transmitting the first information to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the gaming machine.

According to the feature C3, since the transmission means for transmitting the first information stored in the information storage means to a predetermined device connected to the gaming machine is provided, the first information can be stored by using the predetermined device. It is possible to manage and inspect the game-related characteristics of the game machine used.

<Characteristic D group>
The feature D group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature D1]
Launch means (game ball launch mechanism 81) that launches a game ball toward the game area,
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area, and
A payout means (payout device 71) that pays out a game ball as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means.
First prize ball number information storage for storing prize ball number information (prize ball number data) which is information on the number of game balls (prize ball number) paid out as prize balls set in each of the plurality of detection means. Means (main side ROM 63) and
A process execution means (game history management chip 300) that executes a predetermined process, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The processing execution means is
The prize ball number information acquisition means for acquiring the prize ball number information stored in the first prize ball number storage means, and the prize ball number information acquisition means.
A second prize ball number information storage means (memory for storing prize ball number data 306) that stores the prize ball number information acquired by the prize ball number information acquisition means, and
The number information storage means (register 304) for storing information regarding the number of game balls detected by the detection means, and
By executing the calculation based on the information regarding the number of the game balls stored in the number information storage means and the prize ball number information stored in the second prize ball number information storage means, the game is played. Calculation execution means (CPU308) for calculating game history information (role ratio, etc.), which is information related to the history of
A game history information storage means (memory 309 for storing calculation results) that stores the game history information calculated by the calculation execution means, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

The prize ball number information set in the gaming machine is generally set to a different value for each type (model) of the gaming machine.

According to the feature D1, since the processing execution means acquires the prize ball number information stored in the first prize ball number storage means, different prize ball number information is set for each type (model) of the game machine. Even so, the processing execution means can calculate the correct game history information by using the prize ball number information set for each type of game machine.

If the gaming machine is illegally modified or the like, the calculated gaming history information may have an unnatural value different from the expected value. Therefore, the inspector of the gaming machine can appropriately determine whether or not the gaming machine has been tampered with by checking the gaming history information. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature D2]
The gaming machine described in feature D1.
A prize ball number information transmitting means (CPU 62x) for transmitting a signal including the prize ball number information stored in the first prize ball number information storage means to the processing executing means is provided.
The acquisition means is a gaming machine characterized in that the prize ball number information is acquired by receiving the signal transmitted from the prize ball number information transmitting means.

According to the feature D2, since the signal including the prize ball number information stored in the first prize ball number information storage means is transmitted to the processing execution means, the processing execution means accesses the first prize ball number storage means. Even if the configuration cannot be performed or the processing execution means cannot grasp the storage position (memory address) of the prize ball number information stored in the first prize ball number storage means, the processing execution means. Can acquire the prize ball number information stored in the first prize ball number storage means.

[Feature D3]
The gaming machine according to feature D1 or feature D2.
It is characterized by comprising a game history information transmitting means (CPU 308) for transmitting the game history information stored in the game history information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the game machine. A game machine to play.

According to the feature D3, since the game history information of the gaming machine is transmitted to the predetermined device, the predetermined device can display the game history information of the gaming machine. Then, the inspector of the gaming machine can confirm the gaming history information displayed on the predetermined device.

[Feature D4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to the feature D3.
A gaming machine including a display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the game history information stored in the game history information storage means.

According to the feature D4, since the game history information is displayed on the display means of the game machine, the inspector of the game machine does not need to use a dedicated device for confirming the game history information, and the game history of the game machine. You can check the information.

[Feature D5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D4.
The launching means is configured so that the launching of a game ball cannot be executed until the processing executing means completes the storage of the prize ball number information in the second prize ball number information storage means. A game machine characterized by that.

According to the feature D5, since the game ball is not fired until the storage of the prize ball number information in the second prize ball number information storage means is completed, the game ball leaks from the calculation target of the game history information by the calculation execution means. It is possible to prevent the information from being lost.

<Characteristic E group>
The feature E group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature E1]
Launch means (game ball launch mechanism 81) that launches a game ball toward the game area,
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area, and
A payout means (payout device 71) that pays out a game ball as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means.
A process execution means (game history management chip 300) that executes a predetermined process, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The processing execution means is
Prize ball number information storage means (prize) that stores prize ball number information (prize ball number data) that is information on the number of game balls (prize ball number) paid out as prize balls set in each of the plurality of detection means. Memory for storing ball count data 306) and
The number information storage means (register 304) for storing information regarding the number of game balls detected by the detection means, and
Every time the number of game balls (number of passing through discharge passages N _OUT ) detected by a predetermined detection means (discharge passage detection sensor 44h) stored in the number information storage means reaches a specified value (500), the said number information storage means. Information on the history of the game by executing a calculation based on the information on the number of the game balls stored in the number information storage means and the prize ball number information stored in the prize ball number information storage means. An arithmetic execution means (CPU308) for calculating game history information (role ratio, etc.), which is
A game history information storage means (memory 309 for storing calculation results) that stores the game history information calculated by the calculation execution means, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature E1, the game history information is calculated every time the number of game balls detected by the predetermined detection means reaches the specified value, so that the number of game balls detected by each game machine reaches the specified value. Even if there is a variation in the time, it is possible to calculate the game history information that does not affect the variation in the time. That is, even if there is a difference in the frequency at which the game ball is detected, it is possible to calculate highly accurate game history information that is not easily affected by the difference. As a result, the inspector of the gaming machine can confirm the highly accurate gaming history information, and can appropriately determine whether or not the gaming machine has been tampered with. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature E2]
The gaming machine described in the feature E1.
First calculation execution condition storage means (main side ROM 63) that stores information about the predetermined detection means (discharge passage detection sensor 44h) and the specified values (500 pieces) as calculation execution conditions that are conditions for executing the calculation. )
The processing execution means is
An operation execution condition acquisition means for acquiring the operation execution condition stored in the first operation execution condition storage means, and an operation execution condition acquisition means.
A second operation execution condition storage means (memory for storing operation execution conditions 307) for storing the acquired operation execution conditions, and
Equipped with
The calculation execution means is a gaming machine characterized in that the calculation is executed when the calculation execution condition stored in the second calculation execution condition storage means is satisfied.

Since the characteristics of the game are different depending on the type (model) of the game machine, the optimum conditions for executing the calculation for calculating the game history information are also different. Therefore, different calculation execution conditions are stored for each type (model) of the gaming machine.

According to the feature E2, since the processing execution means acquires the calculation execution conditions stored in the first calculation execution condition storage means, the calculation execution conditions set for each type (model) of the game machine are satisfied. You can perform the operation if.

[Feature E3]
The gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2.
The processing execution means is
A gaming machine comprising: an erasing means for erasing information regarding the number of gaming balls stored in the number information storage means after the calculation executing means executes the calculation.

According to the feature E3, after the calculation execution means executes the calculation, the information regarding the number of game balls stored in the number information storage means is deleted, so that the information regarding the number of game balls is stored in the number information storage means again. It becomes possible to do. Therefore, the storage capacity required for the number information storage means can be reduced.

[Feature E4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E3.
It is characterized by comprising a game history information transmitting means (CPU 308) for transmitting the game history information stored in the game history information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the game machine. A game machine to play.

According to the feature E4, since the game history information of the gaming machine is transmitted to the predetermined device, the predetermined device can display the game history information of the gaming machine. Then, the inspector of the gaming machine can confirm the gaming history information displayed on the predetermined device.

[Feature E5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E4.
A gaming machine including a display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the game history information stored in the game history information storage means.

According to the feature E5, since the game history information is displayed on the display means of the game machine, the inspector of the game machine does not need to use a dedicated device for confirming the game history information, and the game history of the game machine. You can check the information.

<Characteristic F group>
The feature F group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature F1]
Launch means (game ball launch mechanism 81) that launches a game ball toward the game area,
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area, and
A payout means (payout device 71) that pays out a game ball as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means.
A process execution means (game history management chip 300) that executes a predetermined process, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The processing execution means is
Prize ball number information storage means (prize) that stores prize ball number information (prize ball number data) that is information on the number of game balls (prize ball number) paid out as prize balls set in each of the plurality of detection means. Memory for storing ball count data 306) and
The number information storage means (register 304) for storing information regarding the number of game balls detected by the detection means, and
Every time a predetermined time (1 hour) elapses, it is based on the information on the number of the game balls stored in the number information storage means and the prize ball number information stored in the prize ball number information storage means. A calculation execution means (CPU308) that calculates game history information (character ratio, etc.), which is information related to the game history, by executing the calculation.
A game history information storage means (memory 309 for storing calculation results) that stores the game history information calculated by the calculation execution means, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature F1, since the game history information is calculated every time a predetermined time elapses, the inspector of the gaming machine can confirm the game history information calculated by the statistical processing using the concept of time. It is possible to appropriately determine whether or not the gaming machine has been tampered with. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature F2]
Feature The gaming machine described in F1.
As an operation execution condition which is a condition for executing the operation, a first operation execution condition storage means (main side ROM 63) for storing information regarding a time interval for executing the operation is provided.
The processing execution means is
An operation execution condition acquisition means for acquiring the operation execution condition stored in the operation execution condition storage means, and an operation execution condition acquisition means.
A second operation execution condition storage means (memory for storing operation execution conditions 307) for storing the acquired operation execution conditions, and
Equipped with
The calculation execution means is a gaming machine characterized in that the calculation is executed when the calculation execution condition stored in the second calculation execution condition storage means is satisfied.

Since the characteristics of the game are different depending on the type (model) of the game machine, the optimum conditions for executing the calculation for calculating the game history information are also different. Therefore, different calculation execution conditions are stored for each type (model) of the gaming machine.

According to the feature F2, since the processing execution means acquires the calculation execution conditions stored in the first calculation execution condition storage means, the calculation execution conditions set for each type (model) of the game machine are satisfied. You can perform the operation if.

[Feature F3]
The gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2.
A measuring means for measuring the elapsed time since the calculation is executed, and
A determination means for determining whether or not a game is being played by a player,
Equipped with
The measuring means is a gaming machine characterized in that the measurement of the elapsed time is interrupted during a period in which it is determined by the determining means that the game is not being performed.

According to the feature F3, during the period when it is determined that the game is not performed, the measurement of the elapsed time from the execution of the calculation is interrupted, so that the game is targeted only during the period when the game is actually performed. History information can be calculated.

[Feature F4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to the feature F3.
It is characterized by comprising a game history information transmitting means (CPU 308) for transmitting the game history information stored in the game history information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the game machine. A game machine to play.

According to the feature F4, since the game history information of the gaming machine is transmitted to the predetermined device, the predetermined device can display the game history information of the gaming machine. Then, the inspector of the gaming machine can confirm the gaming history information displayed on the predetermined device.

[Feature F5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to the feature F4.
A gaming machine including a display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the game history information stored in the game history information storage means.

According to the feature F5, since the game history information is displayed on the display means of the game machine, the inspector of the game machine does not need to use a dedicated device for confirming the game history information, and the game history of the game machine. You can check the information.

<Characteristic G group>
The feature G group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature G1]
Launch means (game ball launch mechanism 81) that launches a game ball toward the game area,
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area, and
A payout means (payout device 71) that pays out a game ball as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means.
A process execution means (game history management chip 300) that executes a predetermined process, and
A monitoring means (power failure monitoring circuit 86) for monitoring the occurrence of power failure, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The processing execution means is
Prize ball number information storage means (prize) that stores prize ball number information (prize ball number data) that is information on the number of game balls (prize ball number) paid out as prize balls set in each of the plurality of detection means. Memory for storing ball count data 306) and
The number information storage means (register 304) for storing information regarding the number of game balls detected by the detection means, and
When the monitoring means detects the occurrence of power interruption, the information regarding the number of the game balls stored in the number information storage means and the prize ball number information stored in the prize ball number information storage means. A calculation execution means (CPU308) that calculates game history information (character ratio, etc.), which is information related to the game history, by executing a calculation based on
A game history information storage means (memory 309 for storing calculation results) that stores the game history information calculated by the calculation execution means, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature G1, since the game history information is calculated when the occurrence of the power cutoff is detected, it is detected during the period from the start of the power supply to the game machine to the occurrence of the power cutoff. The game history information can be calculated based on the number of game balls. That is, since the game history information is calculated for each period from the start to the end of the business of the game hall, the game history information is calculated for each business day of the game hall. Therefore, the inspector of the gaming machine can easily grasp whether or not the characteristics of the gaming history information have changed over the business days of the gaming hall, and the gaming machine has not been tampered with. It becomes possible to judge appropriately. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature G2]
The gaming machine described in the feature G1.
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a supply means (capacitor) for supplying power to the calculation execution means even after the power supply is cut off.

According to the feature G2, since the supply means for supplying power to the calculation execution means even after the power is cut off is provided, the calculation of the game history information by the calculation execution means and the game history information storage means of the game history information. You can surely complete the memory of.

[Feature G3]
The gaming machine according to the feature G1 or the feature G2.
It is characterized by comprising a game history information transmitting means (CPU 308) for transmitting the game history information stored in the game history information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the game machine. A game machine to play.

According to the feature G3, since the game history information of the gaming machine is transmitted to the predetermined device, the predetermined device can display the game history information of the gaming machine. Then, the inspector of the gaming machine can confirm the gaming history information displayed on the predetermined device.

[Feature G4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features G1 to the feature G3.
A gaming machine including a display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the game history information stored in the game history information storage means.

According to the feature G4, since the game history information is displayed on the display means of the game machine, the inspector of the game machine does not need to use a dedicated device for confirming the game history information, and the game history of the game machine. You can check the information.

<Characteristic H group>
The feature H group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Characteristic H1]
Launch means (game ball launch mechanism 81) that launches a game ball toward the game area,
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area, and
A payout means (payout device 71) that pays out a game ball as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means.
A notification means that notifies in a predetermined case, and
A process execution means (game history management chip 300) that executes a predetermined process, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The processing execution means is
Prize ball number information storage means (prize) that stores prize ball number information (prize ball number data) that is information on the number of game balls (prize ball number) paid out as prize balls set in each of the plurality of detection means. Memory for storing ball count data 306) and
The number information storage means (register 304) for storing information regarding the number of game balls detected by the detection means, and
Game history information which is information about the history of the game based on the information about the number of the game balls stored in the number information storage means and the prize ball number information stored in the prize ball number information storage means. A calculation means (CPU308) for calculating (character ratio, etc.) and
A game history information storage means (memory 309 for storing calculation results) that stores the game history information calculated by the calculation means, and
Equipped with
The notifying means is a gaming machine characterized in that it notifies when the game history information stored in the game history information storage means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

According to the feature H1, since the game history information is notified when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the inspector of the gaming machine can easily find the gaming machine whose game history information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. can. Then, by checking the game history information of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been tampered with. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Characteristic H2]
Feature The gaming machine described in H1.
The notification means is characterized in that it notifies when a specific value (payout ratio, etc.) included in the game history information stored in the game history information storage means is no longer included in a predetermined range. Machine.

According to the feature H2, when the specific value included in the game history information is no longer included in the predetermined range, the inspector of the gaming machine notifies that the specific value included in the game history information is not included in the predetermined range. You can easily find a gaming machine that is no longer included in. Then, by checking the game history information of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been tampered with. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Characteristic H3]
Feature The gaming machine described in H2,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the notification means determines a mode of notification (color of an LED lamp) according to a degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range.

According to the feature H3, since the mode of notification is determined according to the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range, the inspector of the gaming machine determines which specific value included in the gaming history information is from the predetermined range. It is possible to easily grasp whether the degree is different.

[Feature H4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features H1 to the feature H3.
The notification means is a gaming machine including a display means for displaying a predetermined display as the notification.

According to the feature H4, since the display means for displaying a predetermined display as a notification is provided, the inspector of the gaming machine can easily know that the gaming history information of the gaming machine does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

[Feature H5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features H1 to the feature H4.
It is characterized by comprising a game history information transmitting means (CPU 308) for transmitting the game history information stored in the game history information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the game machine. A game machine to play.

According to the feature H5, since the game history information of the gaming machine is transmitted to the predetermined device, the predetermined device can display the game history information of the gaming machine. Then, the inspector of the gaming machine can confirm the gaming history information displayed on the predetermined device.

[Feature H6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features H1 to the feature H5.
A gaming machine including a display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the game history information stored in the game history information storage means.

According to the feature H6, since the game history information is displayed on the display means of the game machine, the inspector of the game machine does not need to use a dedicated device for confirming the game history information, and the game history of the game machine. You can check the information.

<Characteristic I group>
The feature I group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature I1]
Launch means (game ball launch mechanism 81) that launches a game ball toward the game area,
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area, and
A payout means (payout device 71) that pays out a game ball as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means.
A process execution means (game history management chip 300) that executes a predetermined process, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The processing execution means is
Prize ball number information storage means (prize) that stores prize ball number information (prize ball number data) that is information on the number of game balls (prize ball number) paid out as prize balls set in each of the plurality of detection means. Memory for storing ball count data 306) and
Each time the game ball is detected by the detection means, the ball entry information storage means (memory 309b for ball entry information storage) that sequentially stores the entry information, which is information indicating that the game ball is detected by the detection means. When,
For a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the game machine, the ball entry information stored in the ball entry information storage means and the prize ball stored in the prize ball number information storage means. A transmission means (CPU308) for transmitting numerical information and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature I1, since the ball entry information and the prize ball number information are transmitted to the predetermined device, the predetermined device is information regarding the game history based on the ball entry information and the prize ball number information. The game history information can be calculated in any range. Therefore, the inspector of the gaming machine can confirm the gaming history information of the gaming machine calculated in an arbitrary range by a predetermined device, and it is appropriate whether or not the gaming machine has been tampered with. It becomes possible to judge. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature I2]
The gaming machine described in Feature I1.
It is equipped with a date and time information acquisition means (RTC96) for acquiring date and time information, which is information about the date and time.
The ball entry information storage means is a gaming machine characterized in that when the ball entry information is stored, the date and time information corresponding to the date and time detected by the detection means is added and stored.

According to the feature I2, the predetermined device that has received the ball entry information to which the date and time information is added can specify the range of the date and time and calculate the game history information. Therefore, the inspector of the gaming machine can perform a detailed inspection based on the gaming history information in which the range of the date and time is specified. Further, if the predetermined device displays the entry information to which the date and time information is added, the inspector of the gaming machine can also grasp the date and time when the gaming ball is detected by each detection means. ..

[Feature I3]
The gaming machine according to feature I1 or feature I2.
A gaming machine including a display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the ball entry information stored in the ball entry information storage means.

According to the feature I3, since the ball entry information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, the inspector of the gaming machine can enter the ball of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for confirming the ball entry information. You can check the information.

<Characteristic J group>
The feature J group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature J1]
Launch means (game ball launch mechanism 81) that launches a game ball toward the game area,
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area, and
Prize ball number information storage means (mainly) for storing prize ball number information (prize ball number data) which is information on the number of game balls (prize ball number) paid out as prize balls set in each of the plurality of detection means. Side ROM 63) and
The game progress process (big hit lottery process, electric service open lottery process, prize ball payout process, symbol on the main display unit 45), which is a process for advancing the game based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means. The variable display process, the opening / closing process of the opening / closing door 36b and the electric accessory 34a, etc.) are executed, and the detection information of the game ball detected by the detection means and the prize ball stored in the prize ball number information storage means. A processing execution means (main side CPU 62x) that executes a process of calculating game history information (character ratio, etc.), which is information related to the game history, by executing a calculation based on numerical information.
A game history information storage means (main side RAM 64, flash memory 64x) that is stored in the housing of the game machine main body and stores the game history information calculated by the processing execution means.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature J1, the game history information storage means for storing the game history information is provided. Since the game history information has a correlation with the behavior of the game ball in the game, the game history information is different for each game machine and is information unique to the game machine. That is, the game history information is information that reflects the characteristics of the game machine. According to the feature J1, the game history information, which is the information reflecting the characteristics of the game machine, is stored in the game history information storage means stored in the housing of the game machine main body. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, the characteristics of the gaming machine can be inspected by acquiring the gaming history information from the gaming machine main body itself. When the gaming machine is installed in the gaming hall, information on the characteristics of the gaming machine can be acquired by the hall computer installed in the gaming hall. However, since the gaming machine is distributed from time to time, it may be placed in a state where it is not connected to the hall computer. In this case, the conventional gaming machine may acquire information on the characteristics of the gaming machine. Can not. Feature The J1 gaming machine stores game history information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, in the gaming history information storage means stored in the housing of the gaming machine main body, so that the gaming machine is connected to the hall computer. The game history information can be acquired from the game machine main body even if it is not in the state. That is, according to the feature J1, it is possible to associate the gaming machine with the gaming history information on a one-to-one basis, and it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the gaming machine. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the feature J1, since a single processing execution means executes the game progress processing and the processing for calculating the game history information, it is necessary to provide another calculation chip or the like for executing the calculation processing. It is possible to reduce the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine.

[Feature J2]
Feature J1 is the gaming machine described in
The processing execution means is
The first mode (game mode), which is a mode in which the game progress process can be executed, and
When the first condition is satisfied (when the operation of pressing the mode switching button is executed, when the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button is executed, the inspection machine is connected to the inspection terminal 65. A second mode (inspection mode), which is a mode executed when the 320 is connected, at a predetermined time, or when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer),
Is feasible and
The second mode is a gaming machine characterized in that the gaming progress process is not executed even when the gaming ball passes through the predetermined area.

According to the feature J2, it is possible to execute the second mode in which the game progress process is not executed even when the game ball passes through a predetermined area, so that it is not preferable to execute the game progress process in parallel with the game progress process. In the second mode, it is possible to execute a process, a process in which a problem is likely to occur when the process is executed in parallel with the game progress process, and the like. Further, according to the feature J2, since the game progress process is not executed in the second mode, when the game progress process is executed in parallel when developing a program for the process to be executed in the second mode. Since it is not necessary to consider countermeasures, it is possible to greatly improve the development efficiency of the processing program to be executed in the second mode.

[Feature J3]
Features The gaming machine described in J2.
The second mode is a gaming machine characterized in that it is a mode for outputting the game history information.

The game history information is information whose contents change when the game ball is detected and the game progress process is executed. Therefore, if a configuration is adopted in which a process of outputting game history information is executed in parallel with the game progress process, the game progress is performed while the inspector of the game machine is inspecting the characteristics of the game machine by the game history information. The processing may be executed and the content of the game history information may change at any time, making it difficult to smoothly carry out the inspection. On the other hand, according to the feature J3, the game history information is output in the second mode in which the game progress process is not executed even when the game ball passes through a predetermined area, so that the game history information is output. It is possible to prevent the content of the game history information from changing during the period. As a result, the inspector of the gaming machine can smoothly carry out the inspection.

[Feature J4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features J1 to the feature J3.
The processing execution means is
The first mode (game mode), which is a mode in which the game progress process can be executed, and
When the first condition is satisfied (when the operation of pressing the mode switching button is executed, when the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button is executed, the inspection machine is connected to the inspection terminal 65. A second mode (inspection mode), which is a mode executed when the 320 is connected, at a predetermined time, or when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer),
Is feasible and
When the first condition is satisfied during the execution of the game progress process in the first mode (when the operation of pressing the mode switching button is executed, the power button is pressed while pressing the mode switching button. At the time when the operation of At the timing when the game progress processing such as the timing is completed up to the predetermined processing stage, and the timing when all the processing of each game progress processing being executed is completed), the mode shifts from the first mode to the second mode. A gaming machine characterized by being configured to play.

According to the feature J4, when the first condition is satisfied in the first mode, the mode is changed from the first mode to the second mode at the timing when the second condition is satisfied. Therefore, the second mode is compared with the configuration in which the first mode is changed to the second mode at the timing immediately after the first condition is satisfied regardless of whether or not the second condition is satisfied. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of processing problems when migrating to.

For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the mode shifts from the first mode to the second mode immediately after the first condition is satisfied regardless of whether or not the second condition is satisfied, the first mode is adopted. If the first condition that a predetermined operation is executed is satisfied during the period in which the symbol variation display process as the game progress process is executed in the mode of, the second is in the middle of the symbol variation display. It becomes difficult to control the timing of stopping the symbol and the fluctuation time of the symbol. On the other hand, according to the feature J4, for example, the first condition that a predetermined operation is executed during the period in which the symbol variation display process as the game progress process is executed in the first mode is satisfied. If it is satisfied, the mode shifts to the second mode at the timing when the second condition that the symbol variation display processing is not executed, that is, the timing after the symbol being displayed in variation is stopped. .. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of processing problems such as difficulty in controlling the timing of stopping the symbol and the fluctuation time of the symbol.

[Feature J5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features J1 to the feature J4.
The processing execution means is
The first mode (game mode), which is a mode in which the game progress process can be executed, and
When the first condition is satisfied (when the operation of pressing the mode switching button is executed, when the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button is executed, the inspection machine is connected to the inspection terminal 65. A second mode (inspection mode), which is a mode executed when the 320 is connected, at a predetermined time, or when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer),
Is feasible and
When the third condition is satisfied during the second mode (when 10 minutes have passed after shifting to the inspection mode), an operation for shifting from the second mode to the first mode. Even when the transition operation (operation of pressing the mode switching button, operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button) is not executed, the first mode is changed from the second mode. A gaming machine characterized by being configured to transition to a mode.

According to the feature J5, when the third condition is satisfied during the second mode, even if the transition operation for shifting from the second mode to the first mode is not executed. Since it is configured to shift from the second mode to the first mode, it is possible to prevent the shift operation from not being executed and not returning to the first mode. For example, after the transition to the second mode, the administrator or the inspector of the gaming machine forgets to execute the transition operation, and the gaming machine does not return to the first mode in which the gaming progress process can be executed, and the game is played. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a person cannot play a game with the gaming machine.

[Feature J6]
Features The gaming machine described in J5.
The third condition is a gaming machine characterized in that a predetermined time elapses from a predetermined time point (10 minutes elapses from the time when the inspection mode is entered).

According to the feature J6, when a predetermined time has elapsed from a predetermined time during the second mode, the transition operation for shifting from the second mode to the first mode has not been executed. However, since it is configured to shift from the second mode to the first mode, it is possible to reliably suppress that the shift operation is not executed and the mode does not return to the first mode. For example, even if the manager of the gaming machine, the inspector, or the like forgets to execute the transition operation after the transition to the second mode, if a predetermined time elapses from the predetermined time, the first Since the mode is restored, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the gaming machine does not return to the first mode in which the gaming progress process can be executed and the player cannot play the game on the gaming machine.

[Feature J7]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features J1 to the feature J6.
A game progress processing information storage means (main side RAM 64) that is stored in the housing of the game machine main body and stores information related to the game progress process.
The game is based on the execution of an erasing operation (an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the RAM clear button), which is an operation for erasing the information stored in the game progress processing information storage means. An erasing means that erases the information stored in the progress processing information storage means,
Equipped with
The processing execution means is
The first mode (game mode), which is a mode in which the game progress process can be executed, and
When the first condition is satisfied (when the operation of pressing the mode switching button is executed, when the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button is executed, the inspection machine is connected to the inspection terminal 65. A second mode (inspection mode), which is a mode executed when the 320 is connected, at a predetermined time, or when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer),
Is feasible and
The erasing means is in a state after shifting to the second mode and before shifting to the first mode (a state in the inspection mode, a state in which the power is turned off as it is after shifting to the inspection mode). A gaming machine characterized in that the information stored in the game progress processing information storage means is not erased even when the erasing operation is executed.

According to the feature J7, in the state after the transition to the second mode and before the transition to the first mode, an erasing operation for erasing the information stored in the game progress processing information storage means is executed. Even in such a case, since the information stored in the game progress processing information storage means is not erased, in the state after the transition to the second mode and before the transition to the first mode, the first mode is set. Even if the erasing operation is mistakenly executed in an attempt to migrate, it is possible to prevent the information from being erroneously erased.

For example, the erasing operation for erasing the information stored in the game progress processing information storage means is an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the erasing button, and the first mode and the second mode In a configuration in which the operation for shifting between modes is an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the transition button, the transition button is used to shift from the second mode to the first mode. I intend to press the power button while pressing, but there is a risk that the power button will be pressed while pressing the erase button by mistake. However, according to the feature J7, in the state after the transition to the second mode and before the transition to the first mode, the operation of pressing the power button while erroneously pressing the erasing button is executed. Even if it does, it is possible to prevent the information from being accidentally deleted.

More specifically, for example, when shifting from the first mode to the second mode, the game progress process executed in the first mode is temporarily stopped, and the stopped game progress process is temporarily stopped. When a configuration is adopted in which the information for resuming the game after returning to the second mode is stored in the game progress processing information storage means, the transition button is pressed in an attempt to return from the second mode to the first mode. If you intend to press the power button while pressing it, but accidentally press the power button while pressing the erase button, the information for restarting the game progress process will be deleted, and the second After returning to the mode of, the game progress process cannot be restarted, which may give a disadvantage to the player. On the other hand, according to the feature J7, in the state after the transition to the second mode and before the transition to the first mode, the button for erasing is erroneously pressed in an attempt to shift to the first mode. Even if the power button is pressed while the power button is pressed, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the game progress processing information storage means from being accidentally erased, which is disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to prevent the memory from being lost.

[Feature J8]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features J1 to the feature J7.
A gaming machine including a display means (design display device 41) for displaying the game history information.

According to the feature J8, since the game history information is displayed on the display means of the game machine, the inspector of the game machine does not need to use a dedicated device for confirming the game history information, and the game history of the game machine. You can check the information.

[Feature J9]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features J1 to the feature J8.
The game history information storage means is characterized in that it is composed of a non-volatile memory (flash memory 64x) capable of holding the memory even when the power supply is cut off.

According to the feature J9, since the game history information is retained even if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, the gaming machine is placed in any state (for example, a distribution state in which the gaming machine is not supplied with power). However, it is possible to always associate the gaming machine with the gaming history information on a one-to-one basis, and it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the gaming machine.

[Feature J10]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features J1 to the feature J9.
The gaming history information storage means is a gaming machine characterized in that it is stored inside a housing (a board box to which a sealing sticker is affixed) in which traces of opening and closing remain.

According to the feature J10, the game history information storage means is stored inside the housing in which the trace of opening and closing remains. Therefore, when physical contact is made with the game history information storage means, a trace of opening the housing remains. Therefore, if the game history information stored in the game history information storage means is modified through physical contact with the game history information storage means, it is necessary to grasp the modification from the trace of the housing. Will be possible. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the game history information. Since some gaming machines are distributed one after another, various external contacts are made in the process of distribution, but since the gaming history information storage means is stored inside the housing in which traces of opening and closing remain. Even in a situation where gaming machines are distributed one after another, it is possible to suppress unauthorized modification of gaming history information by someone. Further, since the game history information is information acquired based on the executed game, it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the game machine regarding the game by using the game history information. Therefore, according to the feature J10, it is possible to properly manage and inspect the gaming machine by preventing unauthorized modification of the gaming history information that reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature J11]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features J1 to the feature J10.
A gaming machine comprising a notification means for notifying when the game history information stored in the game history information storage means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

According to the feature J11, since the game history information is notified when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the inspector of the gaming machine can easily find the gaming machine whose game history information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. can. Then, by checking the game history information of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been tampered with. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature J12]
Features The gaming machine described in J11.
The notification means is characterized in that it notifies when a specific value (payout ratio, etc.) included in the game history information stored in the game history information storage means is no longer included in a predetermined range. Machine.

According to the feature J12, when the specific value included in the game history information is no longer included in the predetermined range, the inspector of the gaming machine notifies that the specific value included in the game history information is not included in the predetermined range. You can easily find a gaming machine that is no longer included in. Then, by checking the game history information of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been tampered with. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature J13]
Features The gaming machine described in J12.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the notification means determines a mode of notification (color of an LED lamp) according to a degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range.

According to the feature J13, since the mode of notification is determined according to the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range, the inspector of the gaming machine determines which specific value included in the gaming history information is from the predetermined range. It is possible to easily grasp whether the degree is different.

[Feature J14]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features J11 to the feature J13.
The notification means is a gaming machine including a display means for displaying a predetermined display as the notification.

According to the feature J14, since the display means for displaying a predetermined display as a notification is provided, the inspector of the gaming machine can easily know that the gaming history information of the gaming machine does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

<Characteristic K group>
The feature K group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature K1]
Launch means (game ball launch mechanism 81) that launches a game ball toward the game area,
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area, and
The game progress process (big hit lottery process, electric motor open lottery process, prize ball payout process, symbol on the main display unit 45), which is a process for advancing the game based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means. Game progress processing execution means (main side CPU62x) that executes variation display processing, opening / closing processing of opening / closing door 36b, electric accessory 34a, etc.)
Equipped with
The game progress processing execution means is
The first mode (game mode), which is a mode in which the game progress process can be executed, and
When a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the operation of pressing the mode switching button is executed, when the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button is executed, the inspection machine 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65. The second mode (inspection mode), which is a mode executed when is connected, when a predetermined time is reached, and when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer), and
Is feasible and
The second mode is a gaming machine characterized in that the gaming progress process is not executed even when the gaming ball passes through the predetermined area.

According to the feature K1, it is possible to execute the second mode in which the game progress process is not executed even when the game ball passes through a predetermined area, so that it is not preferable to execute the game progress process in parallel with the game progress process. In the second mode, it is possible to execute a process, a process in which a problem is likely to occur when the process is executed in parallel with the game progress process, and the like. Further, according to the feature K1, since the game progress process is not executed in the second mode, when the game progress process is executed in parallel when developing a program for the process to be executed in the second mode. Since it is not necessary to consider countermeasures, it is possible to greatly improve the development efficiency of the processing program to be executed in the second mode.

[Feature K2]
Features The gaming machine described in K1.
Detection information (game history information including ball entry information, entry number information, bonus ratio, etc.) that is stored in the housing of the game machine main body and is information based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means. ) Is provided with storage means (calculation result storage memory 309, ball entry number storage memory 309a, ball entry information storage memory 309b, main side RAM 64, flash memory 64x).
The second mode is a gaming machine characterized in that it is a mode for outputting the detection information.

According to the feature K2, the detection information can be stored and the detection information can be output in the second mode. Since the detection information is information having a correlation with the behavior of the gaming ball in the game, the detection information is different for each gaming machine and is information unique to the gaming machine. That is, the detection information is information that reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine. According to the feature K2, the detection information, which is the information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, is stored in the storage means stored in the housing of the gaming machine main body. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, the characteristics of the gaming machine can be inspected by acquiring the detection information from the gaming machine main body itself. When the gaming machine is installed in the gaming hall, information on the characteristics of the gaming machine can be acquired by the hall computer installed in the gaming hall. However, since the gaming machine is distributed from time to time, it may be placed in a state where it is not connected to the hall computer. In this case, the conventional gaming machine may acquire information on the characteristics of the gaming machine. Can not. Feature The K2 gaming machine stores the detection information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, in the storage means stored in the housing of the gaming machine main body, so that the gaming machine is not connected to the hall computer. Even if there is, the detection information can be acquired from the game machine main body. That is, according to the feature K2, the gaming machine and the detection information can be linked to each other on a one-to-one basis, and the characteristics of the gaming machine can be managed and inspected. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

Further, the detection information is information whose content changes when the game ball is detected and the game progress process is executed. Therefore, if a configuration is adopted in which the process of outputting the detection information is executed in parallel with the game progress process, the game progress process is performed while the inspector of the game machine inspects the characteristics of the game machine by the detection information. It may be executed and the content of the detection information may change at any time, making it difficult to carry out the inspection smoothly. On the other hand, according to the feature K2, the detection information is output in the second mode in which the game progress process is not executed even when the game ball passes through a predetermined area, so that the detection information is output. It is possible to prevent the content of the detection information from changing during that time. As a result, the inspector of the gaming machine can smoothly carry out the inspection.

[Feature K3]
Features The gaming machine described in K2,
A gaming machine comprising a display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the detection information output in the second mode.

According to the feature K3, since the detection information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, the inspector of the gaming machine confirms the detection information of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for confirming the detection information. can do.

[Feature K4]
The gaming machine according to feature K2 or feature K3.
The storage means is a non-volatile memory capable of retaining storage even when the power supply is cut off (calculation result storage memory 309, ball entry number storage memory 309a, ball entry information storage memory 309b, flash). A gaming machine characterized by being composed of a memory 64x).

According to the feature K4, since the detection information is retained even if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, the gaming machine is placed in any state (for example, a distribution state in which the gaming machine is not supplied with power). However, it is possible to always associate the gaming machine with the detection information on a one-to-one basis, and it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the gaming machine.

[Feature K5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features K2 to the feature K4.
The storage means is a gaming machine characterized in that it is stored inside a housing (a board box to which a sealing sticker is affixed) in which traces of opening and closing remain.

According to the feature K5, the storage means is stored inside the housing in which the trace of opening and closing remains. Therefore, when physical contact is made with the storage means, a trace of opening the housing remains. Therefore, if the detection information stored in the storage means is modified through physical contact with the storage means, it becomes possible to grasp the modification from the trace of the housing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the detection information. Since some gaming machines are distributed one after another, various external contacts are made in the process of distribution, but since the storage means is stored inside the housing where traces of opening and closing remain, the gaming machine can be used. Even in a situation where the information is distributed from one place to another, it is possible to suppress unauthorized modification of the detection information by someone. Further, since the detection information is information acquired based on the executed game, it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the game machine regarding the game by using the detection information. Therefore, according to the feature K5, the gaming machine can be properly managed and inspected by preventing unauthorized modification of the detection information reflecting the gaming characteristics of the gaming machine. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature K6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features K2 to the feature K5.
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a notifying means for notifying when the detection information stored in the storage means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

According to the feature K6, since the detection information is notified when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the inspector of the gaming machine can easily find the gaming machine whose detection information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Then, by confirming the detection information of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been tampered with. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature K7]
Features The gaming machine described in K6.
The notifying means is a gaming machine characterized in that it notifies when a specific value (payout ratio or the like) contained in the detection information stored in the storage means is no longer included in a predetermined range.

According to the feature K7, when the specific value included in the detection information is no longer included in the predetermined range, the pachinko machine inspector is notified that the specific value included in the detection information is included in the predetermined range. You can easily find a game machine that is no longer available. Then, by confirming the detection information of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been tampered with. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature K8]
Features The gaming machine described in K7.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the notification means determines a mode of notification (color of an LED lamp) according to a degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range.

According to the feature K8, the mode of notification is determined according to the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range, so that the inspector of the gaming machine can see how much the specific value included in the detection information is from the predetermined range. It is possible to easily grasp whether or not there is a divergence.

[Feature K9]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features K6 to the feature K8.
The notification means is a gaming machine including a display means for displaying a predetermined display as the notification.

According to the feature K9, since the display means for displaying a predetermined display as a notification is provided, the inspector of the gaming machine can easily know that the detection information of the gaming machine does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

<Characteristic L group>
The feature L group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature L1]
Launch means (game ball launch mechanism 81) that launches a game ball toward the game area,
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area, and
The game progress process (big hit lottery process, electric motor open lottery process, prize ball payout process, symbol on the main display unit 45), which is a process for advancing the game based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means. Game progress processing execution means (main side CPU62x) that executes variation display processing, opening / closing processing of opening / closing door 36b, electric accessory 34a, etc.)
Equipped with
The game progress processing execution means is
The first mode (game mode), which is a mode in which the game progress process can be executed, and
When the first condition is satisfied (when the operation of pressing the mode switching button is executed, when the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button is executed, the inspection machine is connected to the inspection terminal 65. A second mode (inspection mode), which is a mode executed when the 320 is connected, at a predetermined time, or when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer),
Is feasible and
When the first condition is satisfied during the execution of the game progress process in the first mode (when the operation of pressing the mode switching button is executed, the power button is pressed while pressing the mode switching button. At the time when the operation of At the timing when the game progress processing such as the timing is completed up to the predetermined processing stage, and the timing when all the processing of each game progress processing being executed is completed), the mode shifts from the first mode to the second mode. A gaming machine characterized by being configured to play.

According to the feature L1, when the first condition is satisfied in the first mode, the mode is changed from the first mode to the second mode at the timing when the second condition is satisfied. Therefore, the second mode is compared with the configuration in which the first mode is changed to the second mode at the timing immediately after the first condition is satisfied regardless of whether or not the second condition is satisfied. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of processing problems when migrating to.

For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the mode shifts from the first mode to the second mode immediately after the first condition is satisfied regardless of whether or not the second condition is satisfied, the first mode is adopted. If the first condition that a predetermined operation is executed is satisfied during the period in which the symbol variation display process as the game progress process is executed in the mode of, the second is in the middle of the symbol variation display. It becomes difficult to control the timing of stopping the symbol and the fluctuation time of the symbol. On the other hand, according to the feature L1, for example, the first condition that a predetermined operation is executed during the period in which the symbol variation display process as the game progress process is executed in the first mode is satisfied. If it is satisfied, the mode shifts to the second mode at the timing when the second condition that the symbol variation display processing is not executed, that is, the timing after the symbol being displayed in variation is stopped. .. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of processing problems such as difficulty in controlling the timing of stopping the symbol and the fluctuation time of the symbol.

[Feature L2]
The gaming machine described in the feature L1.
Detection information (game history information including ball entry information, entry number information, bonus ratio, etc.) that is stored in the housing of the game machine main body and is information based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means. ) Is provided with storage means (calculation result storage memory 309, ball entry number storage memory 309a, ball entry information storage memory 309b, main side RAM 64, flash memory 64x).
The second mode is a gaming machine characterized in that it is a mode for outputting the detection information.

According to the feature L2, the detection information can be stored and the detection information can be output in the second mode. Since the detection information is information having a correlation with the behavior of the gaming ball in the game, the detection information is different for each gaming machine and is information unique to the gaming machine. That is, the detection information is information that reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine. According to the feature L2, the detection information, which is the information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, is stored in the storage means stored in the housing of the gaming machine main body. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, the characteristics of the gaming machine can be inspected by acquiring the detection information from the gaming machine main body itself. When the gaming machine is installed in the gaming hall, information on the characteristics of the gaming machine can be acquired by the hall computer installed in the gaming hall. However, since the gaming machine is distributed from time to time, it may be placed in a state where it is not connected to the hall computer. In this case, the conventional gaming machine may acquire information on the characteristics of the gaming machine. Can not. The L2 gaming machine stores the detection information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, in the storage means stored in the housing of the gaming machine main body, so that the gaming machine is not connected to the hall computer. Even if there is, the detection information can be acquired from the game machine main body. That is, according to the feature L2, the gaming machine and the detection information can be linked to each other on a one-to-one basis, and the characteristics of the gaming machine can be managed and inspected. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature L3]
The gaming machine described in the feature L2,
A gaming machine comprising a display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the detection information output in the second mode.

According to the feature L3, since the detection information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, the inspector of the gaming machine confirms the detection information of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for confirming the detection information. can do.

[Feature L4]
The gaming machine according to feature L2 or feature L3.
The storage means is a non-volatile memory capable of retaining storage even when the power supply is cut off (calculation result storage memory 309, ball entry number storage memory 309a, ball entry information storage memory 309b, flash). A gaming machine characterized by being composed of a memory 64x).

According to the feature L4, since the detection information is retained even if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, the gaming machine is placed in any state (for example, a distribution state in which the gaming machine is not supplied with power). However, it is possible to always associate the gaming machine with the detection information on a one-to-one basis, and it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the gaming machine.

[Feature L5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features L2 to the feature L4.
The storage means is a gaming machine characterized in that it is stored inside a housing (a board box to which a sealing sticker is affixed) in which traces of opening and closing remain.

According to the feature L5, the storage means is stored inside the housing in which the trace of opening and closing remains. Therefore, when physical contact is made with the storage means, a trace of opening the housing remains. Therefore, if the detection information stored in the storage means is modified through physical contact with the storage means, it becomes possible to grasp the modification from the trace of the housing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the detection information. Since some gaming machines are distributed one after another, various external contacts are made in the process of distribution, but since the storage means is stored inside the housing where traces of opening and closing remain, the gaming machine can be used. Even in a situation where the information is distributed from one place to another, it is possible to suppress unauthorized modification of the detection information by someone. Further, since the detection information is information acquired based on the executed game, it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the game machine regarding the game by using the detection information. Therefore, according to the feature L5, the gaming machine can be properly managed and inspected by preventing unauthorized modification of the detection information reflecting the gaming characteristics of the gaming machine. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature L6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features L2 to the feature L5.
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a notifying means for notifying when the detection information stored in the storage means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

According to the feature L6, since the detection information is notified when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the inspector of the gaming machine can easily find the gaming machine whose detection information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Then, by confirming the detection information of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been tampered with. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature L7]
Feature The gaming machine described in L6,
The notifying means is a gaming machine characterized in that it notifies when a specific value (payout ratio or the like) contained in the detection information stored in the storage means is no longer included in a predetermined range.

According to the feature L7, when the specific value included in the detection information is no longer included in the predetermined range, the pachinko machine inspector is notified that the specific value included in the detection information is included in the predetermined range. You can easily find a game machine that is no longer available. Then, by confirming the detection information of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been tampered with. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature L8]
Feature The gaming machine described in L7,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the notification means determines a mode of notification (color of an LED lamp) according to a degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range.

According to the feature L8, the mode of notification is determined according to the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range, so that the inspector of the gaming machine can see how much the specific value included in the detection information is from the predetermined range. It is possible to easily grasp whether or not there is a divergence.

[Feature L9]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features L6 to the feature L8.
The notification means is a gaming machine including a display means for displaying a predetermined display as the notification.

According to the feature L9, since the display means for displaying a predetermined display as a notification is provided, the inspector of the gaming machine can easily know that the detection information of the gaming machine does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

<Characteristic M group>
The feature M group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature M1]
Launch means (game ball launch mechanism 81) that launches a game ball toward the game area,
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area, and
The game progress process (big hit lottery process, electric motor open lottery process, prize ball payout process, symbol on the main display unit 45), which is a process for advancing the game based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means. Game progress processing execution means (main side CPU62x) that executes variation display processing, opening / closing processing of opening / closing door 36b, electric accessory 34a, etc.)
Equipped with
The game progress processing execution means is
The first mode (game mode), which is a mode in which the game progress process can be executed, and
When the first condition is satisfied (when the operation of pressing the mode switching button is executed, when the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button is executed, the inspection machine is connected to the inspection terminal 65. A second mode (inspection mode), which is a mode executed when the 320 is connected, at a predetermined time, or when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer),
Is feasible and
When the second condition is satisfied during the second mode (when 10 minutes have passed after shifting to the inspection mode), a predetermined setting for shifting from the second mode to the first mode is performed. Even when the operation (operation of pressing the mode switching button, operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button) is not executed, the second mode is changed to the first mode. A gaming machine characterized by being configured to migrate.

According to the feature M1, when the second condition is satisfied during the second mode, even if the predetermined operation for shifting from the second mode to the first mode is not executed. Since it is configured to shift from the second mode to the first mode, it is possible to prevent the player from not returning to the first mode without executing a predetermined operation. For example, after the transition to the second mode, the manager or the inspector of the gaming machine forgets to execute a predetermined operation, and the gaming machine does not return to the first mode in which the gaming progress process can be executed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player cannot play a game on the gaming machine.

[Feature M2]
Features The gaming machine described in M1.
The second condition is that a predetermined time elapses from a predetermined time point (10 minutes elapses from the time when the inspection mode is entered).

According to the feature M2, when a predetermined time has elapsed from a predetermined time during the second mode, a predetermined operation for shifting from the second mode to the first mode has not been executed. Even if there is, since it is configured to shift from the second mode to the first mode, it is possible to reliably suppress the return to the first mode without executing a predetermined operation. For example, even if the administrator or the inspector of the gaming machine forgets to execute a predetermined operation after the transition to the second mode, the first is as long as a predetermined time elapses from the predetermined time. Since the mode returns to the above mode, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the gaming machine does not return to the first mode in which the gaming progress process can be executed and the player cannot play the game on the gaming machine.

[Feature M3]
The gaming machine according to feature M1 or feature M2.
Detection information (game history information including ball entry information, entry number information, bonus ratio, etc.) that is stored in the housing of the game machine main body and is information based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means. ) Is provided with storage means (calculation result storage memory 309, ball entry number storage memory 309a, ball entry information storage memory 309b, main side RAM 64, flash memory 64x).
The second mode is a gaming machine characterized in that it is a mode for outputting the detection information.

According to the feature M3, the detection information can be stored and the detection information can be output in the second mode. Since the detection information is information having a correlation with the behavior of the gaming ball in the game, the detection information is different for each gaming machine and is information unique to the gaming machine. That is, the detection information is information that reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine. According to the feature M3, the detection information, which is the information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, is stored in the storage means stored in the housing of the gaming machine main body. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, the characteristics of the gaming machine can be inspected by acquiring the detection information from the gaming machine main body itself. When the gaming machine is installed in the gaming hall, information on the characteristics of the gaming machine can be acquired by the hall computer installed in the gaming hall. However, since the gaming machine is distributed from time to time, it may be placed in a state where it is not connected to the hall computer. In this case, the conventional gaming machine may acquire information on the characteristics of the gaming machine. Can not. Feature The M3 gaming machine stores the detection information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, in the storage means stored in the housing of the gaming machine main body, so that the gaming machine is not connected to the hall computer. Even if there is, the detection information can be acquired from the game machine main body. That is, according to the feature M3, the gaming machine and the detection information can be linked to each other on a one-to-one basis, and the characteristics of the gaming machine can be managed and inspected. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the feature M3, after the inspector of the gaming machine inspects the characteristics of the gaming machine by the detection information output in the second mode, the inspector of the gaming machine forgets to execute a predetermined operation, and the gaming machine plays the game. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player cannot play a game on the gaming machine without returning to the first mode in which the progress processing can be executed.

[Feature M4]
Features The gaming machine described in M3.
A gaming machine comprising a display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the detection information output in the second mode.

According to the feature M4, since the detection information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, the inspector of the gaming machine confirms the detection information of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for confirming the detection information. can do.

[Feature M5]
The gaming machine according to the feature M3 or the feature M4.
The storage means is a non-volatile memory capable of retaining storage even when the power supply is cut off (calculation result storage memory 309, ball entry number storage memory 309a, ball entry information storage memory 309b, flash). A gaming machine characterized by being composed of a memory 64x).

According to the feature M5, since the detection information is retained even if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, the gaming machine is placed in any state (for example, a distribution state in which the gaming machine is not supplied with power). However, it is possible to always associate the gaming machine with the detection information on a one-to-one basis, and it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the gaming machine.

[Feature M6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features M3 to the feature M5.
The storage means is a gaming machine characterized in that it is stored inside a housing (a board box to which a sealing sticker is affixed) in which traces of opening and closing remain.

According to the feature M6, the storage means is stored inside the housing in which the trace of opening and closing remains. Therefore, when physical contact is made with the storage means, a trace of opening the housing remains. Therefore, if the detection information stored in the storage means is modified through physical contact with the storage means, it becomes possible to grasp the modification from the trace of the housing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the detection information. Since some gaming machines are distributed one after another, various external contacts are made in the process of distribution, but since the storage means is stored inside the housing where traces of opening and closing remain, the gaming machine can be used. Even in a situation where the information is distributed from one place to another, it is possible to suppress unauthorized modification of the detection information by someone. Further, since the detection information is information acquired based on the executed game, it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the game machine regarding the game by using the detection information. Therefore, according to the feature M6, the gaming machine can be properly managed and inspected by preventing unauthorized modification of the detection information reflecting the gaming characteristics of the gaming machine. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature M7]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features M3 to the feature M6.
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a notifying means for notifying when the detection information stored in the storage means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

According to the feature M7, since the detection information is notified when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the inspector of the gaming machine can easily find the gaming machine whose detection information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Then, by confirming the detection information of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been tampered with. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature M8]
Features The gaming machine described in M7.
The notifying means is a gaming machine characterized in that it notifies when a specific value (payout ratio or the like) contained in the detection information stored in the storage means is no longer included in a predetermined range.

According to the feature M8, when the specific value included in the detection information is no longer included in the predetermined range, the pachinko machine inspector is notified that the specific value included in the detection information is included in the predetermined range. You can easily find a game machine that is no longer available. Then, by confirming the detection information of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been tampered with. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature M9]
Features The gaming machine described in M8.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the notification means determines a mode of notification (color of an LED lamp) according to a degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range.

According to the feature M9, the mode of notification is determined according to the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range, so that the inspector of the gaming machine can see how much the specific value included in the detection information is from the predetermined range. It is possible to easily grasp whether or not there is a divergence.

[Feature M10]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features M7 to the feature M9.
The notification means is a gaming machine including a display means for displaying a predetermined display as the notification.

According to the feature M10, since the display means for displaying a predetermined display as a notification is provided, the inspector of the gaming machine can easily know that the detection information of the gaming machine does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

<Characteristic N group>
The feature N group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature N1]
Launch means (game ball launch mechanism 81) that launches a game ball toward the game area,
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area, and
The game progress process (big hit lottery process, electric motor open lottery process, prize ball payout process, symbol on the main display unit 45), which is a process for advancing the game based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means. Game progress processing execution means (main side CPU62x) that executes variation display processing, opening / closing processing of opening / closing door 36b, electric accessory 34a, etc.)
A storage means (main side RAM 64) that is stored in the housing of the game machine and stores information about the game progress process, and
An erasing means for erasing information stored in the storage means based on the execution of a predetermined operation (an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the RAM clear button).
Equipped with
The game progress processing execution means is
The first mode (game mode), which is a mode in which the game progress process can be executed, and
When a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the operation of pressing the mode switching button is executed, when the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button is executed, the inspection machine 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65. The second mode (inspection mode), which is a mode executed when is connected, when a predetermined time is reached, and when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer), and
Is feasible and
The erasing means is in a state after shifting to the second mode and before shifting to the first mode (a state in the inspection mode, a state in which the power is turned off as it is after shifting to the inspection mode). A gaming machine characterized in that the information stored in the storage means is not erased even when the predetermined operation is executed.

According to the feature N1, in the state after the transition to the second mode and before the transition to the first mode, a predetermined operation for erasing the information stored in the storage means is executed. Even if there is, since the information stored in the storage means is not erased, it is erroneously determined to shift to the first mode in the state after shifting to the second mode and before shifting to the first mode. Even if the operation of is executed, it is possible to prevent the information from being accidentally deleted.

For example, a predetermined operation for erasing the information stored in the storage means is an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the erasing button, and is between the first mode and the second mode. In a configuration in which the operation for shifting the mode is an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the transition button, the transition button is pressed in an attempt to shift from the second mode to the first mode. While I intend to press the power button, there is a risk that I accidentally press the power button while pressing the erase button. However, according to the feature N1, in the state after the transition to the second mode and before the transition to the first mode, the operation of pressing the power button while erroneously pressing the erasing button is executed. Even if it does, it is possible to prevent the information from being accidentally deleted.

More specifically, for example, when shifting from the first mode to the second mode, the game progress process executed in the first mode is temporarily stopped, and the stopped game progress process is temporarily stopped. When a configuration is adopted in which information for resuming the operation after returning to the second mode is stored in the storage means, the power supply is performed while pressing the transition button in order to return from the second mode to the first mode. If you intend to press the button, but accidentally press the power button while pressing the erase button, the information for restarting the game progress process will be erased, and you will enter the second mode. After returning, the game progress process cannot be restarted, which may be disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, according to the feature N1, in the state after the transition to the second mode and before the transition to the first mode, the button for erasing is erroneously pressed in an attempt to shift to the first mode. Even if the power button is pressed while pressing the power button, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the storage means from being accidentally erased, which is disadvantageous to the player. It can be suppressed.

[Feature N2]
The gaming machine described in Feature N1.
Detection information (game history information including ball entry information, entry number information, bonus ratio, etc.) that is stored in the housing of the game machine and is based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means. ) Is equipped with a detection information storage means to store
The second mode is a gaming machine characterized in that the detection information (game history information including ball entry information, ball entry number information, accessory ratio, etc.) is output.

According to the feature N2, the detection information can be stored and the detection information can be output in the second mode. Since the detection information is information having a correlation with the behavior of the gaming ball in the game, the detection information is different for each gaming machine and is information unique to the gaming machine. That is, the detection information is information that reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine. According to the feature N2, the detection information, which is the information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, is stored in the detection information storage means stored in the housing of the gaming machine main body. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, the characteristics of the gaming machine can be inspected by acquiring the detection information from the gaming machine main body itself. When the gaming machine is installed in the gaming hall, information on the characteristics of the gaming machine can be acquired by the hall computer installed in the gaming hall. However, since the gaming machine is distributed from time to time, it may be placed in a state where it is not connected to the hall computer. In this case, the conventional gaming machine may acquire information on the characteristics of the gaming machine. Can not. The N2 gaming machine stores the detection information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, in the detection information detection information storage means stored in the housing of the gaming machine main body, so that the gaming machine is connected to the hall computer. The detection information can be acquired from the main body of the gaming machine even in the non-existing state. That is, according to the feature N2, the gaming machine and the detection information can be linked to each other on a one-to-one basis, and the characteristics of the gaming machine can be managed and inspected. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature N3]
The gaming machine described in Feature N2.
A gaming machine comprising a display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the detection information output in the second mode.

According to the feature N3, since the detection information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, the inspector of the gaming machine confirms the detection information of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for confirming the detection information. can do.

[Feature N4]
The gaming machine according to feature N2 or feature N3.
The detection information storage means is a gaming machine characterized in that it is housed inside a housing (a board box to which a sealing sticker is affixed) in which traces of opening and closing remain.

According to the feature N4, the detection information storage means is stored inside the housing in which the trace of opening and closing remains. Therefore, when physical contact is made with the detection information storage means, a trace of opening the housing remains. Therefore, if the detection information stored in the detection information storage means is modified through physical contact with the detection information storage means, it is possible to grasp the modification from the trace of the housing. Become. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the detection information. Since some gaming machines are distributed in various ways, various external contacts are made in the process of distribution, but since the detection information storage means is stored inside the housing where traces of opening and closing remain, the game is played. Even in a situation where machines are distributed one after another, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the detection information by someone. Further, since the detection information is information acquired based on the executed game, it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the game machine regarding the game by using the detection information. Therefore, according to the feature N4, the gaming machine can be properly managed and inspected by preventing unauthorized modification of the detection information reflecting the gaming characteristics of the gaming machine. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature N5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features N2 to the feature N4.
A gaming machine comprising a notification means for notifying when the detection information stored in the detection information storage means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

According to the feature N5, since the detection information is notified when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the inspector of the gaming machine can easily find the gaming machine whose detection information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Then, by confirming the detection information of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been tampered with. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature N6]
The gaming machine described in Feature N5.
The notifying means is a gaming machine characterized in that it notifies when a specific value (payout ratio or the like) contained in the detection information stored in the detection information storage means is no longer included in a predetermined range.

According to the feature N6, when the specific value included in the detection information is no longer included in the predetermined range, the pachinko machine inspector is notified that the specific value included in the detection information is included in the predetermined range. You can easily find a game machine that is no longer available. Then, by confirming the detection information of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been tampered with. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature N7]
The gaming machine described in Feature N6.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the notification means determines a mode of notification (color of an LED lamp) according to a degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range.

According to the feature N7, the mode of notification is determined according to the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range, so that the inspector of the gaming machine can see how much the specific value included in the detection information is from the predetermined range. It is possible to easily grasp whether or not there is a divergence.

[Feature N8]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features N5 to the feature N7.
The notification means is a gaming machine including a display means for displaying a predetermined display as the notification.

According to the feature N8, since the display means for displaying a predetermined display as a notification is provided, the inspector of the gaming machine can easily know that the detection information of the gaming machine does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

The inventions of the feature A group to the feature N group solve the following problems.

In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as structure, control, and directing for the purpose of improving the interest of the game.

In addition to improving the interest of the game, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of the game, such as finding and deterring illegal acts by the player and unauthorized modification of the gaming machine.

For example, if an illegal act (so-called goto act) is performed by a player, or if a nail provided on the game board of a pachinko gaming machine is illegally bent and remodeled, each entry such as a general winning opening or a starting opening is entered. The ratio of game balls entering the ball mouth may be different from what was initially assumed, and the performance and playability expected of the pachinko gaming machine may be impaired. However, it was very difficult to find such fraud.

Such fraud may be committed by the player during the business hours of the game hall. In addition, somebody may make an illegal modification after the opening hours of the game hall. Furthermore, there are cases where illegal modifications are made to the gaming machines in transit before they are installed in the gaming hall. Furthermore, there are cases where illegal modifications are made to the gaming machines before they are shipped to the gaming hall. There is also the possibility that unauthorized modifications will be made before that.

Based on such a situation, the purpose is to detect illegal acts and unauthorized modifications to the gaming machine and improve the soundness of the game.

<Characteristic O group>
The feature O group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature O1]
A first processing execution means (main control device 60) capable of transmitting the first information (opening command) and the second information (opening start command), and
A second processing execution means (voice emission control device 90) capable of receiving the first information and the second information transmitted by the first processing execution means, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The second processing execution means is
When the first information is received, a plurality of processes (opening effect and right-handed notification effect) are set to be sequentially executed, and the set plurality of processes are sequentially executed.
When the second information is received while the plurality of the set processes are sequentially executed by receiving the first information, the process being executed is terminated and a specific process (round effect) is performed. A gaming machine characterized by running.

Feature In a normal gaming machine other than O1, when the second processing execution means sequentially executes a plurality of processes, the first processing execution means causes the second processing execution means to execute each processing. Information is transmitted to the second processing execution means, respectively. Then, when the second process execution means is made to execute a specific process, the first process execution means is provided with information for causing the second process execution means to execute the specific process. Send to. That is, as the number of processes to be executed by the second process execution means increases, the number of times that the first process execution means transmits information to the second process execution means increases.

Specifically, for example, the second process executing means is made to execute the first process (opening effect), the second process (right-handed notification effect) is executed, and then a specific process (round) is executed. In the case of executing the effect), the first process execution means sends information (opening command) for executing the first process (opening effect) to the second process execution means, and then the second process execution means. Information for executing the process (right-handed notification effect) (right-handed notification command) is transmitted, and further, information for executing a specific process (round effect) (opening start command) is transmitted. In this case, the first process execution means transmits information (command) to the second process execution means three times. Further, when the second process executing means is made to execute the first process (opening effect) and then a specific process (round effect) is executed without executing the second process (right-handed notification effect). Is a second process (right-handed notification effect) after the first process execution means transmits information (opening command) for causing the second process execution means to execute the first process (opening effect). Information (opening start command) for executing a specific process (round effect) is transmitted without transmitting information for executing (right-handed notification command). In this case, the first process execution means transmits information (command) to the second process execution means twice. That is, in a normal game machine, when the second process execution means is not allowed to execute the second process (right-handed notification effect), the first process execution means sends information (command) to the second process execution means. ) Twice, but when the second process execution means is made to execute the second process (right-handed notification effect), the first process execution means informs the second process execution means. (Command) will be sent three times.

On the other hand, according to the feature O1, when the second processing execution means receives the second information while sequentially executing a plurality of processes set by receiving the first information, the second processing execution means is concerned. Since the processing being executed is terminated and the specific processing is executed, even when the specific processing is executed by the second processing execution means after all the processing among the plurality of processing is executed, also , Even in the case where the second process executing means executes a specific process without executing the unexecuted process among the plurality of processes, the first process executing means is used by the second process executing means. The first information and the second information may be transmitted. That is, in any case, the first processing execution means may transmit information to the second processing execution means twice.

Specifically, for example, when the second process execution means is set to sequentially execute the first process (opening effect) and the second process (right-handed notification effect) as a plurality of processes, the first Even when a specific process (round effect) is executed by the second process execution means after executing the first process (opening effect) and the second process (right-handed notification effect), the second process is also performed. Even when a specific process (round effect) is executed by the second process execution means without executing the second process (right-handed notification effect) after the process 1 (opening effect) is executed. The first processing execution means may transmit the first information (opening command) and the second information (opening start command) to the second processing execution means. That is, the first process execution means causes the second process execution means to execute the second process (right-handed notification effect) or not. The information (command) may be sent twice. Therefore, according to the feature O1, the frequency of transmitting information of the first processing execution means can be reduced, and the processing load of the first processing execution means can be reduced.

Further, according to the feature O1, the number of processes actually executed (the number of effects) among the plurality of set processes due to the change in the timing at which the second process execution means receives the second information. Will change. Therefore, by controlling and changing the timing at which the first process execution means transmits the second information, the number of processes to be executed by the second process execution means can be changed.

[Feature O2]
The gaming machine described in Feature O1.
The second processing execution means is
When the first information is received, the first process (opening effect) and the second process (right-handed notification effect) are set to be sequentially executed as the plurality of processes.
If the second information is received after receiving the first information and before executing the second process, the second information is set to be executed after the first process. A gaming machine characterized in that the specific process (round effect) is executed without executing the process of.

According to the feature O2, in the case where a specific process (round effect) is executed by the second process execution means after the first process (opening effect) and the second process (right-handed notification effect) are executed. Even if there is, a specific process (round effect) is executed by the second process execution means without executing the second process (right-handed notification effect) after executing the first process (opening effect). Even in the case of making the process execute, the first process execution means may transmit the first information (opening command) and the second information (opening start command) to the second process execution means. That is, the first process execution means causes the second process execution means to execute the second process (right-handed notification effect) or not. The information (command) may be sent twice. Therefore, the frequency of transmitting information of the first processing execution means can be reduced, and the processing load of the first processing execution means can be reduced.

[Feature O3]
The gaming machine according to feature O1 or feature O2.
The first process executing means executes a process related to the progress of the game,
The second processing execution means is a gaming machine characterized by executing processing related to the production of a game.

According to the feature O3, in the gaming machine in which the first processing execution means executes the processing related to the progress of the game, the frequency of transmission of information by the first processing execution means can be reduced.

[Feature O4]
The gaming machine according to feature O3, which is subordinate to feature O2.
The first processing execution means is
It is possible to execute the privilege granting process (opening / closing processing period in the opening / closing execution mode), which is the processing of granting the privilege to the player.
The second processing execution means is
As the first process, a privilege grant start effect (opening effect), which is an effect suggesting to the player that the privilege grant process is started, is executed.
As the second process, a launch mode suggestion effect (right-handed notification effect), which is an effect of suggesting the launch mode of the game ball recommended to the player during the execution of the privilege grant process, is executed.
As the specific process, a gaming machine characterized by executing a privilege granting effect (round effect), which is an effect suggesting to the player that the privilege granting process is being executed.

According to the feature O4, it is possible to reduce the frequency of information transmission by the first processing execution means in the gaming machine that executes the privilege grant start effect, the launch mode suggestion effect, and the privilege granting effect.

<Characteristic P group>
The feature P group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature P1]
A first processing execution means (main control device 60) capable of transmitting the first information (opening command) and the second information (opening start command), and
A second processing execution means (voice emission control device 90) capable of receiving the first information and the second information transmitted by the first processing execution means, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
When the first processing execution means transmits the first information and then the second information is transmitted, the transmission interval is different.
A gaming machine characterized in that the mode of processing executed by the second processing execution means is configured to be different.

In a normal gaming machine other than the feature P1, the first processing execution means transmits information of various contents to the second processing execution means. Then, the second process execution means executes the process corresponding to the content of the information received from the first process execution means. That is, in a normal gaming machine, in order to cause the second processing execution means to execute various contents of processing, the first processing execution means transmits information of various contents to the second processing execution means.

On the other hand, according to the feature P1, the second processing execution means has different transmission intervals when the first information is transmitted and then the second information is transmitted. Is configured so that the mode of processing to be executed is different, so that the first processing execution means performs the information of various contents in the second process in order to cause the second processing execution means to execute the processing of various contents. The processing load of the first processing execution means can be reduced as compared with the configuration of transmitting to the execution means.

[Feature P2]
Feature The gaming machine described in P1.
The first processing execution means is
The first transmission mode in which the second information (opening start command) is transmitted after the lapse of the first period (opening period of 10 seconds) after the first information (opening command) is transmitted, and
A second transmission mode in which the second information (opening start command) is transmitted after the lapse of the second period (opening period of 7 seconds) after the first information (opening command) is transmitted, and the second transmission mode.
Is feasible and
The second processing execution means is
When the first process executing means executes the first transmission mode, the process mode is such that the second process (right-handed notification effect) is executed after the first process (opening effect) is executed.
When the first process executing means executes the second transmission mode, the process mode in which the second process (right-handed notification effect) is not executed after the first process (opening effect) is executed. A gaming machine characterized by being.

According to the feature P2, even when the second process executing means is made to execute the first process (opening effect) and then the second process (right-handed notification effect), the second process is also performed. Even if the process execution means is made to execute the first process (opening effect) and then the second process (right-handed notification effect) is not executed, the first process execution means is the first information (opening effect). Since the second information (opening start command) may be transmitted after the command) is transmitted, for example, the information (opening command) for causing the second processing execution means to execute the first processing (opening effect) is provided. Information for executing the second process (right-handed notification command) when the second process (right-handed notification effect) is executed after the first process (opening effect) is executed while being transmitted. Is transmitted, and if the second process (right-handed notification effect) is not executed after the first process (opening effect) is executed, information for executing the second process (right-handed notification command). It is possible to reduce the processing load of the first processing execution means as compared with the configuration (comparative example) in which control such as not transmitting is performed.

[Feature P3]
Feature P2 is the gaming machine described in P2.
The second processing execution means is
When the first process executing means executes the first transmission mode, a third process (round) is performed after the first process (opening effect) and the second process (right-handed notification effect) are executed. It becomes a processing mode to execute the production)
When the first process executing means executes the second transmission mode, the second process (right-handed notification effect) is not executed after the first process (opening effect) is executed. A gaming machine characterized in that it is a processing mode for executing the third processing (round effect).

According to the feature P3, the second process executing means is made to execute the first process (opening effect), then the second process (right-handed notification effect), and then the third process (round effect). Even in the case of executing the third process, the second process (opening effect) is executed and then the second process (right-handed notification effect) is not executed after the second process execution means is executed. Even in the case of executing (round effect), the first processing execution means may transmit the second information (opening start command) after transmitting the first information (opening command), for example. , Information (opening command) for executing the first process (opening effect) is transmitted to the second process execution means, and the second process (right) is executed after the first process (opening effect) is executed. When executing the hit notification effect, information for executing the second process (right-handed notification command) is transmitted, and after the first process (opening effect) is executed, the second process (right) is executed. When the strike notification effect) is not executed, the information for executing the second process (right-handed notification command) is not transmitted, and the first process (opening effect) or the second process (right-handed notification effect) is not executed. ) Is executed, and then the third process (round effect) is executed, the information (opening start command) for executing the third process is transmitted, and the control is executed (comparative example). In comparison, the processing load of the first processing execution means can be reduced.

[Feature P4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features P1 to the feature P3.
The first process executing means executes a process related to the progress of the game,
The second processing execution means is a gaming machine characterized by executing processing related to the production of a game.

According to the feature P4, in the gaming machine in which the first processing execution means executes the processing related to the progress of the game, the frequency of transmission of information by the first processing execution means can be reduced.

[Feature P5]
The gaming machine according to feature P4, which is subordinate to feature P3.
The first processing execution means is
It is possible to execute the privilege granting process (opening / closing processing period in the opening / closing execution mode), which is the processing of granting the privilege to the player.
The second processing execution means is
As the first process, a privilege grant start effect (opening effect), which is an effect suggesting to the player that the privilege grant process is started, is executed.
As the second process, a launch mode suggestion effect (right-handed notification effect), which is an effect of suggesting the launch mode of the game ball recommended to the player during the execution of the privilege grant process, is executed.
As the third process, the gaming machine is characterized in that a privilege granting effect (round effect), which is an effect suggesting to the player that the privilege granting process is being executed, is executed.

According to the feature P5, it is possible to reduce the frequency of information transmission by the first processing execution means in the gaming machine that executes the privilege grant start effect, the launch mode suggestion effect, and the privilege granting effect.

[Feature P6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features P1 to the feature P5.
The first processing execution means is a game progress processing execution means (main control device 60) that executes a process related to the progress of the game.
The game progress processing execution means is
A lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process (big hit lottery), and
When the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes a predetermined result (big hit), a transmission means for sequentially transmitting a plurality of predetermined information (opening command and opening start command), and a transmission means.
The transmission interval when the transmission means sequentially transmits the predetermined plurality of information based on the game state (state of the support mode) when the predetermined lottery process which has resulted in the predetermined result is executed. Transmission interval determination means to determine
A gaming machine equipped with.

According to the feature P6, the interval of the transmission when the predetermined plurality of information is sequentially transmitted is determined based on the gaming state when the predetermined lottery process having a predetermined result is executed. Therefore, for example, The device that has received the predetermined plurality of information performs processing corresponding to the gaming state when the lottery processing that has resulted in the predetermined result is executed based on the difference in the intervals at which the predetermined plurality of information is received. It will be possible to execute. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the game progress processing execution means as compared with a configuration in which various information having different contents is transmitted to the other device in order to execute the processing corresponding to the game state.

[Feature P7]
Feature P6 is the gaming machine described in P6.
The second processing execution means is an effect processing execution means (voice emission control device 90) that executes a process related to the effect of the game.
The effect processing executing means receives the predetermined plurality of information transmitted by the transmission means, and executes an effect of an aspect corresponding to the gaming state based on the difference in the reception interval (low frequency). Executes the opening effect and right-handed notification effect corresponding to the support mode, and executes only the opening effect corresponding to the high frequency support mode)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature P7, the effect processing execution means receives a plurality of predetermined information transmitted by the transmission means of the game progress processing execution means, and the mode corresponding to the game state is based on the difference in the reception interval. In comparison with the configuration in which various information having different contents is transmitted to the effect processing execution means in order to cause the effect processing execution means to execute the processing corresponding to the game state, the game progress processing execution means The processing load can be reduced.

[Feature P8]
The gaming machine according to feature P6 or feature P7.
The game progress processing execution means executes a privilege granting process (opening / closing processing period in the opening / closing execution mode), which is a processing for granting a privilege to a player when the result of the predetermined lottery processing becomes the predetermined result. Equipped with a means to execute privilege grant processing
The launch mode of the game ball recommended in the first gaming state (during the low frequency support mode) is the first launch mode (left-handed).
The launch mode of the game ball recommended in the second gaming state (during the high frequency support mode) is the second launch mode (right-handed).
The launch mode of the game ball recommended during the execution of the privilege granting process is the second launch mode (right-handed).
The transmission interval determining means is
When the gaming state when the predetermined lottery process having the predetermined result is executed is the first gaming state, the predetermined plurality of information is transmitted at the first transmission interval (10-second interval). Decided to send,
When the gaming state when the predetermined lottery process having the predetermined result is executed is the second gaming state, the predetermined plurality of information is transmitted at the second transmission interval (7 second interval). Decided to send,
The effect processing execution means is
When the predetermined plurality of information transmitted at the first transmission interval is received, it is an effect suggesting to the player that the launch of the game ball according to the second launch mode is recommended. Execute the launch mode suggestion effect (right-handed notification effect),
A gaming machine characterized in that when the predetermined plurality of information transmitted at the second transmission interval is received, the launch mode suggestion effect (right-handed notification effect) is not executed.

According to the feature P8, when the recommended launch mode of the game ball changes from the first launch mode to the second launch mode due to the execution of the privilege granting process, the second launch mode is recommended. Is executed, and if the recommended launch mode of the game ball does not change as the second launch mode even by executing the privilege granting process, the launch mode suggestion effect is not executed. Therefore, while reducing the processing load of the game progress processing execution means, it is possible to execute an appropriate mode of production corresponding to the game state when a predetermined lottery process is executed.

<Characteristic Q group>
The feature Q group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature Q1]
A game progress processing execution means (main control device 60) that executes a process related to the progress of the game, and
The effect processing execution means (voice emission control device 90) that executes the process related to the effect of the game, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The game progress processing execution means is
A lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process (big hit lottery), and
A game round process executing means for executing a game round process (display of fluctuations in symbols and display of stop), which is a process for displaying the result of the predetermined lottery process, and
A privilege granting processing execution means for executing a privilege granting process (opening / closing processing period in the opening / closing execution mode), which is a processing for granting a privilege to a player when the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes a predetermined result (big hit). ,
The length of the waiting period (opening period), which is the period from the end of the game round processing having the predetermined result to the start of the privilege granting process, is determined based on the game state (support mode state). The means of determining the waiting period and
Equipped with
At the start of the waiting period, the effect processing execution means executes the same process (processing for setting to execute the opening effect and the right-handed notification effect) regardless of the gaming state. A gaming machine characterized in that, during the waiting period, different contents are produced according to the gaming state.

According to the feature Q1, although the effect processing execution means executes the same processing regardless of the gaming state at the start of the waiting period, the content differs depending on the gaming state in the waiting period. Since the effect is executed, it is possible to execute an effect suitable for the waiting period in which the length changes according to the game state without executing different processes according to the game state at the start of the waiting period. .. That is, the effect processing execution means grasps the game state at the start of the waiting period and responds to the game state in order to execute the effect of the content suitable for the waiting period whose length changes according to the game state. There is no need to perform different processing. Therefore, the processing load of the staging process executing means can be reduced.

[Feature Q2]
The gaming machine described in Feature Q1.
The game progress processing execution means transmits the first information (opening command) at the start of the waiting period, and transmits the second information (opening start command) at the start of the privilege granting process.
The effect processing execution means is
When the first information is received, a process of setting a plurality of effects (opening effect and right-handed notification effect) to be sequentially executed is executed regardless of the game state.
When the second information is received during the sequential execution of the plurality of settings set by receiving the first information, the executing effect is terminated and a specific effect (round effect) is received. A gaming machine characterized by running.

According to the feature Q2, the interval from the reception of the first information to the reception of the second information by the effect processing execution means differs depending on the gaming state, so that the first information is received. Of the plurality of effects set by the above, the effect actually executed is smaller as the interval is shorter, and more as the interval is longer. That is, according to the feature Q2, the waiting period is obtained by executing a simple process of setting the effect processing execution means to sequentially execute a plurality of effects regardless of the gaming state when the first information is received. It is possible to make the content of the effect executed in the game different depending on the game state.

[Characteristic Q3]
Feature Q2 is the gaming machine described in Q2.
The effect processing execution means is
When the first information is received, the first effect (opening effect) and the second effect (right-handed notification effect) are sequentially executed as the plurality of effects regardless of the game state. Set to
If the second information is received after the first information is received and before the second effect is executed, the second information is set to be executed after the first effect. A gaming machine characterized in that the specific effect is executed without executing the effect of.

According to the feature Q3, the second effect is executed because the interval from the reception of the first information to the reception of the second information differs depending on the game state. It may not be done. Therefore, according to the feature Q3, when the effect processing execution means receives the first information, the simple process of setting the first effect and the second effect to be sequentially executed regardless of the gaming state is performed. By executing this, it is possible to make it different depending on the gaming state whether or not the second effect is executed during the waiting period.

[Feature Q4]
Feature Q3 is the gaming machine described in Q3.
The effect processing execution means is
As the first effect, a privilege grant start effect (opening effect), which is an effect suggesting to the player that the privilege grant process is started, is executed.
As the second effect, a launch mode suggestion effect (right-handed notification effect), which is an effect of suggesting the launch mode of the game ball recommended to the player during the execution of the privilege granting process, is executed.
As the specific effect, a gaming machine characterized in that a privilege granting effect (round effect), which is an effect suggesting to the player that the privilege granting process is being executed, is executed.

According to the feature Q4, when the effect processing execution means receives the first information, it executes a simple process of setting to sequentially execute the privilege grant start effect and the launch mode suggestion effect regardless of the game state. Thereby, it is possible to make it different depending on the game state whether or not the firing mode suggestion effect is executed in the waiting period before the effect during the privilege granting is started.

<Characteristic R group>
The feature R group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment of the second embodiment.

[Feature R1]
A first processing execution means (main control device 60) capable of transmitting predetermined information (opening command), and
A second processing execution means (voice emission control device 90) capable of receiving the predetermined information transmitted by the first processing execution means, and a second processing execution means (voice emission control device 90).
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The second processing execution means is
It is possible to grasp the control state (support mode state) of the first processing execution means, and it is possible to grasp the control state (support mode state).
When the predetermined information (opening command) is received when the control state is the first state (low frequency support mode), the first process (opening effect) is executed.
When the predetermined information (opening command) is received when the control state is the second state (high frequency support mode), the processing having different contents from the first processing (short opening effect). A gaming machine characterized by running.

According to the feature R1, even when the second process executing means is made to execute the first process, or when the second process executing means is made to execute the process having different contents from the first process. Even if there is, the first process execution means may transmit predetermined information (information of the same content). Therefore, for example, when the second process execution means is made to execute the first process, the first process is concerned. When the information for executing the first process is transmitted to the second process execution means and the second process execution means is made to execute the process having different contents from the first process, the process with the different contents is executed. It is possible to reduce the processing load of the first processing execution means as compared with the configuration in which the information for causing the processing is transmitted to the second processing execution means.

[Feature R2]
Feature The gaming machine described in R1.
The second processing execution means is
When the predetermined information (opening command) is received when the control state is the first state (low frequency support mode), the second process (opening effect) is executed after the first process (opening effect) is executed. A gaming machine characterized by executing the processing (right-handed notification effect).

According to the feature R2, when the second processing execution means receives predetermined information (opening command) when the control state of the first processing execution means is the first state (low frequency support mode). The second process (right-handed notification effect) is executed after the first process (opening effect) is executed. Therefore, for example, the first process execution means is used as the second process execution means. A configuration (comparative example) in which information (opening command) for executing a process (opening effect) is transmitted, and information (right-handed notification command) for executing a second process (right-handed notification effect) is transmitted. The frequency of information transmission by the first processing execution means can be reduced, and the processing load of the first processing execution means can be reduced.

[Feature R3]
The gaming machine according to feature R1 or feature R2.
The first processing execution means transmits state information (high frequency support mode command, low frequency support mode command) which is information about the control state when the control state changes.
The second processing execution means is a gaming machine characterized in that the state of the control of the first processing execution means is grasped based on the state information received from the first processing execution means.

According to the feature R3, the first process execution means transmits state information which is information about the control state when the control state changes, and the second process execution means is the second based on the state information. Since the control state of the process execution means 1 is grasped, the first process execution means does not have to include the information regarding the control state of the first process execution means in the predetermined information and transmit the information. It is possible to reduce the processing load when the first processing execution means transmits predetermined information.

[Feature R4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features R1 to the feature R3.
The first process executing means executes a process related to the progress of the game,
The second processing execution means is a gaming machine characterized by executing processing related to the production of a game.

According to the feature R4, in the gaming machine in which the first processing execution means executes the processing related to the progress of the game, the frequency of transmission of information by the first processing execution means can be reduced.

[Feature R5]
The gaming machine according to feature R4, which is subordinate to feature R2.
The first processing execution means is
It is possible to execute the privilege granting process (opening / closing processing period in the opening / closing execution mode), which is the processing of granting the privilege to the player.
The second processing execution means is
As the first process, a privilege grant start effect (opening effect), which is an effect suggesting to the player that the privilege grant process is started, is executed.
The second process is characterized in that a launch mode suggestion effect (right-handed notification effect), which is an effect of suggesting the launch mode of the game ball recommended to the player during the execution of the privilege grant process, is executed. Gaming machine.

According to the feature R5, in the gaming machine that executes the privilege grant start effect and the launch mode suggestion effect, it is possible to reduce the frequency of information transmission by the first processing execution means.

<Characteristic S group>
The feature S group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment of the second embodiment.

[Feature S1]
A gaming machine provided with a game progress processing execution means (main control device 60) for executing a process related to the progress of a game.
The game progress processing execution means is
It is possible to execute a first game mode (low frequency support mode, low probability mode) and a second game mode (high frequency support mode, high probability mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first game mode. can be,
A lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process (big hit lottery), and
A game round process executing means for executing a game round process (display of fluctuations in symbols and display of stop), which is a process for displaying the result of the predetermined lottery process, and
A privilege granting processing execution means for executing a privilege granting process (opening / closing processing period in the opening / closing execution mode), which is a processing for granting a privilege to a player when the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes a predetermined result (big hit). ,
Equipped with
The privilege grant processing execution means
When the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes the predetermined result during the first game mode, the first period (10 seconds) after the game round process having the predetermined result is completed. After the opening period) has elapsed, the above-mentioned privilege granting process is started,
When the result of the predetermined lottery process is the predetermined result during the second game mode, the time is longer than the first period after the game round process having the predetermined result is completed. A gaming machine characterized in that the privilege granting process is started after a short second period (opening period of 4 seconds) has elapsed.

According to the feature S1, when the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes a predetermined result during the first game mode, the game progress processing execution means ends the game round processing having the predetermined result. After the lapse of the first period, the privilege granting process is started, and if the result of the predetermined lottery process is the predetermined result during the second game mode, the game round process that has the predetermined result is obtained. Since the privilege granting process is started after the lapse of the second period, which is shorter in time than the first period after the end of the game, it is possible to give a sense of speed to the game in the second game mode, and the game can be played. It is possible to improve the interest.

Specifically, for example, during the second game mode that is advantageous to the player, there is a high expectation that the privilege granting process will be started, so that the player is more likely to start the privilege granting process itself. However, they are playing games with the expectation that the privilege granting process will start early. That is, during the second game mode, the player demands a sense of speed in the game. According to the feature S1, during the second game mode, the privilege is given in a shorter time after the game round processing in which the result of the predetermined lottery process is the predetermined result is completed as compared with the case of the first game mode. Since the process is started, it is possible to give a sense of speed to the game in the second game mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature S2]
The gaming machine described in the feature S1.
A production processing execution means (voice emission control device 90) for executing processing related to the production of the game is provided.
The game progress processing execution means is
Predetermined information (opening command) is transmitted when the game round processing in which the result of the lottery process is the predetermined result is completed, and second information (opening start command) is transmitted when the privilege granting process is started. ) Is provided with an information transmission means to transmit
The effect processing execution means is
The first privilege grant start effect (opening effect), which is an effect suggesting to the player that the privilege grant process is started,
A second privilege grant start effect (short opening effect), which is an effect suggesting to the player that the privilege grant process is started and is shorter in time than the first privilege grant start effect,
Is feasible and
It is possible to grasp the type of the game mode of the game progress processing execution means.
When the predetermined information is received during the first game mode, the first privilege grant start effect is executed in the first period.
A gaming machine characterized in that when the predetermined information is received during the second gaming mode, the second privilege grant start effect is executed in the second period.

According to the feature S2, the effect processing execution means can grasp the type of the game mode of the game progress processing execution means, and when a predetermined information is received during the first game mode, in the first period. When the first privilege grant start effect is executed and the predetermined information is received during the second game mode, the second privilege grant start effect is executed in the second period, so that the first period or It is possible to execute the privilege grant start effect suitable for each of the time lengths of the second period. Further, according to the feature S2, the game progress process is performed even when the effect processing execution means is made to execute the first privilege grant start effect or the second privilege grant start effect is executed. Since the execution means may transmit predetermined information (information having the same content), for example, when the effect processing execution means is to execute the first privilege grant start effect, the first privilege grant start effect is performed. A configuration in which information for execution is transmitted to the effect processing execution means, and when the second privilege grant start effect is executed, information for executing the second privilege grant start effect is transmitted to the effect process execution means. The processing load of the game progress processing execution means can be reduced as compared with the above.

[Feature S3]
The gaming machine described in Feature S2.
The effect processing execution means is
It is possible to execute a launch mode suggestion effect (right-handed notification effect), which is an effect of suggesting the launch mode of the game ball recommended to the player during the execution of the privilege granting process.
When the predetermined information is received during the first game mode, the launch mode suggestion effect is executed after the first privilege grant start effect is executed in the first period. Gaming machine.

According to the feature S3, when the effect processing execution means receives predetermined information during the first game mode, the effect suggestion effect is performed after the first privilege grant start effect is executed in the first period. Since it is executed, it is possible to suggest to the player the recommended launch mode of the game ball during the execution of the privilege granting process before the privilege granting process is executed, and for example, the game progress processing executing means. Compared with a configuration in which the information transmitting means of the above is separately transmitting information for causing the effect processing execution means to execute the launch mode suggestion effect, the frequency of information transmission by the information transmission means of the game progress processing execution means is reduced. Can be done.

[Feature S4]
The gaming machine according to feature S2 or feature S3.
The game progress processing execution means transmits type information (high frequency support mode command, low frequency support mode command) which is information about the type of the game mode when the game mode changes.
The effect processing execution means is a gaming machine characterized in that it grasps the type of the game mode of the game progress processing execution means based on the type information received from the game progress processing execution means.

According to the feature S4, the game progress processing execution means transmits the type information which is the information regarding the type of the game mode when the game mode changes, and the effect processing execution means receives the type received from the game progress processing execution means. Since the type of the game mode of the game progress processing execution means is grasped based on the information, the game progress processing execution means does not send the information regarding the type of the game mode of the game progress processing execution means included in the predetermined information. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load when the game progress processing execution means transmits predetermined information.

<Characteristic T group>
The feature T group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from variants 2 and 3 of the second embodiment.

[Feature T1]
A first processing execution means (main control device 60) capable of transmitting the second information (opening start command) after transmitting the first information (opening command), and
A second processing execution means (voice emission control device 90) capable of receiving the first information and the second information, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The second processing execution means is
It is possible to grasp the control state (support mode state) of the first processing execution means, and it is possible to grasp the control state (support mode state).
Based on the state of the control, it is characterized in that the content (content of the effect) of the process to be executed in the period (opening period) from the reception of the first information to the reception of the second information is determined. A game machine.

According to the feature T1, the second process execution means can grasp the control state of the first process execution means, and the first process execution means is based on the control state of the first process execution means. Since the content of the process to be executed in the period from the reception of the information to the reception of the second information is determined, the first process execution means has the first information and the second according to the state of its own control. It is not necessary to change the mode in which the information is transmitted, and the first information and the second information can be transmitted in the same transmission mode each time. Therefore, it is possible to omit the control required for the first processing execution means to change the transmission mode for transmitting the first information and the second information according to the state of its own control. The processing load of the processing execution means can be reduced. Further, according to the feature T1, in order to cause the second processing execution means to execute various contents of processing according to the control state of the first processing execution means, the first processing execution means has various contents of information. The processing load of the first processing execution means can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which is transmitted to the second processing execution means.

[Feature T2]
Feature The gaming machine described in T1.
The first processing execution means is a gaming machine characterized in that the first information and the second information are transmitted at the same interval even if the control states are different.

According to the feature T2, the first processing execution means transmits the first information and the second information at the same interval even if the state of its own control is different, so that the first processing execution means It is possible to omit the control required to change the interval for transmitting the first information and the second information according to the state of its own control, and reduce the processing load of the first processing execution means. be able to.

[Feature T3]
The gaming machine according to feature T1 or feature T2.
The second processing execution means is
When the control state is the first state, the first is in the first partial period included in the period (opening period) from the reception of the first information to the reception of the second information. It is a partial period included in the period from the reception of the first information to the reception of the second information by executing the effect (opening effect) including the contents of the above, and is after the first partial period. In the second partial period of, the effect including the second content (right-handed notification effect) is executed.
When the control state is the second state, the effect including the first content (the part from 0 seconds to 7 seconds of the long opening effect) is executed in the first partial period, and the second A gaming machine characterized in that an effect including a third content (a part from 7 seconds to 10 seconds of a long opening effect in the modified example 2 and a round effect in the modified example 3) is executed in the partial period of.

According to the feature T3, in the first partial period, the effect including the same contents is executed regardless of the control state of the first processing execution means, and in the second partial period, the first processing execution means is executed. Since the effect including different contents is executed according to the state of control, the player is given an expectation of how the contents of the effect will change from the first partial period to the second partial period. be able to. Further, according to the feature T3, in the second partial period, it is possible to execute an effect including contents suitable for the control state of the first processing execution means.

[Feature T4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features T1 to T3.
The first processing execution means transmits state information (high frequency support mode command, low frequency support mode command) which is information about the control state when the control state changes.
The second processing execution means is a gaming machine characterized in that the state of the control of the first processing execution means is grasped based on the state information received from the first processing execution means.

According to the feature T4, the first processing execution means transmits state information which is information about the control state when the control state changes, and the second processing execution means is the second based on the state information. Since the control state of the process execution means 1 is grasped, the first process execution means does not have to include the information regarding the control state of the first process execution means in the first information and transmit the information. , The processing load when the first processing execution means transmits the first information can be reduced.

The inventions of the feature O group to the feature T group solve the following problems.

In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, it is technical from various viewpoints such as structure, control, and production for the purpose of improving the interest of games, reducing the processing load of gaming machines, and simplifying control. Improvements have been made (for example, Patent Document 1).

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of the game, such as finding and deterring illegal acts by the player and unauthorized modification of the gaming machine.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, further improvement of the technique is desired for the purpose of improving the interest of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, simplifying the control, providing a sounder game, and the like.

<Characteristic U group>
The feature U group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature U1]
The flow path through which game balls circulate and
A first entry region (non-V winning region FNV in the third embodiment) provided on the flow path and on which a game ball can enter, and
A second ball entry area (V winning) provided on the downstream side of the flow path with respect to the flow direction of the game ball flowing through the flow path and on the downstream side of the flow path, where the game ball can enter. Area FV) and
A state transition means (a mechanism that contributes to the first ball entry region and the second ball entry region, which transitions between a first state (closed state) and a second state (open state). 2nd opening and closing door) and
Equipped with
The state transition means is
In the first state, the first ball entry area and the second ball entry area are made into a state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter.
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the second state, the first ball entry area and the second ball entry area are made into a state in which a game ball can or easily enter a ball.

According to the feature U1, the state transition means can control the entry region into which the game ball enters by controlling the timing of the state transition between the first state and the second state.

[Characteristic U2]
Features The gaming machine described in U1.
The state transition means is
A game ball in the first flow path region (region corresponding to the non-V winning region FNV on the upper surface of the second opening / closing door), which is a region on the flow path corresponding to the first winning region (non-V winning region FNV). By transitioning from the first state to the second state during the period in which the ball is distributed, it is possible or facilitated that the game ball circulating on the flow path enters the first entry area.
While maintaining the first state during the period in which the game ball circulates in the first flow path region, the game ball passes through the first flow path region and the second ball entry region (V winning region). From the first state to the second A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible or easy for a gaming ball circulating on the flow path to enter the second entry region by transitioning to the state of.

According to the feature U2, the state transition means controls the timing of the state transition between the first state and the second state, so that the game ball circulating in the flow path enters the first entry region. It is possible to control various entry areas for entering the game balls, such as allowing the game balls to enter the second entry area. In other words, for the two entry regions, the entry regions for entering the game ball can be controlled by one state transition means.

[Characteristic U3]
The gaming machine according to feature U1 or feature U2.
The state transition means is
It is provided with an operation mode (open / close execution mode) in which a state transition between the first state and the second state is performed a plurality of times, and is also provided.
The region on the flow path corresponding to the first ball entry region is defined as the first flow path region.
The time required for the game ball to pass through the first flow path region is defined as the first flow path region passage time.
When the duration of the first state sandwiched between the second state and the next second state in the operation mode is defined as the duration of the first state,
The operation mode includes a first operation mode (opening / closing execution mode corresponding to a type 1 jackpot) including a predetermined operation pattern in which the first state duration is longer than the first flow path region passage time. A featured gaming machine.

According to the feature U3, when the game ball reaches the first flow path region periodically and the time interval at which the game ball arrives at the first flow path region is shorter than the first flow path region passage time. By executing the first operation mode, the state transition means can make at least one of the game balls that periodically reach the first flow path region enter the second entry region.

[Feature U4]
Features The gaming machine described in U3.
The region on the flow path corresponding to the second ball entry region is defined as the second flow path region.
When the time required from the game ball entering the first flow path region to advancing the second flow path region is defined as the entry area transit time.
The predetermined operation pattern included in the first operation mode is characterized in that the duration of the first state is longer than the passage time of the first flow path region and shorter than the passage time of the ball entry region. Machine.

According to the feature U4, at least one of the game balls that periodically reach the first flow path region can be made to enter the second entry region while the predetermined motion pattern is being executed. Almost all game balls that reach the flow path region of 1 can be entered into either the first entry region or the second entry region.

[Feature U5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features U1 to the feature 4.
The state transition means is
It is provided with an operation mode in which the transition of the state between the first state and the second state is performed a plurality of times.
The region on the flow path corresponding to the first ball entry region is defined as the first flow path region.
The time required for the game ball to pass through the first flow path region is defined as the first flow path region passage time.
When the duration of the first state sandwiched between the second state and the next second state in the operation mode is defined as the duration of the first state,
As the operation mode, the gaming machine is provided with a second operation mode (opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the second jackpot) in which all the first state durations are shorter than the first flow path region passage time.

According to the feature U5, while the second operation mode is being executed, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the second entry region, and almost all of the game balls reach the first flow path region. The game ball can be entered into the first entry area.

[Feature U6]
Features The gaming machine described in U5.
It is provided on the upstream side on the flow path with respect to the first ball entry area, and has a third ball entry area (first large winning opening) in which a game ball can enter.
The third entry region can change the state between a state in which the entry of the game ball is impossible or difficult and a state in which the entry of the game ball is possible or easy.
The region on the flow path corresponding to the third ball entry region is defined as the third flow path region.
When the time required from the game ball entering the third flow path region to advancing the first flow path region is defined as the second entry region entry time.
The state transition means is
When the second operation mode is executed, the time when the third entry region transitions from a state in which the game ball can enter or is easy to a state in which the game ball cannot enter or is difficult is executed. As a reference, the state transition from the first first state to the second state in the second operation mode is started before the second ball entry region entry time elapses.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature U6, it is possible to suppress the circulation of the game ball on the second flow path region at the start of execution of the second operation mode. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the second entry region when the state transition means transitions from the first state to the second state at the start of the second operation mode. .. Therefore, it is possible to further prevent the game ball from entering the second entry region while the second operation mode is being executed.

<Characteristic V group>
The feature V group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature V1]
The flow path through which game balls circulate and
An upstream side entry portion (first large winning opening in the third embodiment) and a downstream side entry portion (first large winning opening in the third embodiment) provided in order from the upstream side of the flow path with reference to the distribution direction of the game ball flowing through the flow path. 2nd prize opening) and
The state of the upstream side entry portion is a non-entry state (closed state) in which the entry of the game ball is impossible or difficult, and an entry state in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter. Upstream state transition means for transitioning between possible states (open states) and
A downstream state transition means for transitioning the state of the downstream side entry portion between the non-entry possible state and the entry possible state.
A control means for controlling the upstream state transition means and the downstream state transition means,
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The downstream side entry portion is divided into a first entry area (non-V winning area FNV) and a second entry area (V winning area FV) in order from the upstream side of the flow path.
The operation of the upstream side state transition means to transition the upstream side entry portion in the non-entry state to the non-entry state and then to the non-entry state, and the downstream state transition means. When the operation of transitioning the downstream side entry portion in the non-entry possible state to the non-entry possible state and then transitioning to the non-entry possible state is defined as a unit operation.
A gaming machine characterized in that a unit operation by the upstream state transition means and a unit operation by the downstream state transition means are exclusively executed.

According to the feature V1, the control means controls the timing at which the unit operation by the upstream state transition means and the unit operation by the downstream state transition means are executed, so that the game ball flowing through the flow path is entered on the upstream side. The ball can be entered only in the portion, only in the first entry region of the downstream entry portion, or in the first entry region and the second entry region of the downstream entry portion. It is possible to control the ball entry portion or the ball entry area where the game ball is entered, such as.

[Feature V2]
The gaming machine described in Feature V1.
The control means is
When a predetermined gaming state is started, the unit operation is executed by the upstream state transition means and the unit operation is executed by the upstream state transition means prior to the execution of the unit operation by the downstream state transition means.
The time from the end of the unit operation by the upstream state transition means to the start of the unit operation by the downstream state transition means is set to the upstream entry portion of the game ball in the non-entry state. A region on the flow path corresponding to the first entry area of the downstream side entry portion in the non-entry state after entering the upstream flow path region, which is a region on the corresponding flow path. A gaming machine characterized in that it is controlled in a time shorter than the time required to advance into one flow path region.

According to the feature V2, at the start of the unit operation by the downstream state transition means, the game ball exists in the downstream flow path region, which is the region on the flow path corresponding to the downstream side entry portion in the non-entry state, and the game ball is downstream. It is possible to prevent the game ball from unintentionally entering the downstream side entry portion with the start of the unit operation by the side state transition means. For example, by controlling the timing of executing the unit operation by the upstream state transition means and the unit operation by the downstream state transition means, the game ball flowing through the flow path is controlled to enter only the upstream entry portion. If the unit operation by the downstream state transition means is first started, the game ball exists in the downstream flow path region, and the game ball is in the downstream entry portion with the start of the unit operation by the downstream state transition means. May unintentionally enter the ball. On the other hand, if controlled as in this feature, the timing at which the game ball flows through the upstream flow path region and the downstream flow path region can be roughly controlled, and the ball entry portion or the ball entry area into which the game ball enters can be controlled. Can be made easier.

[Feature V3]
The gaming machine according to feature V1 or feature V2.
When the first gaming state (open / close execution mode corresponding to the second type jackpot) is started, the control means first continuously executes the unit operation by the downstream state transition means a plurality of times. While executing the operation pattern of
The game ball has the time from the end of one unit operation in the continuous multiple unit operations by the downstream state transition means for the first operation pattern to the start of the next unit operation. From entering the first flow path region, which is a region on the flow path corresponding to the first ball entry region of the downstream side entry portion in a non-ball entry state, to advancing the first flow path region. A gaming machine characterized by being shorter than the time required for.

According to the feature V3, almost all the game balls that have reached the downstream flow path region can be entered into the first entry region of the downstream entry portion while the first operation pattern is being executed.

[Feature V4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features V1 to the feature V3.
When the second gaming state (opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the first type jackpot) is started, the control means secondly executes the unit operation by the downstream state transition means a plurality of times in succession. While executing the operation pattern of
During the time from the end of one unit operation in the plurality of consecutive unit operations by the downstream state transition means for the second operation pattern to the start of the next unit operation, the gaming ball is set. A gaming machine characterized in that a case longer than the time required from entering the first flow path region to advancing the first flow path region is included.

According to the feature V4, the game ball can be entered into the second entry region of the downstream entry portion while the second operation pattern is being executed.

[Feature V5]
Features The gaming machine described in V4.
The game ball has the time from the end of one unit operation in the continuous multiple unit operations by the downstream state transition means for the second operation pattern to the start of the next unit operation. The time required from entering the first flow path region to advancing the first flow path region is longer than that required, and the game ball corresponds to the downstream side entry portion in the non-entry state. A gaming machine characterized in that the time required from entering the downstream flow path region, which is a region on the flow path, to advancing into the downstream flow path region is shorter than the time required.

According to the feature V5, the game ball can be entered into the second entry region of the downstream entry portion while the second motion pattern is being executed, and further, during the execution of the second motion pattern. Almost all the game balls that have reached the downstream flow path region can be entered into the downstream entry portion.

<Characteristic W group>
The feature W group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature W1]
Multiple entry areas where game balls can enter, and
A control means for controlling the state of the plurality of ball entry regions and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The control means synchronously executes the transition of the states of the plurality of ball entry regions (3rd embodiment and 4th modification of the 3rd embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature W1, since the gaming machine executes the state transitions of a plurality of ball entry regions in synchronization, the control is simplified as compared with the case where the state transitions are controlled for each ball entry area. be able to.

[Feature W2]
Features The gaming machine described in W1.
Equipped with a flow path for game balls to circulate
With reference to the distribution direction of the game balls circulating in the flow path,
A gaming machine characterized in that the plurality of ball entry regions are arranged adjacent to each other from the upstream side to the downstream side of the flow path.

According to the feature W2, since the plurality of entry regions are arranged adjacent to each other from the upstream to the downstream of the flow path, a plurality of control means can be entered according to the behavior of the game ball flowing through the flow path. When the transition of the state of the ball region is executed synchronously, it is possible to execute the control corresponding to the behavior of a small number of game balls. Specifically, in order for the control means to synchronously execute the transition of the states of a plurality of incoming ball regions in response to the behavior of the game balls circulating in the flow path, the peripheral regions of each incoming ball region are distributed. It is necessary to understand the behavior of the game ball to be played. For example, as a comparative example, when a plurality of entry regions are arranged at separate positions, the control means synchronizes the transition of the state of the plurality of entry regions according to the behavior of the game balls in circulation. In order to execute the above, it is necessary to control the game ball circulating in the peripheral area of each distant ball entry area, which complicates the control. That is, the total area including the peripheral areas of each ball entry area is relatively large, and the number of game balls circulating in the entire area is also relatively large. The number increases and the control becomes complicated. On the other hand, since the plurality of ball entry areas in this feature are arranged adjacent to each other, the total area including the peripheral areas of each ball entry area is smaller than that of the above comparative example, and the game is distributed in the entire area. Since the number of balls is also reduced, the number of game balls for which the behavior is to be grasped is reduced, and the control can be simplified. Further, according to this feature, since the plurality of entry areas are arranged from the upstream to the downstream of the flow path, it is easy to grasp the behavior of the game ball reaching each entry area, and the control is easier. Can be transformed into. Specifically, since the plurality of ball entry areas are arranged from the upstream to the downstream of the flow path, the direction of the game ball reaching each ball entry area is a certain direction, and each ball entry area is present. It is possible to reduce the variation in the behavior of each game ball reaching each entry area, such as the speed of the game ball reaching the target is small in the variation of each game ball. As a result, it becomes easier to grasp the behavior of the game ball reaching each entry area, and the control can be further simplified.

[Feature W3]
The gaming machine according to the feature W1 or the feature W2.
The control means can enter the plurality of entry areas in a non-entry state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to enter, and in a state in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter. Transition in synchronization with the state,
An operation in which the control means transitions the plurality of entry regions in the non-entry state to the non-entry state and then transitions to the non-entry state is defined as a unit operation.
When the time required for the game ball to pass through the area corresponding to each non-entry area is defined as the entry area transit time.
The non-entering possible state maintenance time, which is the time from the unit operation executed by the control means to the next unit operation, is set based on the passing time of each entry area of the plurality of entry areas. A gaming machine featuring.

According to the feature W3, the non-entering possible state maintenance time is set based on the passing time of each entry area of the plurality of entry areas. Since it is possible to grasp the passing time of each ball entry area of a plurality of ball entry areas, it is easy to determine and set the non-ball entry enable state maintenance time, and it is possible to simplify the control.

[Feature W4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features W1 to the feature W3.
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when a game ball enters each of the plurality of entry areas is provided.
At least one of the plurality of entry areas (V winning area FV in the third embodiment) has the plurality of benefits given to the player by the privilege granting means when the gaming ball enters. A gaming machine characterized by being different from other ball entry areas in the ball area.

According to the feature W4, since the privilege given to the player includes a ball entry area different from other ball entry areas, the control means controls the mode of the state transition of the plurality of ball entry areas executed synchronously. Thereby, it is possible to control the privilege given to the player.

<Characteristic X group>
The feature X group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature X1]
The flow path through which game balls circulate and
A first ball entry area provided on the flow path and on which a game ball can enter,
The state of the first entry region includes a non-entry state in which the game ball cannot enter or is difficult, and a ball-entry state in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter. State transition means to transition between
When the first ball entry region is in the non-ball entry enable state by the state transition means, the game ball is used in the first ball entry flow path region, which is a region on the flow path corresponding to the first ball entry region. The first entry flow path region passage time adjusting means (the convex portion provided on the second opening / closing door in the third embodiment) for adjusting the first entry flow path region passage time, which is the time required for the passage of the ball. , A magnetic member provided on the second opening / closing door in the second modification of the third embodiment) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature X1, the game to the first ball entry area is performed by controlling the timing at which the state transition means changes the state of the first ball entry area and adjusting the passage time of the first ball entry flow path area. It is possible to control the ease of entering the ball.

[Feature X2]
The gaming machine described in feature X1.
When the state transition means defines the operation of transitioning the first ball-entry region, which is the non-ball-possible state, to the non-ball-possible state and then transitioning to the non-ball-possible state as a unit operation.
The state transition means is an operation mode in which a unit operation is executed a plurality of times, and the time interval from the end of the unit operation to the start of the next unit operation passes through the first entry flow path region. A gaming machine characterized by having a first operation mode (opening / closing execution mode corresponding to a second type jackpot), which is an operation mode shorter than the time.

According to the feature X2, while the state transition means is executing the first operation mode, almost all the game balls that have reached the first entry area can be entered into the first entry area.

[Feature X3]
The gaming machine according to feature X1 or feature X2.
When the state transition means defines the operation of transitioning the first ball-entry region, which is the non-ball-possible state, to the non-ball-possible state and then transitioning to the non-ball-possible state as a unit operation.
The state transition means is an operation mode in which a unit operation is executed a plurality of times, and the time interval from the end of the unit operation to the start of the next unit operation passes through the first entry flow path region. A gaming machine characterized by having a second operation mode (opening / closing execution mode corresponding to a first-class jackpot), which is an operation mode longer than the time.

According to the feature X3, while the state transition means is executing the second operation mode, the ratio of the game balls to be entered into the first entry region can be reduced as compared with the first operation mode described above. .. That is, the game ball that has reached the first entry area can be passed through the first entry area at a predetermined ratio without entering the first entry area.

[Feature X4]
The gaming machine described in Feature X3.
With reference to the distribution direction of the game ball flowing through the flow path, a second entry area provided on the downstream side of the flow path with respect to the first entry area and in which the game ball can enter is provided.
The state transition means transitions the first entry region to the non-entry state, and at the same time, transitions the second entry region to the non-entry state, and causes the first entry region. At the same time as transitioning to the ball-entry state, the second ball-entry area is transitioned to the ball-entry state.
The area on the flow path corresponding to the second ball entry area is defined as the second ball entry flow path area.
When the time required from when the game ball enters the first entry flow path region to when the game ball enters the second entry flow path region is defined as the total entry flow path region transit time.
In the second operation mode provided in the state transition means, the time interval from the end of the unit operation to the start of the next unit operation is longer than the time for passing through the first ball entry flow path region. A gaming machine characterized in that it is shorter than the time it takes to pass through the entry flow path region.

According to the feature X4, almost all the game balls passed by the state transition means without entering the first entry area when the second operation mode is executed can be entered into the second entry area. ..

[Feature X5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features X1 to the feature X4.
The state transition means includes an opening / closing member that opens / closes the opening of the first ball entry region.
The first ball entry flow path region passage time adjusting means is a convex member arranged on the distribution surface on which the game ball flows in the opening / closing member when the first ball entry region is in the non-ball entry state. A gaming machine characterized by being.

According to the feature X5, the passage time of the first ball entry flow path region can be easily adjusted by adjusting the number of convex members arranged on the distribution surface of the opening / closing member.

[Feature X6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features X1 to the feature X5.
The state transition means includes an opening / closing member that opens / closes the opening of the first ball entry region.
The first ball entry flow path region passage time adjusting means is a magnetic material arranged on the distribution surface on which the game ball flows in the opening / closing member when the first ball entry region is in the non-ball entry enable state. A gaming machine characterized by being a member.

According to the feature X6, the game ball circulating on the distribution surface makes a peculiar movement due to the action of the magnetic force exerted by the magnetic member on the game ball, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature X7]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features X1 to the feature X6.
The state transition means includes an opening / closing member that opens / closes the opening of the first ball entry region.
The first ball entry flow path region passage time adjusting means is an inclination of the distribution surface through which the game ball flows in the opening / closing member when the first ball entry region is in the non-ball entry enable state. A featured gaming machine.

According to the feature X7, the passage time of the first ball entry flow path region can be easily adjusted by adjusting the inclination angle of the flow surface.

<Characteristic Y group>
The feature Y group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature Y1]
The flow path through which game balls circulate and
An upstream side entry portion (first large winning opening in the third embodiment) and a downstream side entry portion (first large winning opening in the third embodiment) provided in order from the upstream side of the flow path with reference to the distribution direction of the game ball flowing through the flow path. 2nd prize opening) and
The state of the upstream side entry portion is a non-entry state (closed state) in which the entry of the game ball is impossible or difficult, and an entry state in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter. Upstream state transition means for transitioning between possible states (open states) and
A downstream state transition means for transitioning the state of the downstream side entry portion between the non-entry possible state and the entry possible state.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The downstream side entry portion is
It has a specific area (V winning area FV), which is an area in which the entry of a game ball is set as one of the conditions for changing the state of the game to a specific state, and the specific area is upstream from the specific area. A gaming machine characterized by having a predetermined area (non-V winning area FNV) which is a different area from the above.

According to the feature Y1, since the downstream side entry portion has a predetermined region on the upstream side of the specific entry region, the downstream state transition means controls the timing of transitioning the state of the downstream entry portion to the downstream. It is possible to control whether or not it is easy for the game ball that enters the side entry portion to enter a specific area. In the case of a general gaming machine, when one ball entry portion has two regions, a game is used to control which of the two regions the gaming ball enters inside the ball entry portion. It has a guiding mechanism that guides the ball. In the case of such a gaming machine, it is necessary to control the operation of the above-mentioned guidance mechanism separately from the operation control of the state transition means for controlling the state of the ball entry portion between the non-entry state and the ball entry possible state. Therefore, the control becomes complicated, and it is necessary to secure a storage area for storing a program for executing the control. On the other hand, in the gaming machine of this feature, it is possible to control whether the gaming ball is to enter a predetermined area or a specific area provided in the downstream side entry portion by the operation control of the downstream side state transition means. Compared with the above-mentioned general gaming machine, control can be simplified and the storage area required for storing a program can be reduced.

[Feature Y2]
Feature The gaming machine described in Y1.
When the downstream side entry portion is in the non-entry state, both the predetermined area and the specific area are in a state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter.
A gaming machine characterized in that when the downstream side entry portion is in the entry-capable state, both the predetermined region and the specific region are in a state in which a gaming ball can enter or are easily entered.

According to the feature Y2, by controlling the timing at which the downstream side state transition means transitions the state of the downstream side entry portion, the downstream side entry portion is actually at a timing when it is difficult for the game ball to enter a specific area. Even when the state of is changed to the state where the ball can be entered, when the downstream side entry portion is in the state where the ball can be entered, both the predetermined area and the specific area are in a state where the game ball can be entered or easily. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect the game ball to enter a specific area. More specifically, even if the state of the downstream entry portion is changed to the entry-capable state at the timing when it is difficult for the game ball to enter the specific area, the game ball enters the specific area. Even when the state of the downstream ball entry part is changed to the ball entry state at an easy timing, in both cases, when the downstream side ball entry part is in the ball entry state, both the predetermined area and the specific area are Since it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter, it is possible to expect the player to enter the game ball in a specific area.

[Feature Y3]
The gaming machine according to feature Y1 or feature Y2.
The downstream side entry portion opening, which is the opening of the downstream side entry portion, faces the flow path surface.
The downstream side state transition means shifts the state of the downstream side entry portion to a non-entry possible state by closing the downstream side entry portion opening, and opens the downstream side entry portion opening. By making it an open state, the state of the downstream side entry portion is changed to a state where the ball can enter.
When the downstream side entry portion is in the non-entry state, it is a specific area opening which is an opening for the game ball to enter the specific area and an opening for the game ball to enter the predetermined area. The predetermined area openings are all closed.
A gaming machine characterized in that both the specific region opening and the predetermined region opening are in an open state when the downstream side entry portion is in the entry-capable state.

According to the feature Y3, when the downstream side entry portion opening is in the closed state, both the specific area opening and the predetermined area opening are in the closed state, and when the downstream side entry portion opening is in the open state, Since both the specific area opening and the predetermined area opening are in an open state, whether the specific area and the predetermined area are both in a state where it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter, or both of them are game balls. It is possible to make it easier for the player to visually determine whether or not the ball can be entered easily. Further, by controlling the timing at which the downstream side state transition means transitions the state of the downstream side entry portion opening, the downstream side entry portion opening is actually at the timing when it is difficult for the game ball to enter the specific area. Even when the state of is changed to the open state, when the downstream side entry portion opening is in the open state, both the predetermined area opening and the specific area opening are in the open state. It is possible to expect a game ball to enter a specific area. More specifically, even when the state of the opening of the downstream entry portion is changed to the open state at the timing when it is difficult for the game ball to enter the specific area, the game ball enters the specific area. Even when the state of the downstream side entry portion opening is changed to the open state at an easy timing, in both cases, when the downstream side entry portion opening is in the open state, the predetermined area opening and the specific area opening Since all the parts are in the open state, it is possible to make the player expect the game ball to enter a specific area.

[Feature Y4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features Y1 to the feature Y3.
The downstream side entry portion opening, which is the opening of the downstream side entry portion, faces the flow path surface of the flow path and is an opening in which a game ball enters the specific area. It is divided into a predetermined area opening and a predetermined area opening which is an opening for a game ball to enter the predetermined area.
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined region opening faces the upstream side of the flow path surface with respect to the specific region opening.

According to the feature Y4, the downstream side entry portion opening is divided into a specific region opening and a predetermined region opening, and the predetermined region opening faces the upstream side of the flow path surface with respect to the specific region opening. There is. Therefore, the downstream side state transition means controls the timing of transitioning the state of the downstream side entry portion according to the behavior of the game ball flowing on the flow path surface, so that the game ball enters the downstream side entry portion. Can be controlled whether or not it is easy to enter a specific area.

<Characteristic Z group>
The feature Z group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature Z1]
The entry part where the game ball can enter, and
The state of the ball entry portion is a non-entry state (closed state) in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to enter, and a ball entry state in which the game ball can or is easily entered. A state transition means for transitioning between (open state) and
A discharge means for discharging the game ball that has entered the ball entry portion,
A control means for controlling the state transition means and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The control means is set with a ball-entry state transition condition, which is a condition for the state transition means to transition the ball-entry portion from the non-ball-entry state to the ball-entry state.
The absence of a game ball in the ball entry portion is included as the ball entry enable state transition condition.
The gaming machine is further characterized by comprising a discharge delaying means (a discharge delaying means in the third modification of the third embodiment) for delaying the discharge of the game ball that has entered the ball entry portion by the discharging means. A gaming machine.

According to the feature Z1, the absence of the game ball in the ball entry portion is included as a state transition condition in which the ball can enter, and the discharge delay means for delaying the discharge of the game ball that has entered the ball entry portion by the discharge means. To prepare for. Therefore, since the time until the entry-possible state transition condition is satisfied differs depending on the degree of time that the ejection delay means delays the ejection of the game ball, the state transition means enters the ball entry portion from the non-entry state. The time to transition to the possible state is different. That is, the time until the state transition means changes the entry portion from the non-entry state to the entry-possible state can be irregular. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the discharge delay means and to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature Z2]
The gaming machine described in Feature Z1.
The state transition means is characterized in that a predetermined time that has been set in advance has elapsed since the entry portion was transferred to the non-entry state, which is included as the entry-possible state transition condition. Gaming machine.

According to the feature Z2, a preset predetermined time has elapsed since the state transition means transitions the entry portion to the non-entry state, which is included as the entry-possible state transition condition. Therefore, the non-entry is from the time from the transition of the entry portion to the non-entry state until all the game balls existing in the entry portion are discharged by the ejection means and the game balls do not exist in the entry portion. If the time from the transition to the ball-capable state to the elapse of the preset predetermined time is longer, the time from the non-ball-entry state to the ball-possible state is predetermined. It will be time. On the other hand, due to the function of the discharge delaying means, from the transition to the non-enterable state of the ball entry portion until all the game balls existing in the ball entry section are ejected by the ejection means and the game ball does not exist in the ball entry section. If the time of is longer than the time from the transition to the non-entry state to the elapse of the preset predetermined time, the entry portion changes from the non-entry state to the entry-possible state. The time until the transition depends on the degree of time that the discharge delay means delays the discharge of the game ball. Therefore, the time until the state transition means makes the transition from the non-entry state to the enterable state can be made more irregular, and the behavior of the entry portion to transition to the state by simple control. Can be complicated. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the ball entry section and to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature Z3]
The gaming machine according to feature Z1 or feature Z2.
Equipped with a flow path for game balls to circulate
The ball entry portion is located on the downstream side of the flow path with respect to the first entry area where the game ball can enter and the distribution direction of the game ball flowing through the flow path. A gaming machine provided in the above, which is provided with a second entry area (V winning area FV) into which a gaming ball can enter.

According to the feature Z3, since the entry portion includes a first entry region and a second entry region downstream of the first entry region, the entry portion enters from a non-entry state. Depending on the timing of transition to the ball-capable state, the game ball that has entered the ball entry portion may enter the first entry area or the second entry area. Since the time until the state transition means changes the entry portion from the non-entry state to the entry-capable state is irregular, the player can see that the game ball that has entered the entry portion is the first entry. It is difficult to predict whether the ball will enter the area or the second area, so that the player can pay attention to the ball entry portion and the player can be given a sense of urgency.

[Feature Z4]
The gaming machine described in Feature Z3.
The control unit
When a predetermined time set in advance has elapsed since the state transition means transitions the ball entry portion to the non-ball entry possible state, the ball entry section is moved from the non-ball entry possible state to the ball entry. A gaming machine characterized in that the entry of a gaming ball into the second entry area is controlled by transitioning to a possible state.

According to the feature Z4, a predetermined time is set so that the game ball is difficult to enter the second entry area, and a predetermined time is set so that the game ball can easily enter the second entry area. be able to. On the other hand, when the discharge delay means functions, the function of the discharge delay means causes the discharge means to discharge all the game balls existing in the ball entry portion after the entry portion transitions to the non-entry possible state. If the time until the game ball does not exist in the ball entry section is longer than the time until the preset predetermined time elapses after the transition to the non-entering possible state, the ball entry section The time until the transition from the non-enterable state to the enterable state depends on the degree of time that the discharge delaying means delays the discharge of the game ball. That is, there are cases where the control unit can control the entry of the game ball into the second entry area, and cases where it is not possible. As a result, for example, even when a predetermined time is set so that the game ball is difficult to enter the second entry area, the discharge delay means functions so that the game ball enters the second entry area. The entry portion may transition from the non-entry state to the entry-capable state at a timing when it is easy to enter the ball region, and it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and tension.

[Feature Z5]
The gaming machine according to feature Z3 or feature Z4.
The second ball entry area is characterized in that the ball entry of the game ball into the second ball entry area is set as one of the conditions for changing the state of the game to a specific state. A game machine to play.

According to the feature Z5, it is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation and a sense of urgency regarding whether or not the game ball enters the second entry area.

<Characteristic αA group>
The feature αA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Characteristic αA1]
The flow path through which game balls circulate and
An entry area provided on the flow path and capable of entering a game ball,
The state of the ball entry region is between a non-enterable state in which the game ball cannot enter or is difficult, and a ball-entryable state in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter. State transition means to transition and
Passage suppressing means for suppressing the game ball from passing through the ball entry area without entering the ball entry area (plate-shaped member MD1 in the first modification of the third embodiment, magnetism). Body member MD2) and
A gaming machine characterized by being prepared with.

According to the feature αA1, since the passage suppressing means is provided, it is possible to prevent the game ball from passing through without entering the ball even though the entry area is in a state where the ball can enter. If the game ball passes without entering the ball even though the entry area is in a state where the ball can enter, the player is not given a legitimate privilege and the player's expectation for the game is lowered. I will let you. This feature can suppress such an event, legitimately give a privilege to be given to the player, give the player a sense of expectation, and give a sense of security.

[Characteristic αA2]
Features The gaming machine described in αA1.
The passage suppressing means is a traveling direction correction member (third implementation) that corrects the traveling direction of the gaming ball traveling in the direction of passing without entering the ball entering region in the direction of traveling toward the ball entering region. A gaming machine comprising the plate-shaped member MD1) according to the modified example 1 of the form.

According to the feature αA2, since the passage suppressing means includes the traveling direction correction means, for example, a game ball that has bounced in a direction different from the entry region due to a mechanical external factor given to the game ball. The direction of travel can be corrected and the game ball can be entered into the entry area.

[Characteristic αA3]
Features The gaming machine described in αA2.
The game machine characterized in that the traveling direction correction member is a member provided on the upper part of a region corresponding to the ball entry region on the flow path.

According to the feature αA3, it is possible to suppress an event in which a game ball traveling along the flow path floats from the flow path for some reason and passes through the ball entry region in a floating state. That is, even if the game ball floats in the ball entry area, the traveling direction of the game ball is changed downward by hitting the member provided at the upper part of the area corresponding to the ball entry area on the flow path. The game ball can be entered into the entry area.

[Characteristic αA4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features αA1 to the feature αA3.
The passage suppressing means is a gaming machine including a magnetic material member provided on the upstream side of the ball entry region in the flow path.

According to the feature αA4, even if a force in the direction of floating from the flow path acts on the game ball traveling along the flow path, the magnetic material provided on the flow path surface exerts on the game ball. The magnetic force acts on the game ball in the direction toward the flow path surface, and it is possible to prevent the game ball from floating from the flow path. As a result, the game ball can be entered into the entry area.

[Characteristic αA5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features αA1 to the feature αA4.
The passage suppressing means is provided on the upstream side of the ball entry region in the flow path, and is provided with a cushioning member that cushions an impact between the game ball and the flow path.

According to the feature αA5, even if a force in the direction of floating from the flow path acts on the game ball traveling along the flow path for some reason, the buffer member cushions the force in the direction of floating from the flow path. It is possible to prevent the game ball from floating from the flow path. As a result, the game ball can be entered into the entry area.

The inventions of the feature U group to the feature αA group solve the following problems.

In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, it is technical from various viewpoints such as structure, control, and production for the purpose of improving the interest of games, reducing the processing load of gaming machines, and simplifying control. Improvements have been made (for example, Patent Document 1).

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of the game, such as finding and deterring illegal acts by the player and unauthorized modification of the gaming machine.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, further improvement of the technique is desired for the purpose of improving the interest of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, simplifying the control, providing a sounder game, and the like.

It should be noted that a configuration in which one or a plurality of configurations included in the feature A group to the feature αA group are appropriately combined may be adopted. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The following shows the basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or is applied to each feature.

Pachinko gaming machine: A launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player, and a starting ball that is provided in the game area and allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter. A game including a unit, an information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the starting ball entry unit, and an acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means. Machine.

Rotating machine such as a slot machine: Operation of a pattern display means for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, a start means for starting the variable display of the plurality of patterns due to the operation of the start operation means, and an operation of the stop operation means. A gaming machine provided with a stopping means for stopping the variable display of the plurality of symbols due to the above or due to the passage of a predetermined time, and a privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player according to the symbols after the stop.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modifications, and can be realized with various configurations within a range not deviating from the gist thereof. For example, the embodiments corresponding to the technical features in each of the embodiments described in the column of the outline of the invention, the technical features in the modifications are for solving a part or all of the above-mentioned problems, or the above-mentioned. It is possible to replace or combine them as appropriate to achieve some or all of the effects. Further, if the technical feature is not described as essential in the present specification, it can be appropriately deleted.

10 ... Pachinko machine 11 ... Outer frame 12 ... Pachinko machine body 13 ... Inner frame 14 ... Front door frame 15 ... Hinge 16 ... Hinge 17 ... Cylinder lock 18. .. Window 19 ... Glass unit 20 ... Upper plate 21 ... Lower plate 22 ... Discharge port 23 ... Lever 24 ... Direction operation button 25 ... Operation handle 25a ... Touch sensor 25b ... Weight button 25c ... Variable resistor 26 ... Game ball launch button 30 ... Game board 31 ... Guidance rail 31a ... Inner rail part 31b ... Outer rail part 32 ... General winning opening 33 ... 1st starting opening 34 ... 2nd starting opening 34a ... Electric accessory 34b ... Electric accessory drive unit 35 ... Through gate 36 ... Variable winning opening Device 36a ... Large winning opening 36b ... Opening / closing door 36c ... Variable winning drive unit 37 ... Special figure unit 37a ... 1st symbol display unit 37b ... 2nd symbol display unit 37c .. .1st hold display unit 37d ... 2nd hold display unit 38 ... normal drawing unit 39 ... round display unit 40 ... variable display unit 41 ... symbol display device 41a ... display surface 41aL ... Display area 41aS ... Display area 42 ... Nail 43 ... Out port 44j ... Stage 44j2 ... Stage 44k ... Raised part 44l ... Left side falling part 44m ... Right side Drop part 44n ... Central entry port 44o ... Central exit port 44p ... Central drop part 45 ... Main display part 46 ... Speaker 47 ... Various lamps 48 ... V winning opening 48a ... Open / close door 48b ... Open / close door drive 51 ... 1st control unit 52 ... 2nd control unit 53 ... 3rd control unit 54 ... Tank 55 ... Tank rail 56 ... Case rail 57 ... 1st variable winning device 57a ... 1st large winning opening 57b ... 1st opening / closing door 57c ... 1st variable winning drive unit 57d ... 1st ball entry prevention Member 58 ... 2nd variable winning device 58a ... Large winning opening 58a ... 2nd large winning opening 58b ... 2nd opening / closing door 58c ... 2nd variable winning drive unit 58d ... 2nd Ball entry prevention member 59 ... Convex portion 59a ... Magnetic material member 60 ... Main control device 61 ... Main control board 62 ... Main side MPU
62x ... Main CPU
63 ... Main ROM
64 ... Main RAM
64x ... Flash memory 63a ... Win / fail table storage area 63b ... Distribution table storage area 63c ... Reach judgment table storage area 63d ... Fluctuation time table storage area 63e ... Stop result table storage Area 63f ... Command information storage area 64a ... Lottery counter buffer 64b ... Hold information storage area 64c ... Electric service hold area 64d ... Various counter areas 64e ... Various flag storage areas 64f. .. Pre-judgment processing result storage area 67a ... Various detection sensors 70 ... Payout control device 71 ... Payout device 80 ... Launch control device 81 ... Game ball launch mechanism 85 ... Power supply device 86 ... power failure monitoring circuit 90 ... voice emission control device 91 ... voice emission control board 92 ... sound light side MPU
93 ... Sound light side ROM
93a ... Production pattern table storage area 93b ... Variable display pattern table storage area 94 ... Sound / light side RAM
94a ... Various flag storage areas 94b ... Various counter areas 94c ... Lottery counter area 96 ... RTC
100 ... Display control device 101 ... Display control board 102 ... Display side MPU
103 ... Program ROM
104 ... Work RAM
106 ... Character ROM
107 ... Video RAM
300 ... Game history management chip 302 ... Buffer 304 ... Register 306 ... Prize ball number Data storage memory 307 ... Calculation execution condition storage memory 307a ... Storage execution condition storage memory 308 ... CPU
309 ... Memory for storing calculation results 309a ... Memory for storing the number of balls entered 309b ... Memory for storing information on balls 320 ... Inspection machine 321 ... CPU
328 ... Display unit 329 ... Connection cable PA ... Game area PC ... Winning counter area AE ... Execution area Ra ... 1st hold area Rb ... 2nd hold area Dm11 to Dm14 , Dm21 to Dm24 ... Hold display Sync1 ... 1st synchronous display unit Sync2 ... 2nd synchronous display unit MA ... Main display area SA1 ... 1st sub display area SA2 ... 2nd sub Display area Ds1 ... 1st hold display area Ds2 ... 2nd hold display area

Claims (1)

A plurality of predetermined detection means for detecting a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area,
A game value-adding means that is electrically connected to the plurality of predetermined detection means and executes a process for imparting a game value to the game.
A payout means that is electrically connected to the game value-adding means and executes a payout process for paying out a game ball.
A process execution means that is electrically connected to the game value-adding means by a signal line capable of transmitting various signals and executes a predetermined process that is different from the payout process .
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The game value-adding means is
A first reference information storage means for storing reference information which is information used in a process for imparting a game value to the game and is referred to for detection of the predetermined detection means.
The reference stored in the first reference information storage means after the predetermined supply of electric power to the game machine is started and before the execution of the predetermined process for advancing the game is started. A first transmission means for transmitting a reference information signal corresponding to the information to the processing execution means, and
A second transmission means for transmitting a predetermined information signal based on the ball entry information, which is information acquired based on the detection by the predetermined detection means, to the processing execution means.
Equipped with
The processing execution means is
A second reference information storage means for storing reference information corresponding to the reference information signal transmitted from the game value adding means, and a second reference information storage means.
An execution means that executes the predetermined process based on the predetermined information signal transmitted from the second transmission means and the reference information stored in the second reference information storage means.
A processing result information storage means for storing processing result information which is information related to the processing result of the predetermined processing by the execution means, and a processing result information storage means.
Equipped with
The game value-adding means and the processing execution means are operated by the same power source for the game machine, and are operated by the same power source.
The processing result information storage means includes a plurality of storage areas that can store a plurality of processing result information in a time series.
When storing new processing result information of the one unit, a means for erasing the processing result information of the storage area for storing the oldest processing result information among the plurality of storage areas is provided.
This gaming machine is
An information storage means provided in the game value-giving means and storing at least information related to the game value-giving.
An erasing operation means for erasing the stored contents of the information storage means, and
Equipped with
When the erasing operation is executed by the erasing operation means, the storage erasing process is executed for the information storage means of the game value imparting means, but the processing result information storage means for storing the processing result information On the other hand, the memory erasing process is not executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images